Link Belt Tcc 1100 Operator Manual

Operator's Manual
Upper Serial Number Location
Lower Serial Number Location
Crane Serial Number

The crane serial number is on the Crane Rating Manual In the event the serial number is not readable, a num
in a box below the operator's seat in the operator's cab. ber is stamped on the top left side of the lower frame
The crane serial number should always be furnished and on the left side of the upper frame just left of the
when ordering parts for the crane, or when corre boom hoist cylinder lug. This number can then be
sponding with the Link‐Belt Distributor or Factory re used to help to identify the crane.
garding the crane. The serial number is the only
method the Link‐Belt Distributor or Factory has of en
suring that the correct parts will be furnished.
BOOK1211 S1063014RSW Preface

Operator's Manual
WARNING
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT CAN BE DANGEROUS
IF IMPROPERLY OPERATED OR MAINTAINED. THIS
CRANE SHOULD BE OPERATED AND MAINTAINED
ONLY BY TRAINED AND EXPERIENCED PEOPLE WHO
HAVE READ, UNDERSTOOD, AND COMPLY WITH THIS
OPERATOR'S & MAINTENANCE MANUAL.
The productive life of construction equipment depends The Operator's Manual is stored in a pocket on the rear
largely on the care and consideration given to it. This of the operator's seat. The Operator's Manual should
especially holds true for hydraulic cranes. This Opera remain in the cab and accessible at all times. If the
tor's & Maintenance Manual was compiled to explain Operator's Manual becomes lost, damaged, or un
the procedures and adjustments necessary for proper readable, it must be replaced before operating the
operation of this crane. crane.
A study of this Operator's Manual will acquaint the op In addition to this Operator's & Maintenance Manual, a
erator and service personnel with the construction of Parts Manual, Crane Rating Manual, and Safety Manu
this crane. It will enable them to identify and remedy al are supplied with the crane. Read and understand
most problems that may occur. Any questions pertain all safety guidelines before operating the crane. Addi
ing to the care and upkeep of this crane which are not tional copies of all manuals are available through your
covered in this Operator's Manual should be directed Link‐Belt Distributor.
to your Link‐Belt Distributor.
CALIFORNIA
Proposition 65 Warning
Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other
reproductive harm.
Preface
Operator's Manual
Throughout this Operator's Manual, reference is made to the left, right, front, and rear pertaining to direction and
locations. These reference directions are relative to the operator, sitting in the operator's seat with the upper directly
over the end of the lower with the travel motors to the rear, unless otherwise stated.
Danger, warning, and caution captions as well as special notes are used throughout this Operator's Manual and on
the crane to emphasize important and critical instructions. Labels, decals, plates, etc. should be periodically in
spected and cleaned as necessary to maintain good legibility for safe viewing. If any instruction, caution, warning,
or danger labels, decals, or plates become lost, damaged, or unreadable, they must be replaced. Information
contained on such labels, decals, and plates is important and failure to follow the information they contain could
result in an accident. Replacement labels, decals, and plates can be ordered through your Link‐Belt Distributor. For
the purpose of this Operator's Manual, and the labels which are placed on the crane, danger, warning, and caution
captions and notes are defined as follows:
DANGER
An operating procedure, practice, etc. which,
if not correctly followed, will result in severe
personal injury, dismemberment, or loss of
life.
WARNING
if not correctly followed, may result in
personal injury and may result in damage to or
destruction of equipment or property.
CAUTION
if not correctly followed, may result in damage
to or destruction of equipment or property.
NOTE
Note: An operating procedure, step, condition,
etc. which is essential in order for the process to
be completed properly.
This symbol may appear in this Operator's

Manual and/or on a label on the crane to alert
personnel that additional instructions are
included in this Operator's Manual.
Preface
Operator's Manual
General Index
A detailed Table Of Contents for each Section of this Operator's Manual is in
cluded at the beginning of each Section. The following is a description of each
Section:
Section 1 - Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 1-1 Thru 1-176

Section 1 includes the necessary information for safe, productive crane operation. It includes the nomenclature and
operation of all control switches, levers, pedals, and instrumentation of the crane.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 2-1 Thru 2-30

Section 2 includes the necessary information for proper lubrication and preventive maintenance for daily opera
tions. It includes the check/change intervals and procedures for maximizing the service life of the crane under nor
mal working conditions. It also includes lubrication types and specifications approved for use in the crane.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 3-1 Thru 3-22

Section 3 includes the adjustments which must be made periodically to keep the crane in proper, safe working order.
It includes the procedures and necessary information for adjusting the track tension, mechanical linkages, and hy
draulic pressures on the crane.
Section 4 - Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 4-1 Thru 4-44

Section 4 includes the use and operation of the crane attachments. It includes the necessary information for installa
tion, erection, storage, and removal of the auxiliary lifting sheave and lattice fly.
Section 5 - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 5-1 Thru 5-26

Section 5 includes general information on the Crane Rating Manual and serial number as well as wire rope specifica
tions, inspection, replacement, connections, and reeving. General specifications for the crane are also included.
Section 6 - Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 6-1 Thru 6-6

Section 6 includes a list of terms which are used to refer to crane functions, assembly, operation, and maintenance.
These terms are defined as to how they are used in this Operator's Manual.
Preface
Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
Crane Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Operating Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
General Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Operator Awareness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
Electrical Dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Radio Frequency Or Electro Magnetic Interference (RFI Or EMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Signal Persons And Bystanders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Crane Inspections And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11
Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Crane And Area Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13
Weights, Lengths, And Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Traveling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Leaving The Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19
Personnel Handling Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20
Maintenance, Lubrication, And Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Inspection And Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21
Crane Test Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22
Operation And Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23
Additional Requirements For Offshore Cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24
Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Bubble Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Fire Extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
RCL Overhead Light Bar (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
External RCL Light Bar (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Top Hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Top Hatch Wiper And Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Top Hatch Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Top Hatch Sunscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-27
Section 1 - Operating Instructions i

Operator’s Manual
RCL Control Module Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Cab Electrical Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28
Cab Fuse Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-29
Cab Control Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30
RCL Display Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Engine Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Crane Control Display (CCD) Diagnostic Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-32
Upper & Boom Floodlights (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Winch And Rear View Cameras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34
Camera Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Split Screen Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-37
NORMAL/MIRROR Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-40
UP/DOWN Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-41
SCAN Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Care and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-43
Crane Control Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-44
Engine Data And Aftertreatment Control Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-47
Crane Control Display Brightness Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-49
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
Engine DPF Regeneration Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
High Exhaust System Temperature Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
Engine DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-51
DPF (Parked) Manual Regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-53
Seat Console Control Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-55
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-57
Bass, Treble, Balance, And Fader Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Initial Volume Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Radio Frequency Area Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-59
Beep ON, Beep 2ND Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Setting An Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Weather Band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Public Address (PA) Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-60
Operator's Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
First Aid Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
ii Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Operator’s Manual
Operator's Manual Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
Crane Rating Manual Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-62
Crane System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Horn Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Engine Throttle Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Throttle Lock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-64
Swing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Swing Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Swing Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Travel Swing Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-65
Swing Park Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Wire Rope Winch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Warm‐Up Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Front Winch Control Lever (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-66
Rear Winch Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
Winch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
Winch Control Switch(es) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
High Speed Hoist Or Lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-67
Winch Disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Drum Rotation Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
First Layer/Third Wrap Indicator (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-68
Boom Hoist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Boom Telescope System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-69
Boom Telescope Control Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
Boom Telescope Override Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-70
Fine Metering Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-72
Steering And Traveling The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-73
Power Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Emergency Engine Throttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-74
Hour Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Battery Disconnect Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Fuse Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Mega Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-75
Cab Tilt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-76
Operating In Wind Or Lightning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-77
Section 1 - Operating Instructions iii

Operator’s Manual
Crane Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Wind Speed Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-78
Boom Angle Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Anti‐Two Block Warning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-79
Lockout Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-80
Rated Capacity Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
System Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-82
Display Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-83
System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
System Bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85
System Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86
Configuration Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87
Cancel Audible Alarm And Reset Function Limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96
Operator Settable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97
Setting Angle, Length, Height, Radius, And Swing Operator Settable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-99
Operator Defined Area Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108
Function Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110
Telematics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
Transmitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
Computer Return And Stored Data Disclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111
Ground Bearing Pressure Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
Live Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113
Ground Bearing Pressure Surface Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
Ground Bearing Pressure Live Data Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114
Ground Bearing Pressure Simulation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

Active System Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-117
Active System Faults Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-118
Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119
Highlight Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120
About Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121

Entering And Exiting The Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-123
iv Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Operator’s Manual
Upper Guard Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-125
Before Starting Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
Boom Distortion Due To Thermal Effects Of The Sun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
Engine Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-127
Engine Shutdown Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128
Cold Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-128
Electric Engine Block Preheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-129
Diesel Fired Engine Block Preheater (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-130
Starting Preheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
Stopping Preheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
Timer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
Heater Preset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
Setting The Heater Preset Start Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
Operating Time Duration Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
Remaining Operating Time Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-131
Setting The Clock And Day Of The Week . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
Viewing The Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
Setting The Alarm Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-132
General Failure Symptoms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Heater Lockout Reset Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Annual Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Enclosure And Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133
Combustion Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
Coolant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134
Operational Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

Jump Starting The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-136
General Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137
Lift Crane Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137
During Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-137
Section 1 - Operating Instructions v

Operator’s Manual
Hand Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-138
Emergency Engine Stop Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-139
Service Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-140
Crane Assembly And Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
Crane Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
Crane Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-141
Unloading The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-142
Loading The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-143
Lifting Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-144
Raising The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-146
Lowering The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-149
Lower Counterweight Installation And Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
Lower Counterweight Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-150
Lower Counterweight Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-151
Side Frame Installation And Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152
Side Frame Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-152
Side Frame Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-156
Extending And Retracting The Side Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
Extending Side Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-158
Retracting Side Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-159
Upper Counterweight Assembly, Installation, And Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-160
Upper Counterweight Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
Upper Counterweight Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-161
Upper Counterweight Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-162
Upper Counterweight Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-166
Wedged Blocking (For Over The Front Lifting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-170
Traveling The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
Traveling Without A Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
Traveling On A Slope (Without A Load Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-171
Traveling With A Load (Pick & Carry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-172
Transporting The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-173
Towing The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174
Lifting The Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-174
Crane Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
Short Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
Long Term Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-176
vi Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3
10 9 8 7 6 5 4
1. Boom 5. Travel Motor 8. Hook Block

2. Operator's Cab 6. Lower 9. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave
3. Winch Drum(s) 7. Boom Hoist Cylinder 10. Hook Ball
4. Counterweight
Figure 1-1
Crane Nomenclature
Think Safety - You, the operator, are in charge of an

Operating Safety important piece of equipment. It is very important that
Remember SAFETY every day. Someone's LIFE may you know what it can do. If is also important that you
depend on it, MAYBE YOUR OWN. know what it should not do. No set of instructions can
anticipate all of the situations you will encounter. The
Safe operations of a crane requires a well trained,
rules given here cover the general usage, and some of
qualified operator. Crane operation is more involved
the more common specific cases. If conditions arise
than it may appear, and operation by a careless or un
not covered by these rules, contact a Link‐Belt Distrib
qualified person can result in a serious accident.
utor. A phone call could save someone's life.
When a crane is maintained and used properly it can
be a safe, highly productive piece of equipment, but if
not used properly, it can be dangerous.
Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-1

Operator's Manual
WARNING DANGER
Diesel exhaust fumes can be
harmful. Start and operate engine in
a well ventilated area. If it is Keep clear of
necessary to operate in an enclosed moving parts to
area, vent the exhaust to the outside.
Properly maintain the exhaust
prevent serious
system to its original design. bodily injury.
Figure 1-2
Diesel exhaust fumes can be harmful. Figure 1-4
Keep hands and tools clear of moving parts.
5. Keep your shoes clean. Before entering the opera

Wrong tor's cab, wipe clean any mud, gravel, snow, ice,
moisture, or grease from your feet. Slippery shoes
could cause momentary loss of control of crucial
foot operated controls.
6. Keep all walking surfaces (steps, ladders, plat
forms, etc.) and non‐skid materials on the crane
clean. Non‐skid materials are placed on the crane
to assist operators and service personnel with safe
access/egress to/from the crane and to/from ad
justment and inspection areas. Do not allow non‐
skid materials to become contaminated with mud,
snow, ice, oil, paint, wax, etc. Any contamination
can cause the non‐skid materials to become slick,
Figure 1-3 reducing their effectiveness for safety while walk
Do not smoke when fueling, or fuel up near an ing on the crane. If any non‐skid materials become
open flame. ineffective due to wear, age, or destroyed in any
way, they must be replaced.
7. Keep fingers, feet, and clothing away from
General Safety Rules sheaves, drums, and wire ropes unless the crane
is shutdown and everyone knows what you are do
The following is a list of safety rules which should be fol ing. Do not place a hand on wire ropes when
lowed during all crane operations. climbing on the crane. A sudden movement could
pull them into the drums or sheaves. Never wear
Operator Awareness loose clothing which may be caught in machinery.
1. Read and understand this Operator's Manual, all 8. To prevent movement of the individual boom sec
Safety Manuals, and the Crane Rating Manual and tions, shutdown engine and ensure the operator has
heed them. These Manuals contain important in vacated the cab before putting your hands or tools
formation. inside the boom. Unexpected movement of boom
2. An operator must not eat, read, or otherwise divert sections could sever fingers, hands, arms, etc.
his attention while operating a crane. Remem 9. Operate the crane from the operator's seat only.
ber-operating is a full‐time job. Operating the crane from any other position, such as
3. Start and operate the engine in a well ventilated reaching in a window, constitutes a safety hazard.
area. Diesel exhaust fumes can be harmful. If it is 10. Watch the load or a signal person at all times. A sus
necessary to operate in an enclosed area, vent the pended load must have your undivided attention.
exhaust to the outside. Properly maintain the ex 11. The operator, supervisor, or person in charge of the
haust system to its original design. load must observe the following rules:
4. Do not smoke when fueling, or fuel up near an a. Loads must be well secured before lifting.
open flame. Keep the nozzle in contact with the Ensure that the rigging can't slip off or pull
filler neck to prevent static electric sparks. Shut away from the load, or get out of position on
down the engine when fueling. the load. Use a three‐point sling if necessary
to keep the load from rolling or turning over.
1-2 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Operator's Manual
Right
Wrong
A Small Side Tilt Can Grade Ground Level Or Block Under

Reduce Capacities- Refer Crane. The Load Line Should Hang
To The Crane Rating Manual. Parallel With The Boom.
Figure 1-5
Level the crane.
b. Chains and slings must be of adequate size, in g. Do not wrap the winch wire rope around the
good condition, and not twisted around each load. Do not use discarded, worn, or damaged
other. wire ropes for slings. They may break and drop
c. The load must not catch on an obstruction the load.
when lifting or swinging. Ensure the load, h. Standard capacities require that the crane be on
winch wire ropes, or any other parts of the a firm, level supporting surface before making a
crane do not snag or strike any obstruction. lift. Use the bubble level to help determine when
d. Do not allow the load to rotate out of control. the crane is level. Check its accuracy frequently
Personal injury to ground personnel, load with a carpenter's level. Remember, a small side
damage, crane damage, or damage to anti‐ tilt can reduce capacities. Refer to the “List Ca
two block system may occur. pacities” charts in the Crane Rating Manual be
e. When hoisting with single part of line, especially in fore making a lift when crane is not level.
long falls applications, the design of wire rope and The hook block or hook ball and hoist wire
hook ball is crucial to minimize the potential for un rope can be used as a “plumb bob” to level
controlled wire rope and/or load rotation. Rotation a crane. Pick up a compact load
resistant wire rope is recommended for single part 2,000-3,000 lb (907-1 360kg) a few
of line applications. See Wire Rope Capacity Chart inches (centimeters) above the ground. If
in the Crane Rating Manual for the specific types of the crane is level, the load line will hang
rotation resistant wire rope recommended for the parallel to the boom. Now swing over the
crane. side. The load lines should still hang paral
f. Avoid sudden starts and stops. Lift carefully, lel to the boom. Be extra careful when
swing gently, brake smoothly, lower and set using this method on a windy day.
loads carefully. Jerking the load, swinging and i. If working at night, ensure adequate lighting is
engaging swing brake abruptly, and lowering provided so the operator and all other workers
the load rapidly and slamming on brakes, will can see all movements of the crane, attach
put shock loadings and possible side loadings ment, and load.
on the boom. Unnecessary abuse labels the
operator as a beginner. Be a professional.

Operator's Manual
Wrong Wrong
LOAD
TABLE
AREA
Working Range
Figure 1-6 Figure 1-7

Do not let the load hit the boom or fly. Do not exceed the rated capacities.
12. Don't let the load or bucket hit the boom or fly. 17. After slack winch wire rope operation, ensure the
Don't let the boom or attachment rest on, or hit, a winch wire rope is properly seated in sheaves and
building or any other object. A dent or other dam on drums before continuing to operate. Use a stick
age could result, which will weaken the boom or at or mallet to set the winch wire rope, not your
tachment. If the damage is major, the attachment hands.
could collapse. If a lattice or diagonal bracing 18. Do not lower the load beyond the point where less
member on the fly is broken, cracked, or bent, con than three full wraps of winch wire rope are left on
tact a Link‐Belt Distributor for repair procedures. If the drum. This condition could occur when lower
the boom or fly is struck, or damaged by anything, ing a load below ground level. If all the winch wire
STOP. The loading on a boom or attachments in rope runs off the drum, the load will jerk which
creases as they are lowered, therefore their sus could break the winch wire rope.
pension systems could collapse during lowering. 19. Don't alter any part of the crane. Additions to, or
Use another crane to lower a damaged boom or at changes in, any part of the equipment can create load
tachment. ings for which the crane was not designed. Such
13. Don't pull sideways on the boom or fly, not even a changes may seriously affect the usable capacities and
little. Lift straight up on every load. Moving trucks, make the entire Crane Rating Manual invalid. Such
rail cars, barges, or anything else pulling sideways changes can dangerously overload or weaken critical
on the winch wire rope could buckle the boom or parts and may cause disastrous failure.
fly. It could also damage the swing mechanism. 20. Do not exceed the rated capacities of the crane un
Pulling sideways on the boom or fly can overturn der any circumstances. While a crane has more
the crane. stability when lifting over a corner (as compared to
14. Do not “two block” (pulling the hook block, hook straight over the side) the crane capacity is not in
ball, or load into the head machinery) as this can creased. Any time the loads exceeds the rated ca
cause winch wire rope and sheave breakage re pacities listed on the capacity charts in the Crane
sulting in an accident. Rating Manual, the crane is overloaded. Over
15. Watch the load (or a signal person who can see the loads can damage the crane and such damage
load) at all times. A suspended load must have could cause failure and accidents.
your undivided attention. 21. Confirm that there is a safety latch on the hook, and
16. Operate the crane from the operator's seat only. Op that it works properly. Without a latch, it is possible
erating the crane from any other position, such as for slings or chains to come off the hook, allowing
reaching in a window, constitutes a safety hazard. the load to fall.

Operator's Manual
Right Right
Figure 1-8
Ensure hook is equipped with a functional Figure 1-9
safety latch. Use matting on soft ground.
22. Lifts where two or more cranes work together can 25. Cold weather operation requires some special at
be hazardous and should be avoided. Such lifts tention by the operator to allow for changes in eve
should be made only under the direction of a quali ryday routines:
fied engineer. If a multiple crane lift is unavoidable, a. Clean the crane, especially the boom, of accu
observe the following rules: mulated amounts of ice or snow. Operating
a. The cranes must be level and located on firm the crane with an ice covered boom is danger
surfaces. ous. The added weight of the ice or snow can
b. The cranes should be the same size and ca drastically reduce the capacity of the crane.
pacity, use the same boom length, and be sim Also, falling ice may pose a danger for ground
ilarly reeved. personel.
c. Cranes must be positioned so that each boom b. Clean all snow and ice from steps, ladders,
point is directly over its load attaching point. platforms, etc. to eliminate slippery walking
The winch lines must be vertical during all surfaces.
phases of the lift. c. If cold weather starting aids are provided on
d. The rigging must be placed so each crane lifts the crane, use them. The use of aerosol start
a share of the load well within the crane's ca ing sprays can be dangerous if the manufac
pacity. turer's directions are not closely followed.
e. Ensure that during handling more load is not d. Pay close attention to the gauges in the opera
transferred to either crane than it can handle. tor's cab when starting the engine. Normal
f. Don't attempt to travel when making multiple “warm up” times will be longer. Ensure pres
crane lifts. sures and temperatures are within normal
g. Coordinate plans with the other operator be ranges before beginning operations.
fore beginning to lift. e. Always handle flammable materials according
h. Use only one signal person. to the manufacturer's instructions. Propane,
i. Use of an operable load and angle indicating diesel, or other fuel for auxiliary heaters can be
system is desirable. dangerous if not properly handled. Do not
23. When operating the crane where the tracks could store such fuels on the crane.
sink into the soil any noticeable amount, use mat f. Use caution when lifting any load during freez
ting. Timbers used for matting should be at least ing weather, as it may be frozen to the ground
as long as the total width of the crane and should or the supporting surface. The added pull, to
be heavy enough to withstand loadings without break the load free, could cause an unexpec
damage. Timbers should be close enough to form ted overload situation. Also, when the load
a solid platform when lifting over the ends (or rais does finally break loose it could create an er
ing and lowering attachment). Block under track ratic motion causing damage or injury.
ends so full support is provided where tracks leave g. At the end of the work shift, park the crane where
the ground. This helps keep the tracks from dig it will not freeze to the ground. Major damage to
ging in and reduces crane rocking. the drive mechanism could occur while trying to
24. When operating, use care not to hit the lower with free the crane from a frozen surface.
the load or boom.

Operator's Manual
1
Right
Wrong
3
2
1
1. Use The Connecting Lugs And/Or Head Machinery Cross Shafts As 3. Do Not Attach Slings To Lattices, They Will Bend.
Lifting Points.
2. Use The Main Chords As Lifting Points With Nylon Straps Only.
Figure 1-10
Handling The Fly Sections
1 27. Always wear proper eye protection when driving

connecting pins.
28. Block under and between the fly sections when
loading them on a transport vehicle. When secur
2 ing the fly to a transport vehicle, it is best to use syn
3
thetic webs or slings. If using wire rope slings, pad
6 the fly to protect it from damage. Do not over
tighten the tie downs or the fly may be damaged.
4 Do not use chain tie downs, as they may dent and
damage the fly sections.
29. Thoroughly inspect all the elements of each fly be
fore installing it on the crane. Check each main
chord, picture frame, diagonal, lattice, and con
1. Head Sheave 5. Connecting Lugs necting lug for bends, dents, and cracked or cor
2. Main Chord 6. Head Machinery roded welds. Picture frames must be square. Do
3. Lattices Cross Shaft
not use any fly that is even slightly damaged. Con
4. Picture Frame 5 tact a Link‐Belt Distributor for the proper repair pro
Figure 1-11 cedures.
Fly Section Nomenclature 30. Use care during all access/egress to/from the crane.
Use the hand rails, hand grips, steps ladders, guard
26. Use care handling the fly when loading, transport rails, etc. to prevent slips and falls. Remain in three
ing, and unloading. Damage that occurs during point contact (two hands and one foot or two feet
these operations can go undetected and could re and one hand) with the crane at all times.
sult in failure of the attachment, once subjected to
loading. Do not attach slings to the lattices, when
lifting the fly, as they will bend. It is recommended
that the connecting lugs and/or head machinery
cross shaft be used as the lifting points. However, it
is permissible to attach nylon straps around the
main chords.

Operator's Manual
Wrong
DANGER
Stay away from crane if
close to power lines.
Crane, load, and ground can
become electrified and
deadly.
Refer to Operator's Manual for
minimum required clearance.
DANGER
ELECTROCUTION
HAZARD. Keep all parts of
crane and load away from
electrical lines. Refer to
Operator's Manual or local
code for minimum required
clearances.
Figure 1-12
Stay Away From Power Lines.
Electrical Dangers Minimum Clearance When Operating Near High

1. All Electrical Power Lines Are Dangerous. Contact Voltage Power Lines Or During Crane
with them, whether insulated or not, can cause Assembly/Disassembly.
death or injury. When operating near power lines, Normal Voltage, kV Minimum Required Clearance, ft (m)
(Phase to Phase) See Note 1
the best rule is to have the power company turn off
the power and ground the lines. However, in some To 200 15 (4.57)
cases, the operator may be unable to have the Over 200 To 350 20 (6.10)
power turned off. Follow these rules whether the Over 350 To 500 25 (7.62)
power is turned off or not. Follow all requirements Over 500 To 750 35 (10.67)
per OSHA regulations 1926.1407 through Over 750 To 1000 45 (13.72)
1926.1411 as applicable while assembling, disas As established by the power line
sembling, operating, or traveling the crane in the vi owner/operator or registered profes
cinity of any power lines. Over 1000 sional engineer who is a qualified per
a. Be alert. You are working around conditions son with respect to electrical power
which can cause death. transmission and distribution.
b. Keep all parts of the crane - winch wire
rope(s), hook block, hook ball, and load - at Minimum Clearance When Traveling With No Load
least the distance from the power line as spe To 345 15 (4.57)
cified in the “High Voltage Power Line Clear Over 345 To 750 16 (4.87)
ance Chart”, or such distance as required by Over 750 To 1000 20 (6.10)
any other state or local requirements. As established by the power line
c. Assume that every line is “Hot”. owner/operator or registered profes
d. Appoint a reliable person equipped with a loud Over 1000 sional engineer who is a qualified per
signal (whistle or horn) to warn the operator son with respect to electrical power
when any part of the crane is working around transmission and distribution.
the power line. This person should have no Note 1: Maintain 50 ft (15.2m) minimum clearance from power
lines if voltage is unknown. If unknown but yet known to be less
other duties while the crane is working around than 350 kV, maintain 20 ft (6.1m) minimum clearance.
the power line. Note 2: Environmental conditions such as wind, fog, smoke, or
e. Do not perform any crane assembly/disas precipitation may require increased clearances.
sembly under any energized power line. High Voltage Power Line Clearance Chart

Operator's Manual
Wrong
Wrong
Shaded area shows “sensitivity zone” with full boom length

Shaded area shows “sensitivity zone” with the probe near the
sensor used. Contact can be made outside this zone by the wire
boom peak. Contact can be made outside this zone by the wire
rope(s), cab, etc. In such cases the warning will not sound until
rope(s), cab, etc. In such cases the warning will not sound until
contact is made, and the crane is electrified and deadly.
contact is made, and the crane is electrified and deadly.

Crane equipped with proximity warning device Crane equipped with proximity warning device
on the entire boom. on boom tip.
f. Warn all personnel of the potential danger.

Don't allow unnecessary persons in the area. This could cause the crane and the area
Don't allow anyone to lean against or touch the around it to be electrified.
crane. Don't allow workers or load handlers to i. When operating near radio or T.V. transmitting
hold load, load lines, or rigging gear unless ab stations, high voltage can be induced in metal
solutely necessary. In these cases, use dry parts of the crane, or in the load. This can oc
hemp or plastic ropes as tether lines. Make cur even if the crane is some distance from the
certain everyone stays at least the minimum transmitter or antenna. Painful, dangerous
distance away from the load as specified in the shocks could occur. Consult trained electronic
“High Voltage Power Line Clearance Chart”, or personnel before operating the crane to deter
such distance as required by any other state or mine how to avoid electrical hazards.
local requirements. j. Overhead lines can move when the wind blows
g. The use of boom point guards, proximity de against them. Allow for this when determining
vices, insulated hooks, or swing limit stops do safe operating distances.
not assure safety. Even if codes or regulations 2. What do you do if a power line is touched by a
require the use of such devices, you must fol crane or load?
low rules listed here. If you do not follow them, a. Remain calm - think - a mistake can kill
the result could be serious injury or death. someone.
h. Grounding the crane can increase the danger. b. Warn all personnel to keep clear.
Poor grounding such as a pipe driven into the c. If crane will still operate, try to move it away
ground, may give little or no protection. In ad from contact. You, the operator are reasonably
dition, a grounded crane may strike an arc so safe in the cab unless the crane is on fire or an
heavy that a live line may be burned down. arc is cutting through the cab.

Operator's Manual
Wrong
Wrong
1
1
This Man Is Not Protected.

1. Insulated Link 1. Insulated Link
Figure 1-16
Figure 1-15 Crane equipped with insulated link and boom
Crane equipped with insulated link.
point guard.
d. Move away from contact in the reverse direc

tion to that which caused the contact. Exam
ple: If you swing left to the wire, swing to the
right to break contact. Remember - once an
arc has been struck, it may stretch out much
farther than you think before it breaks. Keep
moving until the arc is broken.
e. When the arc breaks, continue moving until you
are at least the minimum distance away as spe
cified in the “High Voltage Power Line Clearance
Chart”, or such distance as required by any oth
er state or local requirements. Stop the crane.
Thoroughly inspect crane and repair any dam
age before further use. Contact a Link‐Belt Dis
tributor and request a “Crane Inspection After
Contacting Power Line” form which lists neces
sary inspection items.
f. If you cannot disengage from the electrical
line, and the crane is not on fire or no arc is cut
ting through the cab, stay in your seat until the
power line can be turned off.
g. If you must leave the crane, don't step off. Figure 1-17
Leap from the crane as far as you can, landing If you must leave the crane, do not step off.
with feet together, then hop away from the Leap as far as you can with feet together and
crane with feet together, or shuffle feet to keep hop or shuffle away from the crane.
them close together. This could help prevent
personal injury. b. Do not let workers touch magnet or load.
3. When using a magnet: c. Do not let workers get between magnet and a
a. Lifting magnet generators produce voltage in metal object.
excess of 200 volts and present an electrical d. If necessary to position a load, use a dry,
shock hazard. Only trained personnel should wooden stick.
work on the magnet, controller, or wiring. e. Open magnet disconnect switch at magnet
Don't open the controller door with the genera control panel before connecting or discon
tor running. necting leads.

Operator's Manual
Wrong
Wrong
NO!
Figure 1-19
Use a signal person, back safely.
Figure 1-18 6. Do not tamper with safety devices. Keep them in

No hook riders! good repair and properly adjusted. They were put
on the crane for your protection.
Radio Frequency Or Electro Magnetic 7. When operating a crane equipped with any form
Interference (RFI Or EMI) of load indicating mechanism, overload warning
system, or any automatic safety device, remem
Certain areas may contain high Radio Frequency Or
ber that such devices cannot replace the skill and
Electro Magnetic Interference (RFI or EMI). In these
judgment of a good operator. For instance, such
areas the boom can act like an antenna and produce an
devices cannot tell when a crane is located on a
electrical current that may cause electrical shocks and/or
supporting surface that will give away, that too
the crane to malfunction. If operating in an area where
few parts of line are being used to lift a load, can
these conditions may exist, test the crane or have the
not correct for the effects of wind, warn that the
area tested for the magnitude of this interference before
device may be improperly adjusted, correct for
operating the crane. Operation may not be possible or
side pulls on the boom, or for many conditions
boom length may be limited. Comply with all local, state,
which could occur and create hazards. It requires
and federal laws when operating in high RFI/EMI areas.
all the skill, experience, judgment, and safety con
Protective Equipment sciousness that a good operator can develop to at
tain safe operation. Many safety devices can assist
1. Always replace protective guards and panels be
the operator in performing his duties, but he should
fore operating the crane.
not rely on them to keep him out of trouble.
2. Always wear hard hats, safety glasses, steel toe
shoes, hearing protection, and any other safety
Signal Persons And Bystanders
equipment required by local job conditions, OSHA,
1. Don't allow crane boom or loads to pass over peo
or any other requirements of applicable codes.
ple, or endanger their safety. Remove all loose ob
3. Always wear safety glasses when drilling, grinding,
jects from load. All unnecessary personnel should
or hammering. Flying chips could injure the eyes.
leave the immediate area when crane is operating.
4. Always wear a mask to prevent breathing any dust,
2. Do not allow anyone to ride on the hook block,
smoke, fumes, etc. while cleaning, drilling, weld
hook ball, or any part of the load or attachment for
ing, grinding, sanding, etc. on any part of the
construction work or recreational activities. (This
crane. Breathing dust, smoke, fumes, etc. can be
applies to recreational activities such as “bungee
very hazardous.
jumping” or “bungee cord jumping”.) Cranes are
5. Keep a dry chemical or carbon dioxide fire extin
guisher of 5BC rating or larger in the cab or in the intended to lift objects, not people. They are not
immediate area of the crane at all times. Instruct all elevators.
operating and maintenance personnel in proper 3. Do not carry passengers! There is only one seat
use of the extinguisher. Check periodically to en and it is for the operator. Do not allow personnel to
sure it is fully charged and in working order. ride on the crane during operation or while travel
ing the crane. A fall from the crane can cause
death or serious injury.

Operator's Manual
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
DANGER
CRANE OUT OF SERVICE
Do not operate the crane or start the
engine without first notifying this
mechanic. Personnel within the crane
could be hurt or killed. Crane damage
may also result from premature
Figure 1-20
operation of systems which are under
Inspect crane daily.
repair.
Signed:
4. Always look before you travel and post a signal per
son to guide you. Ensure the travel alarm is work
ing properly. Use the horn as a signal. Use a code
such as one beep - stop, two beeps - forward, Figure 1-21
and three beeps - backward. Ensure everyone on Remove the keys from the ignition and post a
the job site knows the code. sign to make others aware of repair activity.
5. Do not make a lift which is not in plain sight without
a signal person. This can lead to an accident or 4. When performing maintenance on the crane, do
crane damage. the following:
a. Fully retract the boom. Lower the boom to the
Crane Inspections And Adjustments limit of the boom hoist cylinder.
1. Inspect the crane daily. Do not operate a damaged b. Shutdown the engine and work all control lev
or poorly maintained crane. Pay particular atten ers back and forth to relieve pressure and relax
tion to the winches, controls, attachments, and the attachment.
wire ropes. If a component is worn or damaged, c. If the above instructions cannot be followed,
replace it before operating. block securely under the attachment so it can
2. Labels, decals, plates, etc. should be periodically not move.
inspected and cleaned as necessary to maintain d. Bleed any precharge off the hydraulic reservoir
good legibility for safe viewing. If any instruction, before opening it or disconnecting a line.
caution, warning, or danger labels, decals, or e. Hydraulic oil becomes hot during operation. In
plates become lost, damaged, or unreadable, they some cases it becomes hot enough to cause
must be replaced. severe burns. Be careful not to let hydraulic oil
3. When performing repetitive lift applications, espe come in contact with skin.
cially at or near maximum strength limited capaci f. Post warning signs in cab so no one will try to
ties, an inspection for cracks or other damage of start the engine. Do not adjust, maintain, or re
the major structural areas of the crane, should be pair a crane while it is in operation without visual
conducted on a regular basis. (A non‐destructive and/or verbal contact with all personnel involved
test such as magnetic particle or dye penetrant to ensure the safety of service personnel.
may even be considered.) Along with inspection 5. When making repairs, which require welding, use
for cracks and damage, frequently check the criti proper welding procedures. Also the following
cally loaded fasteners, such as the turntable bear precautions must be taken:
ing mounting capscrews, to ensure they have not a. All paint and acoustical material in the area
been stretched. Not only does frequent inspection should be removed to prevent burning
promote safety, but it is also much easier and less them. The smoke and fumes from the burn
ing paint and/or acoustical material can be
expensive to perform a repair when a crack is
very hazardous.
small, before it has a chance to traverse through a
b. Turn the battery disconnect switches to the
structural member. Any sign of cracks or damage
“OFF” position to protect any electronic equip
must be repaired before continuing operations. ment on the crane which may be effected by
Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor for repairs. electric arc welding. Contact a Link‐Belt Dis
tributor for proper procedures.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Wrong
Do not remove cap
when engine is hot.
Figure 1-23
Do not use an open flame near the battery.
Figure 1-22
Allow engine to cool before removing 9. Use extreme caution when removing radiator/
radiator/surge tank cap. surge tank caps, hydraulic pressure caps, etc.
They can fly off and hit you, or you could be burned
c. The welding ground cable should be attached by hot oil, water, or steam.
to the portion of the crane being welded. If 10. When checking battery fluid level, use a flashlight, not
welding on the upper, ground on the upper. If an open flame. If battery explodes, you can get acid in
welding on the lower, ground on the lower. your eyes, which could cause blindness. Don't check
Failure to take this precaution may result in battery charge by shorting across posts. The resulting
electrical arcs in the turntable bearing. spark could cause battery to explode. Check with a
d. The welding ground cable should always be tester or hydrometer. Don't smoke near batteries.
connected as close as possible to the area be
ing welded. This minimizes the distance that
electricity must travel. WARNING
e. Disconnect computers and other electronic Battery posts, terminals, and related
equipment (such as rated capacity limiters and accessories contain lead and lead
engine computers) to prevent damage. Contact compounds. Wash hands after handling.
a Link‐Belt Distributor for proper procedures.
f. Remove all flammables from the proximity of 11. When using jumper cables to start an engine, connect
the welding area. negative post to negative ground. Always connect the
6. Keep the crane clean, in good repair, and in proper two positive posts first. Then make one negative post
adjustment. Oil or grease on the walkways may connection. Make the final negative connection a safe
cause falls. Improper adjustments can lead to crane distance from the battery. It can be made on almost
damage, load dropping, or other malfunctions. any bare metal spot on the crane. Any spark could
7. Keep all walking surfaces (steps, ladders, plat cause the battery to explode. Refer to “Jump Starting
forms, etc) and non‐skid materials on the crane The Crane” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
clean. Non‐skid materials are placed on the crane 12. Test the automatic winch brake by raising the load
to assist operators and service personnel with safe a few inches (cm) and holding. It should hold with
access/egress to/from the crane and to/from ad out slipping. It takes more braking power to hold a
justment and inspection areas. Do not allow non‐ load in the air when the drum is full of wire rope than
skid materials to become contaminated with mud, when it is a few inches (cm) above the ground with
snow, ice, oil, paint, wax, etc. Any contamination only a few wraps of wire rope on the drum.
can cause the non‐skid materials to become slick, 13. Always reduce the pressure in hydraulic system to
reducing their effectiveness for safety while walk zero before working on any part of the system.
ing on the crane. If any non‐skid materials become 14. Use extreme care when working with circuits with
ineffective due to wear, age, or destroyed in any accumulators. Check that the hydraulic pressure
way, they must be replaced. is relieved before opening the circuit for repairs.
8. Use proper fall protection such as a fall arrest sys 15. When setting pressures, do not exceed the manu
tem as required by any applicable codes when facturer's ratings. Always follow instructions exactly.
working at elevated heights. Falls can lead to Over pressurization can cause hydraulic component
severe personal injuries and/or death. damage or failure of mechanical parts on the crane.
Either of the above can lead to an accident.

Operator's Manual
Wrong Thursday . . . . .
Right
“I thought I could save

money by running this
wire rope until Friday.”
Figure 1-24
Do not operate the crane with worn or Figure 1-25
damaged wire rope. Erect barricades around the immediate work
area.
Wire Rope 7. Use caution when disconnecting the dead end of

1. Inspect all wire rope thoroughly. OSHA (Occupa wire ropes. Reeved wire rope can become twisted
tional Safety And Health Act) regulations state “a on the sheaves. When the dead end pin or socket
thorough inspection of all wire ropes shall be made is removed the wire rope may spin.
once a month and a full written, dated, and signed
report of the wire rope condition be kept on file
Crane And Area Clearance
where readily available.” A visual inspection must 1. Know the job site conditions. Familiarize yourself
also be performed daily. Replace any worn or with work site obstructions and other potential haz
damaged wire rope. Pay particular attention to ards in the area which might lead to mishaps.
winch wire ropes. Check end connections (pins, Make any necessary arrangements to eliminate
sockets, wedges, etc.) for wear or damage. any potential hazards, if possible.
2. Use at least the number or parts of hoist wire rope 2. Erect barricades around the immediate work area
specified on the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the to prevent unauthorized personnel from wander
Crane Rating Manual to handle the load. Local ing onto the job site.
codes may require more parts of line than is 3. Ensure the work area is clear. Ensure proper clear
shown. Check code requirements and use them ance for the crane, boom, and load. Don't swing,
where applicable. travel, lift, or lower loads without first making sure no
3. Non‐rotating, rotation resistant, or spin resistant one is in the way. If your vision is obscured, locate a
wire ropes are recommended for single part of line signal person so you can see him, and he can see all
applications. This is of utmost importance for long areas you can't. Follow his signals. Ensure you and
fall hoist line applications. Only if certain criteria are the signal person understand each other's signals.
met may a swivel hook ball be used with rotation See Hand Signals Chart in this Section of this Oper
resistant wire rope. Refer to “Single Part Line Hoist ator's Manual. Use the horn to signal or warn. En
ing' and “Hook Ball Usage With Rotation Resistant sure everyone on the job site understands all signals
Wire Rope” in Section 5 of this Operator's Manual. before starting operations.
4. Do not handle wire rope with bare hands. Always 4. When working inside a building, check overhead
use gloves to prevent possible injury from frayed or clearance to avoid a collision. Check load limits on
damaged spots in the wire rope. floors or ramps so as not to crash through.
5. Inspect head machinery and hook block often as 5. Don't operate close to an overhang or deep ditch.
damaged or deteriorating sheaves can cause un Avoid falling rocks, slides, etc. Don't park crane
necessary wear on the wire rope. where a bank can fall on it, or it can fall in an exca
6. When reeving wire rope on the crane, do not stand, vation. Don't park where rain can wash out footing.
walk, or climb on the boom or attachment. Use a
ladder or similar device to reach necessary areas.

Operator's Manual
Wrong
Wrong
“It looked like

about 5 tons.”
Figure 1-27
Avoid working a crane in high winds.
Figure 1-26 When such conditions cannot be attained, loads

Know your load. being handled must be reduced to compensate.
The amount loads are reduced depends upon actu
6. Watch the tailswing of the upper revolving frame al operating conditions. It is a matter of judgment
and counterweight. Even though the original set‐ and experience. Some factors which may require
up may have been clear, situations change. reduction of capacities are:
7. Do not store material under or near electrical a. Soft or unpredictable supporting surfaces.
power sources. Make material handlers aware of b. Wind.
the dangers involved with storing material under c. Hazardous surroundings.
power lines or in the vicinity of any other hazards. d. Inexperienced personnel.
e. Poor visibility.
Weights, Lengths, And Radii f. Fragile loads.
1. Know your load. Don't try to guess or estimate the g. Crane in poor condition.
load. Use a scale or a load indicating system to de When in doubt, do not take a chance. Reduce rat
termine exact weight. Remember the weight you
ings more than you think you need. Avoid working
are lifting includes the weight of any lifting slings or
a crane in high winds. If you must work in a wind,
gear, the hook block, hook ball, and any other
reduce capacities as shown in“Wind Restrictions
weight on the hook. If lifting off the boom with the fly
Guide” in the Crane Rating Manual. Wind blowing
installed, the weight of the fly and rigging must also
against the load and the boom produces a side
be considered as part of the load. The total load
load on the boom and reduces its capacity.
weight must never exceed the rated capacity of the
crane, as listed in the Crane Rating Manual, for the When lifting loads in a wind which have large sur
position, boom length, load radius, and condition of face areas, such as building panels, the movement
operation being used. Remember - capacity chart of the load may pose a danger to workmen or
ratings in the Crane Rating Manual are based on building structures. Out swing of a load will in
ideal conditions: crease the load radius, and may overload the
a. Standing on firm, level surface. crane. This could lead to boom failure or the crane
b. Calm wind. tipping. Refer to “Wind Restrictions Guide” in the
c. No side loads or out swing of load. Crane Rating Manual.
d. Good visibility.
e. Crane in good working condition and
equipped as shipped from the factory.

Operator's Manual
Wrong
Wrong

Do not lift two loads at the same time. Do not push with the boom.
2. When operating off the main boom with the fly 8. When performing repetitive lift applications, espe
erected, deductions must be made for its weight. cially at or near maximum strength limited capaci
(The Rated Capacity Limiter will automatically de ties, be aware that these applications may reduce
duct the weight of the stowed fly to obtain the total component life. These applications include re
allowable load.) The weight of the fly, pendants, peated lifting (or lifting and swinging) of near 100%
etc., must be subtracted to obtain a “NET” capac strength limited capacities and repeated lifting of
ity. Failure to do so could result in an overload con maximum moment loads. These applications may
dition and cause boom failure. Refer to the Crane fatigue the major structural portions of the crane.
Rating Manual for amounts to be deducted. Although the crane may not break during these ap
3. When operating off the main boom with the auxil plications, they can reduce the fatigue life and
iary lifting sheave installed, the weight of the auxil shorten the service life of the crane. To improve the
iary lifting sheave must be deducted. Refer to the service life, while performing repetitive lift applica
Crane Rating Manual for amount to be deducted. tions, consider reducing the capacities to 70% of
4. Do not lift two loads at the same time, even if the maximum strength limited capacities to reduce fa
total load weight is within crane capacity. Loads on tigue cracking. Frequently perform a thorough in
the boom and fly at the same time, stress the boom spection of all the structural areas of the crane.
and drastically reduce its ability to handle loads. Any sign of cracks or damage must be repaired be
Your full attention cannot be given to both loads, fore continuing operations. Contact a Link‐Belt
creating a dangerous situation. Distributor for repairs.
5. Some capacities are based on strength of materi 9. Always refer to the Crane Rating Manual after
als. In these cases, overloads will cause a compo changing the arrangement of the attachments for
nent on the crane to break, before it will tip. Do not the correct lifting capacities.
use signs of tipping as a warning of overload. 10. The boom must be extended in the correct manner
6. Don't tie a crane down. Tying a crane down en before making a lift. The capacities listed in the
courages overloading. Crane damage or injury Crane Rating Manual for this crane are based on
could result. the boom sections being extended in accordance
7. Do not shock load and/or overload the crane at with the boom modes as selected through the RCL
anytime. Shock loading or overloading the crane System.
will reduce the fatigue life of crane components 11. Do not use the boom to push or pull. It is not de
and could result in component failure. signed for this purpose. Such action can damage
the boom and lead to an accident.
12. Know the load radius. Don't guess at it. Determine
the load radius by using the boom angle indicator,
the boom length indicator, and the Crane Rating
Manual, or measure it with a steel tape. Remember
- Radius is the horizontal distance from the center
line of rotation of the upper to the center of gravity
of the load, when the load is hanging free.

Operator's Manual
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Wrong
Operation under conditions which
exceed listed capacities may result in
overturning.
Swinging, extending, or lowering
boom to radii where no capacities are
listed may result in overturning even
without a load.
Figure 1-30
Safety Instruction Label
A little side tilt while
working over the end.......
13. Do not operate the crane at radii or boom lengths
where the capacity charts in the Crane Rating Manu
al show no capacity. Don't use a fly not shipped with
or for the crane. Either of the above can tip the crane
over or cause attachment failure. In some cases, the
crane can tip over, forward or backward, with no load
on the hook. If the boom is fully extended at a low
angle, the crane may tip until the boom touches the
ground. In any of these cases, injury or crane dam
age could result.
14. When lifting a load with any crane, the load may .......Increases load radius
swing out, or sideways. The load radius will in when swung over the side.
crease. Due to the design of hydraulic crane
booms, (cantilever boom, supported by a cylinder Figure 1-31
and overlapping sections) this increase is much Watch that side tilt!
more pronounced. The increase or out swing of
the load can overload the boom, and lead to boom must hoist down the winch wire rope to keep the
failure or tipping. Also, movement of the load can load in place. Extending the boom without winch
cause it to hit something. Ensure the load being ing down, can lead to “two blocking”. This is when
lifted will remain within capacity as it is lifted and the the hook block, hook ball, or the load contacts the
boom deflects. head machinery. Two blocking can lead to sheave
15. When extending or lowering a boom with a load, or wire rope damage.
the load radius increases. As the load radius in 18. The winch wire rope must be vertical when starting to
creases, capacity decreases. If capacity is ex lift. If not, the load will swing in, out, or sideways
ceeded, the boom may bend or the crane may tip when lifted from the ground. The crane will lean to
over. Sometimes at low angles, a hydraulic crane ward the load when lifting heavy loads. This is
boom can be extended with a load, but cannot be caused by elasticity of the crane and the boom. This
retracted. This is because more power is available lean will increase operating radius so the load will
in the boom cylinders to extend than to retract. If swing outward when it clears the ground. This out
an operator extends the boom under load, he may swing is dangerous to anything in the path of the
not be able to retract the boom and may get into a load, and because of the increase in load radius may
dangerous situation. overload the crane. To overcome this out swing,
16. Know the boom length. Don't guess. Use of an in boom up as the load is lifted so winch wire rope re
correct boom length can cause an accident. mains vertical. When setting the load on the ground,
17. When lowering or retracting the boom, the load will lower the boom after the load touches down to avoid
lower. To compensate for this, the operator must hook block and/or hook ball swing when it is un
hoist up on the winch wire rope. Otherwise, move hooked from load.
ment of the load may cause an accident. When ex
tending the boom, the load will raise. The operator

Operator's Manual
DANGER Wrong
Keep clear of
swinging upper to
prevent serious
bodily injury.
1 2
Figure 1-32
1. Load Radius at Rest
Pinch Point Label 2. Load Radius Increases Due To Centrifugal Force
19. Pinch points, which result from relative motion be Figure 1-33
tween mechanical parts, can cause injury. Keep Watch that centrifugal force!
clear of the rotating upper or other moving parts.
20. Lifting heavy loads can cause the crane to tilt or 24. Don't increase the maximum allowable counter
lean toward the load. When swinging a load from weight. Don't add anything to the crane that will
over the end to over the side, the tilt of the crane will act as additional counterweight. Remember that
increase. Since tilt acts to increase load radius, it anything which has weight, if carried behind the
must be compensated for when swinging the load. crane's center of gravity, acts as counterweight.
Swing slowly. Change boom angle (raise the Adding counterweight affects backward stability of
boom) while swinging, to maintain a constant ra the crane, particularly when working over the side.
dius, and prevent in swing or out swing of load. If It also encourages overloading of the crane.
not, a dangerous condition could result. 25. Working areas for cranes are defined per the Work
21. Watch out for centrifugal force when swinging a ing Areas Chart in the Crane Rating Manual. Permis
load. Swing gently. Centrifugal force tends to in sible loads, per the Crane Rating Manual, will vary
crease load radius. This increase in radius could from lifting quadrant to lifting quadrant. The opera
overload the crane and cause crane damage or tip tor must ensure capacity ratings are not exceeded,
ping. When stopping the swing, over swing of the regardless of which quadrant he is operating in, or
load can side load the boom. when swinging from one quadrant to another.
22. Keep the winch wire ropes as short as possible to
prevent excessive swinging. Always use the short
est boom length which will do the job. Remember
- the shorter the boom, the better the capacity.
23. Do not move a crane away from the load while han
dling near capacity loads. Due to load inertia
(weight) the load will tend to stay in position when
the crane starts to move, and then will swing in to
wards the crane. The inertia effect will tend to in
crease load radius and decrease stability. This
could lead to boom failure or crane tipping.

Operator's Manual

Check the location of the travel motors. Avoid traveling over obstacles.
b. Terrain must be smooth and solid. If not, grade

Traveling the area before traveling the crane.
1. Relative direction of the crane is based on the posi c. Tie down the hook block and/or hook ball to
tion of the upper over the lower. Before operating prevent them from swinging when traveling.
the travel controls, check the location of the travel d. Position a signal person to guide you.
motors. When the operator is sitting in the opera e. Refer to “Traveling The Crane” in this Section
tor's seat with the travel motors to the rear, the up for additional information.
per is positioned over the front of the lower. An ar 6. Traveling with a suspended load should be
row decal is placed on the lower to assist in deter avoided if possible. It is especially hazardous
mining upper position over the lower. when terrain is rough or irregular, on a side slope,
2. Travel by the smoothest, most level route. If a or in a hilly area. When traveling with a load, ob
smooth, level route is not available, grade the route serve the following rules:
to provide a smooth, level path. If it is not possible a. Engage the travel swing lock or swing park
to grade the route, travel up or down the slope. brake.
Shift crane to lowest speed when starting up or b. Use a hand line to control the load and reduce
down the slope. If the crane starts slipping side load swing.
ways on a grade, immediately turn the crane down c. Travel by the smoothest, most level route. If a
the grade. Avoid side‐hill travel whenever pos smooth, level route is not available, grade the
sible. route to provide a smooth, level path. If it is not
3. Avoid traveling over obstacles: rough terrain, possible to grade the route, don't travel with a
rocks, logs, curbs, ditches, etc. The size and type suspended load.
of obstacle that can be safely crossed will depend d. Carry loads as close to the ground as possible.
on many factors, including good judgment. When e. Do not allow side swing of the load.
obstructions must be crossed, do so with extreme f. Do not attempt to carry loads which exceed the
caution, at an angle if possible, and at slow speed. crane's rating as listed in the Crane Rating
Ease up to the break over point, balance on the ob Manual.
struction, and then ease down to minimize jolt of g. Use a signal person to warn of any danger or
contact of the other side. obstruction along the route being traveled.
4. Cross a gully or ditch at an angle and very slowly. h. Don't travel with a load on soft ground. If the
Carry boom at a low angle for increased stability. crane sinks into ground, stability can be af
5. When traveling the crane around on the job site fected to the point of tipping the crane.
with the attachment in the air, observe the following i. Keep all personnel clear of crane and load. Be
precautions: prepared to set load down quickly at any time.
a. Engage the travel swing lock or swing park j. Refer to “Traveling The Crane” in this Section
brake. of this Operator's Manual for additional inform
ation.

Operator's Manual
Wrong
SAFETY

Transport the crane safely. Do not leave the crane with a load suspended.
7. Transport the crane safely. Watch for narrow 2. Whenever an operator leaves the control station for
bridges and low clearances. Check load limits, any reason, the following must be done:
heights, width, and length restrictions in the area a. Lower the load to the ground.
you are traveling. Ensure the crane complies with b. Tie down the hook block and/or hook ball. Do
all regulations. not leave them where the wind could swing
8. When transporting the crane, note the following: them to cause damage to the attachment and/
a. Operate with lights on. Use proper warning or nearby objects.
signs, flags, and other devices. Use an escort c. Apply the swing park brake and raise the left
service if required. control console. Shutdown the engine and re
b. Engage the travel swing lock. move the keys.
c. Remove or restrain the hook block and/or d. Do not depend on a brake to suspend a load
hook ball. unless the operator is at the controls, alert, and
d. Check for maximum allowable travel speed ready to handle the load. Brake slippage, van
and any other travel limitations. Don't exceed dalism, or mechanical malfunctions could
these maximums. Crane damage or an acci cause the load to drop.
dent could result. 3. Do not leave the crane unattended with the engine
running.
Leaving The Station 4. When changing work shifts always notify the next op
1. Do not get on or off a crane in motion. Remain in erator of any changes or problems with the crane.
three point contact at all times (two hands and one 5. Hydraulic cylinders, left extended under load, of
foot or two feet and one hand) when climbing on or tentimes have a tendency to drift in (retract) due to
off the crane. If steps and/or a ladder is/are pro internal fluid passage in the cylinders and/or con
vided, use them. trol valves. Do not shutdown the crane and leave it
unattended for extended periods of time, i.e.
overnight, with the boom positioned over anything
that the boom could damage if it should lower.

Operator's Manual
Personnel Handling Guidelines Power Crane and Shovel Association (PCSA) Bureau
of the Association of Equipment Manufacturers
Introduction (AEM) Reference - PCSA Standard No. 4.
The following information is intended to provide Link‐ American Petroleum Institute (A.P.I.) Specification 2C.
Belt's recommended minimum requirements that must OSHA Part 29, CFR 1926.1431 Cranes and Derricks.
be followed when handling personnel with a personnel
basket or work platform (hereafter referred to as a work Authorization
platform) suspended by wire rope from the boom of Link‐ Authorized use of a work platform may be permitted
Belt cranes. These requirements are based upon several only after the following on‐site procedures have been
sources and are put forth in recognition of current in performed:
dustry practices. However, safety, when handling per 1. A competent person on the job site (job site man
sonnel, remains the full responsibility of job site manage ager) specifically responsible for the overall work
ment and is dependent upon the responsible action of function to be performed has determined that
every person on the job involved in the related work. there is no practical alternative means to perform
the needed work and has authorized a personnel
This information is intended to supplement and not to su
lifting operation.
persede or replace any more restrictive federal, state, or
2. For each instance of such lifting, a competent per
local regulations, safety codes, or insurance require
son responsible for the task has attested to the
ments. It is intended to serve users of personnel work
need for the operation by issuing a written state
platforms in achieving the following objectives.
ment describing the operation and its time frame
1. Reduce risk of personal injuries to users and the
and itemizing that each of the on‐site authorization
public.
requirements has been met. The written state
2. Inform users of their respective responsibilities.
ment, after being approved by a qualified person,
3. Provide standards of equipment requirements.
shall be retained at the job site. (Refer to Personnel
4. Provide standards for tests and inspections.
Handling Pre‐Lift Check List For Link‐Belt Cranes in
5. Provide standards of operation to promote safety.
this Section for a sample check list.)
Link‐Belt cranes are designed and intended for handling 3. Review of crane inspection records has been con
material. They are not normally equipped with secondary ducted to ensure the crane being used meets ap
systems or other devices required by personnel lift or el plicable provisions in ANSI B30.5 and B30.23.
evator standards and are not intended for handling per 4. Review of the work platform inspection records
sonnel for construction or amusement purposes. Use of and specifications has been conducted to ensure it
cranes for these purposes is hazardous and is not re meets applicable design standards (refer to ANSI
commended by Link‐Belt. However, Link‐Belt under A10-28).
stands that circumstances may occur (in construction 5. Review of the personnel lifting operation practices
work) when lifting or lowering personnel on a materials specified in these instructions have been conduc
handling crane load line is the only or the least hazardous ted with job site managers and crane operator(s),
method available to position personnel. In fact, Occupa foreman, designated signal person, personnel to
tional Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Part 29, be lifted, safety supervisor, and any other per
CFR 1926.1431 states “The use of equipment to hoist son(s) who has jurisdiction over the operation to
employees is prohibited except where the employer ensure that they are aware of the hazards of the op
demonstrates that the erection, use, and dismantling of eration and they are aware of provisions of these
conventional means of reaching the work area, such as instructions that must be adhered to before and
personnel hoist, ladder, stairway, aerial lift, elevating work during the personnel lifting operation.
platform, or scaffold, would be more hazardous, or is not
possible because of the project's structural design or Equipment
worksite conditions.” 1. The crane system shall be equipped with the fol
lowing:
Much corollary and supplementary information is con a. A fully functional working operational aid such
tained within the following resource documents per as a Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) system - A
taining to both cranes and personnel work platforms. system consisting of devices that sense crane
Job site management must ensure all requirements lis loading, boom length (extendable booms
ted in these resource documents are followed for all only), boom angle, and also automatically
personnel handling operations. provide an audible/visual signal when the
American National Standards Institute Reference - loading conditions approach, reach, and/or
ANSI Standards A10.28, A92.2, A92.3, B30.5, and exceed the rated capacity values. When the
B30.23.

Operator's Manual
Actual Load exceeds the Rated Capacity, the c. Hooks on hook block assemblies, hook ball
system supplies a signal to a function cutout assemblies, or other assemblies, shall be of a
system. The operational aid shall be equipped type that can be closed and locked, (with a
with these additional devices: working safety latch) eliminating the hook
1. Anti‐two block device to prevent damage throat opening, and shall be full load‐bearing,
to the hoist wire rope, other crane com and contain a manual trigger release.
ponents, or attachments, and subsequent 3. No unauthorized alterations or modifications are
endangerment of personnel. allowed to be made to the basic crane.
It is required that the anti‐two block
Maintenance, Lubrication, And Adjustments
device warn both audibly and visually as 1. The crane operator must have a complete under
well as have the capability to cutout the standing of the crane's maintenance, lubrication,
controls/functions that may cause a two and adjustment instructions as outlined in the
block condition. Operator's Manual.
2. Boom angle indicator. 2. The crane shall be maintained, lubricated, and ad
Cranes with extendable booms must justed, by a designated person, as specified in the
utilize a boom angle indicator having Operator's Manual.
“high and low” set points and audible/ 3. The crane and work platform decals must be un
visual alarm(s) capable of activating derstood and maintained.
function cutouts. 4. All decal precautions and instructions shall be
strictly observed.
b. Boom hoist and load line shall have power
lowering and raising and shall have an auto Inspection And Rigging
matic brake which is applied when the applic 1. The lift crane and work platform shall be inspected
able control is in neutral, or when the anti‐two immediately prior to commencement of operation.
block device is actuated. (Refer to the Crane Operator's Manual and ANSI
c. If the crane is equipped with a “free‐fall” hoist, B30.5, Section 5, Section 5-2.1.2 and 5.2.4, and
steps shall be taken to ensure its use is not ANSI B30.23 for the required inspection procedures
possible during the use of the work platform. for the crane. Refer to ANSI A10-28 for inspection
(Note: A.P.I. applications do not permit the procedures required for the work platform.)
crane to be equipped with free‐fall.) 2. The inspection shall be performed once daily when
d. Each crane shall have a mechanical swing the crane is being used in work platform service or
park brake or swing lock capable of being set each time the crane is converted from material lift
at any swing position, and shall have a variable ing to personnel handling operation. In the event
swing brake or swing controls capable of stop the operator is replaced, a new inspection is re
ping the upper swing motion smoothly. The quired. Written documentation of all inspections
swing brake must be properly maintained at all must be kept on the job site during personnel
times to ensure its holding capability. handling operations.
3. Inspect the crane and work platform for any loose,
Note: All operational aids and equipment damaged, or missing components.
must be maintained in operable condition. 4. Any structural or functional defect which adversely
Alternative measures are not permitted. affects the safe operation of the lift crane shall be
corrected before any operation utilizing a work
2. The work platform shall be designed by a qualified
platform begins or continues.
engineer competent in structural design. Its main
5. The hoist drum shall have at least three full wraps of
tenance, and its attachment to the crane load line,
wire rope remaining on the drum at all times when
is the responsibility of the job site management.
using a work platform.
Their arrangement shall comply with the following
6. Minimum load hoist and boom hoist wire rope
as a minimum:
design factors for the combined weight of the lift at
a. The work platform harness must be of suffi
tachments, work platform personnel, and tools shall
cient length to prevent any portion of the work
be 10:1 for “Non‐Rotating” and “Rotation Resistant”
platform or the harness from coming in contact
wire ropes. All other wire rope types require a 7:1
with the boom at any working boom angle.
design factor. (Note: A.P.I. applications require 10:1
b. Audible and visual alert systems shall be
design factor for all wire rope construction.)
provided to the personnel in the work platform
to signal for assistance in the event of an emer
gency.

Operator's Manual
Main Boom Head
Auxiliary Head Sheaves Fixed Fly Sheave
Sheaves
Allowed Allowed Allowed
Telescopic Booms
Offset Fly With
Offset Fly Sheave A‐Frame Jib Sheave
Extension(s) Sheave
Allowed Allowed Not Recommended
Main Boom Head
Conventional Lattice Tip Extension Sheaves Jib Head Sheave
Sheaves
Tubular or Angle Booms
Allowed Allowed Allowed
Luffing Boom
Luffing Jib Head Fixed Jib Head
Luffing Auxiliary Head Midfall Sheaves
Sheaves Sheave
Attachments Sheaves
Not Recommended Allowed Allowed Not Recommended
Lifting Sheaves For Personnel Handling With Suspended Work Platforms
7. The work platform shall be suspended from a wire 13. The following inspections shall be conducted on
rope that is reeved from an allowed lifting sheave. fixed length style booms prior to lifting personnel:
Refer to “Lifting Sheaves For Personnel Handling a. Inspection of all pendants, pendant links,
With Suspended Work Platforms” chart to determ pendant spreader bars, links, etc.
ine the allowed sheave(s). b. Inspection of all mechanical linkages, shafts,
8. Inspect the wire ropes, sheaves, hoist drum drums, etc.
brakes, and other mechanical and rigging equip 14. A written record of all the above inspections must
ment vital to the safe operation of the crane. be maintained on the job site.
9. Ensure that all wire rope sockets and dead end
lugs are properly installed and are in good working Crane Test Procedures
condition. The test procedures listed below shall be conducted at
10. Ensure that all wire rope guards are in good working the following intervals:
order and that they are properly installed and adjus Daily,
ted to prevent wire rope from jumping off sheaves. At each job site before hoisting employees,
11. Inspect all structural members of all boom sec After any repairs or modifications to the equipment,
tions, fly sections, luffing jib sections, and live When an operator is replaced, and
mast, as equipped. When, in the judgement of responsible job site man
12. In addition to other regular inspections, visual inspec agement, or controlling entity, there has been a signi
tion of the crane and work platform shall be conducted ficant change in the conditions of the personnel lifting
immediately after testing and prior to lifting personnel. operation.
The following inspections shall be conducted on ex Note: No personnel are allowed to ride the work
tendable booms prior to lifting personnel: platform during any of the tests recommended in
a. Full power style booms: this Section.
1. Inspection of all extension wire ropes at 1. The work platform and rigging shall be proof tested
the access points in the boom where the to 125 percent of the work platform's rated capa
end connections are visible - Refer to the city. (The proof test may be done concurrently with
Operator's Manual for inspection and ad the trial lift by completing the following test proced
justment procedures. ures.) Do not exceed the rated lifting capacity of
b. Pinning and latching style booms: the applicable lift crane as listed on the crane capa
1. Inspection of the latching mechanism, city charts. (Refer to ANSI A10.28 for suspended
sensors, and hydraulic/electrical circuit at work platform testing and inspection.)
the access points. a. This test load shall be tested for stability.
2. Inspection of all pins and pinning locations The operator and signal person shall con
in the individual boom sections and at the duct this test.
fully retracted position. This test shall include movement of the work
3. Verification of the accuracy of the boom platform through its entire intended range of
length indicator. Refer to the Operator's motion, simulating the specific operation to
Manual for the procedures. be undertaken.

Operator's Manual
A successful stability test must not produce 4. The operator shall not leave the operator's station
instability of the crane or cause permanent when the work platform is occupied. The operator
deformation of any component. shall remain alert in a position of readiness at the
b. This test load shall be raised and lowered at work station with the engine running and the mas
maximum power controlled line speed (NOT ter clutch engaged, if crane is so equipped.
FREE‐FALL). The acceleration must be 5. Unauthorized personnel shall not be in the operat
smooth and the deceleration capability of the or's cab on the lift crane, or near the lift crane while
control/braking system shall be confirmed by a work platform is suspended from the load line.
bringing the work platform to a smooth stop. 6. Any operation in which a work platform is to be sus
The work platform shall be held in a suspen pended from the load line shall be carefully
ded position for a minimum of five minutes with planned by the operator, supervisory personnel,
the test load evenly distributed on the work designated signal person, and personnel to be lif
platform. (This experience is intended to ted prior to commencement of such operation.
sharpen the skill of the operator in handling the They are to be advised:
work platform and to give the operator an op a. That the crane does not have safety devices nor
portunity to evaluate the crane's perform mally used on personnel handling equipment.
ance.) The work platform shall then be inspec b. That the safety of the operation depends on
ted for any evident sign of damage or defect. the skill and judgment of the crane operator
2. All limiting and warning devices shall be tested by and others present.
activation of each appropriate control function. c. Of procedures to enter and leave the work plat
3. With pinning and latching style extendable booms, form and other safety procedures.
a visual inspection shall be conducted to verify that 7. After positioning of the work platform:
the boom extend pins are properly set in the exten a. All brakes and locks on the lift crane shall be
ded boom sections. set before personnel perform any work.
4. At the beginning of each lift, the work platform must b. With pinning and latching style extendable
be hoisted a few inches (mm) with the personnel booms, a visual inspection shall be conducted
and materials/tools on board and inspected by a to verify that the boom extend pins are properly
competent person to ensure; set in the extended boom sections.
The work platform is secure and properly bal 8. Telescope operation is not recommended with any
anced, extendable boom with personnel in a suspended
All wire ropes are free of deficiencies such as work platform.
kinking, crushing, corrosion, etc., 9. A work platform attached to load line of lift cranes
Any multiple part lines are not twisted, shall not be used for working on any energized elec
The primary attachment is centered over the tric power line, or any energized device or facility
work platform, and used for electric power generation or transmission.
If any load rope is slack, it must be inspected to Minimum working clearance shall be at least twice
ensure that all ropes are properly seated on the that recommended for material handling operations
drum and in the sheaves. in ANSI B30.5b section 503.4.5 and ANSI B30.23.
5. Any condition found during any of these tests/in 10. The combined weight of the work platform, any at
spections that fails to meet requirements or may tachment device, personnel, tools, and other
create a safety hazard, must be corrected before equipment shall not exceed 50% of the lifting capa
hoisting personnel. city of the applicable lift crane as listed on the crane
Operation And Safety capacity chart. (Note: A.P.I. applications require
1. The Operator's Manual for the crane shall be read 25% of lifting capacity as the limit.)
and fully understood by operating personnel. The 11. Use caution when utilizing pendant supported lat
Crane Operator's Manual shall be available to tice jibs on tubular or angle booms as the jib can
them at all times. drift backwards into the jib backstops under cer
2. Safety when handling personnel remains the full tain conditions. This is most likely with short jib
responsibility of job site management and is de lengths with minimum jib offset and maximum
pendent upon the responsible action of every per boom angle. Pay special attention to detect the
son on the job involved in the related work. possibility of jib drift during the work platform test
3. Mobile lift cranes shall be erected to obtain maxim lift. An additional test lift is recommended with an
um crane stability. The crane must be level and on empty work platform when operation at or near
firm ground. It is recommended that the outriggers these conditions.
be fully extended and the tires must be clear of the
ground before beginning any operation.

Operator's Manual
12. The following actions and operations are strictly edge of the work platform or use planks, ladders,
prohibited when working with personnel suspen or other devices for attaining a work position. (This
ded in a work platform: does not apply to offshore personnel transfer bas
a. Cranes shall not travel while personnel are in kets. Personnel must ride on the exterior of this
the work platform. type of personnel handling device to assure great
b. No lifts shall be made on another of the crane's er safety of the operation.)
load lines with personnel suspended in a work 21. When welding is done by personnel in the work
platform. platform, the electrode holders shall be protected
c. No external load is allowed to be lifted by at from contact with metal components of the work
taching it to the work platform. platform. If electrically connected electrode hold
d. Work platform lifts shall be a single crane oper ers contact work platform, work platform could be
ation. A work platform shall not be lifted using dropped due to burning/melting of wire ropes sus
two cranes. pending the work platform.
e. Hoisting of personnel shall be discontinued 22. A pre‐lift meeting must be conducted with the
upon indication of any dangerous weather crane operator, signal person, employee(s) to be
conditions, wind, or other impending danger. hoisted, person responsible for the task to be per
f. The emergency manual mode operation of formed, and anyone else that is directly involved
pinning and latching style extendable booms with the lift (as applicable) to review all the require
shall not be utilized. ments and procedures that must be followed to
g. Free‐fall (if equipped) shall not be used. complete the lift.
13. Movement of the work platform with personnel shall 23. Follow all procedures for determining the rated ca
be done in a slow, controlled, cautious manner with pacity and perform all testing as outlined in the
no sudden movements of the crane or work platform. Crane Operator's Manual, the Crane Rating Manu
Do not use high speed functions, if equipped. al, and this Safety Manual.
14. Do not use multi‐function crane operation. If load
hoist, boom hoist, and swing functions must be Additional Requirements For Offshore Cranes
used to position the work platform, perform each 1. Link‐Belt offshore cranes are designed to handle
function individually. materials. However, due to the special conditions
15. Clear, unobstructed visibility between personnel commonly existing offshore, the use of cranes to
on the work platform and the crane operator shall transfer personnel between vessels or from a ves
be maintained at all times except where a desig sel to a work platform is an established practice.
nated signal person has been assigned and posi The safety of the personnel, if a materials handling
tioned such that he is visible to both. Such desig crane is used in transferring personnel, depends
nated signal person shall have no other duties to upon the skill and judgment of the crane operator
perform when personnel are in the work platform. and alertness of the personnel being transferred.
16. Voice communication between work platform per Sea and weather conditions may create additional
sonnel, the crane operator, and designated signal hazards beyond the skill of persons involved.
person, if assigned, shall be maintained. This operation is approved by the American Petro
17. If other cranes or equipment may interfere with the leum Institute (A.P.I.). By adopting procedures for
lifting of personnel, signals or other means of com this operation, the institute has determined that the
munication between all crane or equipment oper transfer of personnel may be performed safely un
ators shall be maintained to avoid interference with der certain offshore conditions. Therefore,
individual operations. whenever an offshore crane is used to transfer per
18. If the work platform is not landed, it shall be tied to a sonnel, all persons involved in the operation must
structure before personnel mount or dismount the know and implement the A.P.I. procedures and
work platform. verify that sea and weather conditions are within
19. Personnel in the work platform shall wear personal safe limits for the transfer.
fall arrest systems. Anchors used for attachment of
personal fall arrest equipment shall be independ In addition to all previous requirements in these In
ent of any anchors being used to support or sus structions, A.P.I. 2C requires the following:
pend work platforms. Personnel shall keep all Boom and load hoists used shall be approved by
parts of body, tools, and equipment inside work the hoist manufacturer for personnel handling
platform during raising, lowering, and positioning. and shall be so indicated on their name plate.
20. Personnel shall always stand firmly on the floor of Refer to A.P.I. 2C Section 6 for further details and
the work platform and shall not sit or climb on the procedures.

Operator's Manual
Personnel Handling
Pre‐Lift Check List for Link‐Belt Cranes
I am the designated person responsible for verifying that all safety requirements are met for this
personnel handling operation;
1
Name: Title:
Signature: Date: / / Initials

2 I have verified that there are no conventional means to handle personnel for this operation.
I have a written statement authorizing personnel handling from a competent person on the job
3
who accepts full responsibility, or I accept full responsibility for the operation.
The Crane Operator acknowledges that he has read and fully understands the Crane
4 Operator's Manual and Crane Rating Manual. All personnel involved have been informed and
understand the tasks required to complete the personnel lifting operation.
The crane has been maintained, lubricated, and adjusted by a designated person, as
5
specified in the Crane Operator's Manual.
6 The lift crane is equipped, and all devices operate properly as follows:
Anti‐two block device with hydraulic cutouts
Power load raising and lowering with automatic brakes and function cutouts - Free‐Fall (if
equipped) shall not be used
Boom angle indicator with high and low set points and function cutouts
Boom length indicator (telescopic booms only) and function cutouts
Load Indicating System or Rated Capacity Limiter System
A variable swing brake or swing controls capable of stopping upper swing motion smoothly
A mechanical swing park brake or swing lock to hold the upper in position while personnel
are working from the work platform
Hook block or hook ball being used can be closed and locked with a safety latch
7 A working audible and visual alert system is provided to the personnel in the work platform.
8 A mechanical and structural crane inspection has been completed by a designated person.
9 The wire rope used to lift the work platform is reeved from an allowed lifting sheave
10 Crane travel is not allowed with personnel in the work platform.
11 Telescoping the boom is not recommended with personnel in the work platform.
When handling personnel with pinning and latching style booms, it is recommended boom be
12
kept in a pinned position. Inspections must be made to ensure boom extend pins are set.
13 All wire rope sockets and dead end lugs are properly installed and are in good working condi
tion. All Wire rope guards are properly installed and adjusted to hold all ropes on the appropri
ate sheaves.
Voice communications between the Crane Operator and the personnel in the work platform
14
are present and operational.
15 Fall arrest systems are present and in use by personnel in the work platform.
16 Weather and wind conditions are acceptable to safely perform the lift.
17 A Proof‐Test/Trial Lift was completed with 125% of the work platform's rated capacity.
18 The total load being lifted will not exceed 50% of the standard lift crane capacity charts.
19 Cranes with outriggers have them equally extended with tires clear of the ground.
20 A Pre‐Lift meeting was held with all appropriate personnel to review all aspects of the lift.
Note: This checklist is to be used as a supplement to (not a substitute for) the information and procedures
supplied for personnel handling operations.

Operator's Manual
17
16
15
14
13
12
1
11
2
10
5
9
8
7 6
1. Cab Electrical Center 7. Swing Brake Pedal 13. External RCL Light Bar (If Equipped)
2. Seat, Controllers, & Control Consoles 8. Travel/Steer Levers/Pedals 14. RCL Overhead Light Bar (If Equipped)
3. Cup Holder 9. Throttle Pedal 15. Upper & Boom Floodlight Switches (If
4. First Aid Kit 10. Bubble Level Equipped)
5. Fire Extinguisher 11. RCL Display & Control Console 16. Travel Swing Lock Lever
6. Boom Telescope Pedal 12. Winch & Rear View Camera Monitor 17. Radio
Figure 1-38
Operator's Cab

Operator's Manual
Operator's Cab 1
Several panels which contain the gages, switches, and
controls to operate and monitor crane operations are
mounted throughout the operator's cab. Refer to
Figure 1-38. The following is a description of each
gauge, switch, or control in each panel, along with an
explanation of their function and/or operation.
Bubble Level 2
The bubble level is provided to assist the operator in
determining when the crane is level. It is on the lower
right front of the operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-38.
Fire Extinguisher
A fire extinguisher is mounted in the left front corner of the
operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-38. It is an ABC type
fire extinguisher, meaning it is capable of extinguishing
most types of fires. The operator should be familiar with
its location, the clamp mechanism used to secure it in
place, and foremost the operation of the device. Specific
instructions, regarding operation, are given on the label 3 4 3
on the fire extinguisher. A charge indicator on the fire ex 1. Sunscreen 3. Latches
tinguisher monitors the pressure within the tank. Check 2. Wiper Motor 4. Catch Release
the indicator daily to ensure the fire extinguisher is ade Figure 1-39
quately charged and ready for use. Top Hatch
RCL Overhead Light Bar (If Equipped)
Top Hatch
The operator's cab may be equipped with an overhead
light bar which gives a visual indication of how much of Top Hatch Wiper And Washer
the crane's capacity is being used and the rate at which
an overload is being approached. This light bar operates The top hatch wiper is mounted in the top of the operat
similar to the bar‐graph on the RCL Display. Refer to or's cab roof. Refer to Figure 1-39. The switch for the
“Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Section of this Operator's top hatch wiper/washer is on the cab control console.
Manual for additional information. Refer to Figure 1-42 for switch location.
External RCL Light Bar (If Equipped) Top Hatch Window

The top hatch window can be opened to improve oper
An external RCL light bar may be mounted on the outside
ator's cab ventilation. To open the top hatch window,
top right corner of the operator's cab. It gives ground
rotate the latches, press the catch release, and push
personnel a visual indication of how much of the crane's
up on the top hatch window. Refer to Figure 1-39.
capacity is being used and the rate at which an overload
is being approached. This light bar operates similar to Top Hatch Sunscreen
the bar‐graph on the RCL Display. Refer to “Rated Ca The top hatch is equipped with a roller type sunscreen
pacity Limiter” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for to assist operator vision when looking up through the
additional information. top hatch. Refer to Figure 1-39.
First Aid Kit
The crane has a multi‐purpose first aid kit to the left of
the operator's seat. Refer to Figure 1-38.

Operator's Manual
2
7
8
6
9
5
4 10
3
11
2
1. RCL Control Module Diagnostic Connector 7. RCL Controller

2. Junction Block 8. 75 Amp Relay Module
3. Solid State Flasher 9. Drum Rotation Indicator Controller
4. Rear View Camera Power Harness Unit 10. Cab Fuse Box Access Panel
5. Diode Packs 11. Cab Fuse Box
6. Wind Speed Indicator Receiver
Figure 1-40
Cab Electrical Center
RCL Control Module Diagnostic Cab Electrical Center

Connector The cab electrical center is mounted behind the operat
or's seat. Refer to Figure 1-38 and Figure 1-40. Re
A diagnostic connector is located behind the operator's move the access panels to gain access to electrical
seat for initial calibration or extensive troubleshooting components within the electrical center. The electrical
for the RCL control module. Refer to Figure 1-40. Ex center contains the fuse box, the RCL control module,
tensive troubleshooting requires a laptop computer, and other various electrical components for the crane.
diagnostic software, and a factory trained technician.
Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor if extensive trouble
shooting is required.

Operator's Manual
SPARE SPARE AL
AH AJ AK
FUSE IDENTIFICATION
1 A - DOME LIGHTS
B - UPPER LIGHTS
C - IGNITION SWITCHES
AE AF AG D - HORN
E - RCL ECM RELAY
F - RCL ECM
AB AC G - FLOODLIGHTS (Option)
AD
H - HEATER FAN
J - STROBE LIGHT (Option)
K - RCL DISPLAY
L - ENGINE/LINDE ECM DIAGNOSTIC
M - SPARE
N - REAR RESISTOR
RR-10 SS-15 TT-15 P - FRONT DRUM ROTATION INDICATOR RESISTOR
R - SWING PARK BRAKE/FUNCTION LOCKOUT
MM-10 NN-10 PP-5 S - SPARE
UU T - CRANE CONTROL DISPLAY
JJ-5 KK-10 LL-5 U - RCL ECM
V - DRUM ROTATION INDICATOR SENSOR/3RD WRAP (Option)
FF-5 GG-10 HH-15 W - HEAT & AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
X - OIL COOLER
Y - SWITCH LIGHTS
Z - TELESCOPE OVERRIDE
AA - CAB TILT
BB - FRONT WIPER, WASHER
Y-5 Z-5 AA-5 BB-10 CC-15 DD-5 EE-5 CC - RAIDO
DD - DRUM ROTATION INDICATOR
R-5 S-10 T-3 U-5 V-10 W-10 X-5 EE - SWING ALARM, LIGHTS
FF - CAMERA SYSTEM
H-25 J-10 K-5 L-10 M-5 N-R1.0K P-R1.0K GG - TOP HATCH WIPER, WAHSER
HH - AUGER (Option)
A-5 B-25 C-15 D-10 E-15 F-5 G-25 JJ - SPARE
A
KK - WINCH CONTROL
LL - TRAVEL ALARM
MM - RCL BYPASS
NN - COUNTERWEIGHT REMOVAL (Option)
PP - TRAVEL CONTROL
RR - 12V ACCESSORY OUTLET
SS - SIDE FRAME EXTEND
TT - SPARE
1. Typical Fuse Box Label

- Always refer to the actual label on the crane.
Figure 1-41
Cab Fuse Box
Cab Fuse Box

The cab fuse box is in the electrical center behind the
operator's seat. Refer to Figure 1-40 and
Figure 1-41. Remove the access panel to gain access
to the fuse box. A label which designates the electrical
circuit protected by each fuse is mounted on the back of
the box cover. Use a fuse puller when replacing a fuse.

Operator's Manual
5
6
7
8
9
10
21
11
20
12
19
18 13
17
16
15 14
1. Emergency Engine Shutdown Button 11. Side Frame Extend/Retract Switch
2. Winch & Rear View Cameras Monitor 12. Ignition Switch
3. Crane Control Display 13. 12V DC Accessory Outlet
4. RCL Display 14. Top Hatch Wiper/Washer Switch
5. Fan Speed Switch 15. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch
6. Heater/Air Conditioner Selector Switch 16. Auger Activation Switch (If Equipped)
7. Rotating Beacon or Strobe Light Switch 17. Auger Lock/Unlock Switch (If Equipped)
(If Equipped) 18. Temperature Control Knob
8. Upper Driving Lights Switch 19. RCL Display Diagnostic Connector
9. Travel Control Switch 20. Engine Diagnostic Connector
10. Cab Tilt Switch 21. Crane Control Display (CCD) Diagnostic Connector
Figure 1-42
Cab Control Console
Cab Control Console

A panel that contains the following controls, gauges,
and indicators is mounted inside the right front corner
of the operator's cab and is shown in Figure 1-42.

Operator's Manual
1. Emergency Engine Shutdown Button 9. Travel Control Switch
The emergency engine shutdown button The travel control system employs a two
is used to shutdown the engine in emer speed travel which can be utilized to pro
gency situations. Reset the button by turn vide the operator with two speeds of crane
ing it counterclockwise. travel. Place the switch in the position for high
speed and in the position for standard
2. Winch & Rear View Cameras Monitor speed. Place the switch in the position to dis
The crane is equipped with two cameras. One able the travel levers. Refer to “Steering And Trav
camera gives the operator a view of the winches to eling The Crane” in this Section of this Operator's
monitor wire rope spooling on the winch drum(s). Manual.
The other camera gives a view of the area directly
behind the crane. Refer to “Winch And Rear View 10. Cab Tilt Switch
Cameras” in this Section of this Operator's Manual. This switch is used to tilt the operator's cab
from 0 to 20 degrees above horizontal.
3. Crane Control Display Use this switch to improve vertical visibility
This unit will display various crane and engine data and help to reduce operator fatigue due to neck
such as rpm's, coolant temperature, oil pressure, strain when the load is high overhead. Refer to
etc. It will also display crane indicators such as “Cab Tilt Operation” in this Section of this Operator's
function lockout, swing park brake, throttle lock, Manual.
etc. Refer to “Crane Control Module And Display”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual for operat
11. Side Frame Extend/Retract Switch
ing instructions. This switch is used to extend and retract the
lower side frames. This switch will extend/
4. Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) Display retract both side frames simultaneously.
This displays the boom length, boom angle, load Push the top side of the switch to retract the side
weight, etc. See “Crane Monitoring System” in this frames, bottom side to extend them. The side
Section of this Operator's Manual for complete op frames can be used in any one of three positions;
erating instructions. fully retracted, intermediate extended, or fully ex
tended. Refer to “Extending And Retracting The
5. Fan Speed Switch Side Frames” in this Section of this Operator's Manu
This switch controls the fan speed. Use al.
the high, medium, or low position to con
trol the air flow into the operator's cab. 12. Ignition Switch
The ignition switch is the conventional, key
6. Heater/Air Conditioner Selector Switch operated, automotive type. It controls en
This switch selects either air conditioning gine off/on/start, accessories, and ener
or heater. Press the top part of the switch gizes the instrument panels in the operator's cab.
to turn the heater on, bottom part to turn
the air conditioning on. 13. 12V DC Accessory Outlet
Use this outlet for electrical accessories.
7. Rotating Beacon or Strobe Light Switch
(If Equipped)
This switch controls the operator's cab ro
CAUTION
tating beacon or strobe light. Push the top Do not connect an accessory to any part of the
side of the switch to turn it on, bottom side crane other than the accessory outlet.
to turn it off. Damage to the crane's electrical system may
result. If it is necessary to do so, contact a
8. Upper Driving Lights Switch Link‐Belt Distributor.
This switch operates the upper lights.
Push the top side of the switch to turn lights
on, bottom side to turn them off.

Operator's Manual
14. Top Hatch Wiper/Washer Switch RCL Display Diagnostic Connector
Rotate the wiper/washer switch clockwise A diagnostic connector is on the left side of the Cab
to activate the top hatch wiper. Rotate the Control Console for initial calibration or extensive
switch to the first detent for low speed wip troubleshooting for the RCL Display. Refer to
er and to the second detent for high speed wiper. Figure 1-42. Extensive troubleshooting requires a lap
Rotate the switch counterclockwise to turn the top computer, diagnostic software, and a factory
wipers off. Pushing the wiper/washer switch trained technician. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor if ex
sprays washer fluid on the top hatch window to tensive troubleshooting is required.
clean the window.
Engine Diagnostic Connector
15. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch The engine diagnostic connector is on the Cab Control
Rotate the wiper/washer switch clockwise Console. Refer to Figure 1-42. The diagnostic connec
to activate the windshield wiper. Rotate tor provides access to diagnostic codes within the engine
the switch to the first detent for low speed control module (ECM). When the check or stop engine
wiper and to the second detent for high speed wip light illuminates, the service technician can plug in a data
er. Rotate the switch counterclockwise to turn the reader or laptop computer to retrieve the engine fault
wipers off. Pushing the wiper/washer switch codes stored in the ECM. Refer to the engine manufac
sprays washer fluid on the windshield to clean the turer's manual for information on engine diagnostics and
windshield. engine fault code descriptions.
16. Auger Activation Switch (If Equipped) Crane Control Display (CCD)
This switch activates the left control lever to be Diagnostic Connector
used as the auger control. Refer to “Auger Attach A diagnostic connector is on the left side of the Cab
ment” in Section 4 of this Operator's Manual for ad Control Console for initial calibration or extensive
ditional information. troubleshooting for the Crane Control Display. Refer to
Figure 1-42. Extensive troubleshooting requires a lap
17. Auger Lock/Unlock Switch (If Equipped) top computer, diagnostic software, and a factory
This switch is used to lock or unlock the auger at trained technician. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor if ex
tachment to the lower storage bracket. Refer to tensive troubleshooting is required.
“Auger Attachment” in Section 4 of this Operator's
Manual for additional information.
18. Temperature Control Knob

Turn the temperature control knob to adjust the
temperature in the operator's cab.

Operator's Manual
Upper & Boom Floodlights
(If Equipped)
1. Boom Floodlight ON/OFF Switch 2 1 4 3
This switch operates the boom floodlight.
Push the top part of the switch to turn flood
light on, bottom part to turn it off.
2. Boom Floodlight Directional Control

Use the directional control to move the
floodlight up, down, left, or right.
3. Upper Floodlight ON/OFF Switch

This switch operates the upper floodlight.
Push the top part of the switch to turn flood
light on, bottom part to turn it off. 1. Boom Floodlight ON/OFF 3. Upper Floodlight ON/OFF
Switch Switch
4. Upper Floodlight Directional Control 2. Boom Floodlight Directional 4. Upper Floodlight
Control Directional Control
Use the directional control to move the
floodlight up, down, left, or right. Figure 1-43
Upper & Boom Floodlights (If Equipped)

Operator's Manual
3
1. Video Monitor
2. Winch Camera
3. Rear View Camera
Figure 1-44
Upper Camera Locations
Winch And Rear View Cameras

The upper is equipped with two cameras. One camera
WARNING
gives the operator a view of the winches to monitor wire Cameras are being supplied as an operator’s
rope spooling on the winch drum(s). The other camera aid. They do not relieve the crane operator of
gives a view of the area to the rear of the crane to be any responsibilities during crane operation.
used before swinging the upper and backing up. Always look directly in the direction of crane
travel or at the load during crane lifting
During initial crane start up and inspection each day, veri
operations. Do not rely solely on the camera to
fy the proper operation of all cameras. If the cameras are
determine if an obstruction is present.
found to be damaged or missing, order replacement
parts as required to repair or replace the damaged or
missing component. Continue operation with caution as When the swing brake is released the monitor will auto
you should normally do with all crane operations. matically display the right swing view.

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1. Power/Menu Button 4. Camera Select/Up Button 7. Volume Up/Navigate Right

2. QUAD(PIP) Select Button 5. AV/Zoom/Down Button 8. CDS Sensor
3. Auto Scan/Locking Button 6. Volume Down/Navigate Left 9. Speaker
Figure 1-45
Winch & Swing Right View Cameras Monitor
Camera Monitor
A video monitor in the Operator’s Cab is supplied to
WARNING
help the Operator see areas that can be obstructed Do not rely solely on the cameras and
from their view. This monitor can distract the Operator monitors.
from their normal duties if not used properly. Use these •The field of vision of the camera may be
monitors as an Operator’s aid and not as the sole meth limited.
od of seeing where the crane is going. Primary atten •Just because the monitor looks clear does not
tion is to be on where the crane is going or the lifted mean that an obstruction does not exist.
load, not the monitor. •Images in the monitor may be farther than
Cameras do not eliminate the requirement for a signal per they appear.
son during crane travel. Do not attempt to move the crane •Images in the monitor may be distorted.
without a signal person. A trained signal person working in •Weather conditions (ice, snow, rain, etc) may
conjunction with a trained Operator is required to move the distort or block the camera lens and inhibit
crane. visibility.
•Do not operate the crane using the camera’s
alone.
•Always look before moving the crane.
•Always employ a signal person to move the
crane.

Operator's Manual
1. Power/Menu Button 4. Camera Select/Up Button
Power Press the Camera Select/Up Button to scroll
Press the top left corner of the Power/Menu Button through the camera views one by one and to get
to turn the monitor ON. out of a split screen view. Press the Camera Select/
Up Button while in MENU MODE to scroll UP.
Press and hold the top left corner of the Power/
Menu Button to turn the monitor OFF. 5. AV/Zoom/Down Button
Menu (While Monitor Is Powered ON) Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button to zoom in on a
specific camera view. Press the AV/Zoom/Down
Press the bottom right corner of the Power/Menu
Button while in MENU MODE to scroll DOWN.
Button to enter MENU MODE.
Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button or Camera Se 6. Left Arrow Button
lect/Up Button to scroll through the MENUS. The left arrow button turns the volume down and
changes functions within the MENUS.
2. QUAD(PIP) Select Button
The QUAD(PIP) Select Button allows the Operator 7. Right Arrow Button
to change the monitor to a split screen display. The right arrow button turns the volume up and
Refer to “Split Screen Displays” in this section of changes functions within the MENUS.
the Operator's Manual for additional information.
8. CDS Sensor
3. Auto Scan/Locking Button The CDS Sensor has an auto dimming feature
Auto Scan making the monitor available for night viewing.
Press the Auto Scan/Locking button one time to ini
tiate auto scan mode. Auto scan mode will scroll
9. Speaker
through the camera views for a set period of time The speakers allows the Operator to hear sounds
as follows: CA1->CA2->CA3->CA4. After the within the camera view.
last camera (CA4) is shown in scan mode the
screen will automatically go back to the first cam
era (CA1). Refer to “SCAN Function” in this section
of the Operator's Manual for additional informa
tion.
Button Lock
Hold the Auto Scan/Locking Button for 3 seconds
to lock all of the buttons. At this time all functions of
the buttons are disabled. While the buttons are
locked, press and hold the Auto Scan/Locking But
ton for 3 more seconds to unlock the buttons.

Operator's Manual
CA3 CA4 CA2 CA3 CA2

CA4 CA1
CA1 CA1
CA3 CA2
QUAD View 3PIP View 2PIP View
CA1
CA3 CA2 CA4 CA1
CA3 CA2
3SPLIT View 2SPLIT View (CA3/CA2) 2SPLIT View (CA4/CA1)
Figure 1-46
Split Screen Function
Split Screen Function

The upper camera has split screen capabilities allow
ing the Operator to view up to four cameras on one
screen. Refer to Figure 1-46. Depending upon which
split screen views are turned on, press the QUAD(PIP)
Select Button to scroll through the different split screen
views. To turn ON/OFF a split screen view:
Refer to Figure 1-45.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until CAM

MODES is displayed on the screen.

Operator's Manual
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into CAM 5. When the proper split screen mode is selected
MODES. press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to turn it
ON or OFF.
4. Press the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down

Button to scroll UP and DOWN within CAM 6. To turn ON or OFF another split screen mode press
MODES. the Camera Select/Up or AV/Zoom/Down Button
to scroll UP and DOWN.

Operator's Manual
7. Then press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
turn it ON or OFF.
8. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
Button.
Note: If the crane is equipped with two cameras,

only CAM4/1SPLIT MODE needs to be on.

Operator's Manual
NORMAL/MIRROR Function
The upper monitor has a NORMAL/MIRROR Function
that allows the Operator to mirror the monitor image
vertically. Refer to Figure 1-47. To change the monitor
image from NORMAL to MIRROR:
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until NORMAL/
MIRROR is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into NOR
MAL/MIRROR.
Button to scroll UP and DOWN.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change the camera view from NORMAL to MIR
ROR.
Button.
Figure 1-47
Normal/Mirror Function

Operator's Manual
UP/DOWN Function
The upper monitor has a UP/DOWN Function that al
lows the Operator to mirror the image horizontally.
Refer to Figure 1-48. To change the monitor image
from UP to DOWN:
MODE.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until UP/DOWN
is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into UP/
DOWN.
Button to scroll UP and DOWN.
change the camera view from UP to DOWN.
Button.
Figure 1-48
UP/DOWN Function

Operator's Manual
AUTO SCAN SCAN KEY Cycle Time
Figure 1-49
SCAN Function
SCAN Function 1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU

MODE.
The upper camera has a SCAN Function that allows the
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until SCAN is dis
monitor to automatically scan through the different
played on the screen.
camera views at the press of a button. The SCAN KEY
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into SCAN.
function can be set to cycle through the camera views
only one time or continuously scroll through the cam
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to SCAN KEY.
era views. Refer to Figure 1-49. To start an AUTO
Scan: 5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to
change SCAN KEY from ONE to FULL.
Refer to Figure 1-45. 6. To go back to MENU MODE press the Power/Menu
1. Press the Auto Scan/Locking Button.
Button.
To turn AUTO SCAN OFF:
To change the SCAN cycle time:
MODE.
MODE.
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to AUTO SCAN.
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to specific camera.
change AUTO SCAN from ON to OFF..
change the time interval (1-9 seconds).
Button.
Button.
To change the SCAN KEY cycle from ONE to FULL :

Operator's Manual
PREFERRED SETTINGS
FUNCTION TRIGGER
LANGUAGE ENGLISH REAR SCALE OFF
SYSTEM NTSC/PAL BLINK MARK OFF
DIRECTION 0° TRIG 1 CAM1
DIMMER 1 TRIG 2 CAM2
AUTO POWER ON TRIG 3 CAM3
LOGO SET > TRIG 4 CAM4
AV OUTPUT LIVE HAZARD QUAD
SHUTTER ON
RESET > CAMERA NAME
CAM1 REAR
PICTURE CAM2* NO CAMERA
CONTRAST 15 CAM3* NO CAMERA
BRIGHTNESS 15 CAM4* WINCH
COLOR 15
TINT 15 CAM MODES
QUAD* OFF
NOR/MIR 3PIP* OFF
CAM1 NORMAL 2PIP* OFF
CAM2 NORMAL 3SPLIT* OFF
CAM3 NORMAL CAM3/2 SPLIT* OFF
CAM4 NORMAL CAM4/1 SPLIT ON
ALL NORMAL
SCAN
AUTO SCAN OFF
UP/DOWN SCAN KEY ONE
CAM1 UP CAM1 3
CAM2 UP CAM2 3
CAM3 UP CAM3 3
CAM4 UP CAM4 3
ALL UP
*Setting may be different if equipped with a third camera.

Figure 1-50
Monitor Preferred Settings
RESET Care and Maintenance

Note: Resetting the monitor will reset it to the monit If crane has been parked in direct sunlight, allow time
or factory settings. The monitor will then need to be for the monitor to cool down.
set to the Link‐Belt preferred settings. Refer to Clean the monitor with a slightly damp cloth. Use a
Figure 1-50. mild household detergent. Do not use strong solvents
such as thinner or benzine as they can damage the fin
To reset the monitor settings: ish of the monitor.
1. Press the Power/Menu Button to enter MENU Contact your Link‐Belt Distributor for the proper repair
MODE. procedures.
2. Press the AV/Zoom/Down Button until FUNCTION
is displayed on the screen.
3. Press the Right Arrow Button to enter into FUNC
TION.
Button to scroll UP and DOWN to RESET.
5. Press the Left Arrow or Right Arrow Button to reset
the monitor.
6. The monitor will power off during reset.

Operator's Manual
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
6
5 16
4 17
3
18
2
1 17
19
25 24 23 22 21 20
1. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge 10. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light 18. OK Button
2. Fine Metering Level Indicator 11. Coolant Temperature Indicator Light 19. Throttle Lock Indicator
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 12. DPF System Indicator Lights 20. Menu Button
4. Tachometer 13. Stop Engine Indicator Light 21. Back Button
5. Fuel Level Gauge 14. Check Engine Indicator Light 22. Function Key F4
6. Fine Metering Indicator Light 15. Wait To Start Indicator Light 23. Function Key F3
7. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator Light 16. Swing Park Brake Indicator Light 24. Function Key F2
8. Hydraulic Pump Controller Indicator Light 17. Up And Down Arrow Buttons 25. Function Key F1
9. Battery Indicator Light
Figure 1-51
Crane Control Display (Main Working Screen Shown)
Crane Control Display ceeds the maximum operating temperature, the

hydraulic oil temperature indicator light will illumi
The Crane Control Display contains the following con
nate and an alarm buzzer will sound. Also the in
trols, gauges, and indicators and is on the Crane Con
dicator light within the gauge will change from
trol Console. Refer to Figure 1-42 and Figure 1-51.
white to red. If the system overheats, shutdown the
1. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Gauge crane immediately and correct the problem.
This gauge registers the hydraulic oil tem 2. Fine Metering Level Indicator
perature in the main return line. Normal op
erating ranges vary with the oils used in dif 0% This indicator alerts the operator of the fine
ferent climates. Refer to Section 2 of this Opera metering level. Refer to “Fine Metering Con
tor's Manual for proper oil viscosities and operat trol” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
ing temperature ranges. If the hydraulic oil ex

Operator's Manual
3. Coolant Temperature Gauge 10. Engine Oil Pressure Indicator Light
This gauge registers the engine cooling sys This red indicator light will illuminate along
tem temperature. For proper cooling sys with an alarm buzzer to alert the operator
tem operating temperature range, refer to that the engine oil pressure is not within
the engine manufacturer's manual. If the cooling normal operating range. For proper oil pressure
system overheats, reduce engine speed until the operating range, refer to the engine manufactur
temperature returns to normal operating range. If er's manual. If there is no engine oil pressure after
engine temperature does not return to normal tem 10-15 seconds of running time, shutdown the en
perature, refer to engine manufacturer's manual. gine immediately and repair the problem to avoid
When the coolant temperature exceeds normal op engine damage.
erating range an indicator light will illuminate, an
alarm buzzer will sound, and the stop engine indicat 11. Coolant Temperature Indicator Light
or light will illuminate. Also the indicator light within This red indicator light will illuminate along
the gauge will change from white to red. with an alarm buzzer to alert the operator
that the engine cooling system temperat
4. Tachometer ure exceeds the maximum operating temperature.
The tachometer registers engine speed in For proper cooling system operating temperature
revolutions per minute (rpm). Refer to the range, refer to the engine manufacturer's manual.
engine manufacturer's manual for sug If the cooling system overheats, reduce engine
gested operating speeds. speed until the temperature returns to normal op
erating range. If engine temperature does not re
5. Fuel Level Gauge turn to normal temperature, refer to engine manu
This gauge registers the level of fuel in the fuel facturer's manual. When the coolant temperature
tank. The fuel tank capacity is 110 gal (416L). exceeds normal operating range, the stop engine
Refer to the engine manufacturer's manual for indicator light will also illuminate.
the correct grade of diesel fuel. When the fuel level
reaches an eighth of a tank, the indicator light within the 12. DPF System Indicator Lights
gauge will change from white to yellow.
These indicator lights will illuminate during
6. Fine Metering Indicator Light various DPF operations. Refer to “Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF)” in this Section of
This indicator alerts the operator that the this Operator's Manual.
fine metering system has been enabled.
Refer to “Fine Metering Control” in this Sec
tion of this Operator's Manual.
13. Stop Engine Indicator Light
7. Hydraulic Oil Temperature Indicator Light This red indicator light will illuminate along
This red indicator light will illuminate along with an alarm buzzer and an error message
with an alarm buzzer to alert the operator pop‐up screen to alert the operator of major
that the hydraulic oil exceeds the maximum engine problems. When this light illuminates stop
operating temperature. If the system overheats, operations immediately and shutdown the engine.
shutdown the crane immediately and correct the Refer to the engine manufacturer's manual and de
problem. termine the problem before any further operation
8. Hydraulic Pump Controller Indicator Light of the engine.
This red indicator light will illuminate along with 14. Check Engine Indicator Light
an error message pop‐up screen to alert the
This yellow indicator light will illuminate
operator of a problem with the main hydraulic
along with an error message pop‐up
pump controller. Communicate the pump controller
screen to make the operator aware of
problem to a Link‐Belt Distributor and correct the error
minor engine problems. When this light illuminates
as soon as possible.
engine operation may continue. However, refer to
9. Battery Indicator Light the engine manufacturer's manual and determine
the problem as soon as possible to avoid prolonged
This red indicator light will illuminate along
operation of the malfunctioning engine which could
with an alarm buzzer to alert the operator
develop into a major problem.
that the charge or the voltage in the battery
is not within normal operating range.

Operator's Manual
15. Wait To Start Indicator Light 20. Menu Button
This green indicator light will illuminate in Push this button to bring up a menu page.
cold weather when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position to alert the operator not to
crank the engine. During cold weather conditions
the light illuminates and an engine air intake heater 21. Back Button
will activate to heat the air before entering the engine Push this button to return to the previous
air intake. When the air intake is warm enough the display page.
indicator light will go out and then the engine can be
started. This aids in engine start‐up in cold weather
conditions and reduces white smoke after starting. 22. Function Key F4
For additional information refer to “Cold Engine Start
ing” in this Section of this Operator's Manual. This function key will bring up the first layer/
F4 third wrap calibration screen (if equipped).
16. Swing Park Brake Indicator Light Refer to “First Layer/Third Wrap Calibra
tion” in Section 3 of this Operator's Manual.
This light will illuminate anytime the swing
park brake is applied and the ignition is on. 23. Function Key F3
This function key will bring up the engine
17. Up And Down Arrow Buttons F3 data screen. Refer to “Engine Data
Screen” in this Section of this Operator's
These are navigation buttons that are used
Manual.
to scroll through selections on a menu
page. 24. Function Key F2
This function key will bring up the fine
F2 metering screen. Refer to “Fine Metering
Control” in this Section of this Operator's
18. OK Button Manual.
Pushing this button equals “enter”. Saves 25. Function Key F1
the value or confirms the selection.
This function key has no function when the
F1 main working screen is displayed.
19. Throttle Lock Indicator
This indicator alerts the operator that the
throttle lock system is locked or un
locked . Refer to “Throttle Lock System”
in this Section of this Operator's Manual.

Operator's Manual
3 5
6
2
7
9
1
11 10
1. Engine RPM 7. Engine Hour Meter
2. Throttle Pedal Position 8. Engine Load
3. Engine Oil Temperature 9. Fuel Consumption
4. Engine Oil Pressure 10. Function Key F2 - DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch
5. Coolant Temperature 11. Function Key F1 - DPF (Parked) Manual Regeneration Switch
6. Battery Voltage Output
Figure 1-52
Engine Data And Aftertreatment Control Screen
Engine Data And Aftertreatment Control 2. Throttle Pedal Position

Screen This indicator light will illuminate anytime
Throttle
The engine data and aftertreatment control screen can Pedal the throttle pedal is depressed and the ver
be displayed by pressing the Function Key F3 on the tical bar‐graph will indicate percentage
Crane Control Display. Press the back button to re pedal is depressed.
turn to the main working screen. The following de
scribes the data displayed on the engine data screen.
3. Engine Oil Temperature
This displays the actual engine oil tempera
1. Engine RPM ture in degrees Fahrenheit (°F). For proper
This displays the actual engine speed in oil temperature operating range, refer to
n‐1 revolutions per minute (rpm). Refer to the the engine manufacturer's manual.
engine manufacturer's manual for sug
gested operating speeds.

Operator's Manual
4. Engine Oil Pressure 9. Fuel Consumption
This displays the actual engine oil pressure This displays the actual fuel consumption
in pounds per square inch (psi). For proper in gallons per hour (gal/hr).
oil pressure operating range, refer to the
engine manufacturer's manual.
10. Function Key F2 - DPF Regeneration
5. Coolant Temperature Inhibit Switch
This displays the actual engine cooling The DPF Regeneration Inhibit switch de
system temperature in degrees Fahren clines an Active and a (parked) Manual Re
heit (°F). For proper cooling system oper generation until turned off. Refer to “Diesel
ating temperature range, refer to the engine manu Particulate Filter (DPF)” in this Section of this Oper
facturer's manual. ator's Manual.
6. Battery Voltage Output 11. Function Key F1 - DPF (Parked) Manual

This displays the actual voltage output from Regeneration Switch
the battery in volts (V). This switch initiates a (parked) Manual Re
generation. This switch will only be active
when a manual regeneration is required
7. Engine Hour Meter (regeneration light illuminated). Refer to “Diesel
Particulate Filter (DPF)” in this Section of this Oper
The hour meter registers engine operating
ator's Manual.
hours. It is useful in determining lubrica
tion and maintenance schedules.
8. Engine Load
Engine This displays the actual engine load as a
Load percentage (%).

Operator's Manual
Crane Control Display Brightness Adjustment
1. From the main working screen, press the menu 4. Press the Function Key F2 to select Backlight.
button.
2. Press the Function Key F3 to bring up the Prefer 5. Press the Up/Down Arrow buttons to adjust the dis
ences screen. play brightness.
6. Press the Function Key F1 to return to the main
working screen.
3. Press the Function Key F1 to bring up the Display

screen.

Operator's Manual
Diesel Particulate Filter (DPF) 2. The DPF regeneration light begins to flash alerting
the operator that the soot loading in the DPF is nearly
The diesel particulate filter (DPF) is designed to remove full. When this light illuminates, ensure the regen
diesel particulate matter or soot from the exhaust gas eration inhibit switch is off (regeneration inhibit in
of the engine. The filter must be periodically regener dicator light is off), increase upper engine load/
ated to remove the accumulated soot from the filter. speed to allow the engine to run until regeneration
During normal operation, the soot in the DPF will be is complete, or use the engine DPF regeneration
purged by an automatic regeneration cycle. In some switch to initiate a (parked) manual regeneration
cases an automatic regeneration may not occur and cycle as soon as safely possible.
the regeneration cycle must be initiated manually.
Refer to engine manufacturer's manual for additional in
formation on the regeneration process and procedures.
Engine DPF Regeneration Indicators
3. The DPF regeneration light continues to flash and

the check engine light will illuminate to alert the op
erator that the soot loading in the DPF is full. This
condition alerts the operator that the soot loading
1. The DPF regeneration indicator light will illuminate in the DPF has reached a critical level where a
to alert the operator that an active regeneration of (parked) manual regeneration must be performed
the diesel particulate filter is required but cannot immediately. Press the Function Key F2 OK button
occur. When this light illuminates, ensure the re and initiate a (parked) manual regeneration. Refer
generation inhibit switch is off (regeneration inhibit to “DPF (Parked) Manual Regeneration” in this Op
indicator light is off), increase upper engine load/ erator's Manual.
speed to allow the engine to run until regeneration
is complete, or use the engine DPF regeneration
switch to initiate a (parked) manual regeneration
cycle as soon as safely possible. Press the Func
tion Key F2 OK button to return to previous screen.
4. The stop engine light will illuminate to alert the op

erator that the soot loading in the DPF has reached
a critical level and continued operation could result
in damage to the DPF. Stop the engine as soon as
possible and call for service or risk damage to the
DPF.

Operator's Manual
1
Engine DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch
The engine DPF regeneration inhibit switch disables
any automatic or manual regeneration of the upper en
gine diesel particulate filter. It may be used to prevent
any regeneration when the crane is operating in a haz
ardous environment and there is a concern about high
temperatures from the DPF system.
1. High Exhaust System Temperature Indicator Light
Figure 1-53
High Exhaust System Temperature Indicator
Light
1. To access the DPF Regeneration Inhibit Switch,

High Exhaust System Temperature press the Function Key F3 from the main working
Indicator Light screen.
This indicator light will illuminate to alert the operator that

the outlet temperature in the upper engine exhaust sys
tem is above normal. This condition can occur under
normal operation or during an automatic or manual DPF
regeneration cycle. No action is required.
DANGER
The temperature of the engine exhaust gas
and the exhaust system components can
reach up to 1200°F (650°C) during DPF
regeneration. An unexpected failure of the
engine or regeneration system may increase
exhaust gas temperature at the particulate
exhaust filter to as high as 1650°F (900°C). 2. The main screen will change to the engine data
This may result in fire, burn, or explosion and aftertreatment control screen. From this
hazards, which may result in serious personal screen, press the Function Key F2 DPF Regenera
injury or death. Do not expose flammable tion Inhibit Switch.
material or explosive atmospheres to exhaust
gas or to exhaust system components during
DPF regeneration.

Operator's Manual
3. If additional information is required, press the 5. If regeneration inhibit is not desired at this time,
Function Key F4 Help to access a help pop‐up press Function Key F3 To to exit the Regeneration
menu. Inhibit Confirmation pop‐up menu and return to
previous screen.
4. If help pop‐up menu was accessed, press Func

tion Key F2 OK to exit help pop‐up and return to 6. Press the Function Key F2 Yes to confirm and activ
previous screen. ate the Regeneration Inhibit. The Regeneration In
hibit indicator light will illuminate to alert the operat
or that the DPF system is inhibited.
7. Press the back button to return to the main
working screen.

Operator's Manual
DPF (Parked) Manual Regeneration Note: Do not press the engine throttle pedal
The DPF manual regeneration switch is used to start a during a DPF manual regeneration cycle.
manual regeneration only when the DPF regeneration Pressing the engine throttle pedal will deactiv
light is illuminated. ate the regeneration cycle and the engine will
return to idle. The engine DPF manual regener
Note: The crane must remain stationary for approx ation cycle must be restarted.
imately 45 minutes to complete an engine DPF
(parked) manual regeneration.
1. Park the crane in a safe location and apply the swing
park brake. Ensure the regeneration inhibit switch is
off (regeneration inhibit indicator light is off).
2. Engine must be at minimum operating temperat
ure of 140°F (60°C).
5. If additional information is required, press the

Function Key F4 Help to access a help pop‐up
menu.
3. To access the DPF Manual Regeneration Switch, press

the Function Key F3 from the main working screen to
enter the engine data and aftertreatment control
screen.
6. If help pop‐up menu was accessed, press Func

tion Key F2 OK to exit help pop‐up and return to
previous screen.
4. The main screen will change to the engine data

screen. From the engine data and aftertreatment
control screen, press the Function Key F1 Manual
Regeneration switch to access the Manual Regen
eration Confirmation pop‐up menu.

Operator's Manual
7. If a manual regeneration is not desired at this time, 8. Press the Function Key F2 Yes to confirm and initi
press Function Key F3 To to exit the Manual Regen ate a manual regeneration cycle.
eration Confirmation pop‐up menu and return to The engine ECM will perform a system check for ap
previous screen. proximately 30 seconds before starting the engine DPF
manual regeneration cycle; also, the engine speed will
increase to 1,000-1,400 rpm. When the cycle begins,
the engine DPF regeneration indicator light goes out
and the high exhaust temperature indicator light illu
minates. When engine DPF regeneration is complete,
the upper engine will return to idle and the exhaust tem
perature indicator light goes out.
DANGER
The temperature of the engine exhaust gas and
exhaust system components can reach up to
1,200° F (650° C) during DPF regeneration. An
unexpected failure of the engine or
regeneration system may increase exhaust gas
temperature at the particulate exhaust filter to
as high as 1,650° F (900° C). This may result in
fire, burn, or explosion hazards, which may
result in serious personal injury or death. Do
not expose flammable material or explosive
atmospheres to exhaust gas or to exhaust
system components during DPF regeneration.

Operator's Manual
ÎÎ ÎÎ
ÎÎ
2 5
6
1
3 4 7
1. Boom Telescope Override Switches 4. Rear Winch Control Switch 6. Drum Rotation Indicator Switch
2. Swing Park Brake Switch* 5. Horn Button* 7. Function Lockout Switch
3. Front Winch Control Switch
*Refer to Figure 1-60 if equipped with joystick controls.
Figure 1-54
Seat Console Control Switches
Seat Console Control Switches 2. Swing Park Brake Switch

Control switches are on the left and right consoles of This switch is used to operate the swing
the operator's seat. Refer to Figure 1-54. park brake to hold the upper in any posi
tion over the lower. An indicator light on
1. Boom Telescope Override Switches the Crane Control Display will illuminate to indicate
These switches are provided to manually the switch is in the ON position. Refer to “Swing
override the telescope system when the System” in this Section of this Operator's Manual
boom is not extending/retracting propor for complete operating procedures. (Refer to
tionally in all boom modes. Use these Figure 1-60 if equipped with joystick controls.)
switches for that purpose only. Press the
switch to enter telescope override
3. Front Winch Control Switch
mode. Use the switch to select the boom sec This switch is used to control engag
tions to override as follows: ing/disengaging the high speed hoist and
disabling the front winch. Refer to “Wire
Top position of the switch will override the in
Rope Winch System” in this Section of this Operat
ner and center sections allowing only the tip
or's Manual for complete operating procedures.
and outer sections to extend and retract.
Center position of the switch will override the 4. Rear Winch Control Switch
inner, outer, and tip sections allowing only This switch is used to control engag
the center section to extend and retract. ing/disengaging the high speed hoist and
The bottom position of the switch will override disabling the rear winch. Refer to “Wire
the center, outer, and tip sections allowing Rope Winch System” in this Section of this Operat
only the inner section to extend and retract. or's Manual for complete operating procedures.

Operator's Manual
5. Horn Button 7. Function Lockout Switch
Press this button to sound the horn. (Refer This switch is used to disable hydraulic
to Figure 1-60 if equipped with joystick functions which are operated by the con
controls.) trol levers and boom telescope foot pedal.
Press the bottom part of the switch to disable hy
6. Drum Rotation Indicator Switch draulic functions and to prevent inadvertent opera
This switch is used to activate the drum ro tion of these controls. To allow normal operation of
tation indicator system. To activate the the control levers and boom telescope foot pedal,
system, press the bottom part of the press the top part of the function lockout switch.
switch. Press the top part of the switch to deacti The bottom part of the switch will illuminate to indi
vate the system. The bottom part of the switch will cate the switch is in the “OPERATION” position.
illuminate to indicate the switch is in the ON posi This switch should always be in the “DISABLE” po
tion. Refer to “Drum Rotation Indicators” in this sition before entering or exiting the operator's seat.
Section of this Operator's Manual for complete op
erating procedures.

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 5
6
14
13
12
11 10 9 8 7
1. Power Button 6. Auto Tuning Buttons 11. WB/ALM (Weather Band/Alarm) Button
2. VOL/SEL (Volume/Select) Knob 7. APS (Auto Preset System) Button 12. Aux (Auxiliary Input 1) Jack
3. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) 8. SCN (Scan) Button 13. Mute Button
4. Manual Tune/Band/Loudness Button 9. Preset (1 to 6) Buttons 14. Mode Button
5. AUX2 Button 10. T/F (Time/Frequency) Button
Figure 1-55
Radio
Radio Operation 2. VOL/SEL (Volume/Select) Knob

The crane may be equipped with an AM/FM/Stereo ra The volume/select knob is used to select and con
dio. It has an electronic station search, a memory func trol all functions related to the volume and sound
tion which can store favorite stations in memory, and an quality of the unit. Momentarily pressing this knob
auto preset store system that automatically selects and scrolls through the following functions appearing
memorizes stations. The radio is equipped with a Aux in the LCD in the order shown below:
iliary Input Audio jack on the front panel that allows the
user to listen to external sources such as Mp3 players.
Two four‐pin connectors on the rear panel accept mi
crophone inputs for public address (PA) type capabilit Once you've selected the function you wish to
ies. change, you have 5 seconds to adjust the settings
before it automatically switches back to the volume
1. Power Button control (default).
Press the power button to turn the unit on; press it
again to turn the unit off. 3. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
The LCD shows the radio reception information
Note: Whenever the unit is powered on for the
such as the FM, AM, Stereo, Ch No., Reception fre
first time, it will default to Radio mode (tuner
quency, Volume, Bass, Treble settings, etc.
mode). After initial power, it will memorize all
settings from previous mode. When ignition is
turned off while radio is operating normally, the
unit will automatically power on when ignition is
turned on again and will have memorized all set
tings from previous mode.

Operator's Manual
4. Manual Tune/Band/Loudness Button 9. Preset (1 to 5) Buttons
MANUAL TUNING: To manually select a desired The preset buttons are used to store favorite radio
frequency,turn button left or right to select the de stations into memory. 15 FM stations and 10 AM sta
sired station. tions can be stored in memory (each button can
LOUDNESS: The loudness button is used to em store 6 stations). Tune the radio to a desired station
phasize the bass and treble at low volume. To ac then press and hold one of the preset buttons for 2
tivate, press and hold the BUTTON for 2 seconds. seconds. The desired station will now be stored in
To cancel loudness press the button again. memory. Once you have completed storing desired
radio stations, simply press each preset button mo
RADIO BAND: During radio operation, momentar mentarily to check if the correct stations have been
ily pressing this button scrolls through the follow memorized. To select a station which is stored in
ing bands, appearing in the LCD, in the order memory, momentarily press any one of the preset
shown below: buttons 1 to 5. The station stored in the preset button
will automatically be selected. The LCD will show the
preset number and frequency.
5. AUX2 Button 10. T/F (Time/Frequency) Button

When there is a Auxiliary Audio device plugged into In any mode, the time display is the default indica
the connector on the rear of the unit, simply press tion on the LCD. When T/F button is pressed while
AUX2 button to enter into AUX2 mode. time is displayed, the current frequency will appear
for approximately 6 seconds and then revert to
6. Auto Tuning Buttons time indication.
To automatically select a radio station,press SEEK Setting or Changing the time
UP button or TRACK DOWN button. The radio will Press and hold the T/F button until hour digit be
seek the next acceptable signal strength station gins to flash. Rotate volume control knob clock
and then stop and remain at that frequency. wise to increase hours, rotate volume control knob
counterclockwise to decrease the hours. Press
7. APS (Auto Preset System) Button and hold T/F button again until minute digit begins
Pressing this button momentarily scans the sta to flash. Rotate volume control knob clockwise to
tions preset 1-5 of the current radio BAND. Scan increase the minutes, rotate volume control knob
ning will stop at each preset station for approxim counterclockwise to decrease the minutes. Once
ately 5 seconds before continuing to the next pre time (Hour or Minute) has been adjusted, wait 5
set station, until all 5 presets have been scanned. seconds until time stops flashing, time is now set.
Press and hold this button for more than 2 seconds 11. WB/ALM (Weather Band/Alarm) Button
and it will automatically preset 5 stations into
memory (presets 1 to 5) in order of strongest signal Press and hold this button for 2 seconds to change
strength. into Alarm mode. Refer to “Setting An Alarm” in this
Section of this Operator's Manual. Momentarily
8. SCN (Scan) Button press the button to change to weather band, then
Press the Scan button to start scanning the avail press the preset buttons 1-5 to listen to WB preset
able frequencies. Scanning will pause at each stations . Refer to “Weather Band” in this Section of
available frequency for approximately 5 seconds this Operator's Manual.
and then continue scanning. Press the Scan but
ton to stop scanning at the current broadcast.

Operator's Manual
12. Aux (Auxiliary Input 1) Jack VOLUME DSP BASS TREBLE BALANCE FADER
Activate the auxiliary input jack by pressing the

Mode button until AUX In appears on the LCD. Us Sound control
ing an Auxiliary Device with the Auxiliary Input Jack Turn to select sound style.
Flat,Classic,Pop,Rock,Off
a. Obtain an audio cable with 1/8 (3.5mm) male
Bass control
plug at each end.
Turn left to decrease the bass.
b. First connect the cable to the radio's auxiliary Turn right to increase the bass.
input jack, then connect the other end to an ex Treble control
ternal audio device. Turn left to decrease the treble.
c. Press the MODE button until AUX In is dis Turn right to increase the treble.
played on the LCD. Balance control
Turn left to decrease the right speaker volume.
Note: Before selecting AUX In mode, verify that Turn right to decrease the left speaker volume.
the cable is connected to both audio device and Fader control
the radio. Since audio devices vary in output Turn left to decrease the front speaker volume.
volume levels, it is recommended that the auxili Turn right to decrease the rear speaker volume.
ary audio device not be set at max output
volume. Very high output levels from audio Initial Volume Adjustment
devices may cause audio distortion to the out Press and hold the Volume/Select knob until BEEP ON
put of the radio. or BEEP 2ND appears on the LCD, release and press
the Volume/Select knob again and I-VOL 30 will ap
13. Mute Button pear on the LCD. Now using the Volume/Select knob,
adjust the Initial Volume to the desired setting. Once
Press this button to mute audio output. Press completed, wait 5 seconds for the unit to exit this mode.
again to enable audio output.
Note: If the volume level is lower than the initial
14. Mode Button volume setting when audio unit is turned off, once
Press this button to toggle between radio mode the audio unit is switched back on again, the audio
and auxiliary mode. unit will remember the lower level and resume
volume at that level.
Bass, Treble, Balance, And Fader Adjustment
These adjustments are controlled by pressing the Radio Frequency Area Selection
Volume/Select knob.
Different radio frequencies are used between countries.
Note: If no adjustments have been made within 5 The frequency is set at the factory. In the event the fre
seconds, it will automatically switch back to the quencies are not set, use the following procedure.
Volume Control Mode. 1. Push and hold the volume/select knob for approx
imately two seconds.
2. Press MODE button repeatedly (3 times), until LCD
shows AREA.
3. Turn volume/select knob until the desired area ap
pears in the LCD (USA or EUROPE).
4. Press BAND button longer than 2 seconds, then re
lease.

Operator's Manual
Beep ON, Beep 2ND Feature Public Address (PA) Feature
BEEP ON: Every time you press a button, you will hear The radio is equipped with two four‐pin connectors on
a beep sound. the rear panel that accept microphone inputs for public
BEEP 2ND: You will only hear beep sound if the button address (PA) type capabilities.
is held down for more than 2 seconds.
To change this feature, simply hold the Volume/Select Microphone One (MIC 1)
knob down until BEEP ON or BEEP 2ND appears on When the microphone pres‐to‐talk switch is activated on
the LCD. Within 5 seconds, turn the Volume/Select microphone one (MIC 1), the current program audio out
knob left or right to change the setting. Now wait 5 put is interrupted, MIC 1 appears on the LCD and the mi
seconds for the unit to exit this mode. crophone voice input can be heard through the speak
ers. When the microphone switch is released, the previ
Setting An Alarm ous program audio output is restored and MIC 1 disap
When the radio is off and the ignition switch is on, the pears from the LCD. Output level heard through the
alarm feature of the radio can be programmed as follows: speakers is controlled with MIC 1 volume control.
1. Press and hold the ALM button for about 2-3
Note: MIC 1 input uses CSS/CRC-103 series
seconds, ALARM ON or OFF appears on the LCD.
2. If the alarm is off, rotate the Volume/Select knob Microphone Two (MIC 2)
clockwise to turn on the alarm (ALARM ON).
When the microphone pres‐to‐talk switch is activated on
3. Momentarily press the ALM button again; the
microphone two (MIC 2), the current program audio out
hours digit flashes; rotate the Volume/Select knob put is interrupted, MIC 2 appears on the LCD and the mi
to set the hours forward (clockwise) or backward crophone voice input can be heard through the speak
(counterclockwise). ers. When the microphone switch is released, the previ
4. Momentarily press the ALM button again, the ous program audio output is restored and MIC 2 disap
minutes digit flashes, rotate the Volume/Select pears from LCD. Output level heard through the speakers
knob to set the minutes forward (clockwise) or is controlled with the Radio volume control.
backward (counterclockwise) as desired.
5. Press the ALM button again, and ALM SET will ap Note: MIC 2 input uses CSS/CRC-105 series and
pear on the LCD. gooseneck type microphones.
Weather Band MIC 2 volume levels will be memorized by the unit from
This audio unit provides access to the weather band for previous set level during normal operation and when
information purposes. When the WB button is radio is turned off.
pressed, “ WB” appears on display and automatically
searches and locks in the strongest signal station.
When the WB button is pressed again, radio operation
returns to the previous play mode.
The default mode of the WB function is seek tuning. In
this mode, tuning the encoder volume button, the unit
will search weather band for next strongest signal sta
tion.
Turn the TUNE button right or left to set the WB function
to manual tuning.
All WB stations can be accessed by momentarily
pressing one of preset buttons.
In WB mode, MODE button has no function until you
exit from WB mode.
Note: In WB Mode, when the unit is in Auto tuning,

the manual tuning has no effect.

Operator's Manual
3
2
1
10
8
4
5
6
11
9
1. Seat Cushion Depth Adjustment Control 5. Seat And Console Release Lever 9. First Aid Kit
2. Seat Cushion Angle Adjustment Control 6. Weight Adjustment Control 10. Operator's Manual Holder
3. Seat Belt 7. Seat Back Adjustment Lever 11. Crane Rating Manual Holder
4. Seat Release Lever 8. Lumbar Adjustment Control
Figure 1-56
Operator's Seat

Operator's Manual
Operator's Seat 5. Seat And Console Release Lever
Pull the seat and console release lever up and
This 6‐way adjustable seat is controlled by manual hold. Position the seat and console as desired and
controls. Refer to Figure 1-56. release the lever to lock the seat and console in
place.
WARNING 6. Weight Adjustment Control

Do not make seat or console adjustments The weight adjustment control is used to adjust the
while operating the crane or while crane is in weight resistance for maximum driver comfort. In
motion. Discontinue operations and properly crease the weight resistance for a heavier operator
park crane before making adjustments. or bumpy travel conditions; decrease for lighter op
erator or smooth travel conditions.
Seat Height Adjustment 7. Seat Back Adjustment Lever

The seat height can be manually adjusted to three pos Raise the seat back adjustment lever and adjust
itions. With the seat in it's lowest position, grab the seat the seat back to the desired position. Release the
and pull up until the seat latches in the first detent posi seat back adjustment lever to lock the seat back in
tion. Pull it up again to latch it in the second detent posi place.
tion. Pull it up again and push it down to release the
seat to the lowest position. 8. Lumbar Adjustment Control
Use the lumbar adjustment control to adjust the
1. Seat Cushion Depth Adjustment Control lumbar support in the lower back area of the seat.
Use the seat cushion depth adjustment control to
position the seat cushion to the desired depth. First Aid Kit
2. Seat Cushion Angle Adjustment Control The crane has a multi‐purpose first aid kit to the left of
the operator's seat. Refer to Figure 1-56.
Use the seat cushion angle adjustment control to
position the seat cushion to the desired angle.
Operator's Manual Holder
3. Seat Belt
The Operator's Manual is stored on the back of the op
A seat belt is provided and must be worn during all erator's seat. Refer Figure 1-56. This is a convenient
operations. To fasten the seat belt pull the belt out storage place to ensure this Operator's Manual is kept
of the retractor and insert the tongue into the with the crane at all times. If this Operator's Manual
buckle until you hear a snap and feel the latch en becomes lost, damaged, or unreadable, it must be
gage. Ensure the belt is not twisted and is fitting replaced before operating the crane. Information
snugly across the hips, not around the waist. contained in this Operator's Manual is important and
failure to follow the information it contains could result
in an accident. A replacement Operator's Manual can
WARNING be ordered through a Link‐Belt Distributor.
Always wear the seat belt while operating the

crane. The seat belt must be snug and low
Crane Rating Manual Holder
across the hips. The Crane Rating Manual is stored under the operator's
seat. It is tethered to the seat to ensure it is kept with the
crane at all times. If the Crane Rating Manual becomes
4. Seat Release Lever lost, damaged, or unreadable, it must be replaced be
Pull the seat release lever up and hold. Position the fore operating the crane. Information contained in the
seat as desired and release the lever to lock the Crane Rating Manual is important and failure to follow the
seat in place. information it contains could result in an accident. A re
placement Crane Rating Manual can be ordered through
a Link‐Belt Distributor. Refer to “Crane Rating Manual
And Serial Number” in Section 5 of this Operator's Manu
al for further information.

Operator's Manual
6
5
3 2
1. Hydraulic Control Levers 4. Cab Control Console 7. Hydraulic Control Levers
(Boom Hoist, Rear Winch)* 5. Travel/Steer Levers/Pedals (Swing, Front Winch)*
2. Boom Telescope Control Pedal 6. Throttle Pedal 8. Travel Swing Lock Lever
3. Swing Brake Pedal
*Refer To Figure 1-60 If Equipped With Joystick Controls
Figure 1-57
Crane System Controls

Operator's Manual
1. Up Arrow Button
2. Throttle Lock Indicator
3. OK Button
4. Down Arrow Button
Figure 1-58
Throttle Lock Controls
Crane System Controls Throttle Lock System

The throttle lock system gives the operator the ability to
The following pages, along with Figure 1-57, give de
set and hold a specific engine speed. Refer to
tailed instructions of individual controls related to crane
Figure 1-58 for location of throttle lock controls. This
operation. It is essential that the operator knows the
provides the operator with more flexibility for certain job
function of each control and its duty in the overall op
eration of the crane. requirements.
With the Crane Control Display on the main working
screen, lock the throttle by pressing the throttle pedal
WARNING until the desired engine speed is reached and press
and release the OK button. The locked indicator
Read and understand all “Operating Safety”
should illuminate and engine should continue to run at
procedures as well as all other operating
a constant speed when the throttle pedal is released.
instructions in this Operator's Manual before
attempting to operate the crane. Operation of To increase throttle lock setting, press and hold the Up
the crane by unqualified personnel may result arrow button until desired engine speed is reached and
in an accident. release switch.
Note: With the throttle locked, the throttle pedal can

Horn Button still be depressed to increase engine rpm's and will
return to throttle lock setting when released.
The horn button is on the right control lever. Refer to
Figure 1-54 or Figure 1-60 if equipped with joystick
To decrease throttle lock setting, press and hold the
controls. To sound the horn, press the button.
Down arrow button until desired engine speed is
Engine Throttle Controls reached and release switch.
A foot throttle pedal is on the operator's cab floor. To op With the Crane Control Display on the main working
erate the foot throttle, press down to increase engine screen, return the engine speed to idle by pressing and
speed; release to decrease engine speed. releasing the OK button. The unlocked indicator
should illuminate.
Note: The throttle lock system is deactivated

anytime the ignition switch is turned off.

Operator's Manual
To Swing The Upper
1. Compare the boom configuration and length to the
DANGER appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual. Position the boom safely within the limits
Keep clear of specified on the capacity chart.
swinging upper 2. Fully apply the swing brake pedal and release the
to prevent swing park brake and/or travel swing lock. Check
serious bodily that the swing park brake indicator light on the
injury. Crane Control Display goes out.
3. Release the swing brake pedal as you begin to en
Figure 1-59 gage the swing control lever.
Swing Pinch Point Label
To Stop Upper Swing
1. Ease swing control lever into the neutral position.
Swing System 2. Apply the swing brake to bring the upper to a com
Rotation of the upper, over the lower, is controlled by plete stop.
the swing system. Use the following controls to operate 3. Engage the swing park brake and/or travel swing lock
the swing functions of the crane. as required. Check that the swing park brake indicator
light on the Crane Control Display illuminates.
Swing Brake Pedal 4. Check engagement of the swing park brake by try
The swing brake pedal is used to stop rotation of the ing to swing right, then left. The upper should not
upper over the lower. To apply the swing brake, push swing.
down on the swing brake foot pedal. To release the
swing brake, release the swing brake foot pedal. Travel Swing Lock
Use the travel swing lock to lock the upper directly over
either the front, rear, or either side of the lower. The
DANGER travel swing lock will engage in these four positions
Swing slowly and cautiously. Watch out for only. Use of the travel swing lock is mandatory when
centrifugal force. Out swing of a load transporting or lifting the crane.
increases the load radius and thus decreases
capacity. Load out swing may result in tipping To Release The Travel Swing Lock
or damaging the crane. 1. Fully apply the swing brake pedal.
2. Pull the travel swing lock lever up and to the left.
All personnel and equipment must be out of
the path of the rotating upper. Failure to do so Note: In order to release the travel swing lock, it
could result in serious personnel injury or may be necessary to swing the upper slightly to
major equipment damage. relieve the pressure on the swing lock pin.
3. Pull the travel swing lock lever all the way up and
Swing Control Lever then to the right and release. The lever should re
The control lever, on the left side of the operator's seat, main in the released position.
is used to operate the swing function of the upper. To Engage The Travel Swing Lock
Move the control lever to the position to swing left; 1. Position the upper directly over either the front,
move it to the position to swing right. Anytime the rear, or either side of the lower. Fully apply the
swing lever is engaged, an audible alarm will sound swing brake pedal.
and visual lights will flash to alert ground personnel of 2. Pull the travel swing lock lever up and to the left.
the swinging upper. Then push the lever down and to the right to the
locked position.
WARNING Note: In order to engage the travel swing lock, it
Do not exceed maximum boom angles listed in may be necessary to swing the upper slightly to
“Maximum Boom Angle” chart in the Crane align the swing lock pin and retaining ring on the
Rating Manual. This crane can tip over lower deck.
backwards when over side on intermediate or
retracted side frames causing major crane 3. Check the engagement of the travel swing lock by
damage and/or serious personal injury. trying to swing the upper right, then left. The upper
should not swing.

Operator's Manual
Swing Park Brake Warm‐Up Procedure
The swing park brake is a multiple disc type brake and A warm‐up procedure is recommended at each
is used for holding the upper, in any position, over the start‐up and is essential at ambient temperatures
lower during normal crane operations. An indicator below 40°F (4°C ). Allow the engine to run at idle speed
light on the Crane Control Display will illuminate when and the winch control lever(s) in neutral for several
the swing park brake is applied. For switch location, minutes. Once the hydraulic oil begins to warm,
refer to Figure 1-54 or Figure 1-60 if equipped with operate the winch at low speed, with no load, lifting and
joystick controls. lowering only the hook block or hook ball until warm oil
To Release The Swing Park Brake circulates throughout the winch.
1. Fully apply the swing brake pedal.
2. Push the swing park brake switch on the left con
trol lever. The indicator light will go out.
WARNING
The weight of the load must be known before
To Apply The Swing Park Brake making a lift. Compare the load weight to the
1. Rotate the upper to the desired position over the appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating
lower. Apply the swing brake pedal to bring the up Manual to ensure compliance with capacity
per to a complete stop. ratings. Compare the load weight to the Wire
2. Push the swing park brake switch on the left con Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating
trol lever. Indicator light will illuminate. Manual to determine the number of parts of
line required to lift the load. Rig and set up the
CAUTION crane to ensure compliance with both the
appropriate crane capacity chart and Wire
Do not attempt to apply swing park brake with Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating
the upper in motion. This practice will result in Manual. Properly set the Rated Capacity
damage to the swing mechanism. Use the Limiter to the correct crane configuration.
swing brake pedal to stop rotation of upper.
Do not lift a load to the point where the hook
3. Check engagement of swing park brake by trying to block, hook ball, or load contacts the head
swing upper right, then left. Upper should not swing. machinery. “Two blocking” could damage the
hook block, hook ball, and/or the head
Wire Rope Winch System machinery. Always keep the hook block, hook
ball, and load a safe distance from the boom.
This system controls raising and lowering the winch
wire rope(s). The system is equipped with a two speed
motor that, when activated, will approximately double Front Winch Control Lever (If Equipped)
winch wire rope(s) speed. The controls for the system This lever controls the front winch drum. Pull this con
are shown in Figure 1-54, Figure 1-57, and/or trol lever back to the position to lift the load. Push
Figure 1-60 if equipped with joystick controls. Review this control lever forward to the position to lower
the following for control descriptions and a brief sum the load. Refer to “Winch Operation” in this Section of
mary of operation. this Operator's Manual for more specific instructions.
WARNING
Cold weather operation of the winch requires
a warm‐up procedure. Failure to properly
warm‐up the winch may result in brake
slippage. Warm‐up the winch before
beginning crane operations.

Operator's Manual
Rear Winch Control Lever Winch Control Switch(es)
This lever controls the rear winch drum. Pull this con These switches are used to control engaging/disengag
trol lever back to the position to lift the load. Push ing the high/low speed hoist and disabling the front or
this control lever forward to the position to lower rear winch. Refer to Figure 1-54.
the load. Refer to “Winch Operation” in this Section of High Speed Hoist Or Lower
this Operator's Manual for more specific instructions. Move the control lever to the neutral position to bring the
load to a complete stop. Press the winch control switch
Winch Operation
to the high speed ( ) position. Move the control
The following is a brief description of the basic proce lever to the or position. The high speed hoist
dure for operating the wire rope winch. Crane opera will activate after engaging the control lever.
tions are to be performed only by a qualified operator
who has read and fully understands the entire content Note: Using the high speed hoist reduces the maxi
of this Operator's Manual. mum line pull by approximately one half. It is re
commended that the high speed hoist button be ac
To Lift A Load: Position head machinery directly above
tivated before engaging the winch control lever(s).
the load. Attach the hook block or hook ball to the load.
Pull the control lever back, toward the operator.
Note: When both winch levers are activated simul
taneously, the winch line requiring the most line pull
WARNING
Do not activate the high speed hoist if the line
may not function.
pull exceeds the available high speed winch line
pull. Crane damage can occur. Always refer to
To Hold A Load: Return the control lever to the neutral
the Crane Rating Manual for the winch available
position. The automatic brake in the winch system
line pulls before lifting or lowering any load.
should hold the load in position.
To Lower A Load: Push the control lever forward. Re
turn the control lever to neutral to stop the load.

Operator's Manual
1
Drum Rotation Indicators
This system is used to monitor winch drum speeds
through the use of a mechanical signaling device
2
mounted inside each of the winch control levers. To acti
vate the system, push the bottom part of the drum rota
tion indicator switch , on the right seat console (Refer
to Figure 1-54), to the “ON” position (indicator within
3 the switch will illuminate). Place your thumb over the
end of the control lever being used. As the winch drum
rotates, a mechanical signal will be felt with your thumb.
The pulse rate of the mechanical signal is a direct indica
tion of the winch drum speed. However, when the pulse
rate reaches 20 per second, the signal will stop increas
ing. Push the top part of the drum rotation switch to de
4 activate the system.
First Layer/Third Wrap Indicator (If Equipped)
The crane may be equipped with a first layer/third wrap
Left Right indicator system. This system allows the operator to
1. Hydraulic Control Lever 3. Horn Button monitor the wire rope windings on the drum(s). When
(Swing, Front Winch) 4. Hydraulic Control Lever the system is enabled, the audible alarm will sound in
2. Swing Park Brake Switch (Boom Hoist, Rear Winch) termittently, and “First Layer” will appear in the warning
message area of the RCL Display to alert the operator
Figure 1-60
Joystick Controls (If Equipped) when the wire rope is down to the first layer on the
winch drum(s). The audible alarm will sound continu
ously, and “Third Wrap” will appear in warning mes
To Return To Standard Winch Mode: Move the con sage area of the RCL Display to alert the operator when
trol lever to the neutral position to bring the load to a the wire rope is down to the third wrap on the winch
complete stop. Press winch control switch(es) to the drum(s). If enabled and activated, the winch down
low speed ( ) position. Move the control lever to function will also cutout with the third wrap alarm. In
the or position. Standard winch mode will order for the system to operate correctly, it must be
activate after engaging the control lever(s). kept calibrated. Refer to First Layer/Third Wrap Calib
Winch Disable ration in Section 3 of this Operator's Manual for calibra
Press the winch control switch(es) to the disable ( ) tion procedures.
position to disable the winch(es) to prevent inadvertent
operation of the winch(es) while using the control le WARNING
vers to perform other operations.
Three (3) full wraps of wire rope must be
maintained on the winch drum(s) at all times
during operation. Wire rope failure may occur.

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 5 6
1. Base Section 4. Outer Section
2. Inner Section 5. Tip Section
3. Center Section 6. Boom Head Machinery
Figure 1-61
Boom Nomenclature
Boom Hoist System

Raising and lowering the boom is controlled by the
CAUTION
boom hoist control lever on the right console. Refer to Wire rope must be spooled off the winch
Figure 1-57 or Figure 1-60 if equipped with joystick drum(s) as the boom is lowered. Failure to do
controls. so may cause two blocking.
To Stop The Boom: Ease the boom hoist control lever

WARNING into the center (neutral) position.
Do not exceed maximum boom angles listed in
“Maximum Boom Angle” chart in the Crane
Boom Telescope System
Rating Manual. This crane can tip over The crane is equipped with a five section full power
backwards when over side on intermediate or boom. The five section boom consists of a base, inner,
retracted side frames causing major crane center, outer, and a tip section. Refer to Figure 1-61.
damage and/or serious personal injury. The telescoping feature of the boom sections is oper
ated through the use of three hydraulic cylinders and a
To raise the boom (boom up): Pull the boom hoist cable/sheave mechanism which are an integral part of
control lever back toward the operator to the posi the boom assembly. The boom can be extended or re
tion. (If equipped with joystick controls, move the lever tracted to the desired length using the boom telescope
to the left.) pedal in the operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-57. The
telescope feature has three modes of operation. Refer
CAUTION to Figure 1-62.
When the hoist line is tied off to the crane or Note: Boom must be fully retracted before chang
any solid object, the winch system can be ing boom modes.
overloaded causing major winch, wire rope,
or crane damage. Do not extend, raise, or Boom Mode “Amax1”: When using boom mode
lower the boom unless wire rope is spooled “Amax1” only the inner and center sections telescope
off the drum(s) to prevent tension on the wire simultaneously. This mode offers increased strength
rope(s). capacities. Select this mode through the RCL System.
Boom Mode “Amax2”: When using boom mode
To Lower The Boom (Boom Down): Push the boom “Amax2” only the center, outer, and tip sections tele
hoist control lever forward away from the operator to scope simultaneously. This mode offers increased sta
the position. (If equipped with joystick controls, bility capacities. Select this mode through the RCL
move the lever to the right.) System.
Boom Mode “Standard”: When using boom mode
“Standard” all power boom sections extend/retract si
multaneously. This mode offers full boom extension.
Select this mode through the RCL System.

Operator's Manual
Boom Telescope Control Pedal 3. Set the RCL System to the desired telescope
mode.
Figure 1-57 shows the location of the telescope con
trol pedal in the operator's cab. Depress the toe of the
telescope control pedal to extend the boom. Depress CAUTION
the heel of the telescope control pedal to retract the
When the hoist line is tied off to the crane or
boom. Use the telescope mode in conjunction with the
any solid object, the winch system can be
telescope control pedal to extend the boom sections to
overloaded causing major winch, wire rope,
the desired length.
or crane damage. Do not extend boom, raise
Boom Telescope Override Switches or lower the boom, or raise the crane on
outriggers unless wire rope is spooled off the
Boom telescope override switches are provided to drum (s) to prevent tension on the wire
manually override the telescope system if the boom is rope(s).
not extending/retracting proportionally. These
switches are to be used for that purpose only. Press 4. Depress the toe of the telescope control pedal.
the switch to enter telescope override mode. For all
boom modes, move the switch to one of the three
positions to override its corresponding boom section CAUTION
so the boom can be extended/retracted proportionally. Wire rope must be spooled off the winch
Refer to Figure 1-54 for switch location. Each position drum(s) as the boom is extended. Failure to
of the switch is defined as follows: do so may cause two blocking.
Top position of the switch will override the inner
and center sections allowing only the tip and out 5. Stop the boom sections by releasing the telescope
er sections to extend and retract. control pedal.
Center position of the switch will override the in
ner, outer, and tip sections allowing only the cen Note: The telescope control pedal is spring
ter section to extend and retract. loaded and should return to the neutral position
when released.
The bottom position of the switch will override the
center, outer, and tip sections allowing only the in
ner section to extend and retract. To Retract The Boom Sections
1. Depress the heel of the telescope control pedal.
To Extend The Boom Sections 2. Stop the boom sections by releasing the telescope
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. control pedal.
2. Review the appropriate capacity chart in the Crane
Rating Manual to establish boom length, angle,
and load limitations.
Note: Boom must be fully retracted before

changing boom modes.

Operator's Manual
Boom Mode “Amax1”

Inner (T1) and center (T2) sections telescope simultaneously.
Center Inner Base
Telescope Length (Ft.) Boom Length (Ft.)

0 0 40
5.0 5.0 50
10.0 10.0 60
15.0 15.0 70
20.0 20.0 80
25.0 25.0 90
27.5 27.5 95
Boom Mode “Amax2”

Center (T2), outer (T3), and tip (T4) sections telescope simultaneously.
Tip Outer Center Base

0 0 0 40
3.33 3.33 3.33 50
6.66 6.66 6.66 60
10.00 10.00 10.00 70
13.33 13.33 13.33 80
16.66 16.66 16.66 90
20.00 20.00 20.00 100
23.33 23.33 23.33 110
27.50 27.50 27.50 122.5
Boom Mode “Standard”

Inner (T1), center (T2), outer (T3), and tip (T4) sections telescope simultaneously.
Tip Outer Center Inner Base

0 0 0 0 40
2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 50
5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 60
7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 70
10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 80
12.5 12.5 12.5 12.5 90
15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 100
17.5 17.5 17.5 17.5 110
20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 120
22.5 22.5 22.5 22.5 130
25.0 25.0 25.0 25.0 140
27.5 27.5 27.5 27.5 150
Figure 1-62
Boom Telescope Modes

Operator's Manual
Main Working Screen
Fine Metering Screen 2
1. Fine Metering Level Indicator

2. Fine Metering Indicator Lights
3. Up Arrow Button
4. OK Button
5. Down Arrow Button
Figure 1-63
Fine Metering Controls
Fine Metering Control 2. From the fine metering screen, press the OK button
to activate the fine metering system. Indicator
The hydraulic control system is equipped with a fine lights will illuminate
metering mode. Refer to Figure 1-63. Fine metering 3. Press the Up or Down Arrow button to adjust the
allows very slow movements of the main and auxiliary fine metering to the desired level.
winches, boom hoist, and telescope functions en 4. Press the Back button to return to the main
abling the operator more precise movement of the load working screen.
when required for precision work. Fine metering can
be adjusted on a scale from 20 to 100%. An indicator
light on the main working screen will illuminate to alert
the operator that the fine metering system has been en
abled and a level indicator alerts the operator to the set
fine metering level. Use the following procedure to ad
just the fine metering system.
1. From the main working screen, press the Function
Key F2 to bring up the fine metering screen.

Operator's Manual
FRONT
1 2
Take Up
Idler
1. Left Travel/Steer Lever/Pedal

2. Right Travel/Steer Lever/Pedal
LEFT RIGHT
Figure 1-64
Travel/Steer Levers/Pedals
Travel
Steering And Traveling The Crane Motor
Traveling the crane is controlled by the travel/steer
levers/pedals. Refer to Figure 1-64. The sequence of
engaging these controls is critical to ensure smooth
REAR
travel operation. The travel control system employs a
two speed travel which can be utilized to provide the Figure 1-65
operator with two speeds of crane travel. Place the Travel Direction
travel control switch on the Crane Control Console
(Figure 1-42) in the position for high speed or in
3. Position the upper directly over the end of the lower
the position for standard speed. Travel speed is
and engage the travel swing lock.
proportional to lever/pedal movement with a top speed
4. To travel the crane forward or backward: Push
of 2.0 mph (3.2km/h). Anytime the travel lever(s)/ped
both travel/steer levers/pedals in the desired direc
al(s) is/are engaged, an audible travel alarm will sound. tion simultaneously. Release of the spring loaded
The travel brakes are a spring applied, hydraulically re travel levers/pedals will automatically return the
leased multiple disc type which are automatically ap levers/pedals to the neutral position and will also
plied when the travel/steer levers/pedals are returned apply the travel brakes.
to the neutral position. To travel and steer the crane
along a firm, level route, proceed as follows: To steer the crane to the right: Push the left travel/
steer lever/pedal forward while leaving the right
Note: The following instructions are based on travel travel/steer lever/pedal in the neutral position.
ing the crane with the travel motors to the rear. Direc To steer the crane to the left: Push the right travel/
tional arrows are located on each side frame to assist steer lever/pedal forward while leaving the left trav
in determining front/rear location. When the travel el/steer lever/pedal in the neutral position.
motors are in front, the right and left travel/steer
To spin turn (counter‐rotate): Push one travel/
levers/pedals operation must be reversed.
steer lever/pedal forward while pulling the oppo
1. Always take time to choose the safest, most level site one to the rear. The direction of rotation will de
route. pend on the direction the travel/steer levers/pedals
2. Designate a signal person to guide the operator are pushed.
along the route. Ensure the travel alarm is working
To Stop: Release the travel/steer levers/pedals.
properly. Use the horn as a signal. Use a code such
as one beep - stop, two beeps - forward, and three
beeps - backward. Ensure everyone on the job site
knows the codes.

Operator's Manual
3 4
2
5
6 7 8 9
1. Air Intake Heater Mega Fuse 6. Emergency Engine Throttle

2. Alternator Mega Fuse 7. Hour Meter
3. 105 Amp Circuit Breaker 8. Fuse Block 2
4. 50 Amp Circuit Breaker 9. Fuse Block 1
5. Battery Disconnect Switches
Figure 1-66
Power Panel
Power Panel Emergency Engine Throttle

The power panel is in front of the battery box on the The emergency engine throttle activates when there is
right front side of the crane. Refer to Figure 1-66. The a loss of communication between the engine and
power panel contains two resettable type circuit break crane control display or if there is a failure of the crane
ers that service the crane's electrical system as follows: control display. When activated, the engine goes to
1300 rpm's.
105 amp resettable circuit breaker (Main)
Upper Fuses (Item 4).
50 amp resettable circuit breaker
Fuel Heater (Item 5).

Operator's Manual
Hour Meter Fuse Blocks
The hour meter is on the power panel. Refer to There are fuse blocks on the power panel. Refer to
Figure 1-66. The hour meter registers engine operat Figure 1-66. The fuse blocks contain fuses which pro
ing hours. It is useful in determining lubrication and tect the crane's electrical system. Each fuse has a let
maintenance schedules. ter designation which corresponds to the upper electri
cal system as shown on the power panel label and the
Battery Disconnect Switches following chart.
The battery disconnect switches are on the power pan Fuse Block Identification
el. Refer to Figure 1-66.
Fuse Block Amp Qty Circuit
5 1 Engine Control Module
CAUTION 1
30 1 (ECM)
Ignition switch should be shut off at least 60 5 1 Linde Hydraulic ECM
seconds prior to turning battery disconnect 2 5 1 Hour Meter
switches to the “OFF” position.
5 1 Crane Control Module
Major damage may occur to the electronic
equipment from welding on the crane prior to
turning battery disconnect switches to the Mega Fuses
“OFF” position.
There are two mega fuses located behind the power
panel. Refer to Figure 1-66. These fuses protect the
Ignition switch should be shut off at least 60 seconds
alternator and engine intake air heater electrical cir
prior to turning battery disconnect switches to the
cuits. If these system are not functioning, check and
“OFF” position. Move the battery disconnect switches
replace these fuses as required.
to the “OFF” position before welding on the crane to
protect the crane's electronic components from dam
age due to an electric arc type welder. Move the positive
disconnect switch to the “OFF” position first, then the
negative. Reverse order to turn back on.
Note: If the batteries are disconnected, the start‐up

time for on‐board computer systems will be longer
than normal.

Operator's Manual
DOWN
UP 20°
0°
Figure 1-67
Operator's Cab Tilt Control Switch
Before operating the cab tilt feature, the operator's cab

Cab Tilt Operation door must be secured in the fully closed or fully open po
The operator's cab tilts up from 0 to 20 degrees above sition.
horizontal to improve vertical visibility and help to re Tilting the Upper Operator's Cab
duce operator fatigue due to neck strain when at high
Push the bottom part of the switch and hold to raise
boom angles. Use the three position momentary
the cab. Release switch to stop.
switch on the cab control console to operate the cab tilt
function. Refer to Figure 1-67. Push the top part of the switch and hold to lower the
cab. Release switch to stop.
Cab must be returned to its horizontal, 0 degree posi
tion, before exiting the cab. An alarm will sound if the
left arm rest is raised and the cab is tilted above 0 de
grees.

Operator's Manual
to workers or building structures. Out swing of a load
Operating In Wind Or will increase the load radius, and may overload the
Lightning crane. This could lead to boom failure or the crane tip
ping. Monitor the wind speed using a wind speed in
Avoid working a crane in high winds and when there is dicator or the “Wind Scale” chart below. Stop lifting op
a likelihood of lightning. Rated lifting capacities do not erations, ground the load and fully retract and lower the
account for the effects of wind on a suspended load or boom to horizontal if wind speed exceeds the maxim
the boom. Lifting capacities should be considered ac um allowed listed in “Wind Restrictions Guide” in the
ceptable for wind speeds up to 20 mph (32km/h) and Crane Rating Manual. Use the following “Wind Scale”
appropriately reduced for wind speeds greater than 20 chart as a general guide.
mph (32km/h). If you must work in a wind, reduce ca
pacities to those listed in “Wind Restrictions Guide” in
the Crane Rating Manual. Wind blowing against the DANGER
load and the boom produces a side load on the boom
and reduces its capacity. When lifting loads which If there is a likelihood of lightning,
have large surface areas in a wind, such as building immediately stop lifting operations, ground
panels, the movement of the load may pose a danger the load, and fully retract and lower the boom.
Wind Scale
Wind Speed Wind Strength
Inland Wind Effect
mph km/h Beaufort Scale WMO* Description
<0.6 <1 0 Calm Calm, smoke rises vertically.
Smoke drift indicates wind direction,
0.6 to 3.1 1 to 5 1 Light Air
wind vanes remain still.
Wind felt on face, leaves rustle, wind
3.7 to 6.8 6 to 11 2 Light Breeze
vanes begin to move.
Leaves and small twigs constantly
7.4 to 11.8 12 to 19 3 Gentle Breeze
moving, light flags extended.
Dust, leaves, and loose paper lifted,
12.4 to 17.4 20 to 28 4 Moderate Breeze
small tree branches move.
Small trees in leaf begin to sway.
18.0 to 23.6 29 to 38 5 Fresh Breeze
Crested waves form on inland waters.
Larger tree branches moving. Tele
24.2 to 30.4 39 to 49 6 Strong Breeze phone wires whistle. Umbrellas
used with difficulty.
Whole trees moving. Resistance felt
31.1 to 37.9 50 to 61 7 Near Gale
walking against wind.
Breaks twigs off trees. Resistance
38.5 to 46.0 62 to 74 8 Gale
felt walking against wind.
Slight structural damage. Slate
46.6 to 54.1 75 to 87 9 Strong Gale
blows off roofs.
Trees broken or uprooted. Consid
54.7 to 62.8 88 to 101 10 Storm
erable structural damage.
* World Meteorological Organization

Operator's Manual
Fly Tip
Main Boom Fly Base
11 mph
RCL Display
2
3
1. Anemometer
2. Transmitter
10 Ft Fly Base
3. Lock Pin
Figure 1-68
Wind Speed Indicator
display unit in the operator's cab. Refer to “Wind

Crane Monitoring System Restrictions Guide” in the Crane Rating Manual for
A crane monitoring system is used for monitoring more information on wind speed restrictions.
boom length, boom angle, load weight, and two block
situations.
CAUTION
Wind Speed Indicator Remove the anemometer assembly from the
boom and/or fly head during transport to
The crane is equipped with a wireless wind speed
indicator integrated into the Rated Capacity Limiter prevent damage to the unit.
System. The indicator is used to monitor wind speeds
at the main boom head or the fly head when erected.
Refer to Figure 1-68. An anemometer mounted on the
boom or fly head transmits wind speed data to the

Operator's Manual
Boom Angle Indicator
A bubble type boom angle indicator is mounted to the
right of the operator's cab on the base section of the
boom. Refer to Figure 1-69. It must be adjusted prop
erly and the crane must be level for the unit to accu
rately indicate boom angles. Even under these condi
tions its readings are only approximate. When making
near capacity lifts, measure the load radius to deter
mine crane capacity. Check the adjustment of the
boom angle indicator daily to ensure its accuracy. Re
fer to “Boom Angle Indicator Adjustment” in Section 3
of this Operator's Manual.
Anti‐Two Block Warning System

Integrated into the Rated Capacity Limiter System is an Figure 1-69
anti‐two block (ATB) warning system. An anti‐two Boom Angle Indicator
block warning system is an electromechanical system
designed to alert the operator before the hook block,
The added feature of hydraulic function limiters, pre
hook ball, or load contacts the head machinery of the
vents the operator from continuing crane functions
main boom, auxiliary lifting sheave, or fly. When a two
which will cause a two block situation to occur. The
block situation is imminent, an audio/visual alarm is ac
crane functions of winch up, boom down, and boom
tivated to alert the operator of the pending danger.
extend are disabled when the anti‐two block weight is
When the alarm activates it is essential that the opera
lifted. These functions will remain disabled until the two
tor discontinue operations immediately, and correct
block situation is corrected or the “Cancel Alarm” but
the two block situation.
ton on the display unit is pressed and held to override
Three basic components are used to make up the anti‐ the system.
two block system. The anti‐two block weight, anti‐two
block switch with lockout clip, and the display unit in the Note: Push the “Cancel Alarm” button momentarily
operator's cab. Refer to Figure 1-70 and Figure 1-71. once to silence the audible alarm. Press and hold
the “Cancel Alarm” button to temporarily override
An anti‐two block weight is suspended from the head the system.
machinery switch(es) where lifts are to be made and is
used to hold the switch(es) in the “working” position.
The main boom head must always have an anti‐two
When the anti‐two block weight is lifted by the hook
block switch. Each of the added attachments used on
block, hook ball, or load, it allows the switch to activate
the crane must employ a similar head machinery
the audio/visual alarm on the display unit in the opera
switch as well, in order for that particular attachment to
tor's cab. In addition to the audio/visual alarm, function
be monitored by the system.
limiters will be activated.
The plug assembly is connected to the jumper assem
bly on the boom head when operating from the main
CAUTION boom. It is connected to the jumper assembly on the
Do not allow the load to spin out of control attachment when operating from that attachment.
when hoisting. The anti‐two block weight may Check that all the harness connections between the at
become entangled with the wire rope and tachments are properly connected and test the system
could damage the anti‐two block system, wire before beginning operations. Test the system by manu
rope, or boom. Use rotation resistant wire ally lifting the ATB weight and verifying that the functions
rope during single part line hoisting of winch up, boom down, and boom extend are disabled.
applications, especially when long fall lifts
are involved.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
FAILURE TO HAVE FULLY
OPERATIONAL ATB SYSTEM
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH. MAIN
BOOM ATB IS DISABLED WHEN
LOCKOUT IS INSTALLED. MAIN
BOOM ATB IS FUNCTIONAL
WHEN LOCKOUT IS NOT
INSTALLED.
Lockout Clip Installed

(ATB Switch Inactive)
1. Jumper Assembly 4. Anti‐Two Block Switch

2. Plug Assembly 5. Lockout Clip
3. Anti‐Two Block Weight
Figure 1-70
Anti‐Two Block Weights And Switches
Lockout Clip When both main boom and any attachment are reeved
The lockout clip is used to hold the main boom anti‐two for operation, the lockout clip must be removed from
block switch in the “working” position, the same as the cable.
having a two block weight suspended from the switch. Note: When using both the main boom and any at
When operating from the main boom the lockout clip tachment, an anti‐two block weight must be sus
must be removed from the anti‐two block weight cable. pended from the anti‐two block switch on the main
When operating from an attachment only, the lockout boom and on any attachment anti‐two block switch
clip must be installed on the anti‐two block weight that is to be monitored.
cable.

Operator's Manual
3 4
2 5
6
7
1 8
9
10
15
14
13 12 11
16 21 18 19
20
29
17
28
27
22
26
24 23
25
1. Bar‐Graph 11. Brightness Icon 21. Boom Section Length Display
2. Pre‐Alarm Indicator 12. Winch Setup Icon 22. Working Area Display
3. Overload Indicator 13. Selection Buttons 23. Parts Of Line Display
4. Side Frame Or Lifting Jack Configuration 14. Winch Select Icon 24. Warning Message Area
5. Counterweight Configuration 15. Main Menu Icon 25. Load Radius Display
6. Boom Extension Mode 16. Crane Representation Image 26. Boom Angle Display
7. Attachment Configuration 17. Wind Speed Display 27. Maximum Rated Capacity Display
8. Stowed Attachment Configuration 18. Boom Telescope Animation Display 28. Actual Load Display
9. Operator Alarm Indicator 19. Winch Wire Rope Direction Indicator 29. Boom Head Height Display
10. Cancel Alarm Icon 20. Boom Length Display
Figure 1-71
Rated Capacity Limiter

Operator's Manual
System Description
The system monitors crane functions by means of high
3 accuracy sensors and continuously compares the load
with a copy of the crane capacity chart which is stored
2 in the computer memory. If an overload is approached,
the system warns by means of audible and visual
alarms and is configured to cause function limitation.
The Rated Capacity Limiter provides the operator with
1
a continuous display of:
Rated Capacity
Actual Load
Radius of the Load
Angle of the Main Boom
Crane Configuration
Length of the Main Boom
Height of the Main Boom Head Above the Ground
Note: The function of the RCL system is an opera
1 2 3
GREEN LENS AMBER LENS RED LENS tional aid to warn or to indicate to the operator when
the load being lifted approaches, meets, or exceeds
the rated capacity of the crane. The RCL system
1. Green Lights - Percent 2. Yellow/Amber Lights -
age of Rated Load Approaching Overload
does not function as a scale or weighing device.
3. Red Lights - Overload The actual load displayed by the RCL system is less
accurate when the actual load lifted is a small per
Figure 1-72
centage of the allowable load. This typically occurs
Overhead Bar‐Graph And External Light Bar
when lifting light loads with a short boom length at
(If Equipped)
high boom angles. Crane configurations of this
type produce low pressures in the boom hoist cylin
Rated Capacity Limiter der resulting in less accuracy of the RCL sensors
and calculated load. The RCL load accuracy im
The following describes the function and operation of proves greatly when the actual load lifted ap
the Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL). The system is in proaches the rated load (higher boom hoist cylin
tended to aid the operator in the efficient operation of der pressures).
the crane by continually monitoring the load and warn
ing of an approach to an overload or unsafe condition.
An additional feature of the system is the provision of
operator alarms. These alarms, when properly set,
provide a method of obstacle avoidance. This is
WARNING achieved by means of maximum boom length, maxi
Although the system will alert the operator of mum boom angle, maximum load radius, maximum
an approaching overload or unsafe condition, boom head height, left and right swing, and defined
it remains the responsibility of the operator to area alarms. These alarms can be programmed for
operate the crane safely at all times. each job site and set rapidly for the prevailing site
conditions thereby aiding the operator in safe opera
This system must never be substituted for the
tion of the crane.
good judgment of the crane operator using safe
operating procedures. The operator is solely
responsible for safe operation of the crane.
!!THIS SYSTEM IS AN OPERATOR'S AID -
NOT A SAFETY DEVICE!!

Operator's Manual
Display Unit 8. Stowed Attachment Configuration
The following is a description of the control buttons, in This area displays the current stowed attachment con
dicators, and windows on the display unit. Use them figuration.
along with Figure 1-71.
9. Operator Alarm Indicator
1. Bar‐Graph This indicator will display whether or not an operator
The Bar‐Graph is a series of twelve colored lights which alarm is set.
gives a visual indication of how much of the crane's ca
pacity is being used and the rate at which an overload is 10. Cancel Alarm Icon
being approached. Each green light represents 10% of The button below this icon can be pushed once to si
the crane's rated capacity being used. Yellow indicates lence the audible alarm when the alarm has occurred
90-99.9%, and the red lights indicate an overload. as a result of either an Overload, a Two Block, or an
Operator Settable alarm. It is also used to reset the
Note: System may be equipped with an overhead
function limit relay when it is necessary to by‐pass a
bar‐graph and/or an external light bar which oper
function limit which has occurred as a result of either an
ates similar to the bar‐graph on the display. Refer to
Overload or a Two Block alarm. This requires the but
Figure 1-72.
ton be pressed and held for 2 seconds or longer.
2. Pre‐Alarm Indicator 11. Brightness Icon

The Pre‐Alarm Indicator illuminates yellow at a pre‐set The button below this icon is used to adjust the display
value of 90% of Maximum Rated Capacity and provides brightness.
a visual indication of an approach to an overload. 12. Winch Setup Icon
3. Overload Indicator The button below this icon is used to enter the active
The Overload Indicator illuminates red at a pre‐set val winch setup screen. The active winch setup screen al
ue of 100% of the Maximum Rated Capacity and pro lows the user to configure lift point and parts of line for
vides a visual indication of Maximum Allowed Load. It the active winch.
will also illuminate whenever a wire rope limit is exceed 13. Selection Buttons
ed. Function limiters will occur simultaneously for an
Overload, Wire Rope Limit, or a Two Block condition, The selection buttons are used to activate each of the
but function limiters will not occur when exceeding an icons at the bottom of the screen. The icons will
operator settable alarm. An audible alarm will sound change depending on the current menu display.
and a message will appear in the warning message
area for all 4 conditions. 14. Winch Select Icon
The button below this icon is used to select which
4. Side Frame Or Lifting Jack Configuration winch will be in use.
This area displays the current lower configuration. It
will also display rigging and travel modes. 15. Main Menu Icon
The button below this icon navigates to the main menu.
5. Counterweight Configuration The main menu contains items such as: Crane Config
This area displays the current counterweight configur uration, Operator Alarms, Diagnostics, Display Op
ation. tions, About, etc.
6. Boom Extension Mode 16. Crane Representation Image

This area displays the current boom extension mode. It This crane representation image is a generic repres
also shows the maximum boom length for the current entation of the boom, active winch configuration, auxili
boom extension mode. ary head configuration (on or off), and fly configuration
(on or off). The attachment image will not change with
7. Attachment Configuration installed attachment.
This area displays the current attachment configura
tion.

Operator's Manual
17. Wind Speed Display tion of the system. When an alarm occurs, the rectan
gular area fills in red. The Warning Message Area will
The current wind speed is displayed here. only be shown when there is an active message.
18. Boom Telescope Animation Display Otherwise the navigation button icons will be shown.
Refer to Figure 1-74. Press any of the selection but
The Boom Telescope Animation Display is a real‐time tons, except the cancel alarm button, to temporarily re
visual representation of the location of the boom sec place the Warning Message Area with the navigation
tions. icons.
19. Winch Wire Rope Direction Indicator 25. Load Radius Display
This Winch Wire Rope Direction indicator is used to The Load Radius Display gives a continuous indication
monitor Winch Up , Winch Down , and Error of the radius of the load in feet (m). It is the horizontal
states . distance from the centerline of rotation to the centerline
of the hook.
Note: If the error state indicator appears, contact
your Link‐Belt Distributor or Factory for service. 26. Boom Angle Display
The Boom Angle Display gives a continuous indication
20. Boom Length Display of the angle of the main boom relative to horizontal.
The Boom Length Display gives a continuous indica 27. Maximum Rated Capacity Display
tion of the boom length in feet (m). It is the distance
from the centerline of the boom foot pin to the center The Maximum Rated Capacity Display is a digital dis
line of the boom head machinery. play of the maximum permitted capacity. It is derived
from a copy of the crane's capacity chart which is
21. Boom Section Length Display stored in the computer memory and is the reference
The Boom Section Length Display shows the current capacity for any lifting operation. It is dependent on the
section lengths as a percentage of their absolute max configuration currently selected, which is shown in the
imum length (not in the current boom mode). The max crane configuration screen, and which determines the
imum length for each section in the current boom section of the capacity chart to be used as the rated ca
mode is shown in brackets. pacity reference.
22. Working Area Display 28. Actual Load Display

This area displays a graphical representation of the al The Actual Load Display is a digital display of the total
lowable lifting quadrant(s) based on the selected con load suspended below the boom or fly head. It in
figuration. A quadrant not allowed will be filled red, an cludes the load, any slings, pins, or tackle used to se
allowable quadrant will be filled green. cure the load and the hook block or hook ball.
23. Parts Of Line Display 29. Boom Head Height Display

The Parts of Line Display shows the parts of line cur The Boom Head Height Display gives a continuous dis
rently selected for the winch in use. play of the height of the boom head or attachment head
above the ground.
24. Warning Message Area
The Warning Message Area displays text messages of
various alarms which may occur during normal opera

Operator's Manual
System Operation
The following is a list of procedures which are used to
operate the multiple features of the Rated Capacity
Limiter. Use these procedures in conjunction with the
previous display unit control descriptions.
System Bypass
In emergency situations, the Rated Capacity Limiter
computer can be bypassed. There is a RCL Status key
switch on the back of the operator's cab, to bypass the
system. Refer to Figure 1-73. Move the key to the
“RCL BYPASSED” position to bypass the system. For
emergency use while the system is bypassed, refer to
“System Inoperative or Malfunctioning” in this Section
WARNING
The RCL System is not operational when the
computer is bypassed. Bypass the system in
emergency situations only.
System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning

RCL STATUS
When operational aids are inoperative or malfunction
ing, the following recommendations for continued use
of the crane should be followed or the crane should be 1
shutdown.
1. Steps shall be taken to schedule repairs and recalib
ration immediately. The operational aids shall be put
back into service as soon as replacement parts, if re
quired, are available and the repairs and recalibra BYPASS IN EMERGENCY
SITUATIONS ONLY. RCL IS
tion can be carried out. Every reasonable effort must NOT OPEARTIONAL WHEN
COMPUER IS BYPASSED.
be made to expedite the repairs and recalibration. REFER TO OPERATOR'S
MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
2. When the rated capacity limiter is inoperative or INSTRUCTIONS.
malfunctioning, the designated person respons
ible for supervising the lifting operations shall es 1. RCL Status Keyswitch
tablish procedures for determining load weights
and shall ascertain that the weight of the load does Figure 1-73
not exceed the crane ratings at the radius where Rated Capacity Limiter Status Keyswitch
the load is to be handled.
3. When a boom angle or radius indicator is inoperat 5. When a boom length indicator is inoperative or mal
ive or malfunctioning, the radius or boom angle functioning, the designated person responsible for
shall be determined by measurement. supervising the lifting operations shall establish the
4. When the anti‐two block warning device is inoperat boom length at which the lift will be made by actual
ive or malfunctioning, the designated person re measurement or markings on the boom.
sponsible for supervising the lifting operations shall 6. When a level indicator is inoperative or malfunction
establish procedures, such as assigning an addition ing, other means shall be used to level the crane.
al signal person, to furnish equivalent protection. 7. In situations where inconsistency exists, verified
This does not apply when lifting personnel in load weights, measured radii, boom lengths, and au
line supported baskets. Personnel shall not be lifted thorized crane capacities must always take pre
in load line supported baskets when the anti‐two cedence over indicator readings.
block devices are not functioning properly.

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 5
1. Back Icon 4. Scroll Down Icon

2. Scroll Up Icon 5. Working Screen Icon
3. OK/Enter Icon 6. Selection Buttons
Figure 1-74
Menu Navigation Icons & Selection Buttons
System Navigation 3. OK/Enter Icon

The RCL Display has two main display modes; the The selection button below the OK/Enter Icon selects
working screen and the menu. The working screen the menu item currently highlighted.
displays all information relevant to the safe operation of
the crane. This includes crane configuration as well as 4. Scroll Down Icon
live data such as boom length and load radius. The
The selection button below the Scroll Down Icon scrolls
menu is used to navigate to various setup and dia
down one menu item each time it is pressed.
gnostic screens needed to properly setup the system.
Although the five navigation icons at the bottom of the 5. Working Screen Icon
screen will change depending on what the display is
currently showing, the five primary icons for menu nav The selection button below the Working Screen Icon
igation are as follows. Refer to Figure 1-74. (If a task immediately navigates to the working screen when it is
associated with a button is not available, that button will pressed.
be disabled and greyed out.)
6. Selection Buttons
1. Back Icon These buttons are used to select the function of the
The selection button below the Back Icon navigates icon displayed above them.
back one menu.
2. Scroll Up Icon
The selection button below the Scroll Up Icon scrolls
up one menu item each time it is pressed.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-75
Carrier Selection
Configuration Selection Depending on how the crane is equipped or which

In the normal operational mode the system is pro selections have been made, some screens shown
grammed to remember the last configuration selected. may not appear or may not appear as illustrated.
Each time the system is powered up it will automatically The system cannot be programmed for configura
default to that last configuration. Only when the crane tions not allowed by the capacity charts in the Crane
is rigged differently must a new configuration be selec Rating Manual.
ted. Use the following procedure to select the crane
configuration. 1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
Note: When selecting configurations allowed on 2. Scroll to Crane Configuration, and press the OK/
tracks, all track beams must be equally extended; Enter button .
all fully retracted, intermediate extended, or fully 3. Scroll to Tracks or Jacks, and press the OK/Enter
extended. button . Refer to Figure 1-75.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-76
Counterweight Selection
4. The menu will change and graphically display the 7. Scroll to the desired counterweight, and press the
Lower options. Scroll to the desired lower config OK/Enter button . Refer to Figure 1-76.
uration, and press the OK/Enter button . 8. After a selection is made, the display will automat
5. After a selection is made, the display will automat ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.
ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.
6. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Coun
terweight, and press the OK/Enter button .

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-77
Boom Extend Mode Selection
9. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Boom Note: Refer to the Crane Rating Manual to de
Extend Mode, and press the OK/Enter button . termine the best boom mode to maximize lifting
Refer to Figure 1-77. capacity at working radius. Boom mode op
10. Scroll to the desired boom extend mode, and tions will only be displayed when the boom is
press the OK/Enter button . fully retracted.
11. After a selection is made, the display will automat
ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-78
Auxiliary Head Selection
12. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Auxili a. If Nothing Erected is selected, the display will
ary Head, and press the OK/Enter button . Re automatically return to the Crane Configura
fer to Figure 1-78. tion menu.
13. Scroll to the desired auxiliary head (off or on), and b. If an erected attachment is selected, the dis
press the OK/Enter button . play will change and graphically display the
14. After a selection is made, the display will automat available offsets as required.
ically return to the Crane Configuration menu. c. Scroll to the desired offset angle, and press the
15. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Attach OK/Enter button .
ment, and press the OK/Enter button . d. After a selection is made, the display will auto
16. Scroll to Erected Attachment, and press the OK/ matically return to the Crane Configuration
Enter button to display the fly options. Scroll to menu.
the desired erected fly, if required, and press the
OK/Enter button . Refer to Figure 1-79.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-79
Erected Attachment Selection

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-80
Stowed Attachment Selection
17. If the crane is equipped with a fly and was not se 18. After a selection is made, the display will automat
lected as an erected attachment, on the Crane ically return to the Crane Configuration menu.
Configuration menu, navigate to Attachment »
Stowed Attachment to display the stowed fly op
tions. Scroll to the desired stowed deduct, if re
quired, and press the OK/Enter button . Refer
to Figure 1-80.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-81
Winch Configuration
19. On the Crane Configuration menu, scroll to Winch, configure the selected winch. The winch se
and press the OK/Enter button to display the lect button on the working screen is used to
front and rear winch items. Refer to Figure 1-81. change the active winch.
a. Scroll to the desired winch menu item, and
press the OK/Enter button . This will only

Operator's Manual

Lifting Point Selection Parts Of Line Selection
b. Scroll through the available lifting points until 20. Press the back button to navigate back to the
the desired lifting point, for the winch selected, Crane Configuration menu.
is displayed. Refer to Figure 1-82.
c. Scroll through the available parts of line until Note: A change to any selection can be made at
the desired parts of line, for the winch selected, anytime during the configuration routine. When
is displayed. Refer to Figure 1-83. on the Crane Configuration menu, simply navig
d. Press the OK/Enter button to confirm the ate to the desired configuration menu to go dir
selections for lifting point and parts of line. If ectly to that sub‐routine.
the back button or working screen button 21. Press the Working Screen button to return to
is pressed before pressing the OK/Enter the normal working screen and graphically display
button , the changes made to lifting point the crane configuration as previously selected.
and parts of line will not be saved.
e. Repeat Steps a thru d for the other winch, if re
quired.

Operator's Manual
7 4
6 9
In this example the crane is setup on fully extended side frames (1), 0
upper plus 0 lower counterweight (2), boom mode Standard (3), no fly
erected (4), no stowed attachment (5), the rear winch selected (6), with
the winch wire rope reeved over the main boom head (7), with one part
of line (8), and 360 degree capacities with the boom currently posi
tioned over the front (9).
Figure 1-84
Normal Working Screen Example

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Once the function limiters have been
by‐passed, the crane is no longer protected
against the condition that initially caused the
function limiters to occur.
Note: The CANCEL ALARM feature is a temporary

function. The audible alarm or function limit is auto
matically reset when the condition which caused
the alarm is no longer present.
The CANCEL ALARM is also used to reset the function
limiters when it is necessary to by‐pass the function lim
iters which has occurred as a result of either an Over
load, a Two Block alarm, or a Wire Rope limit. Function
limiters are reset by first canceling the audible alarm
(as described above) and then pressing and holding
the CANCEL ALARM button, after which the function
Figure 1-85 limiters will be reset to allow operation. However,
Cancel Alarm Button should another different alarm condition occur when
the function limiters had previously been over‐ridden,
then the newly occurring alarm condition would cause
Cancel Audible Alarm And Reset Function Limiters the function limiters to occur again.
The CANCEL ALARM button is used to cancel the
audible alarm when the alarm has occurred as a result
of either an Overload, a Two Block alarm, or an Operat
or settable alarm. The audible alarm may be canceled
by pressing and releasing the CANCEL ALARM button.
The audible alarm remains canceled until the condition
which caused the alarm has been removed. For ex
ample, if the audible alarm was canceled because of an
overload condition, it will remain canceled until the
overload condition is removed. However, if a different
alarm, e.g. two block condition, was to occur when the
audible alarm was still canceled for an earlier overload
condition, the new alarm condition would cause the
audible alarm to be sound.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-86
Operator Settable Alarms
Operator Settable Alarms

Some alarms occur automatically as a result of limita WARNING
tions imposed by the capacity chart. The operator has
The operator settable alarms are a warning
control over additional alarms which can be set to oper
device. All functions remain operational when
ate within the normal chart limitations and which are, in
entering the operator defined bad area. For
addition to those already set by the chart.
safe operation, adequate distance must be
Operator alarms will be stored in the computer maintained to allow for operator reaction time
memory, even if the crane is shutdown, until they are to avoid entering the bad area. It is the
disabled. Refer to Figure 1-86. responsibility of the operator to set points
The following alarms are available for operator use. which ensure that the crane's boom,
Minimum Angle Maximum Load Radius Left and Right Swing attachment, load, rigging, etc. maintains a
Maximum Angle Maximum Boom Length safe working distance and complies with local
Maximum Height Operator Defined Area safety regulations.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-87
Boom Angle Alarm

Operator's Manual
Setting Angle, Length, Height, Radius, And Swing 8. Use the following examples to understand the use
Operator Settable Alarms of the procedure.
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
button . Refer to Figure 1-86.
WARNING
3. Scroll to the desired alarm to be set, and press the If crane or obstacle is moved or if a different
OK/Enter button . size load is lifted, the alarm(s) must be reset.
WARNING WARNING
Avoid positioning the boom, attachment, load,
Check the crane's current configuration,
rigging, etc. into the bad area when setting the
capacity chart, and Working Areas chart in the
alarm values.
Crane Rating Manual to ensure safe, stable
When selecting the alarm values, ensure that operation under conditions described in the
the load will maintain a safe distance from the following examples.
obstacle.
To Set Minimum Angle Alarm
4. Place the crane in the desired position depending
upon the alarm to be set. The numerical value for Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom is
the value being set will be the current position of below a 30 degree angle, use the following
the crane. procedure:
Note: If an alarm had been previously set, the Menu button .
alarm value displayed will be the previously set 2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
alarm value and indicated by the icon. The button . Refer to Figure 1-87.
previous alarm must first be disabled, then set 3. Scroll to Boom Angle , and press the OK/Enter
the new alarm. Alarms which are disabled are button .
indicated by the icon. 4. Move the boom to a 30 degree angle.
5. Press the corresponding selection button to set the 5. Press the corresponding button for “Min. Angle” to
alarm value. set the alarm. The displayed value will be the alarm
6. Press the back button to return to the Operat setting. The will appear to indicate that the
or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but alarm is set.
ton again to return to the normal working 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat
screen. or Alarm menu or press the Working Screen button
7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm again to return to the normal working screen.
points have been properly set. When approaching 7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
the alarm set point, the audible alarm will sound in points have been properly set. When approaching
termittently and a warning message will appear in 30 degree boom angle, the audio will sound inter
the warning message area. When exceeding the mittently and “Approaching Minimum Angle” will
alarm set point, the audible alarm will sound con appear in the warning message area. The audible
tinuously and a warning message will appear in the alarm will sound continuously and “Minimum
warning message area. Angle” will appear in warning message area
whenever the boom is lowered below 30 degrees.
Note: An alarm icon will appear on the nor
mal working screen to alert the operator that an
operator alarm has been set. If no operator
alarm is set, the alarm disabled icon will ap
pear.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-88
Boom Length Alarm
To Set Maximum Angle Alarm 4. Move the boom to a 60 degree angle.

Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom is 5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Angle” to
above a 60 degree angle use the following set the alarm. The displayed value will be the alarm
procedure: setting. The will appear to indicate that the
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main alarm is set.
Menu button . 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but
button . ton again to return to the normal working
3. Scroll to Boom Angle , and press the OK/Enter screen.
button .

Operator's Manual
7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm 4. Extend the boom so that the length is 75
points have been properly set. When approaching feet(22.8m).
60 degree boom angle, the audio will sound inter 5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Length”
mittently and “Approaching Maximum Angle” will to set the alarm. The displayed value will be the
appear in the warning message area. The audible alarm setting. The will appear to indicate that
alarm will sound continuously whenever the boom the alarm is set.
is raised above 60 degrees and “Maximum Angle” 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat
will appear in warning message area. or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but
To Set Maximum Length Alarm ton again to return to the normal working
screen.
Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom
7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
length exceeds 75 feet (22.8m), use the
points have been properly set. When approaching
following procedure:
75 foot (22.8m) boom length, the audio alarm will
sound intermittently and “Approaching Maximum
Menu button .
Length” will appear in the warning message area.
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
The audible alarm will sound continuously
button .
whenever the boom length exceeds 75 feet
3. Scroll to Boom Length , and press the OK/Enter (22.8m) and “Maximum Length” will appear in the
button . warning message area.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-89
Boom Height Alarm
To Set Maximum Height Alarm alarm setting. The will appear to indicate that
Note: The height measured here is from the carrier the alarm is set.
deck to the tip of the attachment. 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat
or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but
Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom tip ton again to return to the normal working
height exceeds 75 feet (22.8m), use the screen.
following procedure: 7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main points have been properly set. When approaching
Menu button . 75 foot (22.8m) boom tip height, the audio alarm
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter will sound intermittently and “Approaching Maxim
button . um Height” will appear in the warning message
3. Scroll to Head Height , and press the OK/Enter area. The audible alarm will sound continuously
button . whenever the boom tip height exceeds 75 feet
4. Extend the boom and/or adjust the boom angle so (22.8m) and “Maximum Height” will appear in the
that the head height is 75 feet (22.8m). warning message area.
5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Height”
to set the alarm. The displayed value will be the

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-90
Load Radius Alarm
To Set Maximum Radius Alarm alarm setting. The will appear to indicate that
Example: To have an alarm whenever the boom the alarm is set.
radius exceeds 95 feet (29m), use the 6. Press the back button to return to the Operat
following procedure: or Alarms menu or press the Working Screen but
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main ton again to return to the normal working
Menu button . screen.
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter 7. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
button . points have been properly set. When approaching
95 foot (29m) boom radius, the audio will sound in
3. Scroll to Radius , and press the OK/Enter button
termittently and “Approaching Maximum Radius”
. will appear in the warning message area. The aud
4. Extend the boom and/or adjust the boom angle so ible alarm will sound continuously whenever the
that the radius is 95 feet (29m). boom radius exceeds 95 feet (29m) and “Maxim
5. Press the corresponding button for “Max. Radius” um Radius” will appear in warning message area.
to set the alarm. The displayed value will be the

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-91
Swing Alarm

Operator's Manual
To Set Left And Right Swing Alarms 7. Press the corresponding button for “Right Angle”
Example: To have an alarm whenever the LEFT to enter the right alarm point. The displayed value
SWING AND RIGHT SWING exceed will be the right alarm setting. The will appear to
pre‐determined alarm points, use the indicate that the angle is set.
following procedure: 8. When both angles are set, the will appear to in
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main dicate that the alarm is set.
button . Refer to Figure 1-91. ton again to return to the normal working
3. Scroll to Swing Angle , and press the OK/Enter screen.
button . 10. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
4. Swing the boom to the left alarm point. points have been properly set. When approaching
5. Press the corresponding button for “Left Angle” to the set alarm point, the audio alarm will sound in
enter the left alarm point. The displayed value will termittently and “Approaching Swing Angle Limit”
be the left alarm setting. The will appear to in will appear in the warning message area. The aud
dicate that the angle is set. ible alarm will sound continuously whenever the
6. Swing the boom to the right alarm point. swing exceeds the alarm points and “Swing Angle
Limit” will appear in warning message area.
Note: Both the left and right swing alarms must
be set for the system to determine the operator
set working area.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-92
Ground Bearing Pressure Alarm
To Set Ground Bearing Pressure Alarm 7. With the correct number(s) entered into the
Example: To have an alarm whenever the ground keypad, scroll to the and press the select but
bearing pressure exceeds 9 psi (62.1kpa), ton to return to the Ground Bearing Pressure
use the following procedure: Screen.
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main 8. The will appear to indicate that the alarm is set.
button . ton again to return to the normal working
screen.
3. Scroll to Ground Bearing Pressure , and press
10. When approaching 9 psi (62.1kpa), the audio will
the OK/Enter button . Refer to Figure 1-92. sound intermittently and “Approaching Ground
4. Press the keypad button to enter into keypad Bearing Limit” will appear in the warning message
mode. area. The audible alarm will sound continuously
5. Scroll to the correct number by pressing the direc and “Ground Bearing Limit” will appear in warning
tion buttons and . message area whenever the pressure reaches 9
6. When the correct number is highlighted press the psi (62.1kpa).
select button .

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-93
Operator Defined Area Alarm

Operator's Manual
Operator Defined Area Alarm 5. Position the boom, attachment, load, rigging, etc.
The operator defined area alarm, when set, will define to the desired Point A and press the corresponding
an imaginary vertical plane between two set points to button for “Point A” to set the first point. The dis
optimize the working area. When approaching the played values for swing angle and radius will be the
plane, the audio alarm will sound intermittently, and the set point. The will appear to indicate that Point
message “Approaching Defined Area” will appear in A is set.
the warning message area. When passing the plane, 6. Position the boom, attachment, load, rigging, etc.
the audio alarm will sound continuously and the mes to the desired Point B and press the corresponding
sage “Defined Area” will appear on the warning mes button for “Point B” to set the second point. The
sage area. Use the following procedure, Figure 1-93, displayed values for swing angle and radius will be
and Figure 1-94 to set the operator defined area the set point. The will appear to indicate that
alarm. Point B is set.
Note: For best results, the two points should be
separated by a minimum of 10 ft (3m) or 30 de
WARNING grees.
The operator defined area alarm is a warning
7. When both angles are set, press the back button
device. All functions remain operational when
to return to the Operator Alarm menu or press
entering the operator defined bad area. For
the Working Screen button again to return to
safe operation, adequate distance must be
the normal working screen.
maintained to allow for operator reaction time
8. Test the alarm, with no load, to ensure the alarm
to avoid entering the bad area. It is the
points have been properly set. When approaching
responsibility of the operator to set points
the plane, the audio alarm will sound intermittently
which ensure that the crane's boom,
and the message “Bad Working Area” will appear
attachment, load, rigging, etc. maintains a on the warning message area. When passing the
safe working distance and complies with local plane, the audio alarm will sound continuously and
safety regulations. the message “Bad Working Area” will appear on
the warning message area.
Setting Operator Defined Area Alarm
Menu button . WARNING
2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter If crane or obstacle is moved or if a different
button . size load is lifted, the area alarm must be
3. Disable any previously set left and right swing reset.
alarms if required. Refer to “To Disable Operator
Settable Alarms” in this Section of this Operator's To Disable Operator Settable Alarms
Manual. 1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Note: It is recommended to clear the left and Menu button .
right swing alarms prior to setting the defined 2. Scroll to Operator Alarms, and press the OK/Enter
area alarm. button .
3. Scroll to the desired alarm to be disabled, and
4. Scroll to Define Area , and press the OK/Enter press the OK/Enter button .
button . 4. Press the corresponding button for each alarm.
The icon indicates the alarm has been cleared.
5. When all desired alarms are disabled, press the
WARNING back button to return to the Operator Alarm
menu or press the Working Screen button
Avoid positioning the boom, attachment, load,
again to return to the normal working screen.
rigging, etc. into the bad area when setting the
left or right alarm points.
When selecting the left and right alarm points,
ensure that the load will maintain a safe
distance from the obstacle. Also ensure that
the two points are set so that the tailswing of
the crane will not enter the bad area.

Operator's Manual
Obstacle Safe
Working
Distance
Imaginary
Vertical
Bad Working Area Plane
Safe Point B
Working Load
Distance
Point A
Working
Area
Figure 1-94
Operator Defined Area Alarm

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-95
Function Time
Function Time Monitoring 1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
The function time monitoring screen enables the oper
2. Scroll to Diagnostics and Monitoring, and press
ator to monitor the hours of use for the winch(s), boom
the OK/Enter button .
hoist cylinder, and boom telescope cylinder for service
3. Scroll to Function Time, and press the OK/Enter
purposes. The screen also displays the number of
button . Refer to Figure 1-95.
times the winch(s) has been started and stopped along
4. From this screen, monitoring of the winch(s), boom
with the total cumulative distance the boom has been
hoist cylinder, and boom telescope cylinder can be
extended and retracted.
done.
5. Press the back button to return to the Dia
gnostics and Monitoring menu or press the Work
ing Screen button to return to the normal
working screen.

Operator's Manual
Telematics 2. Scroll to Diagnostics and Monitoring, and press
the OK/Enter button .
TELEMATICS refers to the use of wireless devices and
3. Scroll to Telematics, and press the OK/Enter but
computer module technologies to transmit data in real
ton . Refer to Figure 1-96.
time back to an organization.
4. Scroll to the data that you would like to send, and
This LinkBelt crane is equipped with one or more on press the OK/Enter button .
board computers that monitor and/or control the 5. A confirmation screen will pop up. Press to
crane’s performance. Crane owners may access elec send the data or press to cancel and return to
tronic data by subscribing to the optional telematics the previous screen.
feature offered by our telematics partner. 6. A will be shown beside the data selected while
Specific electronic data transmitted by the onboard the data is being sent. The Telematics Module will
computers may be, but is not limited to, water temper send data every 10 seconds for 10 minutes or until
ature, oil temperature, engine rpm, fuel consumption, ignition is turned off.
crane location, and other data that may be transmitted 7. Press the back button to return to the Dia
via satellite to our telematics partner. A crane owner gnostics and Monitoring menu or press the Work
may access this data by subscribing to the telematics ing Screen button to return to the normal
feature through our telematics partner. A crane owner working screen.
may then use some or all of the data transmitted from
the crane’s onboard computers to monitor the crane’s Computer Return And Stored Data Disclosure
activity, location, maintenance/service schedule, and/ In the event the Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL), Load
or other areas to assist them in managing this crane. Moment Indicator (LMI), or other computer containing
recorded/stored data on this crane is returned to
Note: LinkBelt recognizes that each individual
LinkBelt Construction Equipment Company (LBCE) or
crane’s data transmitted via telematics is the prop
the original equipment manufacturer (OEM) of an
erty of the crane owner.
onboard computer, for service or replacement, the
crane owner must submit a written request to have the
Data sharing is offered by LinkBelt through our
recorded/stored data on that computer downloaded to
telematics partner in an effort to provide LinkBelt dis
an electronic device that is to be returned to the crane
tributors and our crane owners with overall enhanced
owner before any examination and/or work is started
product support through filed troubleshooting, exped
on that specific computer.
ited parts procurement, infield repairs and other vari
ous support outlets. Any data shared by the crane Should LBCE direct the crane owner to return an
owner is a “snapshot” of the data from the crane. onboard computer to the OEM of that computer, LBCE
LinkBelt may request the crane owner “share data”. recommends the crane owner submit a written request
The crane owner should determine who and when spe to the OEM requesting the OEM download the
cific data related to their crane is shared. LinkBelt and recorded/stored data to an electronic device and
its representatives may be in possession of specific return that device to the crane owner prior to any
crane data only when the crane owner selects “share examination and/or work being started on that specific
data”. computer.
Shared data received by LinkBelt is not intended to be In some instances, in order to read data
“stored” in any permanent data file at our factory. recorded/stored in an onboard computer special
Shared data may exist at the factory location through equipment is required, and access to the crane and/or
the normal course of business until deleted by auto the computer is needed. LinkBelt or the OEM of the
matic expiration. computer has the special equipment necessary to
retrieve the recorded data, or directions on how the
LinkBelt reserves the right to modify this policy as re
quired and make every reasonable attempt to notify data may be retrieved. Please contact your nearest
telematics subscribers of changes to this policy. LinkBelt distributor for assistance.
It is the position of LinkBelt that the crane owner
Transmitting Data owns any data that is recorded and stored in the
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main onboard computer system(s) installed on our
Menu button . cranes.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-96
Telematics

Operator's Manual
Ground Bearing Pressure Monitoring Live Data
The ground bearing pressure screen is offered as an The live data screen may be used for monitoring the
operator’s aid in the RCL system to further assist oper ground bearing pressure while lifting the load. Func
ators in monitoring and understanding the ground tion limiters do not activate when ground bearing pres
bearing pressures in real time in order to lift loads sures are exceeded.
safely. The operator can set up the alarms for excess
ive ground bearing pressure by inputting the max pres
sure limit in “Operator Settable Alarms” section in this WARNING
Operator's Manual.
The live ground bearing pressure mode must
Ground bearing pressures are calculated based on not be used to determine whether the crane
surface types, crane configurations input by Operator, will tip over or not.
and readings from several sensors. Those sensors in
clude but not limited to: boom and boom head angle
sensors, boom hoist cylinder pressure sensors, boom Note: It is not recommended to use the live ground
length encoders, upper slew angle sensor, list and trim bearing pressure screen during lift crane operation.
inclinometers, etc. Use the live ground bearing pressure screen to tem
porarily monitor the cranes ground bearing pres
sure.
WARNING
No actual sensors are present for the direct Simulation Mode
measurement of the ground bearing The simulation mode allows the operator to forecast
pressures. It is operator’s responsibility to what the ground bearing pressure would be by input
input the correct crane configurations in order ting a simulated load manually without lifting the load.
for the RCL system to estimate the ground Operator may then operate the crane through the mo
bearing pressures accurately. tions of what the lift would be and predict whether the
maximum pressures would be exceeded or not. The
The ground bearing pressure monitoring system can simulation mode can be used for lifting planning and
be operated in two modes: live data and simulation lifting dryruns on the job site.
modes.
WARNING
While in simulation mode, lifting a load on
hook is prohibited and do not lower the boom
below the minimum boom angle.
All warnings, i.e., audible and bar graph for visual, and
function limiters are still active and are based on actual
load on hook in both live data and simulation modes.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-97
Ground Bearing Pressure Surface Type
Ground Bearing Pressure Surface Type Selection 3. Scroll to Ground Bearing Pressure, and press the
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main OK/Enter button .
Menu button . 4. Scroll to Live Data, and press the OK/Enter button
2. Scroll to Diagnostics and Monitoring, and press . Refer to Figure 1-98.
the OK/Enter button . 5. In the Live Data screen example in Figure 1-98,
3. Scroll to Ground Bearing Pressure, and press the the crane is setup with the upper in the 90° position
or over the right of the lower. The blue bars display
OK/Enter button .
the pressures on each side of the lower. The pres
4. Scroll to the proper surface per application, and
sure on the left side is 8 psi (55.2kpa) and the pres
press the OK/Enter button .
sure on the right side is 12 psi (82.7kpa). The dis
5. Press the back button to return to the Ground tances of 16.5 ft (5.03m), on the outsides of each
Bearing Pressure menu or press the Working track, indicate the length of each track that has a
Screen button to return to the normal working downward force on it which is creating the ground
screen. bearing pressure. The decrease in the distance of
Ground Bearing Pressure Live Data Selection the pressure indicates the decrease in contact
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main area between the tracks and the ground surface.
Menu button . The screen also includes the bar graph on the left
2. Scroll to Diagnostics and Monitoring, and press side of the screen which indicates how much of the
the OK/Enter button . crane's capacity is being used and the rate at which
an overload is being approached.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-98
Ground Bearing Pressure Live Data
6. Press the back button to return to the Ground 6. Enter the weight of the simulated load, and press
Bearing Pressure menu or press the Working the OK/Enter button .
Screen button to return to the normal working 7. In Figure 1-99, a simulated weight of 21,200 lb
screen. (9 616kg) was entered.
Ground Bearing Pressure Simulation Selection 8. In the Simulation Mode screen example in
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main Figure 1-99, the crane is setup with the upper in
Menu button . the 90° position or over the right of the lower. The
2. Scroll to Diagnostics and Monitoring, and press blue bars, which indicate the pressure on the
the OK/Enter button . lower, could be in a triangular shape when the upper
3. Scroll to Ground Bearing Pressure, and press the is in other positions, i.e., 45° position or over a
OK/Enter button . corner of the lower.
4. Scroll to Simulation, and press the OK/Enter but 9. Press the back button to return to the Ground
ton . Refer to Figure 1-99. Bearing Pressure menu or press the Working
5. Press the keypad button to enter into keypad Screen button to return to the normal working
screen.
mode.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-99
Ground Bearing Pressure Simulation Mode

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-100
Active System Faults
Active System Faults

The Active System Faults menu displays current sys 4. Scroll to the fault code to be addressed, and press
tem faults. Refer to Figure 1-100 and the System the OK/Enter button .
Faults Messages chart. 5. The message selected, meaning of the message,
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main and how to clear the message will be displayed.
Menu button . 6. Press the back button to return to the System
2. Scroll to Diagnostics, and press the OK/Enter but Faults menu or press the Working Screen button
ton . to return to the normal working screen.
3. Scroll to Active System Faults, and press the OK/
Enter button .

Operator's Manual
Active System Faults Messages
Message Meaning How To Clear Message
Verify display is properly connected to the
DispComErr Display communication lost. CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring includ
ing termination resistors.
Verify boom reel is properly connected to
ATBComErr ATB switch communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
including termination resistors.
Verify ATB switch is functioning properly.
ATBShort ATB switch short circuit. Check wiring between ATB switch and
boom reel.
LenComErr Boom length sensor communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
Verify boom length is properly calibrated.
LenDataErr Boom length sensor data is invalid. Verify boom length value changes when ex
tending or retracting the boom.
Verify boom length and boom controller are
Boom length sensor and boom controller properly calibrated. Verify sensor boom length
LenReduErr
length don't agree. and boom controller length both change when
extending or retracting the boom.
AngleComErr Boom angle sensor communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
Verify boom angle is properly calibrated.
AngleDataErr Boom angle sensor data is invalid. Verify boom angle value changes when rais
ing or lowering the boom.
Verify boom angle is properly calibrated.
Boom angle sensor and head angle sensor
AngleReduErr Verify boom angle and head angle both
don't agree.
change when raising or lowering the boom.
HeadComErr Head angle sensor communication lost. the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
Verify head angle is properly calibrated.
Check wiring between head angle sensor
HeadDataErr Head angle sensor data is invalid.
and boom reel. Verify head angle changes
when raising or lowering the boom.
Verify head pressure sensor is properly con
HPresComErr Head pressure sensor communication lost. nected to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus
wiring including termination resistors.
Verify rod pressure sensor is properly con
RPresComErr Rod pressure sensor communication lost. nected to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus
wiring including termination resistors.
Verify display is properly connected to the
DispIOComErr Display I/O communication lost. CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring includ
ing termination resistors.
Verify boom controller is properly connected
BoomComErr Boom controller communication lost. to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wiring
Verify telematics module is properly connec
Telematic
Telematics module communication lost. ted to the CAN bus. Check all CAN bus wir
sModComErr
ing including termination resistors.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-101
Sensor Data Screen
Sensor Data 3. Scroll to Sensor Data, and press the OK/Enter but
The Sensor Data menu displays data being read by ton .
various sensors on the crane. Refer to Figure 1-101. 4. The data being generated by the various sensors
1. From the normal working screen, press the Main will be displayed.
Menu button . 5. Press the back button to return to the Dia
2. Scroll to Diagnostics, and press the OK/Enter but gnostics menu or press the Working Screen button
ton . to return to the normal working screen.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-102
Highlight Data
Highlight Data Menu 3. Scroll to Display Options, and press the OK/Enter
button .
The Highlight Data menu allows the Operator to select
4. Scroll to Highlight, and press the OK/Enter button
specific data to be highlighted on the normal working
.
screen. The data will appear with a purple highlighting.
5. Scroll to the information to be highlighted, and
press the OK/Enter button .
6. Repeat Step 5 for each item to be highlighted.
Menu button .
7. Press the back button to return to the Display
2. Scroll to Crane Configuration, and press the OK/
Options menu or press the Working Screen button
Enter button .
to return to the normal working screen.

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-103
About Screen
About Menu 1. From the normal working screen, press the Main
Menu button .
The About menu displays which version of the Display,
2. Scroll to About, and press the OK/Enter button .
ECM, and Boom Controller software is currently in
3. Press the back button to return to the Main
stalled. Refer to Figure 1-103. The crane serial num
menu or press the Working Screen button to
ber is also displayed on this screen.
return to the normal working screen.

Operator's Manual
6
7
1. Offset Lattice Fly Tip Section
2. Offset Lattice Fly Center Section
3. Offset Lattice Fly Base Section
4. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave
5. Five Section Boom
6. Front Winch
7. Rear Winch
Figure 1-104
Typical Crane Attachment Setup (Provided for correct identification of attachments)

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-105
Lower Steps
Entering And Exiting The 1. Function Lockout Switch

This switch is used to disable the hydraulic func
Operator's Cab tions which are operated by the control levers and
Entering or exiting the operator's cab could be hazard boom telescope foot pedal. The switch is on the
ous if certain aspects are not taken into consideration. right seat console. Refer to Figure 1-54. Press
The elevation of the operator's cab alone could cause the bottom part of the switch to disable hydraulic
serious injury from a fall. For this reason steps are functions and to prevent inadvertent operation of
mounted on each side frame. Refer to Figure 1-105. these controls. To allow normal operation of the
Lower the steps to provide easy access to the opera control levers and boom telescope foot pedal,
tor's cab. press the top part of the function lockout switch.
The bottom part of the switch will illuminate to indi
Cab walks are mounted on the crane and should be cate the switch is in the “OPERATION” position.
unfolded when entering/exiting the operator's cab. Re This switch should always be in the “DISABLE” po
fer to Figure 1-106. Release the latches to unfold the
sition when entering or exiting the operator's seat.
cab walks. Numerous hand grips are also attached to
the operator's cab to provide safe entry to the operat
or's cab. Remain in three point contact with the crane
at all times (two hands and one foot or two feet and one
hand). Use these features to make climbing on the
crane as safe as possible.

Operator's Manual
1
Latch Position Latch Position
Cab Walk Cab Walk

1. Cab Walks
2. Latch - 8 Places
Unfolded Folded
Figure 1-106
Cab Walks
2. Movable Left Side Console Lifting the left side console also performs the same
The left side console is hinged at the rear to allow duty as the function lockout switch, described pre
the operator to lift the console up, out of the way viously, disabling all hydraulic functions related to
while entering or exiting the operator's cab. A the control levers and boom telescope foot pedal.
spring assists movement of the console. Lifting the left side console also automatically ap
plies the swing park brake. Ensure the left side
console is lifted up, out of the way before attempt
ing to enter or leave the operator's cab.
WARNING One more feature which is available to ease entry
To prevent personal injury do not attempt to and exit of the operator's cab, is the adjustable op
enter the operator's cab prior to raising the left erator's seat. Lift the left arm rest up out of the way
side console. and move the seat and/or console back as re
quired to allow safe entry. This feature also pro
vides operator comfort during crane operation as
well. Refer to “Operator's Seat” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual for complete seat operating
instructions.

Operator's Manual
A B A
A
B
1
1
1. Quick Release Pin
Figure 1-107
Upper Guard Rails - Working Position
position at all times except during crane transport.

Upper Guard Rails Refer to Figure 1-107. Position the rails in the storage/
The crane is equipped with guard rails on the upper to transport position before transporting the crane. Refer
make access to upper components safer when servi to Figure 1-108.
cing the crane. The rails should remain in the working

Operator's Manual
A B A
A
B
1
1. Quick Release Pin
Figure 1-108
Upper Guard Rails - Stored/Transport Position

Operator's Manual
the fire extinguisher. A charge indicator on the fire
Before Starting Operations extinguisher monitors the pressure within the tank.
Before starting daily operations, make the following Check the indicator daily to ensure the fire extinguisher
checks and inspections: is adequately charged and ready for use.
Engine Boom Distortion Due To Thermal Effects
Check fuel, oil, and cooling systems for proper fluid lev Of The Sun
els. Check for leaks. Repair or fill as required. Refer to The heat from the sun may have a thermal effect on the
the engine manufacturer's manual for additional in sides of telescopic booms causing the sides of the
formation. boom to expand (lengthen). The sides of the boom
Gear Cases may not expand equally if the boom is extended for
long periods of time with only one side of the boom ex
Visually inspect all gear cases for leaks or damage. If
posed to the sun. The unequal expansion may cause
leaks or damage exists, repair and fill case(s) to proper
boom distortion (the boom may “deflect” to one side).
lubrication level.
This is more noticeable with long boom lengths and/or
Hydraulic System long booms with long lattice flys attached to the boom.
Check all hoses for chafing, bulging, or other damage. For example, a 100 ft (30.5m) main boom, with a 50°F
Replace as necessary. Inspect hydraulic system for ex (10°C ) temperature differential between the two sides
ternal leaks. Repair as needed. Check hydraulic reser of the boom, may cause the centerline of the main
voir oil level. Add oil if necessary. boom head to “deflect” as much as 3 ft (0.9m) off the
centerline of the crane. Attaching a lattice fly to the
Lubrication same boom may cause the centerline of the fly head to
Lubricate the crane as outlined in Section 2 of this Op “deflect” even more off the centerline of the crane. This
erator's Manual. “deflection” to one side creates a “side load” on the
boom and/or fly. Side load on a boom or fly, whether
Note: Operators may have nothing to do with lubri
induced by the load or thermal effects, is dangerous
cation or maintenance of the crane, but it could be
and shall be avoided.
advantageous for them to be familiar with it. Knowl
edge of preventive maintenance makes the opera Prior to lifting any loads, inspect the boom or boom and
tor more aware of malfunctions in the crane so re fly combination to ensure they are straight. If the boom
pairs can be made with a minimum of downtime. or boom and fly combination is not straight, ensure that
all the boom wear pads are properly adjusted.
If the boom is distorted due to temperature differential
Wire Rope And Sheaves on the sides of the boom, reposition the boom to allow
Inspect all wire rope and sheaves for damage or dete the thermal effects from the sun to equalize the temper
rioration. Replace as necessary. atures of the side walls of the boom to eliminate the dis
General Inspection tortion before lifting a load.
Visually inspect the entire crane for loose or missing
cotter pins, bolts, boom damage, or fly chord and/or Engine Starting Procedure
lattice damage. Check for oil or fluid leaks. Make re
pairs as needed. WARNING
Electrical System This Operator's Manual and the engine
Check the operation of all lights, windshield wipers, manufacturer's manual must be thoroughly
horns, etc. Repair as needed. read and understood by the operator before
starting the engine. Serious personal injury
Controls and/or major crane damage could result from
Check all controls for proper operation and adjust
improper operating procedures.
ment. Repair as needed.
Fire Extinguisher Before attempting to start the engine, the operator should
carefully read and understand the engine starting
A fire extinguisher is mounted in the operator's cab. It
instructions in the engine manufacturer's manual and
is an ABC type fire extinguisher, meaning it is capable
this Operator's Manual. Attempting to start or run the
of extinguishing most types of fires. The operator
engine before studying these instructions may result in
should be familiar with its location, the clamp
engine damage. With the crane fully serviced and the
mechanism used to secure it in place, and foremost the
operator familiar with all gauges, switches, controls, and
operation of the device. Specific instructions,
having read and fully understood this entire Operator's
regarding operation, are given on the label attached on
Manual, start the engine using the following procedures.

Operator's Manual
a. Engine Oil Pressure - Observe engine oil pres
WARNING
sure indicator light on the Crane Control Display.
If light does not go out after engine runs 10-15
seconds, shutdown engine immediately and re
pair the problem to avoid major engine damage.
Refer to the engine manufacturer's manual for
proper oil pressure operating range.
b. Coolant Temperature Gauge - Observe the
coolant temperature gauge on the Crane Con
trol Display to ensure engine is warming up to
the proper operating temperature. For proper
Figure 1-109 cooling system operating temperature range,
Starting Fluid Warning Label refer to the engine manufacturer's manual.
c. Battery Indicator Light - Observe battery indic
ator light on the Crane Control Display to ensure
battery and electrical system is working properly.
WARNING 8. When the engine has thoroughly warmed up, after
Diesel exhaust fumes can be all pressures and temperatures are within operat
harmful. Start and operate ing ranges, and all daily checks have been made,
engine in a well ventilated area. the crane is ready for operation.
If it is necessary to operate in an
enclosed area, vent the exhaust Engine Shutdown Procedure
to the outside. Properly 1. Lower any load to the ground and properly secure it.
maintain the exhaust system to Fully retract and lower the boom.
its original design. 2. Engage the travel swing lock.
1. Walk around the crane to verify that there are no 3. Throttle the engine back to idle.
persons under, or in close proximity to the crane. 4. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” position.
2. Sound the horn twice in succession and wait 5. If leaving the operator's cab, press the function
10-15 seconds while making a visual check to lockout switch to the “Disable” position and raise
verify that there are no persons under or in close the left console to disable hydraulic controls.
proximity to the crane. 6. Remove the ignition key from the operator's cab and
3. Ensure the function lockout switch is in the “Disable” lock the door if the crane is to be left unattended.
position and swing park brake is applied. The en
gine will not start if swing park brake is not applied.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position to en
Cold Engine Starting
ergize the engine electrical system. To help ignition in cold ambient conditions, air intake
5. If required, allow the “Wait To Start” indicator light heater is used to warm the intake air prior to starting the
(on the Crane Control Display) to go out. engine. This improves combustion efficiency which aids
6. Turn the ignition switch to the “Start” position. Re in starting a cold engine. With the ignition switch in the on
lease the ignition switch immediately after the en position, the ECM senses ambient air temperature then
gine starts. If the engine fails to start in 30 seconds
determines if the air intake must be energized to warm
and the “Wait To Start” indicator light begins to
the intake air. A “Wait To Start” indicator light on the
flash, release the ignition switch and allow the
starter motor to cool a few minutes before trying to Crane Control Display will illuminate to alert the operator
start the engine again. If the engine fails to start af not to crank the engine because the combustion cham
ter four attempts, refer to the engine manufactur ber is too cold for fuel ignition. When the cylinders are
er's manual for instructions. warm enough to ignite the first charges of fuel, the indica
tor light will go out and the engine can be started.
Note: If the ignition switch is turned to the
“Start” position and nothing happens, turn the
ignition switch back to the “Off” position, then DANGER
back to the “Start” position.
Do not use starting fluids to aid in engine start
7. Warm Up - Run the engine at low throttle with no up. This engine is equipped with a glow plug
load while the engine is warming up. Observe the type cold starting aid and use of a starting
following instruments for proper indications. fluid can cause an explosion resulting in
serious personal injury or death.

Operator's Manual
1. Preheater Receptacle
Figure 1-110
Electric Engine Block Preheater
To Stop The Electric Engine Block Heater

Electric Engine Block 1. Unplug the extension cord from electrical source
Preheater and the preheater receptacle on the crane.
2. Properly store the extension cord.
The electric engine block preheater uses electrical
power to heat the coolant and circulate it through the
engine. The electric engine block preheater receptacle
is on the left side of the upper. Refer to Figure 1-110.
To Start The Electric Engine Block Preheater

1. Park the crane in a suitable area for storage, en
gage the travel swing lock, and shutdown the en
gine.
WARNING
Areas adjacent to the preheater must be clean
and free of oil and debris to avoid possible fire
hazard.
2. Plug an approved extension chord into the recep

tacle on the left side of the upper. Plug the chord
into the receptacle as indicated by the identifica
tion label. Plug the other end into a 110-120V
electrical source.
Note: Unplug the engine block preheater be

fore starting the engine.

Operator's Manual
1 2
5 4 3
1. Time Display 4. Heater ON/OFF Button 7. Memory Timer Preset Display
2. Heater ON Indicator 5. Program Selection Button 8. Alarm Clock Display
3. Left/Right Buttons 6. Clock Button 9. Day Of The Week Display
Figure 1-111
Diesel Fired Engine Block Preheater Controls
Diesel Fired Engine Block

WARNING
Preheater (If Equipped) Diesel exhaust fumes can be
The diesel engine block preheater uses diesel fuel to harmful. Start and operate
power the unit and to heat the coolant and circulate it engine block preheater in a well
through the engine. The controls for the preheater are ventilated area. If it is
located on the right side control console in the operat necessary to operate in an
or's cab. Refer to Figure 1-111. enclosed area, vent the exhaust
to the outside. Properly
maintain the exhaust system to
WARNING its original design.
Explosion hazard!
Do not operate the preheater while refueling.
Do not operate the preheater in an area where
toxic or explosive materials or fumes may be
present.

Operator's Manual
Starting Preheater Heater Preset Operation
Manual: Press the Heater ON/OFF button (continu The preset starting time is the time at which the timer
ous heat mode). Heater ON indicator will illuminate. switches the heater on automatically. Three memory
preset locations numbered 1 to 3 are available. Each
Automatic: Set the timer up to 2 hr. before you want to memory location can be assigned a given time togeth
start the engine. The heater will start up at set time.
er with the day of the week of which only one can be
Note: If heater is being switched on while the en activated at any one time. It is recommend that
gine is warm only the circulating pump will run. memory locations 1 and 2 be used for presetting start
Coolant temperature must fall below 86°F. (30°C ) ing times within 24 hours of setting the timer. Memory
before heater starts. location 3 can be used for a starting time within the next
7days of setting the timer.
Startup Sequence: Setting The Heater Preset Start Time
1. The coolant circulating pump, ceramic igniter, and 1. Press the button. The timer memory preset loc
combustion air fan start operation and after ap ation number will flash.
proximately 60 seconds combustion starts (aud 2. Continue to press the button until the desired
ible combustion sound). preset number 1, 2, or 3 is visible.
2. After the coolant temperature has reached the set 3. Press the or button to select day of the week.
point of 170°F (77°C ) the preheater automatically Heater will start on the time and day selected.
adjust its heat output to a lower operating range Once set, wait for flashing to stop. To program the
(part-load heat output). If the temperature of the other 2 memory preset locations, repeat proced
coolant continues to rise and climb over 174°F ure for each location.
(79°C ) at the heater outlet, the heater will cycle off.
3. When the temperature falls below 149°F (65 °C) Operating Time Duration Operation
the heater will restart and repeat the heating cycle.
The period of time during which the heater is in opera
tion is referred to as operating time. The heater re
Stopping Preheater mains in operation for as long as the operating time has
Manual: Press the Heater ON/OFF button . Heater been preset. Heater operation can be preset for any
ON indicator will extinguish. Combustion is extin time from as little as 1 minute to a maximum of 120
guished followed by an after run cycle of approximately minutes (factory preset is 60 minutes).
90 seconds.
Setting The Operating Time Duration
Automatic: When the timer has reached the end of the 1. The heater must be switched off. Press the but
timed cycle (up to 2 hours). ton for 3 seconds - operating time is flashing.
2. Set the desired operating time using the and
Timer Operation buttons.
The timer enables you to preset the start time of the
heater up to 7 days in advance. When the heater is in Remaining Operating Time Operation
operation, the display and operation buttons of the The remaining operating time refers to the time the
timer are illuminated. heater still continues to remain in operation after the ig
nition is turned off. It can only be changed while the
heater is in operation and the ignition switched off.
Setting The Remaining Operating Time

Set the desired remaining operating time (1 to 120
minutes) using the and buttons.

Operator's Manual
Setting The Clock And Day Of The Week Setting The Alarm Clock
1. Press and hold the button until time of the day Repeatedly press the button until the bell symbol
starts flashing. appears on the display. Set the desired wake up time
2. Set the clock using the and buttons. using the and buttons. The alarm clock turns
3. After 5 seconds, day of the week begins flashing. off after 5 minutes or when one of the buttons is
4. Set the day of the week in the same manner as the pressed. The alarm time is not bound to a specific day
time. of the week.
Viewing The Time To recall the alarm time, repeatedly press the but
ton until bell symbol a
ppears on the display. To era
The clock time can be displayed with the ignition se the wake up time: press the button until the bell
switched off by pressing the button. symbol is no longer visible on the display.

Operator's Manual
General Failure Symptoms
Failure Symptom Probable Cause Remedy
Coolant heater No combustion after Switch off heater momentarily and switch on once again.
switches off automat start or automatic re
ically (Fault Lockout) peat start.
Flame extinguishes Switch off heater momentarily and switch on once again.
during operation.
Heater overheats Check coolant lines for obstructions, closed valves and kinks.
Check coolant level. Allow heater to cool down, reset over
heat. Limiter, switch off heater momentarily and switch on
once again.
Crane electrical sys Charge the battery.
tem voltage too low. Switch off the heater momentarily and switch on once again.
Heater expels black Combustion air and/ Check combustion and exhaust ducting for obstructions.
fumes from exhaust or exhaust ducting
blocked.
Troubleshooting 4. Wait a further 30 seconds and then turn the heater

off.
The following describes basic troubleshooting proced 5. Reinsert 15A fuse after waiting 3 to 10 seconds
ures for the coolant heater. Troubleshooting is nor after shutting off the heater.
mally limited to the isolation of defective components 6. Wait a further 10 seconds and turn the heater back
and should be done by trained, certified personnel on again.
only.
The lockout mode should now be canceled and the
Before troubleshooting, check for and eliminate these heater operating normally.
potential component failures:
• Blown fuses Maintenance
• Fuel supply (plugged fuel filter)
• corrosion on battery terminals, electrical wiring, con The heater requires a minimum of maintenance to
nections, and fuses. keep in good operating condition. The following main
• loose contact on connectors tenance procedures should be performed annually be
• wrong crimping on connectors fore each heating season:
H
eater Lockout Reset Procedure Annual Maintenance
The coolant heater is designed with a lockout safety Enclosure And Heater
feature built in to the control unit. After 3 consecutive • Clean the heater and enclosure box from any accu
unsuccessful startup attempts, the heater will lock itself mulated debris or dust with compressed air.
out from any further start attempts. The heater may al • Inspect all components for wear and damage.
so enter the lockout mode after experiencing an over
heat condition. The following procedure will clear the Electrical System
lockout mode and reset the heater for normal opera • Check wiring harnesses fro damage, repair or re
tion: place if damaged.
1. Remove the 15A fuse , refer to wiring diagram • Check the condition of the batteries and the connec
Figure 1-112 for identification. Wait 10 seconds tions.
before reinserting. This is done to prepare the con
• Load test the batteries and replace if required.
trol unit for resetting.
2. Wait a further 10 seconds after reinserting the 15A Note: The heater will not function properly with
fuse. Turn the heater on using the On/Off button. weak batteries.
3. Wait 10 seconds after turning the heater on and re
move 15A fuse again.

Operator's Manual
Combustion Air System Coolant System
• Check for obstructions at air intake port. • Inspect all coolant lines and clamps for leakage, re
• Check air intake tube carefully for restrictions and strictions, or damage. Repair or replace as required.
damage. Repair or replace as required. • Inspect coolant circulation pump for leakage. Repair
or replace as required.
Exhaust System
• Check the exhaust system carefully for restrictions or Operational Test
corrosion. Repair or replace as required • Run the heating system for at least 15 minutes.
• Check water and fuel connections for leakage.
Fuel System
Re‐tighten hose clamps if necessary.
• Change fuel filter located on the left side of the fuel
tank. Inspect fuel line for damage, restrictions, Note: Operate the heater at least once a month for
routing, or loose connections. Repair or replace as 10 minutes.
required.

Figure 1-112
DIESEL HEATER
Coolant Heater Wiring Diagram

X2 X1
1 2 123456
15 AMP
12 VOLT CAB
602A RED 602B RED 602S BRN A
POWER STUD
2 AMP 602P BLK B FUEL PUMP
602C RED 602D RED
2 AMP 602U VIO DIAGNOSTIC PLUG
602E RED 602F RED 602H RED
602R BLK 602R BLK
602P BLK
30 602J VIO 624F BLK 7 - HOT
87A 602G RED 602J VIO 8 WATER
5 602K BLK 624D VIO VALVE
87 10 +
602L BLK 86
85 602T VIO 602V VIO
602X VIO
602N BLK 602N BLK
Section 1 - Operating Instructions

602V VIO
602M BLK 602M BLK
624C ORG 624G ORG
624H ORG
624J ORG 1
10
11 23:59
2
CONNECTION
624D VIO 8
HOT WATER VALVE

6
624F BLK
DIESEL HEATER TIMER
9
7
4
12
1-135
Operator's Manual
Operator's Manual
Red
3 2 1
Power Source Crane Batteries
ÌÌÌÌ
Black
Upper Frame
Ground
Figure 1-113
Battery Cable Connections
1. Check all battery terminals and remove any corro

Jump Starting The Crane sion before attaching jumper cables.
The electrical system is a DC 12 volt negative (-) 2. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to the
ground. To jump start the crane, a 12V power source positive (+) terminal of the discharged battery.
and two (2) jumper cables are required. 3. Connect the other end of the first cable to the posi
tive (+) terminal of the power source or booster
battery.
WARNING 4. Connect one end of the second jumper cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the power source or boost
To avoid serious personal injury and/or major
er battery.
equipment damage, follow these procedures
5. Connect the other end of the second cable to a
in the order they are given.
ground location on the upper frame as far away
Wear protective clothing and shield your face from crane batteries as possible.
and eyes when working around batteries. 6. If another vehicle is used to jump start the crane,
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns start the booster vehicle. Ensure booster vehicle
skin, eyes, and clothing. and crane are not touching. Run the booster ve
Do not jump start a damaged battery. Ensure hicle's engine at a moderate speed.
vent caps are tight and level. If another 7. Turn on the ignition switch and allow discharged
vehicle is used, ensure booster vehicle and batteries to charge for a few minutes prior to at
crane are not touching. tempting to start the disabled crane.
8. Start the disabled crane. After the crane is started,
The gases around the battery can explode if
remove the jumper cables in reverse order.
exposed to open flames or sparks. An
9. Let the crane's engine run for a few minutes to
explosion could result in serious personal
charge the discharged batteries.
injury and/or major equipment damage.
10. Check the battery indicator light on the Crane Con
Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso trol Display.
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
hands after handling. Note: If the batteries are extremely discharged,
voltage may increase slowly.

Operator's Manual
b. Always use chains, wire ropes, and/or slings of
General Operation ample size and make periodic checks of their
The following procedure contains helpful information condition.
for typical lift crane operation. This information is gen c. Always use sufficient parts of line. Refer to the
eral in nature and is not intended to serve as a fail safe Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating
procedure for any and all situations. The operator Manual for the number of parts of line needed
must, at all times, be alert and fully aware of the load for a given lift.
requirements and specific job site conditions. The op d. When lifting loads, care should be taken to pre
erator must be ready and able to perform any change vent sudden loading or unloading of the winch
in procedure, in a moments notice, to safely operate wire rope. Ease into the load. Lift the load a
the crane as the immediate situation changes. few inches (centimeters) off the ground and
hold to check the winch brakes.
Note: Before operating the crane near airports, ra 9. Boom to the desired angle. Lift the load to the de
dio and microwave towers, power lines, etc., always sired height. Be careful when booming down or
review and comply with all local, state, and federal swinging the load, as these increase the load ra
laws. dius and result in a decrease in capacity. Ensure
the load being lifted remains within the lifting ca
pacity of the crane for the boom length, radius, and
Lift Crane Operation working area being used.
Cranes are used primarily for making heavy lifts. In or 10. Control the load at all times. Use hand lines to
der to do this properly, certain procedures must be fol guide the load. Do not guide loads into place with
lowed. The following is a suggested procedure for your hands. Swing slowly and smoothly. Avoid
making typical lifts: jerks when starting or stopping swings.
1. Determine the weight to be lifted. Add the weight of
the hook block, hook ball, slings, rigging, fly, etc. De
termine height to which the load must be lifted.
During Operation
2. Refer to the Working Areas, Working Range, and The operator must remain alert to possible malfunc
the appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating tioning of the crane while operating. If the crane does
Manual. Find the shortest boom length and load malfunction, lower the load and shutdown the crane
radius that will accomplish the job and assemble until the problem is found and corrected. During op
the crane accordingly. eration, the operator must:
3. Position the crane so a minimum swing is necessary. 1. Remain alert to any noise, loss of power, or bad re
4. The crane must be supported by a firm, level sur
sponse to control of the crane. Watch the engine
face before starting to lift. All capacities (except list
oil pressure indicator light and coolant tempera
capacities) in the Crane Rating Manual are based
ture gauges for proper operating ranges.
on the crane being level in all directions. If the
2. Watch the hydraulic system oil temperature
crane is not level, out swing or side swing of the
load will greatly reduce lifting capacities and could gauge. If the temperature exceeds maximum tem
cause crane damage or an accident. If the ground perature, shutdown the crane until the problem is
is soft, use mats. corrected. (Refer to Section 2 of this Operator's
5. Check that the proper counterweight arrangement Manual for the maximum temperature for each vis
is properly installed. Do not make lifts which ex cosity of hydraulic oil.)
ceed capacity chart specifications. 3. Listen for any unusual noises in the hydraulic system,
6. Check that the correct configuration has been en power train, and gear boxes. If any, correct problem.
tered in the Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL). 4. Watch for oil leaks or any loss of control. If any de
7. Raise the boom and swing over the load. velop, correct before continuing operation.
8. Lower the hook block or hook ball and fasten it to 5. Ensure all controls work freely and easily, with no
the load. The following points must be observed: sticking or binding. Lubricate or adjust as necessary.
a. The boom head must be directly above the 6. Periodically check to confirm the crane is level and
load. (Booms are made to lift, and should not stable.
be used to drag a load sideways.) 7. Heed all DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION la
bels. Observe good safety practices at all times.

Operator's Manual
Standard Hand Signals For Controlling Crane Operations
TRAVEL TRAVEL
HOIST LOWER USE MAIN HOIST (One Track) (Both Tracks)
USE WHIP LINE RAISE BOOM LOWER BOOM SWING STOP
RAISE THE BOOM AND LOWER THE BOOM AND EXTEND BOOM RETRACT BOOM
MOVE SLOWLY LOWER THE LOAD RAISE THE LOAD (Telescoping Booms) (Telescoping Booms)
EXTEND BOOM RETRACT BOOM

TRAVEL DOG EVERYTHING EMERGENCY STOP (Telescoping Booms) (Telescoping Booms)
Reprinted from ASME B30.5-2011 by permission of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers. All rights.
Figure 1-114
Hand Signals
These signals should be used at all times unless voice

Hand Signals instructions with a radio or telephone are being used.
Hand Signals are important for communications be One person should be designated as a signal person
tween the designated signal person and the operator. and their signals obeyed by the operator. Obey a stop
A Hand Signals Chart, Figure 1-114, is included in this signal from anyone.
Section of this Operator's Manual. A copy is also on the
right side window in the operator's cab and on the left
rear of the upper.

Operator's Manual
1 1
Operator's Cab Lower
1. Emergency Engine Stop Button
Figure 1-115
Emergency Engine Stop Buttons
Emergency Engine Stop

Buttons
There are two emergency engine shutdown buttons on
the crane. One is mounted in the operator's cab and
the other is mounted on the right front of the lower.
Refer to Figure 1-115. Either of the emergency en
gine shutdown buttons can be used to shutdown the
engine in emergency situations. Press an emergency
engine stop button to shutdown the cane in an emer
gency situation. Reset the operator's cab button by
turning it counterclockwise. Reset the lower button by
pulling it out.

Operator's Manual
1. Service Stop Button
Figure 1-116
Service Stop Button
Service Stop Button There is a service stop button on the left rear of the up
per. Refer to Figure 1-116. Press this button before
entering the crane to connect the counterweight hy
draulic hoses. Pressing this button will stop all crane
DANGER functions (except counterweight cylinders for raising
Pressing the service stop button disables and lowering the counterweight) by disabling pilot con
pilot control functions. It does not stop the trol oil pressure. The message area of the RCL Display
engine. Precautions must be taken before will alert the operator that control function are disabled
servicing, assembling, or disassembling the when this button is pressed. Pull the button out to re
crane. Serious personal injury may result. store crane functions.

Operator's Manual
3. Install the side frames. Refer to “Side Frame Install
Crane Assembly And ation” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
Disassembly 4. Install the upper counterweights. Refer to “Upper
Counterweight Installation” in this Section of this
When transporting, the crane may require disassembly. Operator's Manual.
When at the job site, it will require reassembly. The fol
lowing instructions are recommended, safe proce Crane Disassembly
dures for assembling and disassembling the crane.
Due to job site conditions and the availability of auxiliary Note: When using the crane boom for lifting
equipment, other methods may be used only if they are during all self disassembly procedures, use the
proven, safe methods. If any questions exist about the “Standard” boom mode and a fully retracted
safety of any procedure, contact a Link‐Belt Distributor. boom.
1. Extend the side frames to the fully extended posi

Crane Assembly tion. Refer to “Extending The Side Frames” in this
Note: When using the crane boom for lifting Section of this Operator's Manual.
2. If equipped, store or remove the fly. Refer to Sec
during all self assembly procedures, use the
tion 4 of this Operator's Manual.
“Standard” boom mode and a fully retracted
3. Remove the upper counterweights. Refer to
boom.
“Counterweight Installation And Removal” in this
1. Unload the crane from the transport vehicle. Refer Section of this Operator's Manual.
to “Unloading The Crane” in this Section of this Op 4. Remove the side frames. Refer to “Side Frame Re
erator's Manual. moval” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
2. Install the lower counterweights if required. Refer 5. Remove the lower counterweights. Refer to
to “Lower Counterweight Installation“ in this Sec “Lower Counterweight Removal” in this Section of
tion of this Operator's Manual. this Operator's Manual.
6. Load the crane onto the transport vehicle. Refer to
“Loading The Crane” in this Section of this Operat
or's Manual.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
BACK
STABILITY
ON JACKS
Do not exceed maximum boom
angles listed in the Crane Rating
Manual. This crane can tip over
when on jacks.
12' 9.72”
(3.9m)
1' 0”
Axle Beams (0.3m)
2' 0”
Fully Extended (0.6m)
Figure 1-117
Base Crane Transporting
5. Position the lifting jacks and beams to the self as

Unloading The Crane sembly position. Refer to “Lifting Jack Operation”
1. Park the transport vehicle on a firm level surface. in this Section of this Operator's Manual and
Figure 1-118.
Note: A firm level surface is required to support
6. Lower the jacks until they contact the ground.
the weight of the crane on jacks while unloading
7. Remove all tie downs that secure the crane to the
the crane. Use matting under the pontoons as
transport vehicle
required to support the weight of the crane.
8. Raise the crane on jacks until there is enough
2. Check that the boom is at 0° boom angle or less. clearance (approximately 1-2 in. [2.54-5.08cm])
3. Check that all control levers are in the neutral posi between the deck of the transport vehicle and the
tion. bottom of the lower frame to allow the transport ve
4. Check that the travel swing lock is engaged. hicle to be driven from under the crane. Refer to
“Lifting Jack Operation” in this Section of this Oper
ator's Manual and Figure 1-118.
WARNING Note: Place matting under each pontoon, as re
quired to provide enough clearance between
Do not swing the upper while the crane is the deck of the transport vehicle and the bottom
loaded for transport. Crane may tip over of the lower frame to drive the transport vehicle
causing major crane damage and/or serious from under the crane.
personal injury. Ensure the travel swing lock
is engaged. 9. Carefully and slowly drive transport vehicle from
under the crane.
10. Set the Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) to the current
crane configuration. Refer to “Rated Capacity Lim
iter” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
BACK
STABILITY
ON JACKS
when on jacks.
45 in (1.1m)
1-2 in.
(2.54-5.08cm)
39 in (1.0m)
24 in (.61m)
Figure 1-118
Jack Operation
8. Raise the crane on jacks until there is enough

Loading The Crane clearance (approximately 1-2 in. [2.54-5.08cm])
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface.
between the deck of the transport vehicle and the
Note: The surface must be firm and level to sup bottom of the lower frame to allow the transport ve
port the weight of the crane on jacks while load hicle to be driven under the crane. Refer to “Lifting
ing the crane. Use matting under the pontoons Jack Operation” in this Section of this Operator's
as required to support the weight of the crane. Manual and Figure 1-118.
2. Extend the side frames. Refer to “Extending Side Note: Place matting under each pontoon, as re
Frames” in this Section of this Operator's Manual. quired to provide enough clearance between
3. Remove upper counterweights. Refer to “Upper the deck of the transport vehicle and the bottom
Counterweight Removal” in this Section of this Oper of the lower frame to drive the transport vehicle
ator's Manual. under the crane.
4. Remove side frames. Refer to “Side Frame Remov
9. Carefully and slowly back transport vehicle under
al” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
the crane.
5. Remove lower counterweights. Refer to “Lower
10. Use blocking as required under the axles and/or
Counterweight Removal” in this Section of this Oper
lower frame to prevent the crane from rocking once
ator's Manual.
it is set on the transport vehicle.
6. Swing the upper directly over the side of the lower
11. Carefully and slowly retract the jacks to lower crane
(boom parallel to the axles) and engage the travel
onto transport vehicle. Refer to “Lifting Jack Oper
swing lock.
ation” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
7. Fully retract and position the boom at 0° boom
12. Properly tie down the crane to the transport
angle or less.
vehicle.

Operator's Manual
1. Jack Pin With Lock Pin (Transport/Working Position) 2

2. Jack Pin With Lock Pin (Self Assembly Position)
Figure 1-119
Position Lifting Jacks
WARNING Lifting Jack Operation

BACK The lifting jacks are used to assist in self assembly of the
STABILITY crane and to extend and retract the side frames. Use the
ON JACKS following procedures to operate the lifting jacks.

WARNING
when on jacks. The crane must be on a firm, level, supporting
surface before operating jacks. Use matting
Figure 1-120
under the pontoons as required to support the
Back Stability On Jacks Warning
weight of the crane. Failure to do so may
result in serious personal injury and/or major
equipment damage.
Operate the jacks within a range so that the
crane tilt angle does not exceed 1°. If the tilt
angle exceeds 1° the crane may tip over
resulting in serious personal injury and/or
major crane damage.
Engage the travel swing lock.
Perform operating functions by using the
switches on the remote control box. Controls
on the lower should only be used in
emergency situations.
Do not lift loads with the crane raised on jacks
with both side frame installed. No capacities
are listed for this configuration as crane
damage may occur. Lower crane on side
frames and refer to the Crane Rating Manual
for lifting capacities.

Operator's Manual
1
2
1 2
TRANSPORT POSITION SELF ASSEMBLY POSITION
INFORMATION
TRANSPORT/
WORKING PIN
POSITION
SELF ASSEMBLY
PIN POSITION
TRANSPORT
POSITION
SELF ASSEMBLY
POSITION
WORKING
POSITION
SELF ASSEMBLY
TRANSPORT/ POSITION
WORKING
POSITION
2
1
WORKING POSITION TRANSPORT/

WORKING PIN
POSITION
SELF ASSEMBLY
PIN POSITION
1. Jack Pin With Lock Pins

2. Beam Pin With Lock Pin
Figure 1-121
Position Jack Beam

Operator's Manual
WARNING
NOTE PONTOON
ORIENTATION
Refer to Operator's
Manual before
operating jacks.
1 2
18” 24”
1. Pontoon
2. Alignment Arrows 2
Figure 1-122
Pontoon Installation
Raising The Crane 5. Remove pontoons from storage. The contact sur
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the face of the pontoons is 18 x 24 inches (.46 x .61m).
upper directly over the end of the lower and en Place the pontoons on the ground with the 24”
gage the travel swing lock. (.61m) length parallel to the side frame.
2. Fully retract and position the boom to 0° boom
angle or less. Note: There are alignment arrows on the pon
3. Remove the jack pin securing the jack cylinder in toons. Direction of arrows must be parallel to
the transport/working position. Refer to the side frame.
Figure 1-119. Tilt the jack cylinder to the self as
6. Place matting under each pontoon as required to
sembly position. Secure the jack cylinder in the
self assembly position by installing the jack pin. support the weight of the crane.
Secure the jack pin with lock pins. Repeat for the Note: The surface must be firm and level to sup
remaining jacks. port the weight of the crane on jacks. Use mat
4. Remove the beam pin securing the lifting jack
ting under the pontoons as required to support
beam in the transport/working position. Refer to
the weight of the crane.
Figure 1-121. Swing jack beam to the self as
sembly position. Secure beams in the self as
sembly position by installing the beam pin. Secure
the beam pin with lock pin. Repeat for the remain
ing beams.

Operator's Manual
8
7
4 5
10 9
1. Axle Beam Extend/Retract Switch 5. Left Rear Extend/Retract Jack Switch (4) 8. Service Stop Button
2. Right Front Extend/Retract Jack Switch (2) 6. Left Front Extend/Retract Jack Switch (1) 9. Electronic Level Indicator Connection
3. Right Rear Extend/Retract Jack Switch (3) 7. Manual Jack Cylinder Control Box 10. Storage Connection
4. On/Off Switch
Figure 1-123
Install Remote Control Box
7. Properly start the engine.

7
Note: The engine can be started using the en
gine ignition switch in the manual jack cylinder
control box. Refer to Figure 1-124. Refer to
“Engine Starting Procedure” in this Section of 6
this Operator's Manual for safety procedures
when starting the engine.
1 5
8. Connect the remote control box to the lower frame.
Refer to Figure 1-123 . Move the power switch on
2 4
the remote control box to the “ON” position.
Note: Manual jack cylinder control switches are 3

mounted on the right front of the lower frame.
These switches can be used if there is a mal
function with the remote control box. If manual
controls are used, a signal person must be used
to assist in the lifting jack procedure.
1. Right Rear (3) 5. Left Rear (4)
9. Extend jack cylinders to the pontoons. Latch pon 2. Right Front (2) 6. Horn Button
toons to cylinder rods. 3. Engine Ignition Switch 7. Emergency Engine
4. Left Front (1) Stop Button
Note: Each jack cylinder is labeled with a num
Figure 1-124
ber that corresponds to numbers on the jack
Manual Jack Cylinder Control Box
cylinder controls.

Operator's Manual
1 FRONT 2
10 4
9 3
8 2
LEFT 1 RIGHT
5 11
6 12
7 13
4 BACK 3
• RED LED's Correspond To The Four Labeled Lifting • RED LED'S 4, 7, 10, And 13 Correspond To Tilt
Jacks Angles Greater Than 3 Degrees
• GREEN Center LED 1 Is Activated When Crane Is • Extend Jack 1 If Any RED LED's 8-10 Are Activ
Level. ated.
• RED LED's 2, 5, 8, And 11 Correspond To Tilt Angles • Extend Jack 2 If Any RED LED's 2-4 Are Activated.
Of 1 To 2 Degrees • Extend Jack 3 If Any RED LED's 11-13 Are Activ
• RED LED's 3, 6, 9, And 12 Correspond To Tilt Angles ated.
Of 2 To 3 Degrees • Extend Jack 4 If Any RED LED's 5-7 Are Activated.
Figure 1-125
Electronic Level Indicator
10. Extend the jack cylinders until crane begins to 12. Disconnect and store the remote control box and
raise. Level the crane before continuing. Connect electronic level. Place the connector in the storage
the electronic level indicator. Figure 1-123. Use connection position. Refer to Figure 1-123.
the electronic level indicator to assist in leveling the 13. Move the engine ignition switch in the manual jack
crane. Refer to Figure 1-125. After crane is level, cylinder control box to the “Off” position to shut
extend jack cylinders (keeping crane level within down the engine. Refer to Figure 1-124.
1° tilt angle) to the desired height. Use the elec 14. Start the engine from the operator's cab and set
tronic level indicator to assist in maintaining the 1° the RCL System to the current crane configuration.
tilt angle. Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Section of
this Operator's Manual.
Note: Use the bubble level mounted on the
lower frame as a backup if required to determ
ine when the crane is level.
11. Move the power switch on the remote control box

to the “OFF” position.

Operator's Manual
Lowering The Crane
WARNING
The crane must be on a firm, level, supporting
surface before operating jacks. Use matting
under the pontoons as required to support the
weight of the crane. Failure to do so may
result in serious personal injury and/or major
equipment damage.
Operate the jacks within a range so that the
crane tilt angle does not exceed 1°. If the tilt
angle exceeds 1° the crane may tip over
resulting in serious personal injury and/or
major crane damage.
Figure 1-126
Perform operating functions by using the Pontoon Storage
switches on the remote control box. Controls
on the lower should only be used in
emergency situations. 5. Slowly retract the jack cylinders (keeping crane
level within 1° tilt angle) as it is lowering. Connect
1. Properly start the engine. the electronic level indicator. Refer to
Figure 1-123. Use the electronic level indicator to
Note: The engine can be started using the en assist in maintaining the 1° tilt angle. Refer to
gine ignition switch in the manual jack cylinder Figure 1-125.
control box. Refer to Figure 1-124. Refer to
“Engine Starting Procedure” in this Section of Note: Use the bubble level mounted on the
this Operator's Manual for safety procedures lower frame as a backup if required to determ
when starting the engine. ine when the crane is level.
2. Ensure that the travel swing lock is engaged and Note: Each jack cylinder is labeled with a num
the boom is positioned to 0° boom angle or less. ber that corresponds to numbers on the jack
3. Ensure the RCL System is set to the current crane cylinder controls.
configuration.
4. Connect the remote control box to the lower frame. 6. Slowly continue to retract the jack cylinders (keep
Refer to Figure 1-123. Move the power switch on ing crane level within 1°) until the side frames are
the remote control box to the “ON” position. resting on the ground.
7. Fully retract the jack cylinders to allow for removal of
Note: Manual jack cylinder control switches are the pontoons. Remove the pontoons from the jack
mounted on the right front of the lower frame. cylinders and properly store them. Move jacks and
These switches can be used if there is a mal beams to the transport/working position. Refer to
function with the remote control box. If manual Figure 1-121.
controls are used, a signal person must be used 8. Move the power switch on the remote control box
to assist in the lifting jack procedure. to the “OFF” position.
9. Disconnect and store the remote control box and
electronic level. Place the connector in the storage
connection position. Refer to Figure 1-123.
10. Move the engine ignition switch in the manual jack
cylinder control box to the “Off” position to shut
down the engine. Refer to Figure 1-124.
11. Start the engine from the operator's cab and set
the RCL System to the current crane configuration.
Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Section of

Operator's Manual
1
2
1. Counterweight Lifting Lugs 3. Lower Connecting Pin With 4. Adjusting Bolt

2. Mounting Hooks Lock Pin
Figure 1-127
Lower Counterweight Installation
2. When using the crane to install the lower counter

Lower Counterweight weights, always refer to the Crane Rating Manual
Installation And Removal to ensure capacities are not exceeded. Using the
crane's boom or an auxiliary lifting device of suit
able size and strength, slowly lift the lower counter
Lower Counterweight Installation weight. Lower counterweight weighs approxim
1. Install a sling on one of the lower counterweights. ately 12,500 lb (5 670kg).
3. Align the counterweight with the mounting hooks
WARNING on the lower frame and slowly lower the lower
counterweight onto the mounting hooks. Refer to
When using the crane's boom to handle the
Figure 1-127. Continue to lower until the lower
lower counterweights, always refer to the
connecting pin holes are aligned.
appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual to ensure lifting capacities are not 4. Install the lower connecting pins and secure with
exceeded. the lock pins.
Note: If the lower connecting pins are difficult to

install due to the alignment of the pin holes, use
the adjusting bolt to align the holes.

Operator's Manual
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 for the other lower coun 3. When using the crane to install the lower counter
terweight. weights, always refer to the Crane Rating Manual
6. Set the RCL System to the current crane configura to ensure capacities are not exceeded. Using the
tion. Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Sec crane's boom or an auxiliary lifting device of suit
tion of this Operator's Manual. able size and strength, slowly lift the lower counter
weight. Lower counterweight weighs approxim
Lower Counterweight Removal ately 12,500 lb (5 670kg).
1. Remove the lower connecting pins. Refer to 4. Repeat Steps 1 through 3 for the other lower coun
Figure 1-127. terweight.
2. Install a sling on one of the lower counterweights. 5. Set the RCL System to the current crane configura
tion. Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Sec
WARNING tion of this Operator's Manual.

lower counterweights, always refer to the
appropriate capacity chart in the Crane Rating
Manual to ensure lifting capacities are not
exceeded.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
BACK
STABILITY
ON JACKS
when on jacks.
2 2
1 1
1. Rated Capacity Radius 2. Lower Counterweight
Figure 1-128
Side Frame Installation And Removal
360° Side Frame Installation And

Removal
Side Frame Installation
WARNING
Do not place your body between the side
frame and lower frame during the installation
process. Serious personal injury may result.
1. Unload the crane from the transport vehicle. Refer to

“Unloading The Crane” in this Section of this Oper
ator's Manual.
Figure 1-129 2. Install lower counterweights if required. Refer to
On Jacks, No Tracks Working Area “Lower Counterweight Installation” in this Section of
3. Remove axle beam covers. Refer to Figure 1-131.
4. Ensure the RCL System is set to the current crane
configuration.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
BACK
STABILITY
ON JACKS
when on jacks.
2 2
1 1
1. Rated Capacity Radius 2. Lower Counterweight
Figure 1-130
Side Frame Installation And Removal
5. Maneuver transport vehicle, which contains the first Note: Take precautions to prevent hydraulic
side frame to be installed, to position the side frame hoses from being damaged during installation.
within rated capacity radius and within the on jacks,
no tracks working area shown on the RCL Display. 7. When using the crane to install the side frames, al
Refer to Figure 1-128 and Figure 1-129. ways refer to the Crane Rating Manual to ensure
capacities are not exceeded. Slowly lift the side
Note: Travel motors on the side frames must be frame off the transport vehicle.
positioned inside and to the rear of the lower
frame. The manual jack cylinder controls are
mounted on the front of the lower frame.
WARNING
6. Using the crane's boom or an auxiliary lifting side frame, always refer to the appropriate
device of suitable size and strength, rig the nylon capacity chart in the Crane Rating Manual to
tri‐sling (provided) to the side frame. The side ensure lifting capacities are not exceeded.
frames weigh approximately 28,750 lb (13 041kg)
each with 36” (.91m) track shoes or 31,000 lb (14 8. Carefully position the side frame onto the end of
062kg) each with 44” (1.12m) track shoes. the lower axle beams.

Operator's Manual
5 6
4 4
1. Retaining Pin And Cotter Pin 3. 1” (2.54cm) Diameter Bolts 5. Hydraulic Hoses
2. 2.5” (6.35cm) Diameter Pin 4. Jam Nuts 6. Axle Beam Covers
Figure 1-131
Side Frame Connection
WARNING
angle before swinging the rear of
the upper over the same side as
Over Side the first installed side frame while
on jacks. Crane may turn over
backwards. Boom must be
positioned at or below the
maximum angle listed below
before swinging the upper.
Figure 1-132 Track Counterweight Max Boom
On Jacks, One Track Working Area Shoes Upper + Lower Angle
0+0 62°
9. Connect side frame to axle beams using the 2.5 in 36”
(6.35cm) diameter pins. Refer to Figure 1-131. 0+A 72.5°
Remove tri‐sling. 0+0 58°
10. Position the boom at or below maximum angle listed 44”
0+A 68°
at right. Slowly swing the upper over the side oppos
ite the installed side frame.

Operator's Manual
A 6
B 1 2 7
3 4 5
1. Case Drain 4. Track Tension 6. Forward Travel

2. Side Frame Extend 5. Two Speed Travel 7. Reverse Travel
3. Side Frame Retract
Figure 1-133
Hydraulic Hose Connections
11. Maneuver transport vehicle, which contains the the following page and within on jacks, one track
second side frame to be installed, to the side oppos working area shown on the RCL Display. Refer to
ite the installed side frame. Position the transport Figure 1-130 and Figure 1-132.
vehicle so the side frame is within the radius listed on

Operator's Manual
Track Counterweight
Radius Side Frame Removal
Shoes Upper+Lower
13-16 Ft
0+0
(4.0-4.9m) WARNING
36” Do not place your body between the side
13-18 Ft
0+A frame and lower frame during the removal
(4.0-5.5m)
process. Serious personal injury may result.
13-15 Ft
0+0
(4.0-4.6m) 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface.
44”
13-17 Ft 2. Extend the side frames to their fully extended posi
0+A
(4.0-5.2m) tion. Refer to “Extending Side Frames” in this Sec
tion of this Operator's Manual.
Note: Travel motors on the side frames must be 3. Remove the upper counterweights. Refer to “Upper
positioned inside and to the rear of the lower Counterweight Removal” in this Section of this Oper
frame. The manual jack cylinder controls are ator's Manual.
mounted on the front of the lower frame. 4. Slowly swing upper over the side of the lower. Apply
12. Repeat Steps 6 through 9 to install the other side the swing park brake.
frame. 5. Maneuver transport vehicle to the left or right side of
13. Fully retract the jack cylinders to lower the side the lower. Position the transport vehicle so the side
frames to the ground. Do not exceed 1° tilt angle frame is within the radius listed below and within on
during the lowering process. Refer to “Lifting Jack jacks, one track working area shown on the RCL
Operation” in this Section of this Operator's Manu Display during removal of the first side frame. Refer
al. to Figure 1-130 and Figure 1-132.
14. Loosen the jam nuts on the 1” (2.54cm) diameter
Track Counterweight
bolts. Refer to Figure 1-131. Tighten the bolts Radius
Shoes Upper+Lower
against the axle beam and tighten the jam nuts to
secure side frame to axle beam. Install retaining 13-16 Ft
0+0
pins and cotter pins into the 2.5 in (6.35cm) diamet (4.0-4.9m)
36”
er pins. Repeat for the other axle beam. Refer to 13-18 Ft
0+A
Figure 1-131. (4.0-5.5m)
15. Connect side frame to axle beam hydraulic hoses.
13-15 Ft
16. Connect the hydraulic hoses for the travel motor 0+0
(4.0-4.6m)
lines, side frame extend/retract lines, 2‐speed 44”
travel line, drain line, and the track tension line (four 13-17 Ft
0+A
places). Refer to Figure 1-133. Do this on both (4.0-5.2m)
side frames.
17. Install drive motor covers.
18. Set the RCL System to the current crane configura
WARNING
tion. Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Section When using the crane's boom to handle the
of this Operator's Manual. side frame, always refer to the appropriate
capacity chart in the Crane Rating Manual to
ensure lifting capacities are not exceeded.
6. Disconnect the hydraulic hoses for the travel motor

lines, side frame extend/retract lines, 2‐speed
travel line, drain line, and the track tension line (four
places). Refer to Figure 1-133. Do this on both
side frames.
Note: Take precautions to prevent hydraulic
hoses from being damaged during removal.
7. Remove all axle beam covers from both side frames.

Operator's Manual
8. Loosen the jam nuts on the 1” (2.54cm) diameter
bolts. Refer to Figure 1-131. Loosen the bolts WARNING
from the axle beam. Bolts should be flush with the
bottom of plate. Remove retaining the pin and cot Do not exceed maximum boom
ter pin from the bottom of the 2.5 in (6.35cm) dia angle before swinging the rear of
meter pins. Repeat for the other axle beam. the upper over the same side as
9. Move the jacks and jack beams to the self as the first installed side frame while
sembly position. Raise the crane on jacks until the on jacks. Crane may turn over
side frames just clear the ground. Refer to “Lifting backwards. Boom must be
Jack Operation” in this Section of this Operator's positioned at or below the
Manual. maximum angle listed below
10. Set the RCL System to the current crane configura before swinging the upper.
tion. Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Sec
Track Counterweight Max Boom
tion of this Operator's Manual. Shoes Upper + Lower Angle
11. Disconnect side frame from the axle beams by re
moving the 2.5 in (6.35cm) diameter pins. Refer to 0+0 62°
36”
Figure 1-131. 0+A 72.5°
12. When using the crane to remove the side frames,
0+0 58°
always refer to the Crane Rating Manual to ensure 44”
capacities are not exceeded. Using the crane's 0+A 68°
boom or an auxiliary lifting device of suitable size
15. Slowly lower the boom at or below maximum boom
and strength, rig the nylon tri‐sling (provided) to
angle listed above and position the side frame onto
the side frame. The side frames weigh approxi
the transport vehicle. Remove the tri‐sling.
mately 28,750 lb (13 041kg) each with 36” (.91m)
16. With the boom at or below maximum angle listed
track shoes or 31,000 lb (14 062kg) each with 44”
above, slowly swing the upper directly over the
(1.12m) track shoes.
same side as the remaining side frame. Apply the
13. Release swing park brake.
swing park brake.
17. Maneuver transport vehicle, to load the second side
WARNING frame to be removed, to position the transport
When using the crane's boom to handle the vehicle so the side frame is within rated capacity radi
side frame, always refer to the appropriate us and within on jacks, no tracks working area
capacity chart in the Crane Rating Manual to shown on the RCL Display. Refer to Figure 1-128
ensure lifting capacities are not exceeded. and Figure 1-129.
18. Repeat Steps 11 through 14 for the second side
14. Slowly lift the side frame off the axle beam. frame.
19. Position the side frame onto the transport vehicle.

Operator's Manual
1 1
1
5 5 5
2 3 4
1. Extend Position Pin 4. Fully Retracted Beam [Not Applicable When Equipped With
2. Fully Extended Beam 44” (1.12m) Track Shoes]
3. Intermediate Extended Beam 5. Slight Gap
Figure 1-134
Axle Beam Positions
Extending And Retracting Extending Side Frames

1. Park the crane on a firm, level supporting surface
The Side Frames and position the upper over the end of the lower.
The side frames can be used in any one of three
2. Fully retract and position boom at approximately
positions when equipped with 36” (091m) track shoes;
45 degrees.
fully retracted, intermediate extended, or fully
3. Remove the upper counterweights from the upper.
extended. [The fully retracted position is not applicable
Refer to “Upper Counterweight Removal” in this
when equipped with 44” (1.12m) track shoes.] The
Section of this Operator's Manual.
side frame extend and retract function is controlled by a
4. Position the lifting jacks in the self assembly posi
switch in the operator's cab (Refer to Figure 1-42 ) or
tion and the jack beams in the working position.
the switch on the remote control box (Refer to
Raise the crane on jacks until the weight of the
Figure 1-124 ) and the extend position pins on the
crane is lifted off the axle beams, evidenced by a
lower (Refer to Figure 1-134). The extend position
slight gap between the top of the axle beams and
pins control the extend length of the beams. They
the wrapper on the lower frame. (Do not raise the
allow for beams to be fully extended, or limits them to
crane too high as this will create a loading between
intermediate extended length(s) based on the selected
the bottom of the axle beams and the wrapper on
position of the extend position pins. The side frames
the lower frame.) Refer to “Lifting Jack Operation”
must be pinned at equal extension for all lifting
in this Section of this Operator's Manual and
operations on the side frames.
Figure 1-134.
5. Remove the extend position pins from the right
side axle beams. Refer to Figure 1-134.

Operator's Manual
5. Position the lifting jacks in the self assembly posi
WARNING tion and the jack beams in the working position.
Raise the crane on jacks until the weight of the
When making lifts on side frames, all axle crane is lifted off the axle beams, evidenced by a
beams must be equally extended; all fully slight gap between the top of the axle beams and
retracted [fully retracted position is not the wrapper on the lower frame. (Do not raise the
applicable when equipped with 44” (1.12m) crane too high as this will create a loading between
track shoes], all intermediate extended, or all the bottom of the axle beams and the wrapper on
fully extended. Failure to do so will cause a the lower frame.) Refer to “Lifting Jack Operation”
loss of stability and possible crane damage in this Section of this Operator's Manual and
and/or personal injury. Figure 1-134.
6. Push the side frame extend switch to the “Extend” 6. Remove the extend position pins from the right
position and hold until the right side axle side axle beams. Refer to Figure 1-134.
beams are extended to desired position. Release
the switch.
7. Install the extend position pins in the appropriate
WARNING
extended position. Refer to Figure 1-134. When making lifts on side frames, all axle
8. Remove the extend position pins from the left side beams must be equally extended; all fully
axle beams. Refer to Figure 1-134. retracted [fully retracted position is not
9. Push the side frame extend switch to the “Extend” applicable when equipped with 44” (1.12m)
position and hold until the left side axle beams track shoes], all intermediate extended, or all
are extended to desired position. Release the fully extended. Failure to do so will cause a
switch. loss of stability and possible crane damage
10. Install the extend position pins in the appropriate and/or personal injury.
extended position. Refer to Figure 1-134.
7. Push the side frame extend switch to the “Retract”
11. Lower the crane and completely retract lifting jack
position and hold until the right side axle
cylinders. Properly remove and store pontoons
beams are retracted to desired position. Release
and position jack cylinders and beams in the work
the switch.
ing position. Refer to “Lifting Jack Operation” in
this Section of this Operator's Manual.
position. Refer to Figure 1-134.
12. Configure upper counterweights to an allowable
9. Remove the extend position pins from the left side
configuration per the current side frame position.
axle beam. Refer to Figure 1-134.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual to determine
10. Push the side frame extend switch to the “Retract”
the allowable counterweight combinations. In
position and hold until the left side axle beams
stall upper counterweights. Refer to “Upper Coun
are retracted to desired position. Release the
terweight Installation” in this Section of this Operat
switch.
or's Manual.
position. Refer to Figure 1-134.
tion. Refer to “Rated Capacity Limiter” in this Section
12. Lower the crane and completely retract lifting jack
cylinders. Properly remove and store pontoons
and position jack cylinders and beams in the work
Retracting Side Frames ing position. Refer to “Lifting Jack Operation” in
1. Park the crane on a firm, level supporting surface
and position the upper over the end of the lower.
13. Configure upper counterweights to an allowable
configuration per the current side frame position.
2. Properly store the fly if equipped. Refer to Section
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual to determine
4 of this Operator's Manual.
the allowable counterweight combinations. In
3. Remove the upper counterweights from the upper.
stall the upper counterweights. Refer to “Upper
Refer to “Upper Counterweight Removal” in this
Counterweight Installation” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual.
4. Fully retract and position boom at approximately
45 degrees.

Operator's Manual
5
2
3
2
Component Weight
lb kg
“A” CTWT W/Cylinders 19,000 (8 618)
“B” CTWT 16,000 (7 257)
“C” CTWT 16,000 (7 257)
1. “A” Counterweight Lifting Shackles 3. Connecting Link 5. “B” Counterweight
2. “A” Counterweight W/Cylinders 4. Lock Pin 6. “C” Counterweight
Figure 1-135
Counterweight Installation
terweight installation/removal cylinders. They can be

Upper Counterweight installed to the upper in “A”, “AB”, or “ABC ” com
Assembly, Installation, And binations depending upon the desired capacities.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual to determine the
Removal allowable counterweight combinations.
The upper counterweights can be assembled with the
crane. They are installed and removed using the coun

Operator's Manual
Upper Counterweight Assembly
Assemble the upper counterweights on a firm level sur
face. The crane can be used to assemble the upper
counterweights. When using the crane to handle the
upper counterweights, ensure the RCL System is set to
the current crane configuration and always refer to the
Crane Rating Manual to ensure capacities are not ex
ceeded. 1
WARNING
Lift the “A”, “B”, and “C” counterweights
separately when assembling and
disassembling the counterweights. Do not lift
the “ABC” counterweights together. Major
crane damage and/or serious personal injury
may result. Use the “A” counterweight lifting
shackles to lift the “A” counterweight with
cylinders only.
13.42 in (34.1cm)
Assemble the counterweights for the “A”, “AB”, or 1. Service Stop Button
“ABC” combination as required per the following: Figure 1-136
1. Lift the “A” counterweight with cylinders off the Position Crane
transport vehicle and set on a firm level surface.
2. Position the “B” counterweight onto the “A” coun
terweight. Secure the counterweights with the Upper Counterweight Disassembly
connecting links. Secure connecting links with the 1. Remove lock pins and “C” counterweight connect
lock pins. ing links.
3. Position the “C” counterweight onto the “B” coun 2. Carefully lift “C” counterweight off the “AB” coun
terweight. Secure the counterweights with the terweight stack and onto transport vehicle.
connecting links. Secure connecting links with the 3. Remove lock pins and “B” counterweight connect
lock pins. ing links.
4. Carefully lift “B” counterweight off the “A” counter
weight and onto transport vehicle.
5. Lift the “A” counterweight with cylinders onto trans
port vehicle.

Operator's Manual
5. If required, assemble the upper counterweight.
1 Refer to “Upper Counterweight Assembly” in this
6. Position the crane and/or upper counterweight so
upper counterweight can be lifted with the counter
weight installation/removal cylinders as shown.
7. Set the engine throttle to the low idle position.
8. Connect the remote control box to the rear of the
upper. Move the power switch to the “ON” position
to provide power to the control box.
Note: Manual counterweight control switches

are at the top left side of the frame. These
switches can be used if there is a malfunction
with the remote control box. If manual controls
are used, a signal person must be used to assist
in the counterweight installation procedure.
9. Press the Service Stop Button (on the left rear of

the upper) and raise the left seat console. Counter
weight controls will not function until the left seat
2 console is raised.
10. Connect the counterweight cylinder hoses to the
1. Counterweight Cylinder Hoses Storage Location quick disconnects on the counterweight cylinders.
2. Counterweight Cylinder Hoses Working Location
Note: If hydraulic hoses are difficult to connect,
Figure 1-137
it may be necessary to relieve pressure within
Connect Counterweight Cylinder Hoses
the circuit. To relieve the pressure, move the
counterweight cylinder control switch to the ex
Upper Counterweight Installation tend/retract position momentarily.
Observe the following working conditions for installing
the upper counterweights:
1. Park the crane on a firm supporting surface and
position the upper over either end of the lower. En
gage the travel swing lock.
2. Fully retract boom and boom down to 0 degrees.
3. The side frames must be locked in the fully ex
tended position.
4. A 2° maximum side to side angle is permissible.
WARNING
Counterweight installation and removal must
be done on firm level ground.
Do not swing the crane with the “ABC”
counterweight installed, when the side frames
are retracted. It may cause the crane to tip
over. Place the upper parallel with the side
frames and engage the travel swing lock.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
allowable crane configurations and maximum
boom angles.

Operator's Manual
3 2
1 1
Manual Controls
1. Left Counterweight Cylinder Extend/Retract Switch

2. Right Counterweight Cylinder Extend/Retract Switch Remote Control Box
3. On/Off Switch
Figure 1-138
Upper Counterweight Controls
11. Ensure that the connecting pin is disengaged from

WARNING
the counterweight cylinder assembly on both sides Comply with
with the
the following to prevent personal injury
ÏÏÏ
or machine
injury or machine
damage.damage.
of the upper counterweight. Connecting pin COUNTERWEIGHT PIN INSTRUCTIONS:
ÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Refer to the Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
handle should be pulled out to the limit of its travel. CTWT PIN
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
ÏÏ
DISENGAGED
2
1
CTWT PIN
ENGAGED
1. Connecting Pin
2. Connecting Pin
Handle
Figure 1-139
Connecting Pin Disengaged

Operator's Manual
Figure 1-141
Retract Cylinders/Lift Counterweight
DANGER
Stay clear of the counterweight during the
raising procedure. Failure to do so could
result in serious personal injury if the
1. Mounting Lug counterweight was to fall or move suddenly.
2. Cylinder Rod Hanger All personnel and equipment must be out of
the path of the counterweight.
Figure 1-140
Extend Counterweight Cylinders
13. Simultaneously retract the cylinders to lift the up
per counterweight into position. As the counter
weight is raised, operate one control switch at a
WARNING time if required to keep the counterweight parallel
Ensure the cylinder rod hangers are fully to the bottom of the upper as it moves upward.
seated in the mounting lugs on the upper
before attempting to lift the upper
counterweight. The counterweight could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or and
major crane damage.
12. Fully extend the counterweight installation/remov
al cylinders. Align and retract the cylinder until the
cylinder rod hangers on the end of the cylinder
rods are fully seated in the mounting lugs on the
upper frame.

Operator's Manual
14. Push the connecting pin handle in to install the
counterweight connecting pins and attach the up WARNING
Comply with
with the
the following to prevent personal injury
ÏÏÏÏ
or machine
injury or machine
damage.damage.
per counterweight to the upper frame. Ensure the COUNTERWEIGHT PIN INSTRUCTIONS:
handle is latched all the way into place. Do this on
ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
Ï
ÏÏ
Ï
CTWT PIN
both sides of the upper counterweight. DISENGAGED
15. Slightly extend the cylinders to transfer the weight

to the connecting pins.
16. Move the power switch of the remote control box to CTWT PIN
ENGAGED
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏ
the “OFF” position and disconnect it from the up
per. Properly store the remote control box.
17. If necessary, reset the Service Stop Button.
WARNING 2
Counterweight installation and removal must
be done on firm level ground.
Do not swing the crane with the “ABC”
counterweight installed, when the side frames
are retracted. It may cause the crane to tip
over. Place the upper parallel with the side
1
frames and engage the travel swing lock.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
boom angles.

1. Connecting Pin
2. Connecting Pin Handle - Latched
Figure 1-142
Connecting Pin Engaged

Operator's Manual
Upper Counterweight Removal
Observe the following working conditions for removing WARNING
the upper counterweights: Counterweight installation and removal must
1. Park the crane on a firm supporting surface and be done on firm level ground.
position the upper over either end of the lower. En
gage the travel swing lock. Do not swing the crane with the “ABC”
2. Properly store the fly if equipped. Refer to Section counterweight installed, when the side frames
4 of this Operator's Manual. are retracted. It may cause the crane to tip
3. A 2° maximum side to side angle is permissible. over. Place the upper parallel with the side
4. The side frames must be locked in the fully ex frames and engage the travel swing lock.
tended position. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
boom angles.
5. Fully retract the boom and boom down to 0 de

grees.
6. Press the Service Stop Button (on the left rear of
the upper, refer to Figure 1-136) and raise the left
seat console. Counterweight controls will not func
tion until the left seat console is raised.
7. If not already connected, connect the counter
weight cylinder hoses to the quick disconnects on
the counterweight cylinders. Refer to
Figure 1-137.

Operator's Manual
3 2
1 1
Manual Controls
1. Left Counterweight Cylinder Extend/Retract Switch
2. Right Counterweight Cylinder Extend/Retract Switch
3. On/Off Switch Remote Control Box
Figure 1-143
Upper Counterweight Controls
8. Connect the remote control box to the rear of the 9. Move back away from the counterweight and visu
upper. Move the power switch to the “ON” position ally check that the the counterweight cylinder rod
to provide power to the control box. hangers are fully seated in the mounting lugs on
the upper frame. Raise counterweight (retract cyl
Note: Manual counterweight control switches inders) slightly to relieve pressure on the connect
are at the top left side of the frame. These ing pins.
switches can be used if there is a malfunction 10. Disengage the counterweight connecting pins that
with the remote control box. If manual controls attach the upper counterweight to the upper
are used, a signal person must be used to assist frame. Do this on both sides of the upper counter
in the counterweight removal procedures. weight.
WARNING
Ensure the cylinder rod hangers are fully
seated in the mounting lugs on the upper
before attempting to lift the upper
counterweight. The counterweight could fall
causing serious personal injury and/or and
major crane damage.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal
ÏÏÏÏ
injury or machine damage.
COUNTERWEIGHT PIN INSTRUCTIONS:
ÏÏÏÏ
Ï
CTWT PIN
DISENGAGED 2
ÏÏÏÏ
1
CTWT PIN
ENGAGED
1. Connecting Pin
2. Connecting Pin Handle
Figure 1-144
Connecting Pin Disengaged
DANGER
Stay clear of the counterweight during the Figure 1-145
lowering procedure. Failure to do so could Extend Counterweight Cylinders
result in serious personal injury if the 12. Extend the counterweight cylinders until the
counterweight was to fall or move suddenly. mounting lugs can pass freely through the cylinder
All personnel and equipment must be out of rod hangers. Slowly travel the crane away from up
the path of the counterweight. per counterweights just enough so the mounting
lugs clear the cylinder rod hangers.
11. Simultaneously extend the counterweight cylin 13. Fully retract the counterweight cylinders.
ders to lower the upper counterweights to the
ground. As the counterweights are lowered, oper
ate one control switch at a time if required, to keep
the counterweights parallel to the ground as they
move downward.
CAUTION
Do not allow one side of the counterweight to
contact the ground before the other. Failure to
do so could cause crane damage. The entire
bottom surface of the counterweight must
contact the ground simultaneously.

Operator's Manual
14. Disconnect the counterweight cylinder hoses from
the quick disconnects on the counterweight cylin
ders.
Note: If counterweight cylinders have been ful

ly retracted, relieve hydraulic pressure within
the circuit by moving the cylinder control
switches back and forth several times. This will
ease hose removal during counterweight re
moval process.
15. Move the power switch on the remote control box

to the “OFF” position. Disconnect the remote con
trol box from the rear of the upper. Properly store
the remote control box.
16. If necessary, reset the Service Stop Button on the
left rear of the upper.
18. If required, disassemble the upper counterweight. Figure 1-146
Refer to “Upper Counterweight Disassembly” in this Disconnect Counterweight Cylinder Hoses

Operator's Manual
3 4
3. Front Idler
4. Wedged Blocking
Figure 1-147
Wedged Blocking
2. Move the crane up onto the wedged blocking. En

Wedged Blocking sure blocking is evenly positioned under the end of
(For Over The Front Lifting) each side frame.
The crane has over front lifting capacities when

wedged blocking is placed under the side frame idlers WARNING
to prevent rocking. Ensure that the faces of the wedged blocking
1. Place the wedged blocking under the front end of and the track shoes contact evenly. If
the tracks that the load is being lifted, as shown in surfaces do not contact evenly, wedged
Figure 1-147. blocking may be damaged.

Operator's Manual
Traveling The Crane Traveling On A Slope
(Without A Load Only)
The following information outlines the recommended Travel on a slope is allowed up to a grade of 40%. The
procedures necessary for safe travel of this crane with crane should be traveled straight up or down the slope
or without a load, or when traveling on a slope. with the “heavy” end of the crane facing uphill. (The
Depending upon job site conditions these procedures heavy end of the crane will normally be the counter
can be modified using only known, proven, and safe weight end of the crane.) With less counterweight in
procedures. stalled, the boom end of the crane may be the “heavy”
Regardless of the specific method used to travel the crane, end. If possible, position the boom at a high enough
certain procedures must be followed to prevent damaging boom angle so that the counterweight end of the crane
the crane. Wreckless travel of the crane can lead to crane is the “heavy” end of the crane and travel with the boom
damage, serious personal injury, and/or death. facing downhill. Certain job site conditions may make
Any questions regarding safe travel procedures should this impossible. Traveling on a slope (without a load)
be directed to a Link‐Belt Distributor. with the boom positioned over the side will be allowed
only when conditions prevent traveling with the boom
Traveling Without A Load straight over the end. The following precautions must
be followed.
The crane can be traveled on the job site with the boom 1. Fully extend side frames. Engage the swing park
in the air provided the following precautions for safe job brake and if possible the travel swing lock.
site travel are met. 2. Properly store the fly base and tip, if equipped.
1. Terrain must be smooth and solid. If not, grade and 3. When traveling on a slope, always face the lower
compact the area before moving the crane. straight up or down the slope.
2. Tie down the hook block and/or hook ball to pre 4. Fully retract and position the boom at an angle that
vent them from swinging. provides the best visibility out the right side window
3. Engage the swing park brake and if possible the of the operator's cab.
travel swing lock. 5. Post a signal person to assist in traveling the crane.
4. The boom must be positioned at a boom angle for Ensure the travel alarm is working properly. Use the
which a capacity is given in the Crane Rating horn as a signal. Use a code such as one beep-stop,
Manual. All other boom angles are considered out two beeps-forward, and three beeps-backward. En
side the allowable working range of the crane and sure everyone on the job site knows the code.
travel is not allowed. 6. Always travel in a slow, cautious manner when trav
5. If the fly is erected, the boom must be fully retracted eling on a slope. Use the travel control switch to
and the fly at the 2 degree offset position. The reduce travel speed if necessary.
boom must be positioned at a boom angle for 7. Do not travel with a load on a slope. Major boom off
which a capacity is given in the Crane Rating lead and/or side load will result, which will greatly
Manual for the fly. All other boom angles are con increase the loading into the boom structure.
sidered outside the allowable working range of the 8. Watch the engine service monitor. Be alert to the
crane and travel is not allowed. engine service monitor while traveling on a slope.
6. Position the boom at an angle that provides the All lamps should be off under normal operation. If
best visibility out the right side window of the oper an engine service monitor lamp comes on while
ator's cab while remaining within Step 4 and/or traveling on a slope, the slope may be too great for
Step 5 guidelines above. the crane to traverse. Limited travel will be allowed
7. The boom should be positioned over the front of the only to travel the crane off the slope. Continued op
lower. Certain job site conditions may make this im eration with an engine service monitor light on may
possible. (Travel with the boom positioned over the result in engine damage.
side will be allowed only when conditions prevent 9. Avoid steering on a slope. Steer only as required to
traveling with the boom straight over the front.) travel straight up or down the slope. Always travel
8. Post a signal person to guide you. Ensure the travel straight up or down the slope. Avoid traveling with
alarm is working properly. Use the horn as a signal. a side to side slope. Grade the path to eliminate
Use a code such as one beep - stop, two beeps - any side to side slope.
forward, and three beeps - backward. Ensure eve 10. Maintain gradual approach and departure angles.
ryone on the job site knows the code. Grade the top and bottom ends of a slope to form a
9. Travel slowly and cautiously in order to avoid any shock gentle break‐over angle. This will prevent the
loading on the boom, fly, or crane. Use the travel con crane from lunging when the center of gravity
trol switch to reduce travel speed if necessary. crosses over the top of the slope.

Operator's Manual
Traveling With A Load (Pick & Carry) 6. Do not allow side swing of load.
7. Don't attempt to carry loads which exceed the
The Crane Rating Manual lists the allowable capacities crane's rating.
for traveling with a load (pick and carry) operations. 8. Don't travel with a load on soft ground. If the crane
Use these capacities only for all pick and carry opera sinks into the ground, stability can be affected to
tions. The boom should be positioned over the front of the point of tipping the crane.
the lower. If the load was lifted over the side, swing the 9. Keep all personnel clear of the crane and load. Be
load over the front before traveling. Certain job site prepared to set the load down quickly at anytime in
conditions may make this impossible. (Pick and carry case of an emergency.
with the boom positioned over the side will be allowed 10. Position the boom at a boom angle/boom length
only when conditions prevent traveling with the boom that will give the greatest margin of safety. If the
straight over the front.) The following precautions must load was lifted at a long radius and the load is at or
be followed while traveling with a load. near capacity for that radius, boom up/retract
1. Engage the swing park brake and if possible the boom to obtain a greater lifting capacity (and thus
travel swing lock. a greater margin of safety) before starting travel.
2. Travel only on a smooth level surface. If a smooth 11. Position the boom at an angle that provides the
level route is not available, don't travel with a sus best visibility out the right side window of the oper
pended load. Grade and compact the route to pro ator's cab while remaining within Step 10
vide a firm, smooth, and level path. If it is not pos guidelines above.
sible to grade the route, move the load by step 12. Position a signal person to assist in traveling the
ping. Park the crane on a level area, lift the load, crane. Ensure the travel alarm is working properly.
swing around, and set it down ahead of the crane. Use the horn as a signal. Use a code such as one
Travel the unloaded crane beyond the load, level beep - stop, two beeps - forward, and three beeps
the crane, lift the load, swing, and set it down far - backward. Ensure everyone on the job site knows
ther along the route. Continue this procedure until the code.
the load is at its destination. 13. Travel slowly and cautiously in order to avoid shock
3. Boom must be extended in accordance with loading on the boom, fly, or crane. Use the travel
“Standard” or “A‐Max” boom modes. control switch to reduce travel speed if necessary.
4. Use hand lines to control the load and reduce load Do not let the load swing out or to the side. The
swing. load must be kept directly under the boom point at
5. Carry loads as close to the ground as possible. all times.

Operator's Manual
of
Rotation
12' 9.72”
(3.9m)
1' 0” (.30m)
Transport Weight - 89,000 lb (40 370kg)
Base crane, 850 ft (259.0m) type “ZB” main wire rope, 500 ft (152.4m) type “ZB” auxiliary wire
rope, 2 piece fly, 80 ton (72.6mt) 5 sheave hook block, and 12 ton (10.89mt) hook ball.
Figure 1-148
Transporting The Crane
4. All control levers in operator's cab must be in neu

Transporting The Crane tral and the function lockout switch in the
When transporting the crane, precautions should be “DISABLE” position.
taken in securing the crane to the trailer, barge, or other 5. Remove the keys from the crane. Lock all windows
means of conveyance. The lower cross axles are the and doors.
recommended tie down points. 6. Fold the upper guard rails to the transport position.
Refer to .
7. Fold up the left and right side cab walks. Refer to
CAUTION Figure 1-106.
If chains are wrapped around the cross axles, 8. Fold up the lower steps on the side frames. Refer
be certain the chains will not damage any lines to Figure 1-105.
or components. 9. Securely cover the exhaust to prevent air being
forced into the exhaust. Covering the exhaust will
Always exercise safety and follow all local codes when also help prevent any water or other contamination
loading, unloading, or transporting the crane. from entering the exhaust which could also dam
age the turbocharger.
If the boom must be removed from the crane for trans
port, refer to the crane's Shop Manual for the correct pro
cedure. However, do not transport the the crane with the CAUTION
upper over the end, on retracted side frames with the When a turbocharged engine is not running,
boom removed with “AB” or more upper counterweight. air forced into the exhaust will cause the
Prepare crane as follows before transporting it: turbocharger impeller to spin. Without the
1. Properly disassemble the crane as required to engine running, the turbocharger bearing is
meet all road weight restrictions. Refer to the appli not lubricated. When transporting the crane
cable Sections of this Operator's Manual for the and the exhaust is facing in a direction such
correct procedures. that the travel speed continually forces air into
2. Load the crane onto the transport vehicle. Refer to the exhaust, it may cause major damage to, or
“Loading the Crane” in this Section of this Opera total destruction of the turbocharger.
tor's Manual. Axle beams must be in the fully ex
tended position. 10. Depending on the specific situations, further
3. The upper must be positioned directly over the preparations may be needed to protect the crane
side of the lower with the travel swing lock en from the environment or vandalism. See “Crane
gaged. Storage” in this Section of this Operator's Manual
for further suggestions.

Operator's Manual
2. Use lifting equipment, shackles, slings, chains,
Towing The Crane etc. of suitable size and strength. All lifting equip
Always use good judgment and reliable equipment ment must be inspected before lifting the crane.
when towing the crane. When making connections be The inspection must be recorded and dated in ac
tween the crane and towing vehicle, ensure none of the cordance with current regulations.
connections will cause damage to either vehicle. The 3. Fold up the left and right side cab walks. Refer to
tow lugs are the recommended connection points on Figure 1-106.
the crane. Refer to Figure 1-149. 4. When lifting the entire crane (without fly), extend
Always exercise safety when towing the crane. Pre the side frames to the intermediate position and
pare the crane as follows before towing it. install slings around the beams. Protect slings
1. If equipped, store the fly base and tip on the boom. from any sharp edges.
2. Swing the upper over the end of the lower and en 5. The weights and locations of all CG's include all
gage the travel swing lock. possible options (heaviest crane) except the fly
3. All boom sections must be fully retracted with the base and fly tip. Use the CG's as a starting point.
boom at a 0° angle. Secure the hook block and/or Center hoist line on the CG, lift a few inches (centi
hook ball to prevent excessive swinging. meters) and adjust the hoist line to keep the crane/
4. The engine must be running and the travel levers components level at all times.
engaged to assist in towing the crane. 6. Removal of any components from the crane will
shift the CG of the entire crane. Adjust hoist line to
Lifting The Crane account for the removal of any component.
7. Do not lift crane with fly attached to boom. Dam
The entire crane (except the fly) can be lifted or the age to the fly may result. Remove the fly from the
components may be removed from the crane and lifted crane before lifting. Refer to Section 4 of this Oper
individually. Refer to Figure 1-149 for the center of ator's Manual for the correct procedures for remov
gravity (CG) and weights for the entire crane and the ing the fly.
individual components. The following conditions and 8. Use only properly attached nylon straps to lift fly
precautions must be met before lifting the crane or re base or fly tip to prevent damage to the compo
moving any component. nent. Refer to Figure 1-10. Protect the straps
1. The crane must be parked on a firm level surface from sharp edges.
with the travel swing lock engaged. The swing 9. Do not allow the hoist lines to contact boom while
park brake and 360° swing lock, if equipped, must lifting crane. Damage to the boom may result.
be released.

Operator's Manual
18' FLY BASE
4'-5”
(1.3m) 11'-6” 31' FLY BASE (2 PC) 12'-11” 31' FLY BASE (1 PC)
(3.5m) (3.9m)
FLY LUG FLY LUG FLY LUG

10'-3”
(3.1m)
BOOM 19'-10”
(6.0m)
24' FLY TIP
FLY LUG
BOOM FOOT PIN
6'-7”
(2.0m) BOOM HOIST PIN
AUXILIARY
5'- 8”
ARM BOOM HOIST (1.7m)
CYLINDER
UPPER
SUPERSTRUCTUER
LOWER
COUNTERWEIGHTS COUNTERWEIGHTS
SIDE FRAME
0'-5.0” 0'-7.0”
(0.1m) (0.2m)
COMPLETE
LOWER
OF ROTATION OF ROTATION
TOTAL CRANE 2'-5” (0.7m)
(EXCEPT FLY) 1'-5” (0.4m) LIFT POINTS
WITH CTWT
WITHOUT CTWT FRONT & BACK
DESCRIPTION WEIGHT OF ROTATION TOW & TIE

LOWER 80,980 lb (36 732kg) DOWN POINTS
SIDE FRAMES 57,478 (26 072kg) FRONT & BACK
UPPER 29,702 lb (13 473kg)
BOOM HOIST CYLINDER 4,413 lb (2 002kg)
BOOM W/FOOT PIN 26,190 lb (11 880kg)
AUXILIARY ARM 120 lb (54kg)
HOOK BALL & BLOCK 2,133 lb (968kg)
FLY BASE 10FT 1,496 lb (679kg)
FLY BASE 31FT (1 pc) 1,999 lb (907kg)
FLY BASE 31FT (2 pc) 2,667 lb (1 210kg)
FLY TIP 24 FT 810 lb (367kg)
UPPER COUNTERWEIGHT 51,006 lb (23 136kg)
LOWER COUNTERWEIGHT 25,029 lb (11 353kg)
TOTAL CRANE 222,380 lb (100 870kg)
TOTAL CRANE W/O CTWT & FLY 143,536 lb (65 107kg)
TOTAL CRANE W/O CTWT, FLY 143,536 lb (65 107kg)
& SIDE FRAMES 86,058 lb (39 035kg)
Note: Total crane weight includes load handling equipment at the front tie‐down point and
every option including 31 ft (1pc) fly base and 24 ft fly tip specified above.
Figure 1-149
Lifting The Crane

Operator's Manual
3. Thoroughly clean the crane.
Crane Storage 4. Touch up any spots where paint has chipped. This
Any time the crane is going to be left unattended, it will prevent rusting.
should be prepared so that it will not be damaged by 5. Lubricate the entire crane as per the Lubrication
the elements, be an attraction to vandals, or a plaything Chart. Ensure all gear cases are filled to their
for children. proper oil level.
6. If possible, block the crane up so the tracks clear
Short Term Storage the ground. Ensure the blocking is placed so the
crane cannot fall off it. If this is not possible, set the
1. Do not leave the crane where it will be a traffic haz
crane on planks so the track will not sink in the
ard.
ground. Block the track to prevent the crane from
2. Lower all loads to the ground.
rolling.
3. The boom can be left in the air provided that the 7. Fully retract all hydraulic cylinders. Cover all cylin
“Wind Restriction Guide” in the Crane Rating der rods, machined, and unpainted surfaces with a
Manual is adhered to. If the wind velocity exceeds coat of grease.
the Link‐Belt guidelines at any time during crane 8. The travel swing lock must be engaged.
storage, fully retract the boom and store the boom 9. Tie off the hook block and/or hook ball to keep the
in the fully lowered position. Do not take chances. winch wire ropes snug.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for wind speed 10. All control levers must be in the neutral position
and other applicable restrictions. with the function lockout switch in the “DISABLE”
4. The travel swing lock must be engaged. position.
5. Tie off the hook block and/or hook ball to keep the 11. Cover all open areas around the engine and oper
winch wire ropes snug. ator's cab to prevent entry of water. Cover the en
6. All control levers must be in the neutral position tire engine area with a tarp if possible.
with the function lockout switch in the “DISABLE” 12. Prepare the engine as per the engine manufac
position. turer's manual. Ensure antifreeze protection is suf
7. Block the tracks to prevent the crane from rolling. ficient to prevent the engine from freezing. If anti
8. In cold weather, locate the crane where it will not freeze protection is not adequate, completely drain
freeze to the ground. the engine block.
9. To preserve battery life, move the battery discon 13. To preserve battery life, move the battery discon
nect switches to the off position. nect switches to the off position.
10. Remove the keys from the crane. Lock all windows 14. If in a location where vandalism may occur, remove
and doors. the keys from the crane and lock the operator's
11. Prepare the engine as per the engine manufac cab doors. Cover all operator's cab glass with ply
turer's manual. Ensure antifreeze protection is suf wood or sheet metal to prevent glass breakage.
ficient to prevent the engine from freezing. If anti Provide a means of locking the engine access
freeze protection is not adequate, completely drain doors, fuel tank, and hydraulic reservoir.
the engine block. 15. Store the crane so it does not provide a plaything
for children. Such a unit can be an “attractive nui
Long Term Storage sance” for children to play on. If they fall off it or get
1. Store the crane inside a building if possible. entangled, serious injury may result.
2. The boom can be left in the air provided that the 16. While in storage, the crane should be “exercised”
“Wind Restriction Guide” in the Crane Rating every 60 days to ensure the working condition of
Manual is adhered to. If the wind velocity exceeds the crane. Remove all covers from around the en
the Link‐Belt guidelines at any time during crane gine. Start the engine and operate all switches,
storage, fully retract the boom and store the boom control cables, and hydraulic functions several
in the fully lowered position. Do not take chances. times to circulate lubricants and to keep all mecha
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for wind speed nisms and linkages operative.
and other applicable restrictions. 17. A crane that has been in storage shall have a thor
ough inspection prior to returning the crane to ser
vice.

Operator’s Manual
Table Of Contents
General Lubrication Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Lubrication Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Disposal Of Used Lubricants, Fluids, Etc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Travel Reduction Unit Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Travel Unit Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Travel Reduction Unit Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
Travel Motor Breather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Engine Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

Cooling System Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Cooling System Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
Cooling System Coolant Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Engine Air System Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14

Changing The Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Engine Fuel Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Fuel Filter Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
Primary Fuel Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Secondary Fuel Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
Hydraulic Hose Assembly Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Water Drain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
Hydraulic Reservoir Filter Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
Swing Speed Reducer Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
Winch Drum Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Winch Drum Oil Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventative Maintenance i

Operator’s Manual
Winch Drum Oil Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Boom Inspection And Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
Fly Inspection & Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Wire Rope Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26

Application Of Wire Rope Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Hook Block, Hook Ball, And Swivel Inspection And Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
Turntable Bearing Capscrew Torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Turntable Bearing Capscrew Inspection Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
Crane Monitoring System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
Paint Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Regular Preventative Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
Polishing And Waxing Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
ii Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventative Maintenance

Operator’s Manual
The following procedures are important for proper lu
General Lubrication brication of the crane:
Information 1. Wipe the grease gun nozzle and grease fittings
clean before lubricating. This will help keep dirt
The crane should be regularly and systematically lubri and grit from entering the bushing or bearing.
cated in accordance with the Lubrication Chart shown 2. Keep all grease and oil cans and containers clean.
on the following pages. Refer to Figure 2-1. Another Wipe off oil can covers before using. Always re
copy of the chart is on the left side of the crane behind place the lid on containers when finished to pre
the fuel tank access door. The time intervals shown on vent entry of foreign materials.
the Lubrication Chart are intended as a guide only. Un 3. Drain oil cases when oil is hot to drain off accumu
der unusual working conditions, such as working in lated sludge.
dry, dusty conditions, in water or mud, or around a cor 4. Watch for signs of incorrect lubrication such as fail
rosive atmosphere, more frequent lubrication could be ure of clean grease to purge the old grease.
necessary. In these cases, the oiler must use his best 5. Bleed off hydraulic pressure before opening or re
judgment and establish a lubrication schedule. moving a line or fitting.
In addition to the points on the Lubrication Chart, all 6. Replace all guards before starting crane.
movable linkages and control cables should be peri 7. Use a clean funnel equipped with a strainer for
odically lubricated to resist wear. pouring lubricants.
8. Clean the area around check and fill plugs before
There are practical reasons for lubricating and lubri removing them to prevent entry of foreign particles.
cant changes. Lubricants serve more than one pur
pose. They not only lubricate, but also transport
chemically reactive additives, wash away minute wear
particles, serve as a corrosion inhibitor, and act as a DANGER
heat transfer medium. Draining and refilling any gear When it is required to operate the crane during
unit with a fresh supply of oil also assists in eliminating maintenance and/or adjustments, use extreme
wear particles not trapped by magnetic plugs. caution as service personnel may have to work
near and/or under moving machinery. Serious
personal injury and/or death may result.
WARNING Always remain in visual and/or verbal contact to
Shutdown the engine before fueling or lubri ensure the safety of service personnel. Use a
cating crane. To avoid a fire hazard, do not signal person if necessary.
smoke or handle fuel around an open flame.
To avoid crane damage and to prevent serious Note: See specific instructions in this Section of
injury, do not lubricate gears or any assem this Operator's Manual for lubrication check
blies while they are in motion. and change procedures on all gear compart
ments.
Keep grease, oil containers, and guns clean. Clean all fittings before lubrication. Block
the tracks and shutdown the engine before working on the crane. Replace all guards and
panels before operating the crane.
Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventative Maintenance 2-1

Operator’s Manual
7 27 5 6 4 28 33 15 33 34 31 32
2 3 1 37 11 37 25 36 35
18 30
ÎÎÎ
ÎÎ
Î
Ï
Î
Î
41
ÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎÎ
Î
16 29 17 14 24 40 10 12 8 26 9 27 13
23
38
21
28 19 22 37 39 37 20
Figure 2-1
Lubrication Chart
2-2 Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventative Maintenance

Operator’s Manual
KEY CAPACITY
1. SYMBOLS: Location Gallons Liters
* Check fluid level and fill as required.
0 Inspect, lubricate, adjust, repair or replace as required. Winch Drums (each) 5.50 20.8
+ Change oil (and filter if applicable). Swing Speed Reducers (each) 0.40 1.5
# Change filter only.
@ Clean filter/strainer as necessary. Windshield Washer Reservoir 1.00 3.8
X Clean fins if needed.
Engine Coolant 13.90 62.5
$ Drain water.
N/A Not applicable. Engine Oil 6.00 22.7
A,E,H, etc. are lubrication codes. Refer to the Lubrication Code Identification on this
chart. Link‐Belt recommends the lubrication codes on this chart, however if Travel Reduction Units (each) 6.60 25.0
an equivalent is to be used refer to the Operator's Manual for detailed speci Hydraulic Reservoir 250.00 946.4
fications to ensure a correct equivalent is used.
2. Refer to engine manufacturer's manuals for proper maintenance, lubrication, fuel or Hydraulic System 375.00 1419.5
coolant grade, and additional information.
Fuel Tank 110.00 416.4
3. Refer to the Operator's Manual for additional information.
4. Lubricate the turntable bearing through the grease fittings on the front of the upper
frame. Use a low pressure handgun and pump grease until clean grease comes out.
Rotate the upper a few degrees and pump grease until clean grease comes out
again. Repeat throughout the 360 cycle.
LUBRICATION CODE IDENTIFICATION

Lube
Code Recommended Type
A Grease, NLGI Grade No. 2
E Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant, 80W/90
H Grease (Summer Grade)
HH Gear Lubricant
KK Grease, NLGI Grade No. 1
LL Extreme Pressure Gear Oil, 75W/90
QQ Synthetic Gear Oil, Grade 140
TT Synthetic Gear Oil, Grade 220
MAINTENANCE LUBRICATION
Lube Lube Lube Lube
Service Code Code Num Lube Code Code
Ref Interval Above Below Ref ber of Interval Above Below
Location No (Hours) Operation Key -10 F -10 F
Location No Points (Hours) -10 F -10 F
Engine Oil 1 10 * 1,2 Key 2 Key 2
Turntable Bearing 24 2, Key 4 50 A KK
Key 2 0,+ 1,2 Key 2 Key 2
Primary Fuel Filter/ 2 10 $ 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2 Turntable Gear Teeth 25 All 50 H H
Water Separator Key 2 # 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2 Travel Swing Lock 26 1 250 A KK
Secondary Fuel Filter 3 Key 2 # 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2 Boom Foot Pin 27 2 10 A KK
Engine Cooling Sys 4 10 *,X 1,2,3 Key 2,3 Key 2,3
Boom Hoist Cylinder Pins 28 2 10 A KK
tem Key 2 + 1,2,3 Key 2,3 Key 2,3
Engine Air Cleaner 5 10 0 1,2,3 N/A N/A Boom Extend Sheaves 29 2 50 A KK
Engine Crankcase 6 Key 2 # 1,2,3 N/A N/A Boom Retract Sheaves 30 2 50 A KK

Breather Filter Boom Head Sheaves 31 All 50 A KK
Diesel Particulate Filter 7 Key 2 @ 1,2,3 N/A N/A Auxiliary Lifting Sheave 32 1 50 A KK
Fuel Tank 8 10 * 1,2,3 Key 2 Key 2
Fly Head Sheaves 33 All 50 A KK
Hydraulic Reservoir 9 10 *,$ 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 (Base, Center, & Tip)
500 # 1,3 Key 3 Key 3
2000 + 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 Fly Wire Rope Deflection Sheave 34 1 50 A KK
Windshield Washer 10 10 * 1,3 Key 3 Key 3 Hook Ball 35 1 Key 3 A KK

Reservoir Hook Block & Sheaves 36 All Key 3 A KK
Batteries 11 50 0 1 N/A N/A Side Frame Extend/Retract 37 4 150 A KK
Swing Speed 12 50 * 1,3 E LL Cylinders
Reducers 1000 + 1,3 E LL Hose Reel Wobble Rollers 38 2 50 A KK
Winch Drums 13 50 * 1,3 HH QQ
Cab Tilt Cylinder 39 2 150 A KK
1000 + 1,3 HH QQ
Boom 14 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A Cab Tilt Pivot 40 2 150 A KK
Fly 15 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A Axles 41 6 150 A KK

Wire Rope 16 10 0 1,3 Key 3 Key 3
Boom Extend Wire 17 250 0 1,3 N/A N/A
Rope Anchor
Boom Retract Wire 18 250 0 1,3 N/A N/A
Rope Anchor
Track Tension 19 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A
Travel Reduction 20 250 * 1,3 E TT
Units 1000 + 1,3 E TT
Track Shoes 21 10 0 1 N/A N/A
Track Rollers 22 10 0 1,3 N/A N/A
Hose Reel 23 250 0 1,3 N/A N/A
Figure 2-2
Lubrication Chart

Operator’s Manual
Lubrication Specifications
The following specifications are approved for use in Link‐Belt cranes. The specifications are identified by a code
letter. When a code letter appears on the lubrication or maintenance chart, it is referring to one of the lubricants
as described on the following pages. These lubricants are listed by specifications and by one brand name. Most
reputable oil companies can provide a lubricant to match a particular specification. It may then be used in the
crane no matter what the brand name. When using other brand names, the user assumes all responsibility for
product and patent liability.
Type A Type E
Grease, NLGI Grade No. 2 Extreme Pressure Gear Lubricant, 80W/90
A mineral oil based, multipurpose lithium complex ex An extreme pressure gear lubricant containing anti‐
treme pressure (EP) grease. Composed of a lithium foam protection, oxidation stability, anti‐rust, and
complex soap, compounded with highly refined par anti‐corrosion qualities. Contains sulfur and phos
affinic base oils and formulated with a special additive phorus additive materials but no zinc in compliance
package to provide rust and corrosion protection, res with Eaton, General Motors, and International Har
istance to water washout, oxidation stability, and wear vester truck driving axle requirements.
protection under high loads. It meets the require
ments of ASTM D4950 GC-LB covering wheel bear Must meet or exceed military specification MIL-
ing and chassis greases. Recommended for use as a PRF-2105E, and is suitable for API service desig
multipurpose industrial grease, particularly where nations GL3, GL4, MT-1, and GL5, with a rating of
temperature operation is of concern. 10 as determined in the shock load test
CRC-L-42.
Typical Characteristics:
Used in hoist reducer, swing reducer, driving axles,
Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Blue, Tacky and drop transmissions.
Lithium Complex Soap, wt % . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Penetration, D 217, Worked 60 X . . . . . . . 280
Physical Properties:
D 217, Worked 10,000 X % Change . . . 10
Dropping Point, Mettler,F (_C) 450+ (232+) Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Very Dark Red, Dark
Mineral Oil Viscosity, D 445 Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7-27
cSt at 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . 150-205 Flash, COC, (Min) (F) (_C) . . . . . . 375 (191)
cSt at 212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . 14.5-18 Pour Point, (Max) (F) (_C) . . . . . . -20 (-29)
Rust Protection, D 1743 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass Viscosity, Max @ 100F (38_C) SUS . . . . 829
Copper Corrosion, D 4048 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1B Viscosity, Max @ 210F (99_C) SUS . . . . 72.5
Timken, OK Load, lbs, D 2509 . . . . . . . . . . 40 Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-100
Four-Ball EP, D 2596 Sulfur . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.37
Load Wear Index, kgf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Ash (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . None
Weld Point, kgf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 CU Corr 3 Hours 250F (121_C) . . . . . . . . 1 b
Four-Ball Wear, mm, D 2266 . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4 Channel Point, Max (F) (_C) . . . . . . . 0 (-17)
1 hr, 167F (75_C), 1200 rpm, 40 kg Timken Test Lever Load lb (Min) . . . . . . . . . 50
Water Washout, wt % loss at Phosphorus (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
100F (38_C) D 1264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Grease Mobility, U.S. Steel Method g(l)/min Shell 59210 Spirax HD 80W/90 or Equivalent.
-30F (34_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0 (0)
-20F (29_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5(1.9)
0F (-17_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5(20.8)
20F (7_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30(113.6)
Guide to Usable Temperature
Min., F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -20 (-29)
Continuous Service, Max, F (_C) 325 (163)
Short Exposure, Max, F (_C) . . 450 (232)
Shell Code 70311- ALBIDA LC or Equivalent.

Operator’s Manual
Type H Type HH
Grease (Summer Grade) Gear Lubricant
For open gear applications. Satisfactory down to This gear lubricant is suitable for use in a wide variety
-40F (-40_C) on dry gears. Good adhesiveness of mobile equipment gear and brake applications.
on open gears at 73F (22.7_C) and good reten Has good oxidation and thermal stability, is non‐cor
tion. The grease with use will become tacky and will rosive to most gear and bearing materials, and is in
resist leaking. Used on cast tooth gears and ring hibited to provide good foam resistance and water
gear teeth. Extremely resistant to water washing. separation characteristics. Has moderate concentra
tion of EP additives.
Must meet performance requirements of AGMA
Specification 250.04 for extreme pressure lubricants.
Mineral Oil Component:
Is suitable for API service designations of GL2 and
Viscosity at 100F (38_C) SUS . . . . . . . . 4545 GL3.
Viscosity at 210F (99_C) SUS . . . . . . . . . 170
Load Wear Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Typical Characteristics:
Penetration, Worked at 77F (25_C)
(60 Strokes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Very Dark Red
Dropping Point, Min (F) (_C) . . . . . . 222(105) Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.7-29
Soap Base - Calcium (%) with 22% graphite Flash, COC, Min F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 (210)
and 3% Molybdenum Disulfide . . . . . 9.0 Pour Point, Max F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . -10 (-23)
Water (%) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 Viscosity cSt @ 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Recommended Max Temperature Viscosity cSt @ 212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4
(F) (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 (79) Viscosity SUS @ 100F (38_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . 796
Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Buttery Grease Viscosity SUS @ 210F (99_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Black-Gray Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95-100
Sulfur, % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.66
Shell 71228 - Rhodina SDX Grease 2 or Equiva Phosphorous, % . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.03
lent. Timken OK Load, Lbs (Min) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
AGMA No. EP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Shell 65104, OMALA 150 or Equivalent.

Operator’s Manual
Type KK Type LL
Grease, NLGI Grade No. 1 Extreme Pressure Gear Oil, 75W/90
Low temperature, extreme pressure, synthetic all A synthetic, extreme pressure gear oil designed for
purpose grease made from a low pour point syn cold weather operation in hypoid, spiral bevel, and
thetic hydrocarbon lubricant, thickened with lithium planetary gear axles. Must meet the requirements of
or clay. The grease is fortified with an extreme pres Military Specification MIL-PRF-2105E. Meets API
sure additive and a rust inhibitor to provide even GL-5 and MT-1 performance ratings
better equipment protection.
A multi‐purpose grease that can be pumped from Physical Properties:
normal grease dispensing equipment at tempera
tures down to a -55F (-48_C). Good for heavy Gravity, API (ASTM D-1298) . . . . . 25.2-33.3
duty operation. Kinematic Viscosity, (ASTM D-443)
Min @ 212F (100_C), cSt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.5
Recommended for use in centralized lube systems,
wheel bearings. chassis bearings, universal joints, Max @ 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
and all other applications requiring a grease of this Apparent Viscosity, (ASTM 2983) (Brookfield)
type. Offers full protection regardless of the season. Max @ -40F (-40_C), ml . . . . . . . . . . 150,000
Pumpable at -55F (-48_C), even in a hand grease Flash Point (ASTM D-92)
gun. Excellent anti‐wear and load carrying ability, Min F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 (204)
stays in place better than lighter greases, waterproof Pour Point (ASTM D-97)
to resist washout, good shear stability. Assures good Max F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -49 (-45)
high temperature performances. Compatibility of this Viscosity Index (ASTM D-2270) . . . . 140-151
grease with ordinary greases presents no problems. Copper Corrosion, (ASTM D-130)
3 hrs. @ 250F (121_C) Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Physical Properties: Foaming Characteristics (ASTM D-892)
Thickener . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lithium or Clay (Foam readings taken immediately
Penetration worked @ 77F (25_C) (ASTM D217) after 5 minutes aeration)
60 strokes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315-325 Max @ 75F (24_C), ml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Texture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Smooth Max @ 200F (94_C), ml . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Dropping Point, (F) (_C) Storage Stability, % Max
(ASTM D2265) Max . . . . . . . . +500 (260) (FTMS 791B Method 3440) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.25
Viscosity (ASTM D445) cSt Compatibility
104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2-32 (FTMS 791B Method 3430) . . . . . . . . . . . . Note 1
212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.08-5.2
Rust Properties (ASTM D1743) . . . . . . . . Pass The latest revision of all referenced specifications and
Four Ball, EP (ASTM D2596) test methods shall be used.
Wear, mm, Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.7
Weld, kg, Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 FTMS= Federal Test Method Standard.
Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red or Brown
Note 1: Use approved per Eaton PS-163 and Mack
Exxon Mobil Mobiltemp SHC 32 or Equivalent. GO-J Plus.
Mobil Oil Molilube SHC 75W/90, Code No.

51100‐6 or Equivalent.

Operator’s Manual
Type QQ Type TT
Synthetic Gear Oil - Grade 150 Synthetic Gear Oil - Grade 220
A specially formulated lubricant for applications A specially formulated lubricant for applications
where service conditions are severe because of where service conditions are severe because of
high operating and bulk oil temperatures. Typical high operating and bulk oil temperatures. The high
applications are spur, helical, herringbone, bevel, viscosity index allows the oil to flow at low tempera
and planetary gears and gear boxes with multiple tures and maintain viscosity at high temperatures.
disc brakes. Lubricant is derived from synthetic Typical applications are spur, helical, herringbone,
based oils that are more resistant to thermal and ox bevel, planetary gears, and gear boxes with multi
idation degradation. Can offer advantages of ex ple disc brakes. This lubricant is derived from syn
tension of lubricant life and reduced risk of damage thetic based oils that are more resistant to thermal
to crane elements. and oxidative degradation. It can offer advantages
of extension of lubricant life and reduced risk of
Typical Characteristics: damage to crane elements.
AGMA Grade No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 EP
Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5-34.4
ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Gravity, API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.5, 32.4
Viscosity, Cst (ASTM D-445) ISO Viscosity Grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
@104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Viscosity, cSt (ASTM D-445)
@ 212F (100_C), Cst . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.0 @ 104F (40_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 - 210
Viscosity, SUS (ASTM D-2161) @ 212F (100_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.8 - 27.1
@ 100F (38_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 737 Viscosity Index (ASTM D-2270) . . . . . 163 - 165
@ 210F (99_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75-100 Pour Point (ASTM D-97)
Viscosity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96-150 (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -45 - 49
Pour Point, (C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40 - 45
(ASTM D-97) F (_C) . . . . . . -23 (-10) Flash Point, COC (ASTM D-92)
Flash Point, COC, (ASTM D-92) (F) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 - 520
F (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229-460 (_C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 - 271
Rust Test, Distilled Water, Rust Test, Distilled Water (ASTM D-665) . . Pass
(ASTM D-665) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pass
Copper Corrosion Test
24 hr. -30 hr. @ 212F (100_C) . . . . . . 1b Mobil Oil Company - Mobilgear SHC 220 -
Timken Extreme Pressure Test or Equivalent.
(ASTM D-2782) Pass Value (lbs) . . . . 60
FZG Test, Stages, Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Phosphorus, Wt. % . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.005-0.03
Mobil SHC 629 or Equivalent.

Operator’s Manual
Hi Performance Hydraulic Oil

Important
Use only pre‐filtered hydraulic oil. Warranty is void if incorrect oil is used.
Incorrect oil may result in damage to hydraulic components. Hi Performance
Hydraulic Oil is available through a Link‐Belt Distributor in the following
grades and quantities.
Temperature Range Container Capacity
ISO Grade Ambient Maximum Hydraulic Part Number
Gallons Liters
Temperature Use System Temperature
-45°F to +80°F 150F 5 18.9 830666001

Grade 22
-43°C - 27°C 66_C 55 208.0 830666002
10F to 100F 195F 5 18.9 830663001

Grade 46
-12_C to 30_C 91_C 55 208.0 830663002
Grade 46
-40F to 100F 200F 5 18.9 830348001
All
-40C to 38C 93C 55 208.2 830348002
Temperature
Disposal Of Used
Lubricants, Fluids, Etc.
Properly dispose of used lubricants and filters. Every
drop of misplaced oil damages the environment. Each
year literally thousands of gallons of used oil is dumped
into our fields and streams or buried in community
landfills. These methods of disposal permanently
damage the world around us. You can see that the oil
you use is properly disposed of by sending it to a recy
cling center. Most local automobile service stations are
happy to receive used oil and will see to it that the oil is
recycled. Refer to the latest EPA, state, and local regu
lations regarding proper disposal. Figure 2-3
Please Don't Do It!

Operator’s Manual
Correct;
2 Oil level at bottom of filler hole.
Incorrect;
Oil level below filler hole.
1. Check/Fill Plug
2. Drain Plug Note: Oil level close enough to the hole to be seen or
touched is not sufficient. It must be level with the
Figure 2-4 bottom of the hole.
Travel Reduction Unit
Figure 2-5
Checking The Oil Level
Travel Reduction Unit
Lubrication Travel Reduction Unit Oil Change
Check oil level in travel reduction unit after every 250
1. Crane must be on a firm level surface. Travel the
hours of operation. The oil, in a new or rebuilt gear case
crane for several minutes, without a load, to agitate
or planetary, should be changed after the initial 250
and warm the oil within the gear case. Travel the
hours of operation. Thereafter, change the oil with
crane until the drain plug is positioned on the bot
each 1,000 hours of operation or 6 months, whichever
tom vertical centerline of the travel reduction unit.
occurs first.
Travel Unit Oil Level Check 2. Position the upper facing directly over the end of
1. Crane must be on a firm level surface. Travel the the lower, engage the travel swing lock, and shut
crane until the drain plug is positioned on the bot down the engine.
tom vertical centerline of the travel reduction unit. 3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear
Refer to Figure 2-4. case around the check/fill and drain plugs to pre
2. Position upper facing directly over the end of the vent contamination from entering the unit. Refer to
lower, engage the travel swing lock, and shutdown Figure 2-4.
the engine. 4. Remove the check/fill and drain plugs and allow
3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the gear the oil to drain into a suitable container.
case around the check/fill plug to prevent contami 5. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and in
nation from entering the unit. stall the drain plug.
4. Remove the check/fill plug. Oil should be level with 6. Fill the unit with oil until it begins to flow from the
the bottom of check hole. Refer to Figure 2-5. check hole. Refer to Figure 2-5. Refer to the Lu
5. If necessary, add oil through the check/fill plug hole brication Chart for the correct grade and quantity of
until it begins to flow from the check/fill plug hole. oil.
Refer to the Lubrication Chart for the correct grade 7. Clean and install the check/fill plug. Properly dis
of oil. pose of the used oil.
6. Clean and install the check/fill plug. 8. Repeat procedure for the other travel reduction
7. Repeat procedure for the other travel reduction unit.
unit.

Operator’s Manual
1. Breather
2. Travel Motor
Figure 2-6
Travel Motor Breather
2. Remove the travel motor cover.

Travel Motor Breather 3. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the
A breather is mounted in the travel motor hydraulic cir breather connection to prevent contamination
cuit. Refer to Figure 2-6. This breather should be from entering the system.
periodically inspected and cleaned or replaced as re 4. Remove the breather and inspect.
quired. 5. Clean or replace breather as required.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the 6. Repeat procedure for the other travel motor
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower and breather.
engage the travel swing lock.

Operator’s Manual
Engine Cooling System
The coolant in the engine cooling system must be
WARNING
maintained at the proper level and proper concentra
tion levels to adequately keep the engine operating at
safe temperatures.
Antifreeze must be used in all climates for both freezing
and boiling protection. It broadens the operating tem
perature range by lowering the coolant freezing point
and by raising its boiling point. Refer to engine
manufacturer's manual for proper coolant selection.
Do not remove cap

when engine is hot.
WARNING
Avoid prolonged and repeated skin contact
with antifreeze. Such prolonged, repeated Figure 2-7
Allow engine to cool before removing the fill cap.
contact can cause skin disorders or other
bodily injury. Keep out of reach of children.
4. If coolant must be added, allow the engine to cool
Coolant is toxic. Keep away from children and until the the coolant temperature is below 122°F
pets. If not reused, dispose of in accordance (50°C ).
with local environmental regulations.
CAUTION
Cooling System Test Do not add cold coolant to a hot engine.
Check the antifreeze concentration and the freezing Engine castings can be damaged. Allow the
point protection as outlined in the engine manufactur engine to cool until the coolant temperature is
er's manual. below 122°F (50°C ) before adding coolant.
Testing the engine coolant is important to ensure that the Do not use a sealing additive to stop leaks in
engine is protected from internal cavitation and from cor the cooling system. This can result in cooling
rosion. Refer to engine manufacturer's manual for addi system plugging and inadequate coolant
tional information on coolant system analysis. flow, causing the engine to overheat.
Cooling System Level Check If additional coolant must be added, it must be
pre‐mixed before being added to the system.
Check the coolant level in the surge tank every 10
Since the ability of antifreeze to remove heat
hours of operation. Check the protection level per the
from the engine is not as good as water,
maintenance interval schedule in the engine manufac
pouring antifreeze into the system first could
turer's manual.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the contribute to an overheated condition before
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower. the liquids are completely mixed.
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en
gine. 5. Slowly remove the fill cap. Add coolant, as re
3. Check that the coolant level in the surge tank is at quired, until it is to the “Full-Cold” level in the sight
least up to the “Full-Cold” level in the sight gauge gauge on the side of the surge tank. Use a pre‐
on the side of the surge tank. Refer to Figure 2-8. mixed solution per the engine manufacturer's
specification. Refer to engine manufacturer's
manual for proper coolant selection.
6. Replace fill cap. Start the engine and let it run until
WARNING it reaches normal operating temperature. Shut
Engine cooling system is pressurized. Do not down the engine and repeat Step 3.
remove fill cap from a hot engine. Heated
coolant spray or steam can cause personal
injury. Wait until the engine has cooled before
slowly removing fill cap.

Operator’s Manual
CAUTION
4
2
Keep hands clear of fan.
3
1. Radiator Assembly
2. Surge Tank
3. Drain Valve
4. Fill Cap
5. Sight Gauge
Figure 2-8
Engine Cooling System

Operator’s Manual
Cooling System Coolant Change 6. Close the drain valve on the radiator and engine
block.
Drain, flush, and fill the engine cooling system at the in
tervals outlined in the engine manufacturer's manual.
Use a pre‐mixed solution per the engine manufactur CAUTION
er's specification. Refer to engine manufacturer's During filling, air must be vented from the
manual for proper coolant selection. engine coolant passages. Wait 2 to 3 minutes
to allow air to be vented. Air trapped in the
CAUTION system may cause damage to the engine.
Protect the environment: Handling and 7. Inspect and clean any debris from the radiator fins.
disposing of used antifreeze is subject to 8. Remove the fill cap from the surge tank.
federal, state, and local regulations. Use 9. Flush the system as outlined in the engine
authorized waste disposal facilities, including manufacturer's manual. If the engine is warm, fill
civic amenity sites and garages providing slowly to prevent the rapid cooling and distortion of
authorized facilities for the receipt of used the metal castings.
antifreeze. If in doubt, contact your local 10. Flush the system as many times as required until
authorities or the EPA for guidance as to the water is clean.
proper handling of used antifreeze. 11. Add coolant, as required, until coolant is visible
within the sight gauge on the surge tank. Use a
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the pre‐mixed solution per the engine manufacturer's
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower. specification. Refer to engine manufacturer's
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en manual for proper coolant selection. Do not install
gine. the fill cap.
3. Allow the engine to cool until the coolant tempera 12. Start the engine and let it run at low idle. Increase
ture is below 122°F (50°C ). engine to 1,500 rpm. Run the engine at high idle for
approximately 1 minute to purge trapped air from
the system. Shutdown the engine.
WARNING 13. Check the coolant level to ensure that the coolant
level has risen at least to the “Full-Cold” level in
Engine coolant may be hot and could cause the sight gauge on the side of the surge tank. Refer
burns. Avoid prolonged and repeated skin to “Cooling System Level Check” in this Section of
contact with antifreeze. Such prolonged, this Operator's Manual.
repeated contact can cause skin disorders or 14. Install the fill cap on the surge tank.
other bodily injury. Keep out of reach of
children.
Coolant is toxic. Keep away from children and WARNING
pets. If not reused, dispose of in accordance
with local environmental regulations. Engine cooling system is pressurized. Do not
remove fill cap from a hot engine. Heated
4. Drain the cooling system by opening the drain coolant spray or steam can cause personal
valve on the radiator and engine block. Allow the injury. Wait until the engine has cooled before
coolant to drain into a suitable container. Properly slowly removing fill cap.
dispose of used antifreeze. Refer to Figure 2-8.
5. Check for damaged hoses and hose clamps. 15. Start the engine. Check system for leaks and for
Hoses must be firm to the feel. If they are soft and proper operating temperature.
spongy they must be replaced. Replace as re
quired. Check the radiator for leaks, damage, and
build up of dirt. Clean and replace as required.

Operator’s Manual
2 1
4 5
1. Air Cleaner Cover

2. Reset Button
3. Service Indicator
4. Filter Change (Red) Line
5. Dust Exhaust Valve
Figure 2-9
Engine Air Cleaner And Service Indicator
Engine Air System Inspection Changing The Air Cleaner Filter

1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the
In addition to servicing the air cleaner, it is also recom upper directly over the front or rear of the lower and
mended that the engine air system be inspected every engage the travel swing lock.
250 hours or 3 months. Inspect the air system pipes, 2. Inspect the service indicator to see if the yellow in
hoses, air compressor, and turbocharger systems, as dicator has reached the filter change (red) line. If
equipped. (Inspect all the pipes and hoses associated the yellow indicator has reached the filter change
with the air compressor, turbocharger, air cleaner, and (red) line, proceed with the following steps. If it has
air intake.) Check for any cracks, corrosion, loose not reached the red line, there is no reason to ser
clamps, wear points, leaks, or punctures which can al
vice the air cleaner.
low contaminants to enter the system and damage air
system components and/or the engine. All hoses Refer to Figure 2-10
should be kept free of oil contaminants, both internally 3. Unlatch and remove the service cover from the air
and externally. Disassemble and clean as required. cleaner body.
Tighten or replace parts as necessary to ensure that 4. Remove primary filter from the air cleaner body.
the air system does not leak. 5. Remove secondary filter from the air cleaner body.
6. Install secondary and primary filters in same order
Engine Air Cleaner and latch service cover.
7. Remove the dust exhaust valve and inspect it for
Variations in job site conditions prevent establishing a damage or wear. Replace it if required. Refer to
set interval for air cleaner servicing. For this reason a Figure 2-9.
vacuum operated service indicator is mounted on the 8. Reset the service indicator by pressing the button
air cleaner to assist in determining the condition of the on top of it.
air cleaner element. Refer to Figure 2-9. Anytime the
yellow indicator reaches the red line, service the air
cleaner immediately. Clean or replace the air cleaner
element as often as required. Replace the air cleaner
element after the sixth cleaning or annually, whichever
occurs first. Service the engine air cleaner as follows.

Operator’s Manual
B
A A
3 4
5 6
Figure 2-10
Changing The Air Cleaner Filters

Operator’s Manual
1. Secondary Fuel Filter

2. Fuel Filter/Water Separator
Figure 2-11
Engine Fuel Filter/Water Separator
6 Engine Fuel Filters

Two spin‐on type filters are used, a primary fuel filter/
water separator and a secondary fuel filter. (Refer to
Figure 2-11.) The function of the filters is to remove
water and contaminants from the fuel before they enter
the fuel system. Removal of water and contaminants is
important for troublefree operation and long life of the
1 fuel system. Water should be drained daily before
start‐up. Change the filters every 500 hours of opera
2 tion. Use the following procedures along with
5 Figure 2-12.
Fuel Filter Water Drain

4 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the
3 upper directly over the front or rear of the lower.
1. Fuel Heater 4. Water Drain Valve gine.
2. Fuel Filter 5. Secondary Fuel Filter
3. Water In Fuel Sensor 6. Shutoff Valve
Figure 2-12
Engine Fuel Filter/Water Separator

Operator’s Manual
13. Prime the fuel system as follows:
CAUTION a. Turn the ignition key switch to the ON position
The engine must be shutdown when draining but do not start the engine. This will cause the
water from the fuel filter to prevent water from ECM to operate the fuel lift pump through a
being drawn into the fuel system. priming cycle which will last at least 30
seconds.
3. Place a suitable container under the water drain b. When the lift pump completes its priming
valve. Turn the drain valve counterclockwise cycle, turn the key to the OFF position for 10
approximately 1 and 1/2 to 2 turns until draining oc seconds.
curs. c. Perform two or three more 30 second lift pump
4. Continue draining until clean fuel is visible. cycles.
14. Start the engine and check for leaks. Slowly in
crease engine speed to allow air to be purged from
CAUTION the fuel system.
Do not over‐tighten the valve. Over‐tightening 15. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel and filter.
the drain valve can damage the threads.
Secondary Fuel Filter Change
5. Close the water drain valve. 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the
6. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel. upper directly over the front or rear of the lower.
Primary Fuel Filter Change gine.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the 3. Clean the area around the filter head.
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower. 4. Turn the shutoff valve to the “Closed” position (per
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en pendicular to the valve).
gine. 5. Remove the filter from the head.
3. Disconnect the engine batteries. 6. Fill a new filter with clean fuel and thoroughly lubri
4. Clean the area around the filter head. cate the o‐ring with clean engine oil.
5. Turn the shutoff valve to the “Closed” position (per 7. Install new filter on filter head and tighten by hand.
pendicular to the valve).
6. Disconnect the wire harness from the fuel heater
and the fuel in water sensor.
CAUTION
7. Place a suitable container under the water drain To prevent fuel leaks, ensure the filter is
valve. Open the drain valve. Drain all fuel from fil installed tightly but do not over‐tighten.
ter. Mechanical tightening will damage the filter.
8. Remove the filter from the filter head. Ensure the
seal ring does not stick to the filter head. 8. Turn the shutoff valve to the “Open” position (in line
9. Lubricate a new seal ring with clean engine oil. with the valve).
Install the new filter onto the filter head by hand. 9. Prime the fuel system as follows:
a. Turn the ignition key switch to the ON position
but do not start the engine. This will cause the
CAUTION ECM to operate the fuel lift pump through a
To prevent fuel leaks, confirm that the filter is priming cycle which will last at least 30
installed tightly but do not over‐tighten. seconds.
Mechanical tightening will damage the filter. b. When the lift pump completes its priming
cycle, turn the key to the OFF position for 10
10. Connect the wire harness to the fuel heater and the seconds.
fuel in water sensor. c. Perform two or three more 30 second lift pump
11. Turn the shutoff valve to the “Open” position (in line cycles.
with the valve). 10. Start the engine and check for leaks. Slowly in
12. Reconnect the engine batteries. crease engine speed to allow air to be purged from
the fuel system.
11. Properly dispose of contaminated fuel and filter.

Operator’s Manual
A daily visual inspection is recommended for all hose
Hydraulic Hose Assembly assemblies in service.
Inspection 1. Check all hose end fittings for cracks, crushing,
corrosion, slippage on the hose, leakage, or any
The frequency of inspection and replacement of hose other damage.
assemblies should be determined by the operating en 2. Check all hoses for cracks, exposed reinforce
vironment, the potential risk from a hose failure, and ment, chafing, bulging, loose covers, or any other
past experience of hose failures in the application and damage.
environment. 3. Check the installation of all hose assemblies for
any kinked, crushed, flattened, or twisted hoses.
4. Replace any damaged hose assemblies, hose end
WARNING mating fittings, and seals as required.
Always wear safety glasses when working

with or inspecting pressurized hose
assemblies. Do not search for leaks by
running your hand or finger along a hydraulic
hose. Hot hydraulic oil, under high pressure
leaking through a small pinhole in a hose, can
puncture gloves, your skin, and penetrate
several inches (centimeters) into soft body
tissue causing serious personal injury.

Operator’s Manual
Hydraulic Reservoir Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check
Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir daily before
The hydraulic reservoir is used to store and supply hy
start‐up. Operating the crane with the oil level below
draulic oil needed to operate all hydraulic functions of
the full mark can lead to hydraulic component failure.
the crane. The hydraulic reservoir, as shown in
1. With all hydraulic cylinders fully retracted except
Figure 2-13, is equipped with a sight gauge for check
the side frame extend/retract cylinders, park the
ing the oil level.
crane on a firm level surface, and shutdown the en
A filter housing is mounted on the top of the tank. It has gine.
a contamination indicator which signals when the filter 2. With the hydraulic oil cold (approximately 62F
is being bypassed. Drain any water from the hydraulic 17C), check its level through the sight gauge on
reservoir, check the oil level, and inspect the contami the front of the hydraulic reservoir. Refer to
nation indicator daily. Operating the crane with the oil Figure 2-13. The proper level must be maintained
level below the full mark or with the filter element by at all times. Add hydraulic oil as necessary to bring
passed can lead to hydraulic component failure. Refer the oil level between the “HIGH” and “LOW” marks.
to the following procedures when servicing the hydrau Refer to “Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir” in
lic reservoir. this Section of this Operator's Manual. Use only Hi
Performance Hydraulic Oil or an approved substi
Water Drain tute. Do Not Overfill.
Drain the water from the hydraulic reservoir daily before
start‐up. Contaminated oil will damage the hydraulic Adding Oil To The Hydraulic
components. Reservoir
1. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by 1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the
loosening the breather/filler cap, on the hydraulic upper directly over the front or rear of the lower.
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved. 2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en
Refer to Figure 2-13. gine.
3. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by
loosening the breather/filler cap, on the hydraulic
WARNING reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved.
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury. WARNING
2. Loosen the water drain plug and allow the water to exhausted from the system before removing
drain into a suitable container. The water drain any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
plug is slotted and does not need to be completely could cause burns or other serious injury.
removed to drain the water.
3. When a clean flow of hydraulic oil begins to drain 4. Clean the top of the hydraulic reservoir, the breath
from the water drain plug, tighten the plug. er/filler cap, and breather/filler cover to prevent for
4. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir before eign material from entering the hydraulic system.
beginning operation of the crane. Add oil if neces 5. Remove the breather/filler cap.
sary. Refer to “Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reser 6. Add oil as required to bring the oil level to the
voir” in this Section of this Operator's Manual. “FULL” mark.
Properly dispose of the contaminated oil. 7. Install breather/filler cap.

Operator’s Manual
1 2 3 4 5
9 8 7 6
1. Filter Housing 4. Breather/Filler Cap 6. System Drain Plug 8. Access Panel
2. Filter Housing Cover 5. Sight Gauge 7. Water Drain Plug 9. Hydraulic Reservoir
3. Contamination Indicator
Figure 2-13
Hydraulic Reservoir

Operator’s Manual
Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Change 6. Remove the bottom access panel, filter housing
cover, and the filter element. Properly dispose of
The hydraulic reservoir oil should be changed every the filter element.
2,000 hours of operation or seasonally, whichever oc 7. Clean any old gasket material off the access pan
curs first. Change the hydraulic reservoir oil at the end els and hydraulic reservoir.
of a working day when any foreign particles will be sus 8. Remove and clean the oil diffuser in the bottom of
pended in the warm oil. If this is not possible, cycle the the filter housing.
crane until the oil is warm and proceed as follows: 9. Clean the interior of the hydraulic reservoir with
1. With all hydraulic cylinders fully retracted except clean diesel fuel or kerosene.
the side frame extend/retract cylinders, park the 10. Allow the diesel fuel or kerosene to drain into a suit
crane on a firm level surface. Position the upper di able container until the hydraulic reservoir is thor
rectly over the front or rear of the lower. oughly drained. Inspect the interior of the hydrau
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en lic reservoir for foreign material and wipe clean.
gine. 11. Clean and install the system drain plug.
3. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by 12. Clean the filter housing. Install oil diffuser in the
loosening the breather/filler cap, on the hydraulic bottom of filter housing. Install a new filter element.
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved. 13. Install the access panels, using new gaskets.
Refer to Figure 2-13. 14. Using clean, uncontaminated oil, fill the reservoir
through the filter element until it reaches the full
mark in the sight gauge.
WARNING 15. Install the filter housing cover.
All trapped hydraulic pressure must be 16. Remove the breather/filler cap from the breather/
exhausted from the system before removing filler cover. Clean or replace the sponge filter inside
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil the breather/filler cap.
could cause burns or other serious injury. 17. Install the breather/filler cover on the reservoir.
18. Start the engine. Allow the engine to idle several
minutes to ensure oil is being cycled properly.
4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the hy
Check for any leaks.
draulic reservoir to prevent foreign materials from
19. Check the oil level in the hydraulic reservoir for
entering the system, once the access panels and
proper level. Refer to “Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Lev
filter housing are opened.
el Check” in this Section of this Operator's Manual.
5. Remove the filter housing cover and pump the hy
Add oil if necessary. Refer to “Adding Oil To The Hy
draulic oil into suitable containers. Refer to the Lu
draulic Reservoir” in this Section of this Operator's
brication Chart to determine the volume of oil to be
Manual. Properly dispose of the used oil.
removed.
Note: In case of hydraulic system component
WARNING failure, a more thorough oil change procedure
is required. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor for
Do not remove the bottom access panel this procedure.
before the hydraulic reservoir has completely
drained. A large volume of hot oil may
suddenly be released resulting in personal
injury and/or property damage. Drain the oil
from the hydraulic reservoir before removing
the bottom access panel.
Note: If a pump is not available to remove the oil

from the reservoir, place a suitable container
under the system drain plug. Open the plug and
drain one container full at a time, until the oil has
thoroughly drained from the reservoir. Do not
remove bottom access panel to drain reservoir.

Operator’s Manual
1. Filter Housing Cover 3. Element

2. Contamination Indicator 4. Oil Diffuser
Figure 2-14
Filter Assembly
Hydraulic Reservoir Filter Change 4. Clean the top the the hydraulic reservoir, the filter
housing, and filter housing cover to prevent foreign
Change hydraulic reservoir filter element after the initial material from entering the hydraulic system.
50 hours of operation and every 500 hours of operation 5. Remove the filter housing cover.
thereafter. Change the filter element immediately if the 6. Remove the filter element and inspect it for con
contamination indicator is in the “Change” position af tamination. Any dirt or foreign particles on the filter
ter the oil has reached operating temperature. element may indicate excessive system contami
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the nation or imminent system component failure.
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower. Once the filter has been thoroughly inspected, dis
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en pose of it properly.
gine. 7. Install new filter element and filter housing cover.
3. Relieve any trapped hydraulic system pressure by 8. Start engine and check the filter housing for leaks.
loosening the breather/filler cap, on the hydraulic 9. Check the hydraulic reservoir oil level. Refer to
reservoir, 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved. “Hydraulic Reservoir Oil Level Check” in this Sec
Refer to Figure 2-13. tion of this Operator's Manual. Add oil if necessary.
Refer to “Adding Oil To The Hydraulic Reservoir” in
WARNING
exhausted from the system before removing
any plug or cover. A sudden release of hot oil
could cause burns or other serious injury.

Operator’s Manual
2
1. Swing Unit Check/Fill Plugs 2. Swing Unit Drain Plugs
Figure 2-15
Swing Speed Reducer
Swing Speed Reducer Swing Speed Reducer Oil Change

Lubrication upper directly over the front or rear of the lower.
Check the oil level in the swing speed reducer after ev 2. Fully extend the side frames and swing the upper
ery 50 hours of operation. The oil in a new or rebuilt for several minutes to agitate and warm the oil with
swing speed reducer should be changed after the ini in the swing speed reducer.
tial 200 hours of operation. Thereafter, change the oil 3. Engage the travel swing lock, fully lower the boom,
with each 1,000 hours of operation or seasonally, and shutdown the engine.
whichever occurs first. 4. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the swing
speed reducer around the check/fill and drain
Swing Speed Reducer Oil Level Check plugs to prevent contamination from entering the
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the unit. Refer to Figure 2-15.
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower. 5. Remove the check/fill and drain plugs and allow
2. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en the oil to drain into a suitable container. The drain
gine. plug is magnetic and should be inspected for large
3. Clean the speed reducer around the check/fill plug quantities of metal particles. After the initial oil
to prevent contamination from entering the sys change, this is a sign of damage or extreme wear
tem. Remove the check/fill plug. Refer to within the unit, and a complete internal inspection
Figure 2-15. may be necessary.
4. Oil should be within 0.5 in (12.7mm) of the bottom 6. After the oil has thoroughly drained, clean and
of the threads. Add oil as required to bring the oil to install the drain plug.
the proper level. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for 7. Fill the unit with oil through the check/fill plug hole,
the correct grade of oil. until the oil is within 0.5 in (12.7mm) of the bottom of
5. Clean and install the check/fill plug. the threads. For the correct grade and quantity of
6. Repeat for the other swing speed reducer oil, refer to the Lubrication Chart.
8. Clean and install the check/fill plug. Properly dis
pose of the used oil.
9. Repeat for the other swing speed reducer.

Operator’s Manual
3
2
1. Fill Alignment Hole

2. Fill/Drain Plug
3. Vent Plug
4. Sight Gauge
5
5. Drain Position
Figure 2-16
Winch Drum Lubrication
2. Cycle the winch for several minutes, without a load,

Winch Drum Lubrication to agitate and warm the oil within the winch drum.
For maximum operating efficiency and service life of 3. Rotate winch drum until the fill/drain plug is aligned
the winch drum(s), check oil level after every 50 hours with the fill alignment hole in the side support. Re
of operation. The oil, in a new or rebuilt winch drum, fer to Figure 2-16.
should be changed after the initial 100 hours of opera 4. Engage the travel swing lock and shutdown the en
tion. Thereafter, change oil with each 1,000 hours of gine.
operation or seasonally, whichever occurs first. It is 5. Thoroughly clean the exterior surface of the winch
also recommended that every 2,000 hours of opera around the vent and fill/drain plugs to prevent con
tion, the winch should be disassembled and thor tamination from entering the unit.
oughly inspected for damaged or worn parts. Replace 6. Remove the fill/drain and vent plugs.
damaged or worn parts as required. 7. Position a suitable container under the winch
drum.
Winch Drum Oil Level Check 8. Start the engine. Rotate the drum until the fill/drain
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the port is in the drain position and allow the oil to drain
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower and into a suitable container.
engage the travel swing lock. 9. After the oil has thoroughly drained, start the en
2. Observe the oil level within the sight gauge. Oil gine and rotate the drum until the fill/drain port is
should be visible within the sight gauge. Refer to aligned with the fill alignment hole in the side sup
Figure 2-16. Add oil as required to bring the oil to port. Shutdown the engine.
the proper level. Refer to the Lubrication Chart for 10. Fill the unit with oil through the fill/drain port, until oil is
the correct grade of oil. visible within the sight gauge. For the correct grade
and quantity of oil, refer to the Lubrication Chart.
Winch Drum Oil Change 11. Clean and install the vent and fill/drain plugs. Prop
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. Position the erly dispose of the used oil.
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower and 12. Repeat procedure for the other winch drum if
engage the travel swing lock. equipped.

Operator’s Manual
Boom Inspection And SAFETY
Lubrication INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
similar device to reach necessary areas.
Before putting hands or tools inside a boom
section, ensure the engine is shutdown and
operator has properly vacated the operator's To prevent personal
cab. Movement of the boom could cause injury, do not climb on
serious injury. boom or attachments.
Do not use a crane that has a damaged boom.
The structural integrity of the boom is lost and
Figure 2-17
could collapse with any load. Use the crane Do not climb on boom or attachments.
only after the boom has passed a thorough
inspection. Contact a Link‐Belt Distributor for
the proper inspection procedures. Lubricate the boom extend and retract sheaves at 50
hour intervals. It is also recommended that every 4,000
hours of operation the boom should be disassembled
To prevent movement of the individual boom sections,
and the extend and retract wire ropes inspected, lubri
shutdown the engine and ensure that the operator has
cated, and/or replaced as required. See “Boom Ex
vacated the operator's cab before putting your hands
tend And Retract Wire Rope Inspection And Adjust
or tools inside the boom. Unexpected movement of the
ment” in Section 3 of this Operator's Manual, “Wire
boom section could sever fingers, hands, arms, etc.
Rope Lubrication” found later in this Section of this
The boom wear shoes are equipped with teflon inserts Operator's Manual, and “Wire Rope Inspection And
that self‐lubricate the boom. Therefore, the boom wear Replacement Recommendations” in Section 5 of this
shoe areas require no lubrication. However, visually in Operator's Manual.
spect all boom sections daily for damaged or cracked
Lubricate the boom foot pin and boom hoist cylinder
members or welds. If any dents, bends, cracked
pins daily.
welds, etc. are found, do not use the crane. Contact a
Link‐Belt Distributor for repair procedures. Check for Lubricate the boom head sheaves and auxiliary head
damaged or leaking hoses, fittings, valves, cylinders, sheaves if equipped, every 50 hours of operation.
etc. Repair as necessary. At 250 hour intervals, check
all boom wear shoes for proper adjustment. See
“Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment” in Section 3 of this Op
erator's Manual for further details.
Inspect for wear on the wire rope deflector bar at the
top front of each boom section. Reverse or replace the
wear bars as required.

Operator’s Manual
No set rule can be given for lubrication frequency. This
Fly Inspection & Lubrication will depend on the type of conditions under which the
wire rope is used. A wire rope used in wet conditions
would need to be lubricated more often than one used
WARNING in dry conditions, to prevent rust and corrosion.
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, Lubricants used for wire rope lubrication should have
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or the following properties:
1. They must have enough adhesive strength to stay
on the wire rope.
Do not use a fly which has been damaged. 2. They must be able to penetrate between the wires
The structural integrity of the fly is lost and the and strands.
attachment could collapse with any load. Use 3. They must have high film strength.
the fly only after it has passed a thorough 4. They must resist oxidation.
inspection. 5. They must remain soft and pliable.
Inspect all parts of the fly daily. Pay particular attention

Application Of Wire Rope Lubricant
to the chords and lattice. If any dents, bends, cracked Wire ropes that have been in service should be cleaned
welds, etc. are found, do not use the fly. Contact a before re‐lubricating them. Use a wire brush and com
Link‐Belt Distributor for repair procedures. pressed air to clean the wire rope. All possible foreign
Lubricate the fly head sheaves and deflector sheave(s) material and old lubricant should be removed from the
every 50 hours of operation. wire rope before re‐lubricating it. Use one of the follow
ing methods to apply the lubricant.
Wire Rope Lubrication 1. Continuous Bath
Inspect wire ropes daily to ensure they are not dam Run the wire rope through a container filled with lu
aged. bricant. A sheave mounted in the center of the con
Wire rope is like a machine. Each time a wire rope tainer will hold the wire rope submerged as it
bends over a sheave or straightens from a slack posi passes through the container. Use swabbing to re
tion many wires move against each other. Lubrication move excess lubricant as the wire rope leaves the
is necessary to help prevent wear caused by this move container.
ment. Lubrication also helps prevent deterioration of
wire rope due to rust and corrosion. 2. Dripping
Place a container above a sheave so a spigot can
be opened to drip oil on the wire rope as it passes
WARNING through the sheave groove.
Rusty wire rope is dangerous since there is no 3. Swabbing And Painting

way to determine its remaining strength. Do
not use rusty wire rope. Two fast methods are swabbing the lubricant on
with rags or painting it on with a brush.
Most wire ropes are lubricated during manufacture, but 4. Spraying

the lubricant does not last the life of the wire rope. The
lubricant is squeezed out of the wire rope as it runs over Light lubricants may be applied with a spray gun.
sheaves under tension, or is washed off by rain. Aerosol cans of lubricant are also available.
For the above reasons, wire rope MUST BE periodically

lubricated. Crude or used oils and grease should not
be used as lubricants because they may be grit or acid
laden. Either of these conditions can cause damage to
the wire rope.

Operator’s Manual
Hook Block, Hook Ball, And Swivel Inspection And Maintenance
1. All nuts, setscrews, pins, bolts, and retainers cating pin for excessive wear. Inspect swivel parts
should be checked for tightness every 14 to 30 as specified previously. Check that hook latch is
days, depending on the operating conditions and operative.
the product involved. 3. If a swivel is constantly overloaded, it will cause
2. Inspect the components carefully at least once a damage to the unit. The first sign of damage is
month. often bearing brinelling (dimpling of the bearing
Swivels: Check for excessive gap distance be races). This condition is determined by spinning
tween the rotating parts. Check threaded parts the swivel by hand. If the motion is rough or has a
that are installed together to see that they are se ratchet‐like effect, the bearing has been damaged
cure and tight. Check all setscrews to see that they and should be replaced.
are tight and staked. 4. The distance between the swivel barrel and shank
or rotating members are pre‐set with a factory
Hook Blocks: Check all pins and bolts for tight clearance of 0.020-0.050 in (0.5-1.2mm). If this
ness, spreading of side plates, weld cracks, distance increases more than 0.060 in (1.5mm)
sheave wear, bearing wear, spreading of hook, and over the above distance, it is a good indication of
that setscrews are tight and staked. Check that bearing fatigue and the unit should be removed
hook latch is operative. from service.
Hook Balls: Check pin, nut, and washer to ensure
ball halves are held securely together. Check lo
Under Intermittent Under Continuous
Item
Operating Conditions Operating Conditions
Swivels, Swivel Overhaul Balls, Swivel Hook Balls 14 days 24 hours
Hook Blocks with Bronze Bushed Sheaves 14 days 8 hours
Hook Blocks with Roller Bearing Sheaves 14 days 24 hours
Chart A - Hook Block, Hook Ball, & Swivel Lubrication Frequency
Item Frequency What to Check For Appropriate Action

End play or gap of more than 0.06
Remove from service immediately.
in (1.5mm) along the axis.
14 days under continuous operation Defective bearing. Remove from
Swivels Rough turning.
30 days under intermittent operation service immediately.
Indicates overload. Remove for re
Elongated eye holes, bent clevis pins.
pairs.
Indicates major bearing wear. Re
Misalignment, as evidenced by move from service.
14 days under continuous operation wobble or uneven groove flange wear. Check for wear in bronze spacers
Sheaves where used.
30 days under intermittent operation
Striations or corrugations in sheave Result of wire rope wear. If major,
groove. replace.
Missing, off center, bent, broken
Hook Latch When Used Replace immediately
spring, or defective.
An indication of overload. If major,
replace.
Permanent deformation or
stretching. Any suspicion of fractures calls for
an immediate investigation and, if
necessary, replacement of part.
Hooks Daily or When Used
Hooks should be tested at least
once a year by magnafluxing, x‐ray,
Crack or other defects. or other qualified method. Intermit
tent tests can be conducted by a
less accurate oil stain method.
Chart B - Hook Block, Hook Ball, & Swivel Inspection Frequency

Operator’s Manual
Turntable Bearing Turntable Bearing Capscrew Inspection
Schedule
Capscrew Torque Capscrews should be inspected and/or torqued after
Maintaining the proper torque on turntable bearing the initial 250 hours of operation of any new crane or if
mounting capscrews is critical. If the bearing has been the crane has been undecked for any reason.
replaced or the crane undecked for any reason, Inspect and/or torque capscrews per the Turntable
capscrews should be replaced. Reuse of turntable Bearing Capscrew Torque Inspection Schedule,
bearing mounting capscrews is not recommended. thereafter. Torque capscrews to 2,120-2,335 ft lb
(2 875-3 166Nm).
CAUTION
Turntable bearing capscrews use Loctite® 571
Pipe Sealant or equivalent. The sealant or
coating is used to protect the threads of the
capscrews from rust and corrosion. Unpro
tected capscrews will not maintain the proper
torque. Always use sealant or coating when
installing turntable bearing capscrews.
Turntable Bearing Capscrew Torque Inspection Schedule

Schedule Interval Requirements
Perform an initial torque of the capscrews after the first 250 hours of operation of a new
crane, or if the crane has been undecked for any reason, to establish capscrew torque
baseline.
Note: Use the minimum applicable torque value when checking.
After the next 500 hours of operation, if any of the capscrew torques have degraded,
tighten capscrews to the proper torque.
A 500 Hrs Note: Use the minimum applicable torque value when checking.
If the crane is utilized for duty cycle work, Schedule A must be continuously maintained
during duty cycle applications.
Inspection Schedule A must be maintained until such a time that no capscrews require
tightening after 500 hours of operation. Schedule B can then be followed.
The minimum applicable torque value is acceptable for the turntable bearing capscrew
torque inspection.
If the capscrew torque has degraded at any annual check, Torque Inspection Schedule
A must be followed until such time that no loss of capscrew torque is observed.
B Annually
The minimum applicable torque value is acceptable for the turntable bearing capscrew
torque inspection.

Operator’s Manual
and any lifting equipment such as slings, pins,
Crane Monitoring System shackles, etc.
Maintenance of the Rated Capacity Limiter System 10. If crane capacities are rated for specific areas e.g.
consists of the following daily inspection prior to the side, front, or rear, check the system by swinging
first operation: the boom into the permitted areas and checking
1. Check that the system is operating normally as de that the Rated Capacity Limiter reading agrees
scribed in Section 1 of this Operator's Manual. with the crane capacities as listed in the Crane Rat
2. Check the electrical cables connecting the various ing Manual.
parts of the system. 11. Check for erratic readings on the boom angle, the
3. Check insulation on the boom reeling drum cable. boom length, and the operating radius displays.
4. Check boom reeling drum cable for proper tension. Check the boom angle, boom length, and the op
5. Check all anti‐two block switches for freedom of erating radius for accuracy every 30 days.
movement.
6. Check that the anti‐two block weights are installed
and working properly with the anti‐two block WARNING
switches.
Any unusual or erratic system operation must
7. Inspect the pressure transducers at the back of the
be investigated and corrected immediately. If
operator's cab and check the connecting hoses for
any problem is found with any of the above
oil leaks.
inspection steps, the problem must be
8. Test that the function limiters activate properly by
corrected/repaired as soon as possible. If
simulating a two‐block condition. (Do this by
necessary to continue crane operations, refer
manually lifting the ATB weight.)
to “System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning” in
9. Using a known test weight, check that the dis
Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
played weight agrees with the test load. The dis
played load includes the hook block, hook ball,

Operator’s Manual
Paint Maintenance Regular Preventative Maintenance
1. Regular washing is the best way to remove surface
Knowledgeable equipment owners realize the value of contaminants.
periodic preventative maintenance and responsible 2. Always use mild cleaners and soaps, and rinse
care. A regular surface care program should be fol thoroughly after washing. Do not use harsh deter
lowed to protect the equipment's paint finish and main gents, such as household laundry detergents, or
tain a like‐new appearance. There is no one correct/ul cleaners that contain phosphates, as they will
timate procedure since the uniqueness of every “burn” the paint, strip off protective coating, dimin
crane's operating environment and owner/operator ish the gloss and accelerate the contamination
maintenance habits differ. However, it is important to process.
remove surface contaminants before they have time to 3. Periodic waxing will enhance the luster and protect
bond or etch into the paint finish. the paint surface.
The crane has non‐skid materials in certain areas to as If environmental damage to the paint finish is detected
sist operators and service personnel with safe access/ (loss of some of its luster due to lack of or inability to
egress to/from the crane. Do not paint or wax non‐skid maintain as recommended) the paint finish can be re
materials. Paint or wax will cause the non‐skid materi stored to near‐new appearance by following a simple
als to become slick, reducing their effectiveness for polishing and waxing procedure.
safety while walking on the crane. If any non‐skid ma
terials become ineffective due to wear, age, or de
stroyed in any way, they must be replaced.
Polishing And Waxing Procedure
1. Clean surface thoroughly by hand washing or
power washing with a mild detergent. Rinse thor
WARNING oughly with water before buffing.
2. Apply a polishing compound, such as Meguiar's
Do not apply paint or wax over non‐skid M8432, or equivalent, to a surface area approxi
materials. Keep all non‐skid materials clean mately two feet by two feet (.6m by .6m) at a time.
and free of all contaminants. All walking Ensure the compound is applied liberally to entire
surfaces on the crane should be cleaned to area and work on only that area with the buffing
eliminate any contaminants. Paint, wax, or wheel.
other contaminants will reduce the 3. Buff surface with an electric or air buffer at 1,000
effectiveness of the materials. Ineffective rpm using a 3M Superbuff polishing pad, or equiv
materials can create unsafe access/egress alent, with light to medium pressure until a uniform
to/from the crane leading to serious personal high gloss is obtained. Hand wipe with a clean
injury. Mask off and/or cover non‐skid materials cloth.
prior to painting or waxing areas around any 4. After surface has been buffed, apply a quality auto
non‐skid material(s). Contact a Link‐Belt motive wax such a Meguiar's M-26 Hi‐Tech Yellow
Distributor for information regarding the Wax, or equivalent, and hand buff until the cloth
replacement or repair of any non‐skid moves freely. The original luster of coating should
material(s). be restored.

Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Track Tension Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
To Set Track Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
To Decrease Track Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Travel Swing Lock Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Bubble Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Rated Capacity Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Boom Extend And Retract Wire Rope Inspection And Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Extend/Retract Wire Rope Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Extend/Retract Wire Rope Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Boom Angle Indicator Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Hydraulic System Relief Valve Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11

Preparing The Crane For Checking Relief Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Relief Valve Pressure Checking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Pilot Control Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Swing Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Side Frame Extend/Retract & Counterweight Retract Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
Counterweight Extend Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Travel Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Boom Hoist Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Boom Telescope Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Winch Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17
Hydraulic Oil Cooler Fan Motor Motor Circuit Adjusting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
First Layer/Third Wrap Calibration (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments i

Operator's Manual
ii Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

Operator's Manual
2 3
1. Relief Valve
2. Bleeder Plug
3. Jam Nuts
Figure 3-1
Track Tension Adjustment
Track Tension Adjustment To Decrease Track Tension

Excessively tight track shoes may cause unnecessary upper facing directly over the front or rear of the
wear on track components. Excessively loose track lower and engage the travel swing lock.
shoes can cause the drive sprockets to climb on the 2. Shutdown the engine.
shoe lugs or the track shoes to come off the track roll 3. Remove the cap from the bleeder plug on the
ers while steering. Adjust the track tension whenever check valve on one side frame. Install tubing on
necessary. the bleeder plug.
4. Place a suitable container under the tubing.
To Set Track Tension
upper facing directly over the front or rear of the
lower and engage the travel swing lock.
WARNING
2. Fully loosen all the jam nuts on both side frames. Oil in relief valve may be under high pressure.
The jam nuts are on the right and left side frames A sudden release of oil could cause serious
on the inner and outer side of the shoes. Refer to injury.
Figure 3-1.
3. Move the travel levers forward and backward to 5. Carefully loosen the bleeder plug on the relief
supply oil to the cylinders. This will tighten the valve. Drain oil as required until there is a ¼ in
track tension. (6.3mm) gap between the locking nut and the side
4. Tighten all the inner jam nuts evenly on both sides frame.
until they come in contact with the side frames. 6. Repeat Steps procedure for the other side frame.
5. Shutdown the engine. 7. Adjust track tension per “To Set Track Tension” in
6. Tighten all the inner jam nuts one more turn. Tight this Section of this Operator's Manual.
en all the outer jam nuts to lock them on the inner
jam nuts.
Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments 3-1

Operator's Manual
0-0.06 inch (0-1.5mm)

Engaged Clearance
1. Cable Adjusting Nuts 4. Pin Guide Tube

2. Swing Lock Pin 5. Retainer
3. Grease Fitting 6. Lower Frame
Figure 3-2
Travel Swing Lock Adjustment
2. Check the engagement of the swing lock pin in the

Travel Swing Lock Adjustment retainer on the lower frame. The pin should extend
The travel swing lock is a four position, positive lock of in the retainer to within 0-0.06 inch (0-1.5mm)
the upper over the lower to prevent swinging of the up from the bottom of the retainer slot. Refer to
per. For the travel swing lock to operate properly, it Figure 3-2.
must be adjusted correctly. 3. Adjust the stroke of the swing lock pin as required
by using the cable adjusting nuts.
4. Test the swing lock in each working position before
upper facing directly over the front or rear of the
operating the crane.
lower, engage the travel swing lock, and shutdown
the engine.
3-2 Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments

Operator's Manual
Bubble Level Adjustment
A bubble level, to assist in determining when the crane 1 2 3
is level, is mounted in the operator's cab on the lower
right side. It should be checked periodically to ensure
proper adjustment.
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface.
5
°
2. Fully extend the side frames. Position the upper fa
cing directly over the front of the lower and engage
0°
the travel swing lock. Fully retract the boom. Posi 3° 1° 1° 3°
tion boom at a 45 angle.
0°
3. Verify the crane is level by placing a carpenter's
°
level across the front of upper frame. Check that
5
the crane is level with the upper over the front, rear,
and both sides of the crane. Install cribbing under
the tracks as required until crane is level side to 1. Glass Vial
side and front to rear. 2. Spring
4. Rotate the adjustment nuts as required until the 3. Adjusting Nut
bubble is centered within the vial. Refer to
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-3.
Bubble Level Adjustment
Note: Do not flatten out the springs under the
bubble level. Loosen rather that overtighten the
adjustment nuts to gain the necessary adjust
Rated Capacity Limiter
ment. A properly calibrated Rated Capacity Limiter is critical
for safe crane operation. The boom angle and length
are crucial factors in determining crane capacities. The
Rated Capacity Limiter must be checked for accuracy
on a daily basis and calibrated as needed. Refer to
“Crane Monitoring System” in Section 2 of this Opera
tor's Manual for the daily check list for the system.
The Rated Capacity Limiter should be calibrated by
a qualified technician only. Contact a Link‐Belt Dis
tributor to arrange for a qualified technician to per
form the calibration procedures when required.

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 1. Bearing Cage
1. Capscrew And Washer 2. Front Bottom Wear Shoe 1 2 3
2. Retaining Plate 3. Capscrew And Washer
3. Rear Bottom Center Wear Shoe
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-4 Front Bottom Wear Shoes
Rear Bottom Center Wear Shoes
between the external shell and the retaining
Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment pocket can be measured. To get an accurate
Boom wear shoes are provided as a means of keeping measurement the internal section must be rest
the boom working smoothly. They must be adjusted ing on the rear bottom center wear shoe. An ap
periodically to prevent excessive deflection of the propriate lifting device must be used to lift the
boom sections. Refer to Figure 3-6. front of the internal section to put pressure on the
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. rear bottom center wear shoe.
2. Fully extend the side frames. Position the upper fa Minimum allowable distance is ¼ in (6.35mm).
cing directly over the front of the lower and engage The wear shoe must be replaced if the clearance
the travel swing lock. Lower the boom and extend is measured less than this. This can be meas
each boom section as required to gain access to ured with a gauge made of a stack of shims or
each wear shoe. other material.
c. If the wear shoe is removed for inspection, min
imum wear shoe thickness is 1.25 in (3.2cm) for
WARNING the center wear shoes. Wear shoes worn to less
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, than this dimension must be replaced.
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar d. Removal of the rear bottom center wear shoe for
device to reach necessary areas. all sections is easily done through holes in the
sides of the external boom section when the
To prevent movement of individual boom
boom is extended.
sections, shutdown the engine and ensure
that the operator has properly vacated the e. If wear shoe was replaced, apply Loctiteâ 242
operators cab before putting hands or tools to the capscrews before installing.
inside the boom. Unexpected movement of 4. Check the thickness of the front bottom wear shoes .
the boom sections could sever fingers, The wear shoes are to be replaced when the bottom
hands, arms, etc. most wear pads reach a minimum thickness of 1/2 in
(1.3cm). To replace these shoes, extend the internal
3. Check the thickness of the rear bottom center wear section out 3 ft, remove the front top wear shoes, lift
shoes. Refer to Figure 3-4 and Figure 3-6. up on the internal section, remove the capscrews
a. The rear bottom center wear shoes are not ad holding the bearing cages, and slide the shoes and
justable. For inspection or replacement, access bearing cages out of the boom section. The shoes
to the retaining plates for these wear shoes is come out the back of the bearing cages for replace
gained through holes in the sides of the external ment. Reinstall the bearing cages with new shoes
boom section when the boom is extended. and apply Loctiteâ 242 to the capscrews. Lower the
b. To check the thickness of the wear shoe without internal section back down, reinstall and adjust the
removal of the wear shoe, the clearance front top wear shoes.

Operator's Manual
1
SAFETY
INSTRUCTIONS
3 To prevent personal
injury, do not climb on
boom or attachments.
2
4
7 6 5
1. Wire Rope Wear Bar (4 Places) 5. Rear Bottom Center Wear Shoes (4 Places)
2. Front Bottom Wear Shoe - (24 Places) 6. Rear Bottom Side Wear Shoes in Rear Subweld (16 Places)
3. Front Top Wear Shoe - (8 Places) 7. Rear Bottom Side Wear Shoes in Front of Subweld (12 Places)
4. Rear Top Wear Shoe (16 Places)
Figure 3-6
Boom Wear Shoe Adjustment And Inspection

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 5 4‐15/16 in
(125.4mm)
1 Minimum
6 7
1. Horizontal Adjustment 5. Rear Top Wear Shoe
1. Vertical Adjustment Setscrew Setscrew 6. Vertical Adjustment Shims
2. Retaining Screw 2. Capscrew And Washer 7. Keeper Plate
3. Horizontal Adjustment Shims 3. Nylon Spacer
4. Horizontal Adjustment Setscrew 4. Horizontal Adjustment
Figure 3-7 Shims
Front Top Wear Shoe Figure 3-8
Rear Top Wear Shoe
5. Adjust the following wear shoes to ensure the
boom is straight and each boom section is cen
2. Vertical adjustment is used to hold the
tered within the next.
wear shoe down against the top of the in
a. Front Top Wear Shoes
side boom section. Adjust these so that
(Refer Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-7)
there is no clearance between wear shoes
1. The front top wear shoes are adjustable in
and boom section. Torque the jam nuts to
both horizontal and vertical directions.
150175 ft lb (204237Nm).
The horizontal adjustment is used to cen
3. Replace when shoe is worn to 0.375 in
ter one boom section inside the other.
(0.95cm) minimum thickness or when ad
Measure the clearance between sections
justment is used up whichever comes first.
on each side and space them equally. The
b. Rear Top Wear Shoes
wear shoes should contact the inside sec
(Refer to Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-8)
tion on both sides. No clearance between
1. There is a pair of rear top wear shoes on
wear shoe and boom section is required.
the side of each boom section. Adjust
Note: The base, inner and center sec ment of these wear shoes is accomplished
tions have shims for taking the load on through holes in the side and top of the ad
the horizontal adjustment. jacent boom section. Extend only the
boom sections required, and just far
For base and inner sections, install as
enough, until the rear top wear shoe ad
many horizontal shims as possible
justment setscrews are accessible
between the wear shoe backer plate and
through the hole in the top of the adjacent
the boom plate. Attach the shims to the
section. Leave the other inner sections
boom plate with the retaining screw. Back
fully retracted at this point.
off the adjustment setscrews one com
2. For proper inspection, the rear top wear
plete turn and torque the jam nuts to
shoes must be removed and measured.
150175 ft lb (204237Nm).
Access through the sides of the boom and
On the center section install enough shims remove the capscrews and washers which
to match the height of the setscrews on the secure the rear top wear shoes keeper
wear shoe retainer plate after adjusting. plates. Remove the keeper plates.
Back off the adjustment setscrews one 3. Loosen the jam nuts on the adjustment
complete turn and torque the jam nuts to setscrews and back off the adjustment
150175 ft lb (204237Nm). setscrews and remove shims as needed.

Operator's Manual
1 2 3 4 1 2 3
1. Capscrew And Washer 3. Shims 4

2. Retaining Plate 4. Wear Shoe 1. Capscrew And Washer 3. Shims
2. Retaining Plate 4. Wear Shoe
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Rear Bottom Side Wear Shoe in Front of Subweld
Rear Bottom Side Wear Shoe in Rear Subweld
4. Remove and inspect the height of the rear
8. Install as many horizontal shims to fill the
top wear shoes. Minimum wear shoe
gap between the nylon spacer plate and
height is 4‐15/16 in (125.4mm). Wear
the wear shoes on both sides of the boom.
shoes worn to less than this dimension
Back off the adjustment setscrews one
must be replaced.
complete turn and torque the jam nuts to
Note: It will be necessary to lift the ex 150175 ft lb (204237Nm).
tended boom sections, with an appro 9. Apply Loctiteâ 242 to the capscrews used
priate auxiliary lifting device, in order to to secure the keeper plates.
relieve pressure on the wear shoe for re 10. Install the keeper plates and secure them
moval and adjustment. with the capscrews and washers.
5. Install the rear top wear shoes back into c. Rear Bottom Side Wear Shoes
their proper location. Note the orientation (Refer to Figure 3-6 and Figure 3-10)
of the wear shoes with the large chamfers 1. The rear bottom side wear shoes are ad
towards either end. If new wear shoes are justable. Shims should be added to the
being installed, the adjustment setscrews side wear shoes until the wear shoes are
may need to be loosened further and/or tight against the larger outer section.
horizontal shims removed to allow room 2. For inspection, access to the retaining
for the larger new shoes. plates for these wear shoes is gained
6. Vertical adjustment of the rear top wear through holes in the sides of the external
shoes is accomplished by installing vertical boom section when the boom is extended.
shims under the wear shoe. Vertical shims Some wear shoes are in the rear subweld of
should be added so there is no clearance the section and some are just in front of it.
between wear shoe and boom section. 3. For proper inspection, the bottom rear
7. Horizontal adjustment of the rear top wear side wear shoes must be removed. Re
shoes is accomplished with the adjust move the capscrews and washers which
ment setscrews. This adjustment is used secure the retaining plates. Remove the
to align one section inside another. The Retaining plates. For wear shoes in front of
straightness of the boom is dependent on the rear subwelds a rag or piece of cloth
this adjustment. Small holes in the sides of can be put below the wear pads to keep
the boom sections allow measurements loose parts from falling down into the
between sections. Set the gap between boom.
the sections equal on both sides to ensure
boom straightness.

Operator's Manual
4. Remove shims and wear shoes to inspect
the thickness. Minimum wear shoe thick
Boom Extend And Retract
ness is 1.25 in (3.8cm) for the side wear
shoes. Wear shoes worn to less than this
Wire Rope Inspection And
dimension must be replaced. Adjustment
5. Install the rear bottom wear shoes back in
to their pockets and install shims until the The boom extend and retract wire ropes must be in
wear shoes are tight against the larger out spected and the rope anchors torqued periodically to
er section. compensate for stretching of the extend and retract
6. Apply Loctiteâ 242 to the capscrews used wire ropes. Refer to Figure 3-11.
to secure the retaining plates.
7. Install the retaining plates and secure
them with the capscrews and washers. WARNING
6. After adjusting the boom wear shoes, boom up to a
60° angle and fully extend the boom. Confirm that To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar
the boom is straight and the sections are centered
device to reach necessary areas.
within each other.
Note: External effects such as sun and wind on
one side of the boom or having the crane out of Extend/Retract Wire Rope Inspection
level can make the boom appear to not be 1. Fully extend the side frames. Position the upper fa
aligned. Negate these effects as much as pos cing directly over the front or rear of the lower and
sible when checking boom straightness. Refer engage the travel swing lock.
to “Boom Distortion Due To Thermal Effects Of 2. Fully extend the boom in “Amax2” mode. Retract
The Sun” in Section 1 of this Operator's Manual. the sections approximately 1 ft (30.5cm) to remove
the load from the extend wire ropes and allow them
to sag

Operator's Manual
Boom Extend Wire Rope Anchors Boom Retract Wire Rope Anchors
1 2
1. Extend Rope Anchors (Both Sides)

2. Jam Nut
3. Retract Rope Anchors (Both Sides) 2 3
Figure 3-11
Boom Extend And Retract Wire Rope Anchors
3. If the extend wire ropes sag more than 4 in 3. Tighten the retract cable. The tip will retract 0.1"
(10.2cm) or if there is a difference of more than 1/2 per turn of the cable nut.
in (1.3cm) of sag between the left and the right ex 4. Fully retract the boom and check the clearance
tend wire ropes, the extend wire ropes must be ad between the boom head and the outer section
justed. Refer to “Extend And Retract Wire Rope stops. The clearance must be 1/83/16 in (35mm).
Adjustment”. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the clearance is to spec.
4. Fully retract the boom. The tip section must touch The extend cables may have to be loosened up to
the stops on the base section and also must have get the tip to pull in.
1/8-3/16 in (3-5mm) gap to the outer section 5. Fully retract boom and extend again in “Amax2"
stops. mode. Then retract approximately 1 ft (0.3m).
5. Inspect extend/retract wire rope for wear. Refer to 6. Tighten the extend cables at the top front of the
“Wire Rope Inspection And Replacement Recom center section until there is 1-2 in (2.5-5.1cm) of
mendations” in Section 5 of this Operator's Manual. sag at the center of the rope and equal sag
6. Lubricate the extend/retract wire ropes. Refer to between the left and right ropes.
“Wire Rope Lubrication” in Section 2 of this Opera 7. Fully retract boom and verify that the tip section is
tor's Manual. still has 1/83/16 in (35mm) clearance to outer sec
tion.
Extend/Retract Wire Rope Adjustment 8. If the tip section gap to outer section is not spec.
1. Fully extend the side frames. Position the upper fa then loosen the extend cables slightly and repeat
cing directly over the front or rear of the lower and the process of tightening the retract cable and then
engage the travel swing lock. the extend cables until the tip section gap to the
2. The retract cable is adjusted through access holes outer section is acceptable when fully retraced and
in the side plates that line up when the following the sag in the extend cables is acceptable.
conditions are met. With the boom mode set to 9. Reinstall retract stop shims as required to fill the
“Amax2", extend the boom out to 85 feet while space between the base section stops and the
overriding the T2 section to keep it retracted until dead end lugs on the boom head. Always round
the retract cable adjustment nuts are visible in the up on the number of shims needed to fill the space.
hole in the side of the outer. To remove tension on Example: If 3.5 shims would fit, put 4 shims in.
the retract cable the last movement of the boom
must be extending. Remove the retract shims form Note: A special wrench is provided to aid in the
the back of the boom head. adjustment of the extend wire rope nuts.

Operator's Manual
1. Carpenter's Level
2. Screw
3. Boom Angle Indicator
Figure 3-12
Boom Angle Indicator
3. Verify the crane is level by placing a carpenter's

Boom Angle Indicator level across the front of upper frame. Check that
Adjustment the crane is level with the upper over the front and
over the side of the crane. Install cribbing under
A bubble type boom angle indicator is mounted on the the tracks as required until crane is level side to
base section of the boom to the right of the operator's side and front to rear.
cab. Refer to Figure 3-12. It must be adjusted properly 4. Once the crane is level, verify that the boom is at 0
and the crane must be level for the unit to accurately indi angle by placing carpenter's level on top of the
cate boom angles. Check the adjustment of the boom boom. Refer to Figure 3-12. Adjust the boom as
angle indicator daily to ensure its accuracy. necessary.
1. Fully extend the side frames. Position the upper fa 5. If necessary, loosen the screw and adjust the angle
cing directly over the front or rear of the lower and indicator until the bubble within the vial is located
engage the travel swing lock under the 0 mark. Tighten the screw.
2. Fully retract the boom. Boom down to 0 angle.

Operator's Manual
Note: Checking relief valve pressures is simpli
Hydraulic System Relief fied by using two persons, one in the operator's
Valve Adjustment cab to operate the controls and one to check
and adjust the relief valves.
The following instructions pertain to checking and set
ting all relief valve pressures in the hydraulic system.
All cranes are tested and properly adjusted before leav Relief Valve Pressure Checking
ing the factory and should not need checking when first Instructions
put into operation. Each 250 hours of operation, the re
lief valve pressure settings should be checked. A drop Refer to Figure 3-13 and Figure 3-14 for relief valve
in relief valve pressure setting may be noticed the first and quick disconnect fitting locations.
time checked. This is normal and is probably due to 1. Use a gauge of known accuracy. Have the gauge
lessening of spring tension or stress relief in relief valve calibrated if necessary. Use a snubber or gate
parts. valve to reduce shock loading in the gauge.
If a new or rebuilt pump is installed, all relief valve pres 2. Release the hydraulic system precharge pressure
sures must be backed off and reset, as outlined in this by loosening the breather/filler cap on the hydrau
Section of this Operator's Manual before putting the lic reservoir 1/4 turn until pressure is fully relieved.
crane back in operation. The purpose of this is to avoid 3. Turn the ignition key to the “ON” position but do not
the possibility of damaging the new pump from over start the engine and work the control or switch, for
pressurization if relief valves are set incorrectly. Do not the circuit being checked, back and forth to relieve
operate the crane over relief pressures for extended any trapped hydraulic pressure.
periods of time to avoid overheating of hydraulic oil.
WARNING
DANGER All trapped hydraulic pressure must be
exhausted from the system before installing a
When it is required to operate the crane during
maintenance and/or adjustments, use extreme gauge in any quick disconnect. A sudden
caution as service personnel may have to work release of hot oil could cause burns or other
near and/or under moving machinery. Serious serious injury.
personal injury and/or death may result.
4. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
Always remain in visual and/or verbal contact to
fitting.
ensure the safety of service personnel. Use a
5. Refer to the Figure 3-13 to determine the correct
signal person if necessary.
pressure setting for the circuit being checked.
Also, review the procedure for checking that par
ticular circuit.
CAUTION 6. Start the engine.
Relief valves are provided to protect the 7. If applicable, fully engage the control for the circuit
hydraulic system. Do not increase relief valve being checked and hold it in that position.
pressures above specifications or hydraulic 8. With the engine running at the speed specified,
system damage may occur. check the gauge for the correct reading, adjust as
required.
Preparing The Crane For Checking Note: Obtain each final pressure by bringing
the pressure up to the proper setting, not by
Relief Pressures backing down to it.
upper directly over the front or rear of the lower and 9. Allow the engine to return to idle before shutting it
engage the travel swing lock. down.
2. Operate the hydraulic functions as required to 10. Release the hydraulic system precharge pressure
bring the hydraulic oil temperature to its normal op and work the control back and forth to relieve any
erating range. Refer to Section 2 of this Operator's hydraulic pressure before removing pressure
Manual for oil operating temperature ranges. gauge from the quick disconnect fitting.
3. Fully retract and lower the boom. Shutdown the
engine.

Operator's Manual
Hydraulic Pressure Settings

Quick Disconnect & Adjust
Valve Hydraulic Circuit Relief Valve Setting*
ment Location
500 psi
Figure 3-14
+0 -50 psi
1 Pilot Control &
(3 448kPa)
Figure 3-15
(+0 -344kPa)
Figure 3-14
Side Frame Extend/Retract 3,500 psi
Counterweight Retract &
(24 132kPa)
2 Figure 3-16
Figure 3-14
2,600 psi
Swing &
(17 927kPa)
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-14
1,500 psi
3 Counterweight Extend &
(10 342kPa)
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-14
5,000 psi
Travel &
(34 475kPa)
Figure 3-18
Boom Hoist
Figure 3-14 3,900 psi
Extend
& (26 890kPa)
Figure 3-18 2,500 psi
Retract
(17 237kPa)
Boom Telescope
4
3,000 psi
Extend
Figure 3-14 (20 685kPa)
Retract &
Inner Figure 3-18 4,700 psi (32 406kPa)
Center 4,600 psi (31 717kPa)
Outer/Tip 4,500 psi (31 027kPa)
Figure 3-14
4,150 psi
Front & Rear Winch &
(28 614Pa)
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-14
2,900 psi
5 Hydraulic Oil Cooler Fan Motor &
(19 995kPa)
Figure 3-19
*Adjust All Pressures to Within ±50 psi (±344kPa) Except Where Noted.
Figure 3-13
Relief Valves Pressures & Adjusting Procedures

Operator's Manual
4 2
3 1 5
Right Rear Access Door
Figure 3-14
Relief Valves

Operator's Manual
1. Relief Valve Adjuster

2. Quick Disconnect Fitting
Figure 3-15
Relief Valve 1 - Pilot Control Circuit
Pilot Control Adjusting Procedure 3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of 4. Hold any hydraulic function over relief and check
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane pressure. Adjust pressure as required to 500 psi
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve +0 -50 psi (3 448kPa +0 -344kPa).
Pressure Checking Instructions”. 5. Shutdown the engine.
6. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to 7. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis
obtain an accurate reading. connect fitting.

fitting.

Operator's Manual
1 5
3 4
1. Main Relief Valve Adjuster

3. Right Port Relief Adjuster
4. Left Port Relief Adjuster
5. Swing Control Valve
Figure 3-16
Relief Valve 2 - Swing, Side Frame Extend/Retract, & Counterweight Retract Circuit
Swing Circuit Adjusting Procedure Side Frame Extend/Retract &

1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of Counterweight Retract Circuit
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve Adjusting Procedure
Pressure Checking Instructions”. 1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
obtain an accurate reading. Pressure Checking Instructions”.
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect fitting.
fitting. 3. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine
3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed. speed to full throttle.
4. Engage the swing park brake. 4. Engage the counterweight control in the retract po
5. Move the swing control lever to the swing left posi sition or the side frame control in the extend or re
tion and hold. Check pressure. tract position and hold. Check pressure.
6. Adjust left port relief pressure as required to 2,600 5. Adjust main relief pressure on the swing control
psi (17 927kPa). valve as required to 3,500 psi (24 132kPa).
7. Move the swing control lever to the swing right pos 6. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
ition and hold. Check pressure. 7. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
8. Adjust right port relief pressure as required to 8. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis
2,600 psi (17 927kPa). connect fitting.
9. Shutdown the engine.
11. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis
connect fitting.

Operator's Manual
1. Counterweight Cylinder Extend Port Relief Quick Disconnect Fitting

2. Right Cylinder Port Relief Adjuster
3. Left Cylinder Port Relief Adjuster
Figure 3-17
Relief Valve 3 - Counterweight Extend Circuit
Counterweight Extend Circuit 3. Start the engine and maintain idle speed.
4. Engage the left counterweight control in the extend
Adjusting Procedure position and hold. Check pressure.
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of 5. Adjust the left cylinder port relief adjuster as re
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane quired to 1,500 psi (10 342kPa).
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve 6. Engage the right counterweight control in the ex
Pressure Checking Instructions”. tend position and hold. Check pressure.
7. Adjust the right cylinder port relief adjuster as re
Note: Idle speed must be maintained in order to
quired to 1,500 psi (10 342kPa).
obtain an accurate reading.
8. Shutdown the engine, relieve hydraulic system
2. Install the pressure gauge on the counterweight pressure, and remove the pressure gauge.
cylinder port relief quick disconnect fitting (fitting
marked Swing Control Valve).

Operator's Manual
Travel Circuit Adjusting Procedure Boom Telescope Circuit Adjusting
Refer to Figure 3-18. Procedure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of Refer to Figure 3-18.
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane 1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
Pressure Checking Instructions”. For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
2. Remove and plug the brake line to the travel motor. Pressure Checking Instructions”.
3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect 2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
fitting marked “Main Control Valve”. fitting marked “Main Control Valve”.
4. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine 3. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine
speed to full throttle. speed to full throttle.
5. Engage a travel control and hold. Check pressure. 4. Using the telescope override switch, extend each
6. Adjust pressure as required to 5,000 psi (34 475kPa). boom section and hold. Check pressure.
7. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown. 5. Adjust inner, center, and outer/tip extend port relief
8. Relieve hydraulic system pressure. pressures as required to 3,000 psi (20 685kPa).
9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis 6. Move the boom telescope control lever to the re
connect fitting. tract position and hold. Adjust the center and out
10. Remove the plug and install brake line to the travel er/tip retract port relief pressures above 4,700 psi
motor. (32 406kPa).
7. Adjust inner retract port relief pressure as required
Boom Hoist Circuit Adjusting to 4,700 psi (32 406kPa), then adjust center retract
Procedure port relief pressure as required to 4,600 psi (31
Refer to Figure 3-18. 717kPa), then adjust outer/tip retract port relief
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of pressure as required to 4,500 psi (31 027kPa).
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane 8. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve 9. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
Pressure Checking Instructions”. 10. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis
2. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect connect fitting.
fitting marked “Main Control Valve”.
3. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine Winch Circuit Adjusting Procedure
speed to full throttle. Refer to Figure 3-18.
4. Move the boom hoist control lever to the boom up 1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of
position and hold. Check pressure. this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane
5. Adjust boom up port relief pressure as required to For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve
3,900 psi (26 890kPa). Pressure Checking Instructions”.
6. Move the boom hoist control lever to the boom 2. Remove and plug the brake line to the winch motor.
down position and hold. Check pressure. 3. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect
7. Adjust boom down port relief pressure as required fitting marked “Main Control Valve”.
to 2,500 psi (17 237kPa). 4. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine
8. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown. speed to full throttle.
9. Relieve hydraulic system pressure. 5. Move the winch control lever to the down position.
10. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis Check pressure.
connect fitting. 6. Adjust winch down pressure as required to 4,150 psi
(28 614Pa).
7. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis
connect fitting.
10. Remove the plug and install brake line to the winch
motor.
11. Repeat procedure for the other winch if equipped.

Operator's Manual
16 15
11 6 5
Travel Motor
4 8
13 12
10
14
9
Winch Motor 3
1. Travel Relief Adjuster 9. Inner Boom Telescope Extend Port Relief Adjuster
2. Quick Disconnect Fitting - “Main Control Valve” 10. Outer/Tip Boom Telescope Retract Port Relief Adjuster
3. Boom Hoist Down Port Relief Adjuster 11. Travel Motor Brake Line
4. Boom Hoist Up Port Relief Adjuster 12. Rear Winch Down Relief Adjuster
5. Center Boom Telescope Extend Port Relief Adjuster 13. Front Winch Down Relief Adjuster
6. Outer/Tip Boom Telescope Extend Port Relief Adjuster 14. Winch Motor Brake Line
7. Center Boom Telescope Retract Port Relief Adjuster 15. Rear Winch Up Relief Adjuster
8. Inner Boom Telescope Retract Port Relief Adjuster 16. Front Winch Up Relief Adjuster
Figure 3-18
Relief Valve 4 - Main Control Valve

Operator's Manual
1
1. Relief Valve Adjuster 2

Figure 3-19
Relief Valve 5 - Hydraulic Oil Cooler Fan Motor Motor Circuit
Hydraulic Oil Cooler Fan Motor 6. Loosen the jam nut on the relief valve adjuster and
back off the relief valve adjuster approximately one
Motor Circuit Adjusting Procedure turn. Turn in the relief valve adjuster until pressure
1. Review all the general instructions in this Section of stops rising or has reached 3,000 psi (20 685kPa),
this Operator's Manual per “Preparing The Crane whichever comes first, and then turn the relief valve
For Checking Relief Pressures” and “Relief Valve adjuster in one‐half turn and tighten the jam nut.
Pressure Checking Instructions”. The pressure should read approximately 2,900 -
2. Unplug solenoid on fan motor. 3,000 psi (19 995 - 20 685kPa). Adjust as re
3. Ensure the hydraulic oil temperature is 50-100F quired.
(10-38_C) 7. Return engine to idle speed and shutdown.
4. Install the pressure gauge on the quick disconnect 8. Relieve hydraulic system pressure.
fitting. 9. Remove the pressure gauge from the quick dis
5. Start the engine and gradually increase the engine connect fitting.
speed to full throttle. 10. Reconnect plug to fan motor solenoid.

Operator's Manual
6. Press and hold the Function Key F3 to calibrate
First Layer/Third Wrap third wrap for the rear drum until a confirmation
Calibration (If Equipped) pop‐up window appears.
7. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
The crane may be equipped with a first layer/third wrap Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin
warning system. This system allows the operator to ates to confirm third wrap for the rear drum is calib
monitor the wire rope windings on the drum(s). In or rated.
der for this system to function correctly, it must be prop 8. Wind wire rope onto the rear drum until the first lay
erly calibrated using the controls on the Crane Control er is wound fully onto the drum. Visually verify that
Display. Refer to Figure 3-20. Calibrate the system one full layer is spooled correctly on the drum be
anytime wire rope is installed on the winch drum(s) or fore proceeding.
the live end of the wire rope is wound past the winch 9. Press and hold the Function Key F4 to calibrate first
drum(s). layer for the rear drum until a confirmation pop‐up
window appears.
Note: When the first layer/third wrap is enabled,
10. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
first layer and third wrap warning indicators on the
Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin
calibration screen will illuminate when either of
ates to confirm first layer for the rear drum is calib
these conditions are met. Warning indicators will
rated.
also be displayed on the RCL screen.
11. Properly wind the remaining wire rope on the rear
drum. Refer to “Winding Wire Rope On Drum” in
Section 5 of this Operator's Manual.
WARNING 12. Wind wire rope off the front drum (if equipped) until
only four full wraps are left on the drum. Or if in
The first layer/third wrap system will not
stalling wire rope on the drum, properly install the
function properly if the live end of the hoist
drum wedge to anchor the wire rope to the drum.
wire rope is wound past the winch drum(s).
Refer to “Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum” and
Wire rope failure may occur. Recalibrate the
“Winding Wire Rope On Drum” in Section 5 of this
first layer/third wrap system so that three (3)
Operator's Manual. Properly wind four full wraps
full wraps of wire rope are maintained on the
on the drum.
winch drum(s) at all times during operation.
13. Visually verify that four full wraps are on the front
1. Park the crane on a firm level surface. drum before proceeding.
2. Set the RCL System to Rigging Mode. 14. Press and hold the Function Key F1 to calibrate
third wrap for the front drum until a confirmation
pop‐up window appears. Refer to Figure 3-20.
WARNING 15. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin
The RCL is not operational when in the ates to confirm third wrap for the front drum is calib
Rigging Mode. Return the RCL to normal rated.
operation before operating the crane. 16. Wind wire rope onto the front drum until the first lay
er is wound fully onto the drum. Visually verify that
3. Wind wire rope off the rear drum until only four full one full layer is spooled correctly on the drum be
wraps are left on the drum. Or if installing wire rope fore proceeding.
on the drum, properly install the drum wedge to an 17. Press and hold the Function Key F2 to calibrate first
chor the wire rope to the drum. Refer to “Anchoring layer for the front drum until a confirmation pop‐up
Wire Rope To Drum” and “Winding Wire Rope On window appears.
Drum” in Section 5 of this Operator's Manual for in 18. Press Function Key F2 (Yes) to confirm or Function
structions. Properly wind four full wraps on the Key F3 (No) to cancel. Blue indicator light illumin
drum. ates to confirm first layer for the front drum is calib
4. Visually verify that four full wraps are on the rear rated.
drum before proceeding. 19. Properly wind the remaining wire rope on the front
5. From the Main Working Screen, press the Function drum. Refer to “Winding Wire Rope On Drum” in
Key F4 to bring up the First Layer/Third Wrap Calib Section 5 of this Operator's Manual.
ration Screen. Refer to Figure 3-20. 20. Return RCL System to the normal operating mode.

Operator's Manual
Main Working Screen
First Layer/Third Wrap Calibration Screen

2
4 5 6 7
Confirmation Pop‐up Window
1. First Layer Warning Indicator

2. Third Wrap Warning Indicator
3. Indicator Lights
4. Function Key F1 - Front Winch Third Wrap Calibration Switch
5. Function Key F2 - Front Winch First Layer Calibration Switch
6. Function Key F3 - Rear Winch Third Wrap Calibration Switch
7. Function Key F4 - Rear Winch First Layer Calibration Switch
Figure 3-20
First Layer/Third Wrap Calibration Controls

Operator's Manual
Notes:

Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Adjustable Boom Head Deflector Sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Installation Of Auxiliary Lifting Sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Removal Of Auxiliary Lifting Sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Changing The 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11
Storage Of The 31 Ft Fly Base Section From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13
Storage Of The 31 Ft Fly Base And 24 Ft Tip Sections From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base Section From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17
Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base And 24 Ft Tip Sections From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
Changing The 10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
Storage Of The 10 Ft Fly Base Section From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
Storage Of The 10 Ft Fly Base And 21 Ft Fly Center Sections From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . 4-32
Storage Of The 10 Ft Fly Base, 21 Ft Fly Center, And 24 Ft Fly Tip Sections
From The Erected Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base Section From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base And 21 Ft Fly Center Sections From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base, 21 Ft Fly Center, And 24 Ft Fly Tip Sections
From The Stored Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
10 Ft Offset Fly Base Panel Lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-44
Section 4 - Attachments i
Operator's Manual
ii Section 4 - Attachments
Operator's Manual
3
1
1. Boom Head Machinery 4. Center (T2) Section

2. Tip (T4) Section 5. Inner (T1) Section
3. Outer (T3) Section 6. Base Section
Figure 4-1
Boom Nomenclature
The telescoping feature of the boom sections is oper

Boom ated through the use of three hydraulic cylinders and a
The crane is equipped with a five section full power cable sheave mechanism which are an integral part of
boom. It consists of five basic parts: a base, inner (T1), the boom assembly. The T1, T2, T3, and T4 sections of
center (T2), outer (T3), and a tip (T4) section. Refer to the boom are “power sections”. Power sections can be
Figure 4-1. The base section is connected to the up extended or retracted to any desired length using the
per revolving frame. The boom is raised and lowered boom telescope control in the operator's cab. Refer to
by the boom hoist cylinder. Section 1 of this Operator's Manual for complete oper
ating instructions.
Section 4 - Attachments 4-1

Operator's Manual
Center Position
Far Right Position
1. Adjustable Right Deflector Sheave

2. Split Spacer
3. Capscrew And Locknut
Figure 4-2
Adjustable Boom Head Deflector Sheave
4-2 Section 4 - Attachments

Operator's Manual
In general the sheave should be kept in the position
Adjustable Boom Head nearest the center of the boom. If 4 or more parts of line
Deflector Sheave are reeved on the main boom head, the top right
sheave can be moved to the right side of the boom
The position of the right deflector sheave on the boom head by removing the capscrew and locknut from the
head machinery is adjustable. Refer to Figure 4-2. split spacer on the top head shaft. Slide the sheave to
The purpose is to keep the wire rope(s) as near the the right and then install the split spacer between the
center of the boom as possible to reduce side pull on sheaves. Secure split spacer with the capscrew and
the boom. locknut.

Operator's Manual
10
1
11
3
2
4
6 Lockout Clip Installed
(Switch Inactive)
5
WARNING
7
A FAILURE TO HAVE FULLY
OPERATIONAL ATB SYSTEM
9 COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS
INJURY OR DEATH. MAIN
BOOM ATB IS DISABLED WHEN
LOCKOUT IS INSTALLED. MAIN
10 BOOM ATB IS FUNCTIONAL
WHEN LOCKOUT IS NOT
8 INSTALLED.
1. Jumper Assembly 7. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Anti‐Two Block Switch

2. Plug Assembly 8. Anti‐Two Block Weight
3. Main Boom Head 9. Capscrew, Locknut, & Washer
4. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave 10. Main Boom Anti‐Two Block Switch
5. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Connector 11. Lockout Clip (Installed)
6. Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Wire Rope Guard
Figure 4-3
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave

The auxiliary lifting sheave connects to the boom head
WARNING
machinery. It is used for reeving winch wire rope for the The auxiliary lifting sheave adds weight to the
second winch drum. Once installed, it may be left in boom which must be considered in lifting
place without interfering with installation, erection, or capacities. When making lifts from the main
storage of other boom attachments. boom or fly with the auxiliary lifting sheave
installed, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities.

Operator's Manual
Installation Of Auxiliary Lifting Sheave Removal Of Auxiliary Lifting Sheave
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract
the boom and position the upper directly over the the boom and position the upper directly over the
front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing
lock. lock.
2. Boom down and/or extend the boom as required, 2. Boom down and/or extend the boom as required to
to ease access to the boom head machinery. ease access to the boom head machinery.
3. Adequately support the auxiliary lifting sheave with
an appropriate lifting device. It weighs approxi
mately 120 lb (54kg). Position the auxiliary lifting WARNING
sheave frame under the boom head machinery
cross shaft. Align the holes in the auxiliary lifting
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar
sheave frame with the lugs in the main boom and
device to reach necessary areas.
install capscrews, locknuts, and washers. Refer to
Figure 4-3. 3. Disconnect the plug assembly from the auxiliary
lifting sheave and connect it to the jumper assem
bly on the main boom head. Refer to Figure 4-3.
WARNING 4. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom head
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, anti‐two block switch weight cable.
or walk on the boom. Use a ladder or similar 5. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the auxilia
device as required to reach necessary areas. ry lifting sheave and install it on the main boom anti‐
two block switch.
4. Remove the wire rope guards from the boom de 6. Remove the wire rope guard from the auxiliary lift
flector sheaves and the auxiliary lifting sheave. ing sheave. Remove the winch wire rope and in
Reeve the winch wire rope on the center boom de stall the auxiliary lifting sheave wire rope guard for
flector sheave, then over the head sheave on the storage.
auxiliary lifting sheave. Install all wire rope guards. 7. Adequately support the auxiliary lifting sheave. It
weighs approximately 120 lb (54kg). Remove the
CAUTION capscrews, locknuts, and washers. Remove the
auxiliary lifting sheave.
All wire rope guards must be in proper 8. Properly store the auxiliary lifting sheave, the
position during operation. capscrews, locknuts, and washers, and the winch
wire rope which was used on the auxiliary lifting
5. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper assembly sheave.
on the main boom head and connect it to the auxil
iary lifting sheave connector.
6. Install the anti‐two block weight to the auxiliary lift
ing sheave anti‐two block switch.
7. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom anti‐
two block switch weight cable.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the

anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and auxiliary sheave are

reeved for operation, the lockout clip must be
removed and properly stored and an anti‐two
block weight must be suspended from each
anti‐two block switch.
8. Check the Crane Rating Manual in the operator's

cab for necessary deductions with the auxiliary lift
ing sheave installed before continuing operations.
9. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.

Operator's Manual
3
2
Right Wrong
1. Use The Connecting Lugs And/Or Fly Head Machinery Cross Shaft(s) 3. Do Not Attach Slings To Lattices, They Will Bend.
As Lifting Points.
2. Use The Main Chords As Lifting Points With Nylon Straps Only.
Figure 4-4
Handling The Fly Sections.
Offset Lattice Fly Safety Instructions

The crane may be equipped with a 31-55 ft offset lattice The following points must be observed while
fly or a 10 ft, 31-55 ft offset lattice fly. See “31-55 Ft performing any fly assembly or disassembly:
Offset Lattice Fly” or “10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly” in 1. Read and understand the instructions in this Oper
this Section of this Operator's Manual for instructions on ator's Manual before attempting to assemble or
these arrangements. disassemble the fly.
2. Do not stand inside, on top, or under the fly at any
time while assembling, storing, erecting, or disas
sembling the fly.

Operator's Manual
3. To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, or 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Installation
walk on the fly. Use a ladder or similar device to 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the
reach necessary areas. boom and position the upper directly over the front or
4. Use care handling the fly section(s) when loading, rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock.
transporting, and unloading. Damage that occurs
during these operations can go undetected and
could result in failure of the attachment, once sub WARNING
jected to loading. Do not attach slings to the lat
Install the offset fly with the crane on a firm
tices, when lifting the fly, as they will bend. It is rec
level surface, the side frames fully extended,
ommended that the connecting lugs and/or fly
ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode
head machinery cross shaft(s) be used as the lift
“Standard”, the upper directly over the front or
ing points. However, it is permissible to attach ny
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
lon straps around all four main chords. Refer to
engaged.
Figure 4-4.
5. Each individual fly section must be adequately The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
supported before attempting to disassemble the must be in the 2° offset position to install,
fly. Removing the connecting pins from the fly be remove, erect, or store, the offset fly.
fore it is supported, may allow the fly to fall. Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
6. Fully retract the boom and position it to 0° angle be maximum boom length the fly can be
fore swinging any fly section(s) around to the side of raised/lowered to/from the ground.
the boom/fly sections during fly erection and/or fly
Failure to do the above could result in serious
storage. Fly and/or boom damage could occur.
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
7. Use a hand line to control fly section(s) swing while
the crane tipping.
swinging fly section(s) during erection and storage
procedures. 2. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect
8. The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins must ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
be in the 2° offset position to install, remove, erect, to Figure 4-7.
or store, the offset fly. 3. Pin the fly base and tip together on secure block
9. Before operating or traveling the crane, ensure all fly ing. Refer to Figure 4-5. The fly base section
connecting pins and storage mechanisms are prop weighs approximately 3,322 lb (1 507kg) and the
erly installed. The fly could fall causing serious per fly tip section approximately 816 lb (370kg).
sonal injury, and/or major fly and/or boom damage.
10. Stay clear of pinch points when aligning fly section Note: Fly base section may be installed by itself
connecting points. Never place your fingers in if desired.
connecting pin holes.
11. Fully assemble the fly before installing it on the
boom. WARNING
31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
The crane may be equipped with either a one or two
piece offset lattice fly. The offset lattice fly, as shown in 4. Remove the winch wire rope from the main boom
Figure 4-6, connects to the main boom head. It can head machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave,
be used in one of four offset positions: 2, 15, 30, or whichever is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to
45. The fly extends the boom length for greater prevent damage to it during installation of the fly.
heights. The tip section of the fly extends its overall 5. Lower the boom and extend it to the fly. Slowly
length from 31 ft (9.4m) to 55 ft (16.8m). Once installed, raise or lower the boom to engage the fly lugs with
the offset lattice fly can be stored on the right side of the the boom head machinery cross shafts.
boom base section. 6. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the stor
age rings at the rear of the fly base section. Refer to
Figure 4-6. Install all four pins to connect the fly
lugs to the boom head machinery cross shafts on
the right side of the boom. Refer to Right Side Fly
Base Connecting Pin Label, refer to Figure 4-10.
(Install the pins with the head on top and keeper on
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Avoid injury to yourself. Fly can fall
when pins are removed. Do not
remove pins until fly is supported or
stored properly. Refer to Operator's
Manual for further information.
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Â ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
Â ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
1. Blocking 1 1 1
Figure 4-5
Installation And Removal Of The 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly
7. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the boom a. Disconnect plug assembly from jumper as
head machinery cross shafts on the left side of the sembly on the main boom head and connect it
boom head. Refer to Left Side Fly Base Connect to the offset lattice fly base section connector.
ing Pin Label, Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-6. Install Refer to Figure 4-3. Ensure all necessary
the top pin to connect the fly lug to the boom head anti‐two block harness connections are made
machinery cross shaft on the left side of the boom to the appropriate section(s).
head. Turn the t‐handle as required to push and b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro
align the bottom left fly lug and the bottom boom priate offset lattice fly anti‐two block switch.
head machinery cross shaft. Install the bottom left c. Properly install lockout clip on the main boom
fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the head anti‐two block switch weight cable.
on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin
keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a 1/2 in Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
(1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is obtained. anti‐two block switch is inactive.
When both main boom and fly are reeved for

operation, the lockout clip must be removed
WARNING and properly stored and an anti‐two block
All fly tip and base connecting pins must be weight must be suspended from each anti‐
properly installed before operating the crane two block switch.
with the fly erected. Serious personal injury or
damage to the fly and/or boom could occur if 11. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
all connecting pins are not properly installed. rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Operator's Manual.
8. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de 12. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca
flector sheave and boom head deflector sheaves. pacity deductions with the fly installed before con
Reeve the winch wire rope over the boom deflector tinuing operations.
sheave, then over the fly base deflector sheave.
9. Remove the wire rope guard(s) from the fly base
and/or fly tip head sheaves. Reeve the winch wire WARNING
rope over the appropriate sheave(s) and install all
wire rope guard(s). The fly adds weight to the boom which must
be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
is erected. When making lifts from the main
CAUTION boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
tion during operation. the appropriate deductions from lifting
capacities. Use the offset lattice fly only when
10. Properly connect the anti‐two block system as follows: the crane is level on fully extended side
frames.

Operator's Manual
14
15
18
19
20
16
17
13
21
10
9 11 12
1
2
8
3
4
6
5
1. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Pivot Pin) 12. Fly Base Deflector Sheave
2. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft 13. Fly Base Section
3. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 14. Fly Tip Wire Rope Guards
4. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Storage Rings 15. Fly Tip Section
5. Boom Head 16. Left Side Fly Tip Connecting Pin
6. T‐Handle 17. Fly Tip Connecting Pin Storage Location
7. Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 18. Right Side Fly Tip Connecting Pivot Pin
8. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring 19. Fly Base Wire Rope Guard
9. Fly Adaptor Lug 20. Fly Base Head Deflector Sheave
10. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Fly Erected Position) 21. Fly Base Head Sheave
11. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin (Fly Stored Position)
Figure 4-6
31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly

Operator's Manual
31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Removal b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
the boom and position the upper directly over the head anti‐two block switch.
front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat
lock. tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as
sembly on the main boom head.
6. Remove all fly base and/or tip wire rope guards as
WARNING applicable. Remove boom head and fly deflector
sheave wire rope guards and lay the winch wire
Remove the offset fly with the crane on a firm
rope aside to prevent damage to it during removal
ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode of the fly.
“Standard”, the upper directly over the front or 7. Install all fly base and tip wire rope guards for stor
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock age. Install the boom head and deflector sheave
engaged. wire rope guards for storage.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins 8. Extend the boom until the fly tip head sheave or fly
must be in the 2° offset position to install, base head sheave, as applicable rests on the
remove, erect, or store, the offset fly. ground.
9. Securely block up the fly section(s) to support it
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
(them). Refer to Figure 4-5. The fly base section
maximum boom length the fly can be
weighs approximately 3,322 lb (1 507kg) and the
raised/lowered to/from the ground.
fly tip section approximately 816 lb (370kg).
the crane tipping. WARNING
2. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per Use extreme care when removing the tapered
“Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base Section From The fly connecting pins. They could pop out
Stored Position” or “Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base suddenly and cause serious personal injury.
And 24 Ft Tip Sections From The Stored Position”
as applicable, in this Section of this Operator's 10. Remove the six fly connecting pins and store four
Manual. of the pins and keepers in the storage rings at the
3. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect rear of the fly. Install the remaining two pins and
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer keepers in the storage holes on the left side of the
to Figure 4-7. If necessary, change the fly offset to boom head machinery cross shafts to prevent the
the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 31-55 Ft shafts from rotating. Refer to Figure 4-6.
Fly Offset Angle” in this Section of this Operator's
Note: If only the fly tip section is to be removed,
Manual for detailed instructions.
remove the connecting pins from the fly tip lugs
4. Boom down fully.
only.
11. Retract the boom away from the fly or the fly base
WARNING away from the fly tip, as applicable.
12. Properly reeve or secure the winch wire rope which
was used on the fly.
5. Properly change the anti‐two block system con Operator's Manual.
nections as follows: 14. Properly store fly section(s) to prevent damage to it
a. Remove the lockout clip from the main boom (them).
anti‐two block switch weight cable. Refer to
Figure 4-3. Ensure all necessary anti‐two
block harness connections have been discon
nected.

Operator's Manual
Changing The 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle Note: If the crane is not equipped with the fly tip
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract section or the fly tip section is not erected, lower
the boom and position the upper directly over the or extend the boom until the fly base head
front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing sheave is resting on the ground.
lock.
WARNING WARNING
Change the offset fly angle with the crane on a
firm level surface, the side frames fully
extended, ABC+A counterweight installed,
boom mode “Standard”, the upper directly
over the front or rear of the lower, and the 4. Remove the offset connecting pins from the fly
travel swing lock engaged. adaptor lugs as required.
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the 5. Install the offset connecting pins in the correct lo
maximum boom length the fly can be cation for the desired offset angle. Use the infor
raised/lowered to/from the ground. mation label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine
the correct offset connecting pin locations for the
Failure to do the above could result serious
desired offset angle of the fly. Refer to Figure 4-7.
6. Confirm that the offset connecting pins are prop
the crane tipping.
erly located on both sides of the fly and ensure that
2. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per the keeper pins are securely installed.
“Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base Section From The 7. Slowly boom up to allow the fly section to adjust it
Stored Position” or “Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base self to the desired offset angle.
And 24 Ft Tip Sections From The Stored Position” 8. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
as applicable, in this Section of this Operator's rect crane configuration before continuing opera
Manual. tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
9. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca
pacity deductions with the fly installed before con
CAUTION tinuing operations.
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly.
Structural damage to the fly could occur if WARNING
care is not taken. Use a signal person to aid
The fly adds weight to the boom which must
the operator in lowering the fly head sheave to
the ground.
boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
3. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
erected, refer to the Crane Rating Manual for
tip head sheave or fly base head sheave, as applic
able, is resting on the ground. Use a signal person
to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
the crane is level on fully extended side
the ground.
frames.

Operator's Manual
PIN
LOCATION
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent
PIN
LOCATION personal injury or crane damage.
Pins must be properly installed on both
sides of fly.
2° Offset Rest fly sheave on ground before
PIN changing offsets.
LOCATION Install pins per 2° offset to install, erect,
store, or remove the fly.
3
PIN 2
LOCATION
PIN 15° Offset

1
LOCATION
PIN
LOCATION
30° Offset
PIN
LOCATION
PIN
LOCATION
45° Offset 4
2
4
5
6
1. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring 4. Offset Lattice Fly Base Section
2. Offset Connecting Pins (2° Position Shown) 5. Offset Lattice Fly Tip Section
3. Fly Adaptor Lug 6. Fly Tip Head Sheave
Figure 4-7
Changing The 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle

Operator's Manual
Storage Of The 31 Ft Fly Base Section 6. Remove wire rope guards from fly base head sheaves,
From The Erected Position fly base deflector sheave, the boom head sheave and
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the boom deflector sheave. Refer to Figure 4-6. Remove
boom and position the upper directly over the front or the winch wire rope and lay it aside. Install all wire rope
rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock. guards at all sheaves for storage.
7. Properly store winch wire rope which was used on fly.
8. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly base.
WARNING
Store the offset fly with the crane on a firm WARNING
ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
“Standard”, the upper directly over the front or the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
engaged. causing serious personal injury and/or crane
damage.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
must be in the 2° offset position to install, Use extreme care when removing the tapered
remove, erect, or store, the offset fly. fly connecting pins. They could pop out
suddenly causing serious personal injury.
maximum boom length the fly can be 9. Remove the bottom left fly base connecting pin on
raised/lowered to/from the ground. the left side of the fly using the t‐handle to assist in
Failure to do the above could result in serious relieving the load on the pin. Back off the t‐handle
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
the crane tipping. lug is obtained. Remove the top left fly base con
necting pin. Store connecting pins in the storage
2. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect holes (11) on the boom head machinery cross
ing pins (2) are installed in the 2° offset position. shafts (2) on the left side of the boom to prevent the
Refer to Figure 4-7. If necessary change the fly shafts from rotating.
offset to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 10. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect
31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle” in this Section of this ing pin on the right side of the fly. Refer to
Operator's Manual for detailed instructions. Figure 4-6. To reduce loading and ease pin re
3. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully moval, push the fly slightly right or left. Remove the
retract the boom. inside top right fly base connecting pin on the right
4. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle. side of the fly. To reduce loading and ease pin re
moval push the fly slightly left or right. Store the two
pins and keepers in the storage rings (4) on the rear
WARNING of the fly base section (13).
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, 11. Fully retract the boom and position it to 0° angle.
similar device to reach necessary areas. CAUTION
5. Properly change the anti‐two block system con Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
nections as follows: Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom
a. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat damage.
tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as
sembly on the main boom head. Refer to
Figure 4-3. Ensure all necessary anti‐two
block harness connections have been discon
WARNING
nected. Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
b. Remove the lockout clip from main boom head swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
anti‐two block switch weight cable. personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly
base section and install it on the main boom

Operator's Manual
Top View
Swinging The Fly Base And Tip Sections
Swinging The Fly Base Section

Figure 4-8
Swinging The 31-55 Ft Fly Sections

Operator's Manual
12. Slowly swing the fly base section around to the Storage Of The 31 Ft Fly Base And 24 Ft
right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50. Re Tip Sections From The Erected Position
fer to Figure 4-8. 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the
13. Using the boom override switch, extend the inner boom and position the upper directly over the front or
boom section until the fly can swing completely rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock.
against the storage bracket.
14. Slowly fully retract the boom while maintaining 50°
boom angle to slide the storage lug on the rear of
the fly base into the slot on the rear fly storage
WARNING
bracket (10). Refer to Figure 4-12. At the same Store the offset fly with the crane on a firm
time, the bullet lug and the square lug on the front level surface, the side frames fully extended,
fly storage bracket (14) should engage through the “Standard”, the upper directly over the front or
holes on the rear of the fly base. Also if the fly tip rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
section is stored on the boom, the fly base and fly engaged.
tip lugs must engage. Install two right side fly base
pins to attach the fly base to the fly tip lugs. must be in the 2° offset position to install,
15. Boom down low enough to reach retaining pins. remove, erect, or store, the offset fly.
Pull and rotate retaining pin to the engaged posi
tion (4). Refer to Figure 4-13. Push retaining pin Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
to engage the pin through the square lug on the maximum boom length the fly can be
front storage bracket. raised/lowered to/from the ground.
WARNING the crane tipping.
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
2. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
ing pins (2) are installed in the 2° offset position.
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
Refer to Figure 4-7. If necessary change the fly
causing serious personal injury and/or crane
offset to the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The
damage.
31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle ” in this Section of this
16. Remove two fly base connecting pivot pins (1) from Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
the right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-6. 3. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
Store pins and keepers in storage rings (4) on the retract the boom.
rear of the fly base section (13). 4. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
17. Remove and store the hand line from the tip of the
fly base section.
WARNING
WARNING or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
Before operating or traveling the crane ensure
the right side fly connecting pins are properly 5. Properly change the anti‐two block system con
stored in their storage rings, and the left side nections as follows:
connecting pins are stored in their storage a. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat
holes in the boom head machinery cross tice fly base and connect it to the jumper as
shafts to prevent the shafts from rotating. Ser sembly on the main boom head. Refer to
ious personal injury or damage could result to Figure 4-3. Ensure all necessary anti‐two
the fly and/or boom if fly connecting pins are block harness connections have been discon
not properly stored. nected.
b. Remove the lockout clip from main boom head
anti‐two block switch weight cable.
Operator's Manual.
base section and install it on the main boom
19. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci
ties with the fly in the stored position before con
tinuing operations.

Operator's Manual
6. Remove wire rope guards from fly tip head sheave,
fly base head sheave, fly base deflector sheave,
the boom head sheave, and boom deflector
WARNING
sheave. Refer to Figure 4-6. Remove the winch Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
wire rope and lay it aside. Install all wire rope the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
guards at all sheaves for storage. to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
7. Properly store winch wire rope which was used on causing serious personal injury and/or crane
fly. damage.
8. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
Use extreme care when removing the tapered
fly connecting pins. They could pop out
WARNING
Do not remove fly tip connecting pivot pins on 13. Remove the hand line from the tip of the fly tip and
the right side of the fly until the fly tip is pinned attach it to the tip of the fly base.
to the storage brackets. Fly tip could fall 14. Remove the bottom left fly base connecting pin on
causing serious personal injury and/or crane the left side of the fly using the t‐handle to assist in
damage. relieving the load on the pin. Back off the t‐handle
until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
lug is obtained. Remove the top left fly base con
necting pin. Store connecting pins in the storage
holes (11) on the boom head machinery cross
9. Remove the bottom and then the top fly tip connect shafts (2) on the left side of the boom to prevent the
ing pins (16) on the left side of the fly tip section (15). shafts from rotating. Refer to Figure 4-6.
Refer to Figure 4-6. To ease pin removal, relieve the 15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect
loading on the pins by pushing the fly tip from side to ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
side. Store pins and keepers in the storage location and ease pin removal, push the fly slightly right or
(17) on the rear of the fly tip section. left. Refer to Figure 4-6. Remove the inside top
10. Ensure the boom is fully retracted and at 0° boom right fly base connecting pin on the right side of the
angle. fly. To reduce loading and ease pin removal push
the fly slightly left or right. Store the two pins and
keepers in the storage rings (4) on the rear of the fly
CAUTION base section (13).
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. 16. Fully retract the boom and position it to 0° angle.
Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom
damage. CAUTION
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
WARNING damage.
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly tip

could swing around fly base rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury. WARNING
11. Using the hand line attached to the fly tip section, Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
slowly swing the fly tip section around to the right swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
side of the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-8. personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
12. Align the storage bracket on the fly tip section with
17. Using the hand line attached to the fly base sec
the storage bracket on the fly base section. Refer
tion, slowly swing the fly base section around to the
to Figure 4-13. Install the hitch pin (2) through the
right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50. Re
storage brackets and secure the hitch pin.
fer to Figure 4-8.

Operator's Manual
18. Using the boom override switch, extend the inner
boom section until the fly can swing completely
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or machine
19. Slowly fully retract the boom while maintaining 50° damage.
boom angle to slide the storage lug on the rear of Stored Fly Tip: (shown)
the fly base into the slot on the rear fly storage Install one pin in top left side lug closest to boom.
Install other 3 pins in storage.
bracket (10). Refer to Figure 4-12. At the same Refer to Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
time, the bullet lug and the square lug on the front
Fly Tip Stored on Boom
fly storage bracket (14) should engage through the
Connecting
holes on the rear of the fly base. Pin Storage Connecting
20. Boom down low enough to reach retaining pins. Pull Pin Storage (3)
and rotate retaining pin to the engaged position (4). Lest Side
Refer to Figure 4-13. Push retaining pin to engage Lug
the pin through the square lug on the front storage Connecting
Pin (1)
bracket. Connecting
Pins (3)
WARNING Figure 4-9

Fly Tip Storage Label
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base Section
causing serious personal injury and/or crane From The Stored Position
damage. 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the
boom and position the upper directly over the front or
21. Remove two fly base connecting pivot pins (1) from rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock.
the right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-6.
Store pins and keepers in storage rings (4) on the
rear of the fly base section (13). WARNING
22. Store one pin in the top left fly tip connecting lug.
Erect the offset fly with the crane on a firm
storage hole on the rear of the fly tip section. Refer
to Fly Tip Storage Label, Figure 4-9 and
Figure 4-12. Install the other pins in their storage
locations.
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
engaged.
fly base section.
must be in the 2° offset position to install,
WARNING remove, erect, or store, the offset fly.
the right side fly connecting pins are properly
stored in their storage rings, and the left side
connecting pins are stored in their storage Failure to do the above could result in serious
holes in the boom head machinery cross personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
shafts to prevent the shafts from rotating. Ser the crane tipping.
ious personal injury or damage could result to
the fly and/or boom if fly connecting pins are 2. If the fly tip is stored on the boom, check that the fly
not properly stored. tip connecting pins are in the stored position. Refer
to Fly Tip Storage Label, Figure 4-9 and
24. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor Figure 4-12. Ensure the two connecting pins are re
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this moved from the pivot holes in the fly tip section so the
Operator's Manual. fly tip is not connected to the fly base section.
25. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci 3. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect
ties with the fly in the stored position before con ing pins (2) are installed in the 2° offset position.
tinuing operations. Refer to Figure 4-7.

Operator's Manual
8. Pull the retaining pin (4) to disengage the pin from
the square lug on the front storage bracket. Refer
WARNING to Figure 4-13. Rotate and release the retaining
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury
or machine damage.
pin to lock it in the disengaged position (5).
Connecting Pins must be properly installed in both top and
bottom lugs, as follows:
Lifting Loads:
Install 2 pins in each right side lug
WARNING
(total of 4 pins on right side.)
Fly Not Erected:
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
Install pins in storage tubes on fly. swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
Refer to Operator's Manual for detailed instructions. personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
Fly Base Connecting Pin Placement injury.
Right Side Lug
Fly Base 9. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly base and
boom up to 20°. Using the boom override switch,
slowly extend the inner boom section approxi
Connecting Pins
mately 2-2.5 ft (0.61-0.76m) to slide the fly off the
Connecting pin
Right Side storage tubes storage brackets.
Figure 4-10
Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label CAUTION
Do not extend boom more than 2.5 ft (0.76m).
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle. Extend the Damage to the fly may occur.
boom to at least 62 ft (19m) and lower the hook ball, to
be used on the fly, to the ground. This will allow
enough wire rope length to ease reeving of the fly.
5. Fully retract the boom to engage the fly lugs with CAUTION
the boom head machinery cross shafts on the right Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
side of the boom. Fully lower the boom. Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom
damage.
WARNING 10. Slowly boom down to allow the fly to swing out
slightly from the storage brackets and then fully re
tract the boom.
11. Continue to lower the boom to 0° angle. Use the
hand line attached to the fly base to swing the fly
base around the boom head until the fly lugs en
6. Remove two fly connecting pins from the storage
gage with the boom head machinery cross shafts
rings on the rear of the fly base section. Install
on the left side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-8.
them through the fly base pivot lugs (15) on the
12. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-12. (In
rings (11) on the rear of the fly base section and
stall the pins with the head on top and the keeper
install them in the boom head machinery cross
on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
shafts (20) on the right side of the boom. Refer to
7. Remove the winch wire rope from the boom head
Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label,
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever
Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-12. Install the inside
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent
top right pin first. Swing the fly base to the left or
damage to it during erection of the fly.
right to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the
inside bottom right pin. Swing the fly base to the
right or left to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
WARNING the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
Check that the fly base connecting pins are bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
installed on the right side of the boom in the fly
base pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from
the storage brackets. The fly could fall causing
serious personal injury and/or crane damage.

Operator's Manual
13. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor
age location (21) on the boom head machinery WARNING
cross shafts on the left side of the boom. Refer to Comply with the following to prevent personal
Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label, injury or machine damage.
Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12. Install one left side Connecting Pins must be properly installed in both top
fly base connecting pin (18) through the top fly lug and bottom lugs, as follows:
on the left side of the boom. Turn the t‐handle to Lifting Loads:
Install pins in working position (as shown).
push and align the bottom left fly lug and the bot Verify pin placement on opposite side of boom
tom boom head machinery cross shaft. Install the below lifting loads.
bottom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with Fly Not Erected: Install pins in boom headshaft storage
to prevent headshafts from turning.
the head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) In Refer to Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
stall the pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at Fly Base Connecting Pin Placement
least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is Boom headshaft
Fly Base storage
obtained.
Working Position
WARNING Connecting Pin
Left Side
All six fly base connecting pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane Figure 4-11
with the fly base erected. Serious personal Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label
injury or damage to the fly and/or boom could
occur if all connecting pins are not properly 16. Remove and store the hand line from the tip of the
installed. fly base section.
14. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-6. Operator's Manual.
Reeve the winch wire rope on the boom deflector 18. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
sheave then over the fly deflector and head with the fly installed before continuing operations.
sheaves. Install all wire rope guards.
CAUTION WARNING
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
tion during operation. considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
15. Properly change the anti‐two block system con or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
nections as follows: refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
assembly on main boom head and connect it Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
to the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-3. level on fully extended side frames.
Ensure all necessary anti‐two block harness
connections have been made.
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
section anti‐two block switch.
c. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
head anti‐two block switch cable.


and properly stored and an anti‐two block
weight must be suspended from each anti‐
two block switch.

Operator's Manual
5 B 7
14
D 8
A
10
A
1
9 4
B
C
2 16 6
3 15 20
C D
21
18
12
17
19
21
18
13
11 15 20
1. Left Side Fly Tip Connecting 6. Front Fly Tip Storage Lug 12. Fly Tip Wire Rope Guards 18. Left Side Fly Base Connecting
Pin Storage Location 7. Boom 13. Fly Tip Head Sheave Pin Holes
2. Fly Tip Connecting Pin 8. Fly Base Deflector Sheave 14. Front Fly Storage Bracket 19. Boom Head Sheaves
Storage Rings 9. Offset Lattice Fly Base Section 15. Fly Base Pivot Pins 20. Right Side Fly Base
3. Fly Tip Connecting Lug Pivot 10. Rear Fly Storage Bracket 16. Boom Deflector Sheave Wire Connecting Pin Holes
Holes/Pins 11. Fly Base Connecting Pin Rope Guard 21. Fly Base Connecting Pins
4. Rear Fly Tip Storage Lug Storage Rings (Four Places) 17. Boom Deflector Sheaves Storage Locations
5. Offset Lattice Fly Tip Section
Figure 4-12
31-55 Ft Fly Erection And Storage

Operator's Manual
Erection Of The 31 Ft Fly Base And 24 Ft bottom.) Install the pin keepers. Remove the con
Tip Sections From The Stored Position necting pin and keeper from the top fly tip connect
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the ing lug (1) on the left side of the fly tip section. Refer
boom and position the upper directly over the front or to Figure 4-12.
rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock. 7. Remove the winch wire rope from the boom head
damage to it during erection of the fly.
WARNING 8. Check that the hitch pin (2) is installed through the
Erect the offset fly with the crane on a firm lugs on the fly tip and base sections. Refer to
level surface, the side frames fully extended, Figure 4-13.
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock WARNING
engaged.
Check that the fly base and tip connecting
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins pins are installed in the pivot holes before
must be in the 2° offset position to install, disconnecting the fly from the storage
remove, erect, or store, the offset fly. brackets. Also check that the hitch pin is
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the installed through the lugs on the fly tip and
maximum boom length the fly can be base sections. The fly could fall causing
raised/lowered to/from the ground. serious personal injury and/or crane damage.
Failure to do the above could result in serious 9. Pull the retaining pin (4) to disengage the pin from
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or the square lug on the front storage bracket. Refer
the crane tipping. to Figure 4-13. Rotate and release the retaining
pin to lock it in the disengaged position (5).
2. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect
ing pins (2) are installed in the 2° offset position.
3. Position the boom above 50° boom angle. Extend
WARNING
the boom to at least 86 ft (26m) and lower the hook Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
ball, to be used on the fly, to the ground. This will al swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
low enough wire rope length to ease reeving of the personnel clear of the swing path to avoid injury.
fly.
10. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly base and
4. Fully retract the boom to engage the fly lugs with
boom up to 20°. Using the boom override switch,
the boom head machinery cross shafts on the right
slowly extend the inner boom section approxim
side of the boom. Fully lower the boom.
ately 2-2.5 ft (0.61-0.76m) to slide the fly off the
storage brackets.
WARNING
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, CAUTION
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or Do not extend boom more than 2.5 ft (0.46m).
similar device to reach necessary areas. Damage to the fly may occur.
5. Remove two fly connecting pins from the storage rings 11. Slowly boom down to allow the fly to swing slightly
(11) on the rear of the fly base section. Install them out from the storage brackets and then fully retract
through the fly base pivot lugs (15) on the right side of the boom.
the boom. Refer to Figure 4-12. (Install the pins with
the head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
the pin keepers. CAUTION
6. Ensure the two right side fly tip connecting pins are Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
Installed through the fly tip connecting pivot lugs Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom
(3) to connect the fly base and fly tip. (Install the damage.
pins with the head on top and the keeper on the

Operator's Manual
1
B C
1. Bullet Lug
2. Hitch Pin 2 3 4 5
3. Square Lug
4. Retaining Pin In Engaged Position
5. Retaining Pin In Disengaged Position
Figure 4-13
Front Storage Bracket

Operator's Manual
12. Continue to lower the boom to 0° angle. Use the 16. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. Use the hand
hand line attached to the fly base to swing the fly line attached to the fly tip section and slowly swing
base and tip around the boom head until the fly the fly tip section around the fly base section until
base lugs engage with the boom head machinery the fly tip lugs engage with the fly base lugs on the
cross shafts on the left side of the boom. Refer to left side of the fly.
Figure 4-8. 17. Remove the left side fly tip connecting pins from the
13. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage storage rings on the rear of the fly tip section. Install
rings (11) on the rear of the fly base section and them through the fly tip connecting lugs on the left
install them in the boom head machinery cross side of the fly. Install the top left pin and then the bot
shafts (20) on the right side of the boom. Refer to tom left. (Install the pins with the head on top and the
Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label, keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-12. Install the inside
right to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the WARNING
inside bottom right pin. Swing the fly base to the All four fly tip connecting pins must be properly
right or left to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install installed before operating the crane with the fly
the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the tip erected. Serious personal injury or damage
bottom.) Install the pin keepers. to the fly and/or boom could occur if all
14. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor connecting pins are not properly installed.
age location (21) on the boom head machinery
cross shafts on the left side of the boom. Refer to 18. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base
Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label, head and deflector sheaves and fly tip head
Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-12. Install one left side sheave. Refer to Figure 4-6. Reeve the winch
fly base connecting pin (18) through the top fly lug wire rope on the boom deflector sheave then over
on the left side of the boom. Turn the t‐handle to the fly base deflector and head sheaves and fly tip
push and align the bottom left fly lug and the bot head sheave. Install all wire rope guards.
tom boom head machinery cross shaft. Install the
bottom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with CAUTION
the head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) In All wire rope guards must be in proper posi
stall the pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at tion during operation.
least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is
obtained. 19. Properly change the anti‐two block system con
nections as follows:
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
WARNING assembly on main boom head and connect it
All six fly base connecting pins must be to the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-3.
properly installed before operating the crane Ensure all necessary anti‐two block harness
with the fly base erected. Serious personal connections have been made.
injury or damage to the fly and/or boom could b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the fly base
occur if all connecting pins are not properly section anti‐two block switch.
installed. c. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
15. Remove the hand line from the tip of the fly base
section and attach it to the tip of the fly tip section. Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
Remove the hitch pin which connects the fly tip anti‐two block switch is inactive.
section to the fly base section. Refer to When both main boom and fly are reeved for
Figure 4-13. Store the hitch pin back in the lug on operation, the lockout clip must be removed
the fly tip section once it is erected. and properly stored and an anti‐two block
two block switch.
WARNING 20. Remove and store the hand line from the tip of the
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could fly tip section.
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
personnel clear of the swing path to avoid injury.

Operator's Manual
21. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor 2. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer
Operator's Manual. to Figure 4-16.
22. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities 3. Pin the fly base, fly center, and fly tip together on
with the fly installed before continuing operations. secure blocking. Refer to Figure 4-14. The fly
base section weighs approximately 1,393 lb
(632kg), the fly center section approximately 1,937
WARNING lb (879kg), and the fly tip section approximately
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be 797 lb (362kg).
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is Note: The fly base section connects to the fly
erected. When making lifts from the main boom center with two connecting pins at the top and
or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected, two connecting hitch pins at the bottom.
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Note: Fly base may be installed without the fly
Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
center section and/or the fly base and fly center
level on fully extended side frames.
sections may be installed without the fly tip sec
tion, if desired.
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly
The crane may be equipped with either a one, two, or WARNING
three piece offset lattice fly. The offset lattice fly section,
as shown in Figure 4-15, connects to the main boom
head. It can be used in one of four offset positions: 2,
15, 30, or 45. The fly extends the boom length for
greater heights. The fly center section extends the fly 4. Remove the winch wire rope from the main boom
from 10 ft (3.0m) to 31 ft (9.4m). The tip section of the fly head machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave,
extends its overall length from 31 ft (9.4m) to 55 ft whichever is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to
(16.8m). Once installed, the offset lattice fly section(s) prevent damage to it during installation of the fly.
can be stored on the right side of the boom base section. 5. Lower the boom and extend it to the fly. Slowly
raise or lower the boom to engage the fly lugs with
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly the boom head machinery cross shafts.
Installation 6. Remove the four fly connecting pins from the storage
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the rings at the right rear of the fly base section. Refer to
boom and position the upper directly over the front or Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label,
rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock. Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-15. Install all four pins to
connect the fly lugs to the boom head machinery cross
shafts on the right side of the boom. (Install the pins
WARNING with the head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install
Install the offset fly with the crane on a firm the pin keepers.
level surface, the side frames fully extended, 7. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the boom
ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode head machinery cross shafts on the left side of the
“Standard”, the upper directly over the front or boom head. Refer to Left Side Fly Base Connect
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock ing Pin Label, Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-15. In
engaged. stall the top pin to connect the fly lug to the boom
head machinery cross shaft on the left side of the
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins boom head. Turn the t‐handle as required to push
and align the bottom left fly lug and the bottom
remove, erect, or store, the offset fly.
boom head machinery cross shaft. Install the bot
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
maximum boom length the fly can be head on top and keeper on the bottom.) Install the
raised/lowered to/from the ground. pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a
Failure to do the above could result in serious 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or tained.
the crane tipping.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Avoid injury to yourself. Fly can fall
when pins are removed. Do not
remove pins until fly is supported or
stored properly. Refer to Operator's
Manual for further information.
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
1. Blocking
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ
ÂÂ ÂÂ
ÂÂ Â
Â
ÂÂ
1 1 1
Figure 4-14
Installation And Removal Of The 10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro
WARNING priate fly section anti‐two block switch.
c. Properly install lockout clip on main boom
All fly tip, center, and base connecting pins head anti‐two block switch cable.
must be properly installed before operating
the crane with the fly erected. Serious Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the
personal injury or damage to the fly and/or anti‐two block switch is inactive.
boom could occur if all connecting pins are
not properly installed. When both main boom and fly are reeved for
8. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base and and properly stored and an anti‐two block
boom head deflector sheaves. Reeve the winch weight must be suspended from each anti‐
wire rope over the boom deflector sheave, then on two block switch.
the fly base deflector sheave.
9. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de 11. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
flector, fly center, or fly tip head sheaves, as applic rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
able. Reeve the winch wire rope over the appropri Operator's Manual.
ate deflector and head sheave(s) as applicable 12. Check the Crane Rating Manual for necessary ca
and install all wire rope guards. pacity deductions with the fly installed before con
tinuing operations.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi
tion during operation.
WARNING
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
10. Properly change anti‐two block system connec considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
tions as follows: erected. When making lifts from the main boom
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
assembly on main boom head and connect it refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
to the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-3. appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
Ensure all necessary anti‐two block harness Use the offset lattice fly only when the crane is
connections have been made. level on fully extended side frames.

Operator's Manual
19
20
23
24
21 25
22
17
18
27
11 12 13
10
14
1
2
8 6
7 9 16
15
5 4
1. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 10. Fly Base Deflector Sheave 26
(Pivot Pin) 11. Fly Base Deflector Sheave Wire Rope
2. Boom Head Machinery Cross Shaft Guard 19. Fly Tip Wire Rope Guards
3. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 12. Fly Adaptor Lug 20. Fly Tip Section
4. Boom Head 13. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 21. Left Side Fly Tip Connecting Pins
5. T‐Handle (Fly Erected Position) 22. Fly Tip Connecting Pin Storage Locations
6. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 14. Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin 23. Right Side Fly Tip Connecting Pins
Storage Rings (Fly Stored Position) (Pivot Pins)
7. Offset Connecting Pins 15. Fly Base/Center Connecting Pin 24. Fly Base Wire Rope Guard
(2° Position Shown) 16. Fly Base/Center Connecting Hitch Pin 25. Fly Base Head Deflector Sheave
8. 10 Ft (3.0m) Fly Base Section 17. Fly Center Deflector Sheave 26. Fly Base Head Sheave
9. Offset Connecting Pin Storage Ring 18. 21 Ft (6.4m) Fly Center Section 27. Fly Center Head Sheave
Figure 4-15
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly

Operator's Manual
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Removal b. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the off
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract set lattice fly and install it on the main boom
the boom and position the upper directly over the head anti‐two block switch.
front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing c. Remove the plug assembly from the offset lat
lock. tice fly and connect it to the jumper assembly
on the main boom head. Ensure all necessary
anti‐two block connections are disconnected.
WARNING 6. Remove all fly base, fly center, and/or fly tip wire
rope guards, as applicable. Remove boom head
Remove the offset fly with the crane on a firm and deflector sheave wire rope guards and lay the
level surface, the side frames fully extended, winch wire rope aside to prevent damage to it dur
ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode ing removal of the fly.
“Standard”, the upper directly over the front or 7. Install all fly base, fly center, and fly tip wire rope
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock guards at the deflector and head sheaves for stor
engaged. age, as applicable. Install the boom head and de
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins flector sheave wire rope guards.
must be in the 2° offset position to install, 8. Extend the boom until the fly tip sheave, fly center
remove, erect, or store, the offset fly. sheave, or fly base sheave, as applicable, rests on
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the the ground.
maximum boom length the fly can be 9. Securely block up the fly section(s) to support it
raised/lowered to/from the ground. (them). Refer to Figure 4-14. The fly base section
weighs approximately 1,393 lb (632kg), the fly cen
Failure to do the above could result in serious ter section approximately 1,937 lb (879kg), and the
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or fly tip section approximately 797 lb (362kg).
the crane tipping.
2. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per

“Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base From The Stored
WARNING
Position”, “Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base And 21 Ft Use extreme care when removing the tapered
Fly Center Sections From The Stored Position”, or fly connecting pins. They could pop out
“Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base, 21 Ft Fly Center suddenly and cause serious personal injury.
And 24 Ft Fly Tip Sections From The Stored Posi
tion”, as applicable, in this Section of this Opera 10. Remove the six fly connecting pins and store four
tor's Manual. of the pins and keepers in the storage rings at the
3. Check that the fly adaptor lug and offset connect rear of the fly. Install the remaining two pins and
ing pins are installed in the 2° offset position. Refer keepers in the storage holes on the left side of the
to Figure 4-7. If necessary, change the fly offset to boom head machinery cross shafts to prevent the
the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 10 Ft, shafts from rotating. Refer to Figure 4-15.
31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle ” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual for detailed instructions. Note: If only the fly tip section is to be removed,
4. Boom down fully. remove the connecting pins from the fly tip lugs
only. If only the fly tip and fly center sections are
to be removed, remove the connecting pins and
WARNING connecting hitch pins from the fly center lugs
only.
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or 11. Retract the boom away from the fly, the fly base
similar device to reach necessary areas. away from the fly center, or the fly center away from
the fly tip, as applicable.
5. Properly change the anti‐two block system con 12. Properly reeve or secure the winch wire rope which
nections as follows: was used on the fly.
a. Remove lockout clip on the main boom head 13. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
anti‐two block switch cable. Refer to rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
Figure 4-3. Operator's Manual.
14. Properly store fly section(s) to prevent damage to it
(them).

Operator's Manual
Changing The 10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Fly Offset 3. Carefully extend and/or lower the boom until the fly
Angle tip, fly center, or fly base head sheave, as applic
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract able is resting on the ground. Use a signal person
the boom and position the upper directly over the to alert the operator when the sheave is resting on
front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing the ground.
lock.
WARNING WARNING
Change the offset fly angle with the crane on a To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand,
firm level surface, the side frames fully or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
extended, ABC+A counterweight installed, similar device to reach necessary areas.
boom mode “Standard”, the upper directly
4. Remove the offset connecting pins from the fly
over the front or rear of the lower, and the
adaptor lugs as required.
travel swing lock engaged.
5. Install the offset connecting pins in the correct lo
Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the cation for the desired offset angle. Use the infor
maximum boom length the fly can be mation label, on the offset lattice fly, to determine
raised/lowered to/from the ground. the correct offset connecting pin locations for the
Failure to do the above could result in serious desired offset angle of the fly. Refer to
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or Figure 4-16.
the crane tipping. 6. Confirm that the offset connecting pins are prop
erly located on both sides of the fly and ensure that
2. If the fly is not in the erected position, erect it per the keeper pins are securely installed.
“Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base From The Stored 7. Slowly boom up to allow the fly section to adjust it
Position”, “Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base And 21 Ft self to the desired offset angle.
Fly Center Sections From The Stored Position”, or 8. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
“Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base, 21 Ft Fly Center rect crane configuration before continuing opera
And 24 Ft Fly Tip Sections From The Stored Posi tions. Refer to Section 1 of this Operator's Manual.
tion”, as applicable, in this Section of this Opera 9. Check the Crane Rating Manual, in the operator's
tor's Manual. cab, for deductions to the lifting capacities with the
fly installed before continuing operations.
CAUTION
Do not extend the boom or boom down to the WARNING
point of over stressing the offset lattice fly.
Structural damage to the fly and/or boom The fly adds weight to the boom which must
could occur if care is not taken. Use a signal be considered in lifting capacities when the fly
person to aid the operator in lowering the fly is erected. When making lifts from the main
head sheave to the ground. boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
frames.

Operator's Manual
WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal
injury or crane damage.
Pins must be properly installed on both sides of fly.
Rest fly sheave on ground before changing offsets.
Install pins per 2° offset to store or erect fly.
PIN
LOCATION
PIN
LOCATION
PIN PIN
LOCATION LOCATION
2° Offset 30° Offset

PIN PIN
LOCATION LOCATION
PIN PIN
LOCATION LOCATION
15° Offset 45° Offset
2 1
3
4
5
1. Fly Adaptor Lug 4. 24 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Tip Section

2. 10 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Base Section 5. Fly Tip Head Sheave
3. 21 Ft Offset Lattice Fly Center Section
Figure 4-16
Changing The 10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle

Operator's Manual
Storage Of The 10 Ft Fly Base Section boom deflector sheave. Refer to Figure 4-15. Re
From The Erected Position move the winch wire rope and lay it aside. Install wire
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the rope guards at all sheaves for storage.
boom and position the upper directly over the front or 7. Properly store winch wire rope which was used on
rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock. fly.
8. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly base.
WARNING WARNING
Store the offset fly with the crane on a firm
level surface, the side frames fully extended, Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on
ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned
“Standard”, the upper directly over the front or to the storage brackets. The fly could fall
rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock causing serious personal injury and/or crane
engaged. damage.
The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins Use extreme care when removing the tapered
must be in the 2° offset position to install, fly connecting pins. They could pop out
remove, erect, or store, the offset fly. suddenly causing serious personal injury.
9. Remove the bottom left fly base connecting pin on
the left side of the fly using the t‐handle to assist in
relieving the load on the pin. Back off the t‐handle
Failure to do the above could result in serious until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
personal injury, major crane damage, and/or lug is obtained. Remove the top left fly base con
the crane tipping. necting pin. Store connecting pins in the storage
holes on the boom head machinery cross shafts
2. Check that the offset connecting pins are installed
(25) on the left side of the boom to prevent the
in the 2° offset position. Refer to Figure 4-16. If
shafts from rotating. Refer to Figure 4-17.
necessary change the fly offset to the 2° position.
10. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect
Refer to “Changing The 10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Fly Offset
ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
Angle ” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
and ease pin removal, push the fly slightly right or
detailed instructions.
left. Refer to Figure 4-15. Remove the inside top
3. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
right fly base connecting pin on the right side of the
retract the boom.
fly. To reduce loading and ease pin removal push
4. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
keepers in the storage rings (6) on the right rear of
WARNING the fly base section (8).
11. Fully retract the boom and position it to 0° angle.
similar device to reach necessary areas. CAUTION
5. Properly change the anti‐two block system con Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
nections as follows: Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base and damage.
connect it to the jumper assembly on the main
boom head. Refer to Figure 4-3. Ensure all
necessary anti‐two block connections are dis
connected.
WARNING
b. Remove lockout clip on the main boom head Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
anti‐two block switch cable. swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
base section and install it on the main boom 12. Use the hand line attached to the fly base section
anti‐two block switch. and slowly swing the fly base section around to the
6. Remove wire rope guards from fly base head sheave, right side of the boom. Slowly boom up to 50. Re
fly base deflector sheave, the boom head sheave and fer to Figure 4-8.

Operator's Manual
5 B
7
16 17
D 18
8
A
12
A
1
11
10
B
9
C
4
20 6
2 3 24 19
C D
25
22
14
21
23
25
22
15
13 24 19
1. Left Side Fly Tip Connecting 8. 10 Ft Fly Base Deflector 14. Fly Tip Wire Rope Guards 21. Boom Deflector Sheave
Pin Storage Location Sheave 15. Fly Tip Head Sheave 22. Left Side Fly Base
2. Fly Tip Connecting Pin 9. 10 Ft Fly Base Section 16. Fly Center Storage Bracket Connecting Pin Hole
Storage Rings 10. Fly Base/Center Connecting 17. Fly Base/Center Connecting 23. Boom Head Sheave
3. Fly Tip Lug Pivot Holes/Pins Hitch Pin Pin 24. Right Side Fly Base
4. Rear Fly Tip Storage Lug 11. 21 Ft Fly Center Section 18. Fly Base Storage Bracket Connecting Pin Hole
5. Offset Lattice Fly Tip Section 12. Rear Fly Storage Bracket 19. Fly Base Pivot Pins 25. Left Side Fly Base
6. Front Fly Tip Storage Lug 13. Fly Base Connecting Pin 20. Boom Deflector Sheave Wire Connecting Pins
7. Boom Storage Rings (Four Places) Rope Guard (Fly Stored Position)
Figure 4-17
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Offset Fly Erection And Storage

Operator's Manual
1
WARNING
the right side fly connecting pins are properly
2 stored in their storage rings, and the left side
connecting pins are stored in their storage
holes in the boom head machinery cross
shafts to prevent the shafts from rotating. Ser
the fly and/or boom if fly connecting pins are
3 not properly stored.
fly base section.
1. Bullet Lug 18. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
2. Retaining Pin In Disengaged Position
3. Retaining Pin In Engaged Position
Operator's Manual.
Figure 4-18 19. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci
10 Ft Fly Base Storage Bracket ties with the fly in the stored position before con
tinuing operations.
boom section until the fly can swing completely Storage Of The 10 Ft Fly Base And 21 Ft
against the storage bracket. Fly Center Sections From The Erected
14. Slowly fully retract the boom while maintaining 50° Position
boom angle to engage the bullet lug on the 10 ft fly 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the
base storage bracket. Refer to Figure 4-17. boom and position the upper directly over the front or
Note: If the fly center section is stored on the rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock.
boom, ensure top and bottom chords engage.
Secure base section to center section with two
connecting pins at the top and two connecting WARNING
hitch pins at the bottom. Store the offset fly with the crane on a firm
15. Boom down low enough to reach retaining pins. Pull ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode
and rotate retaining pin (3). Refer to Figure 4-18. “Standard”, the upper directly over the front or
Push retaining pin to engage the pin through the bul rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
let lug on the 10 ft fly base storage bracket. engaged.
causing serious personal injury and/or crane Failure to do the above could result in serious
damage. personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
16. Remove two fly base connecting pivot pins (1) from
the right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-15. 2. Check that the offset connecting pins are installed
Store pins and keepers in storage rings (6) on the in the 2° offset position. Refer to Figure 4-16. If
rear of the fly base section (8). necessary change the fly offset to the 2° position.
Refer to “Changing The 10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Fly Offset
Angle ” in this Section of this Operator's Manual for
detailed instructions.

Operator's Manual
A
2 B C
3 4 5
1. Hitch Pin 4. Retaining Pin In Engaged Position

2. Bullet Lug 5. Retaining Pin In Disengaged Position
1 3. Square Lug
Figure 4-19
10 Ft, 31-55 Ft Fly Center Storage Bracket

Operator's Manual
3. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully 10. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect
retract the boom. ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
4. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle. and ease pin removal, push the fly slightly right or
left. Refer to Figure 4-15. Remove the inside top
right fly base connecting pin on the right side of the
WARNING fly. To reduce loading and ease pin removal push
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, the fly slightly left or right. Store the two pins and
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or keepers in the storage rings (6) on the right rear of
similar device to reach necessary areas. the fly base section (8).
11. Fully retract the boom and position it to 0° angle.
5. Properly change the anti‐two block system con
a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base and
CAUTION
connect it to the jumper assembly on the main Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
boom head. Refer to Figure 4-3. Ensure all Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom
necessary anti‐two block connections are dis damage.
connected.
b. Remove lockout clip on the main boom head
anti‐two block switch cable.
c. Remove the anti‐two block weight from the fly WARNING
base section and install it on the main boom Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
anti‐two block switch. swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
6. Remove wire rope guards from fly center head personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
sheaves, fly base deflector sheave, the boom head
sheave and boom deflector sheave. Refer to 12. Use the hand line attached to the fly center section
Figure 4-15. Remove the winch wire rope and lay and slowly swing the fly base and center sections
it aside. Install wire rope guards at all sheaves for around to the right side of the boom. Slowly boom
storage. up to 50. Refer to Figure 4-8.
7. Properly store the winch wire rope which was used 13. Using the boom override switch, extend the inner
on the fly. boom section until the fly can swing completely
8. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly center section. against the storage bracket.
WARNING the fly center into the slot on the rear storage brack
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on et (12). Refer to Figure 4-17. At the same time,
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned the bullet lug and the square lug on the fly center
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall storage bracket should engage through the holes
causing serious personal injury and/or crane on the rear of the fly center section. Refer to
damage. Figure 4-19. Also the bullet lug on the fly base
storage bracket on the boom base section should
Use extreme care when removing the tapered engage the fly base storage bracket on the fly base
fly connecting pins. They could pop out section. Refer to Figure 4-18. Also, if the fly tip is
suddenly causing serious personal injury. stored on the boom, the tip and center sections
must engage. Install two right side fly tip connect
9. Remove the bottom left fly base connecting pin on ing pins to connect the fly center to the fly tip sec
the left side of the fly using the t‐handle to assist in tion.
relieving the load on the pin. Refer to Figure 4-15. 15. Boom down low enough to reach retaining pins. Pull
Back off the t‐handle until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) and rotate the fly center retaining pin (4). Refer to
clearance from the fly lug is obtained. Remove the Figure 4-19. Push retaining pin to engage the pin
top left fly base connecting pin. Store connecting through the square lug on the front storage bracket.
pins in the storage holes on the boom head ma Pull and rotate the fly base retaining pin (3). Refer to
chinery cross shafts (2) on the left side of the boom Figure 4-18. Push retaining pin to engage the pin
to prevent the shafts from rotating. through the bullet lug on the 10 ft fly base storage
bracket.

Operator's Manual
WARNING WARNING
Do not remove the fly connecting pivot pins on Store the offset fly with the crane on a firm
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall “Standard”, the upper directly over the front or
causing serious personal injury and/or crane rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
damage. engaged.
16. If the fly tip is stored on the side of the boom, install must be in the 2° offset position to install,
the hitch pin (1) through the storage bracket on the remove, erect, or store, the offset fly.
fly tip section and the storage bracket on the fly
center section and secure the hitch pin. Refer to
Figure 4-19.
17. Remove two fly base connecting pivot pins (1) from
the right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-15. Failure to do the above could result in serious
Store pins and keepers in storage rings (6) on the personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
rear of the fly base section (8). the crane tipping.
2. Check that the offset connecting pins (2) are in

stalled in the 2° offset position. Refer to
WARNING Figure 4-16. If necessary change the fly offset to
Before operating or traveling the crane ensure the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 10 Ft,
the right side fly connecting pins are properly 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle ” in this Section of this
stored in their storage rings, and the left side Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
connecting pins are stored in their storage 3. Position the boom above 50° boom angle and fully
holes in the boom head machinery cross retract the boom.
shafts to prevent the shafts from rotating. Ser 4. Lower the boom to 0° boom angle.
the fly and/or boom if fly connecting pins are
not properly stored. WARNING
18. Remove and store the hand line from the tip of the or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or
fly base section. similar device to reach necessary areas.
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this 5. Properly change the anti‐two block system con
Operator's Manual. nections as follows:
20. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci a. Disconnect plug assembly from fly base and
ties with the fly in the stored position before con connect it to the jumper assembly on the main
tinuing operations. boom head. Refer to Figure 4-3. Ensure all
necessary anti‐two block connections are dis
Storage Of The 10 Ft Fly Base, 21 Ft Fly connected.
Center, And 24 Ft Fly Tip Sections From b. Remove lockout clip on the main boom head
The Erected Position anti‐two block switch cable.
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the
boom and position the upper directly over the front or
section and install it on the main boom anti‐two
rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock.
block switch.
6. Remove wire rope guards from fly tip head sheave,
fly center deflector sheave, fly base deflector
sheave, boom head sheaves, and boom deflector
sheave. Refer to Figure 4-15. Remove the winch
wire rope and lay it aside. Install wire rope guards
at all sheaves for storage.

Operator's Manual
WARNING WARNING
Comply with the following to prevent personal injury or machine Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly tip
damage.
could swing around fly base rapidly. Keep all
Stored Fly Tip: (shown)
Install one pin in top left side lug closest to boom. personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
Install other 3 pins in storage.
Refer to Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
11. Using the hand line attached to the fly tip section,
Fly Tip Stored on Boom slowly swing the fly tip section around to the right
Connecting
Connecting
side of the fly center section. Refer to Figure 4-8.
Pin Storage
Pin Storage (3) 12. Align the storage bracket on the fly tip section with
the storage bracket on the fly center section. Refer
Lest Side
Lug to Figure 4-19. Install the hitch pin (1) through the
Connecting storage brackets and secure the hitch pin.
Pin (1)
Connecting
Pins (3)
WARNING
Figure 4-20
Fly Tip Storage Label
7. Properly store the winch wire rope which was used causing serious personal injury and/or crane
on the fly. damage.
8. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly tip section.
WARNING suddenly causing serious personal injury.
Do not remove fly tip connecting pivot pins on 13. Remove the bottom left fly base connecting pin on
the right side of the fly until the fly is pinned to the left side of the fly using the t‐handle to assist in
the storage brackets. Fly tip could fall relieving the load on the pin. Back off the t‐handle
causing serious personal injury and/or crane until at least a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly
damage. lug is obtained. Remove the top left fly base con
Use extreme care when removing the tapered necting pin. Store connecting pins in the storage
fly connecting pins. They could pop out holes (14) on the boom head machinery cross
suddenly causing serious personal injury. shafts (2) on the left side of the boom to prevent the
shafts from rotating. Refer to Figure 4-15.
9. Remove the bottom and then the top fly tip connect 14. Remove the hand line from the tip of the fly tip sec
ing pins (21) on the left side of the fly tip section (20). tion and attach it to the tip of the fly center section.
Refer to Figure 4-15. To ease pin removal, relieve 15. Remove the inside bottom right fly base connect
the loading on the pins by pushing the fly tip from ing pin on the right side of the fly. To reduce loading
side to side. Store pins and keepers in the storage and ease pin removal, push the fly slightly right or
location (22) on the rear of the fly tip section. left. Refer to Figure 4-15. Remove the inside top
10. Ensure the boom is fully retracted. right fly base connecting pin on the right side of the
fly. To reduce loading and ease pin removal push
CAUTION keepers in the storage rings (6) on the right rear of
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. the fly base section (8).
Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom 16. Fully retract the boom and position it to 0° angle.
damage.

Operator's Manual
CAUTION WARNING
Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom Before operating or traveling the crane ensure
damage. the right side fly connecting pins are properly
stored in their storage rings, and the left side
connecting pins are stored in their storage
holes in the boom head machinery cross
WARNING shafts to prevent the shafts from rotating.
Serious personal injury or damage could
Use a hand line to control fly swing. Fly could
result to the fly and/or boom if fly connecting
swing around the boom rapidly. Keep all
pins are not properly stored.
personnel clear of swing path to avoid injury.
22. Install a fly tip connecting pin in the top left fly tip
17. Use the hand line attached to the center section
connecting lug. Refer to Figure 4-17 and Fly Tip
and slowly swing the fly base and center sections
Storage Label, Figure 4-20.
around to the right side of the boom. Slowly boom
up to 50. Refer to Figure 4-8.
fly center section.
boom section until the fly can swing completely
Operator's Manual.
25. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capaci
ties with the fly in the stored position before con
the fly center into the slot on the rear storage brack
tinuing operations.
et (12). Refer to Figure 4-17. At the same time,
the bullet lug and the square lug on the fly center Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base Section
storage bracket should engage through the holes From The Stored Position
on the rear of the fly center section. Refer to 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract the
Figure 4-19. Also the bullet lug on the fly base boom and position the upper directly over the front or
storage bracket on the boom base section should rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing lock.
engage the fly base storage bracket on the fly base
section. Refer to Figure 4-18.
20. Boom down low enough to reach retaining pins. Pull
and rotate the fly center retaining pin (4). Refer to
WARNING
Figure 4-19. Push retaining pin to engage the pin Erect the offset fly with the crane on a firm
through the square lug on the fly center storage level surface, the side frames fully extended,
bracket. Pull and rotate the 10 ft fly base retaining pin ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode
(3). Refer to Figure 4-18. Push retaining pin to en “Standard”, the upper directly over the front or
gage the pin through the bullet lug on the 10 fly base rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
storage bracket. engaged.
the right side of the boom until the fly is pinned maximum boom length the fly can be
to the storage brackets. The fly could fall raised/lowered to/from the ground.
causing serious personal injury and/or crane Failure to do the above could result in serious
damage. personal injury, major crane damage, and/or
the crane tipping.
21. Remove two fly base connecting pivot pins (19)
from the right side of the boom. Refer to
Figure 4-17. Store pins and keepers in storage
rings (13) on the rear of the 10 ft fly base section (9).

Operator's Manual
2. If the fly center and/or the fly tip sections are stored 9. Attach a hand line to the tip of the 10 ft fly base and
on the boom, check that the fly center and/or fly tip boom up to 20°.
section connecting pins are in the stored position. 10. Using the boom override switch, slowly extend the
Refer to Figure 4-17, Figure 4-19, and inner boom section approximately 1-1.5 ft
Figure 4-20. (0.3-0.46m) to slide the 10 ft fly base off the stor
3. Check that the offset connecting pins (2) are in age brackets.
stalled in the 2° offset position. Refer to
Figure 4-16. If necessary change the fly offset to
the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 10 Ft,
CAUTION
31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle ” in this Section of this Do not extend boom more than 1.5 ft (0.46m).
Operator's Manual for detailed instructions. Damage to the fly and/or boom may occur.
4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle. Extend the
boom to at least 62 ft (19m) and lower the hook ball, to 11. Slowly boom down to allow the fly base to swing
be used on the fly, to the ground. This will allow out slightly from the storage bracket and then fully
enough wire rope length to ease reeving of the fly. retract the boom.
CAUTION
WARNING damage.
WARNING
6. Remove two fly connecting pins from the storage Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
rings on the rear of the fly base section. Install could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
them through the fly base pivot lugs (19) on the all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
right side of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-17. (In injury.
stall the pins with the head on top and the keeper
on the bottom.) Install the pin keepers. 12. Continue to lower the boom to 0° angle. Use the
7. Remove the winch wire rope from the boom head hand line attached to the fly base and swing the fly
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave whichever base around the boom head until the fly base lugs
is to be used on the fly and lay it aside to prevent engage with the boom head machinery cross
damage to it during erection of the fly. shafts on the left side of the boom. Refer to
Figure 4-8.
13. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
WARNING rings (13) on the rear of the fly base section and
Check that the fly base connecting pins are install them in the boom head machinery cross
installed on the right side of the boom in the shafts (24) on the right side of the boom. Refer to
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from Figure 4-17. Install the inside top right pin first.
the storage brackets. The fly could fall Swing the fly base to the left or right to get the pin to
causing serious personal injury and/or crane drop in the hole. Install the inside bottom right pin.
damage. Swing the fly base to the right or left to get the pin to
drop in the hole. (Install the pins with the head on
8. Pull the retaining pin to disengage the pin from the top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin
bullet lug on the 10 ft fly base storage bracket. Re keepers.
fer to Figure 4-18. Rotate and release the retain 14. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor
ing pin to lock it in the disengaged position. age location (25) on the boom head machinery
cross shafts on the left side of the boom. Refer to
Note: If fly center section is stored on the boom, Figure 4-17. Install one left side fly base connect
remove two connecting pins from the top of the ing pin through the top fly lug on the left side of the
center section and two connecting hitch pins boom. Turn the t‐handle to push and align the bot
from the bottom of the center section that con tom left fly lug and the bottom boom head ma
nects the base section to the center section. chinery cross shaft. Install the bottom left fly con

Operator's Manual
necting pin. (Install the pins with the head on top
and the keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin
keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a 1/2 in
WARNING
(1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is obtained. The fly adds weight to the boom which must
WARNING boom or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly
All six fly base connecting pins must be
properly installed before operating the crane
with the fly base erected. Serious personal
injury or damage to the fly and/or boom could
frames.
occur if all connecting pins are not properly
installed.
Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base And 21 Ft
15. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base head
Fly Center Sections From The Stored
and deflector sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-15.
Reeve the winch wire rope on the boom deflector Position
sheave then over the fly base deflector and head 1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract
sheaves. Install all wire rope guards. the boom and position the upper directly over the
front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing
lock.
CAUTION
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi
tion during operation. WARNING
Erect the offset fly with the crane on a firm
16. Properly change the anti‐two block system con level surface, the side frames fully extended,
nections as follows: ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper “Standard”, the upper directly over the front or
assembly on main boom head and connect it rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
to the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-3. engaged.
Ensure all the necessary anti‐two block har
ness connections are made. The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the offset fly
remove, erect, or store, the offset fly.
base section.
c. Properly install lockout clip on main boom Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
head anti‐two block switch cable. maximum boom length the fly can be
When both main boom and fly are reeved for the crane tipping.
and properly stored and an anti‐two block 2. Check that the offset connecting pins (2) are in
weight must be suspended from each anti‐ stalled in the 2° offset position. Refer to
two block switch. Figure 4-16. If necessary change the fly offset to
the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 10 Ft,
17. Remove and store the hand line from the tip of the 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle ” in this Section of this
fly base section. Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
18. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor 3. Check that the fly tip connecting pins are in the
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this stored position. Refer to Figure 4-17.
Operator's Manual. 4. Position the boom above 50° boom angle. Extend
19. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities the boom to at least 62 ft (19m) and lower the hook
with the fly installed before continuing operations. ball, to be used on the fly, to the ground. This will
allow enough wire rope length to ease reeving of
the fly.

Operator's Manual
the boom head machinery cross shafts on the right CAUTION
side of the boom. Fully lower the boom. Do not extend boom more than 2.5 ft (0.76m).
Damage to the fly and/or boom may occur.
WARNING 13. Slowly boom down to allow the fly base and center
To avoid personal injury, do not climb, stand, sections to swing out slightly from the storage
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or bracket and then fully retract the boom.
6. Remove two fly connecting pins from the storage
CAUTION
rings on the rear of the fly base section. Install Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
them through the fly pivot lugs (19) on the right side Failure to do so could cause boom and/or fly
of the boom. Refer to Figure 4-17. (Install the damage.
pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
7. Remove the winch wire rope from the boom head
WARNING
is to be used on the fly, and lay it aside to prevent Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
damage to it during erection of the fly. could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
injury.
WARNING
14. Continue to lower the boom to 0° angle. Use the
Check that the fly base connecting pins are hand line attached to the fly center section to swing
installed on the right side of the boom in the the fly base and center sections around the boom
pivot holes before disconnecting the fly from head until the fly lugs engage with the boom head
the storage brackets. The fly could fall machinery cross shafts on the left side of the
causing serious personal injury and/or crane boom. Refer to Figure 4-8.
damage. 15. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
8. Pull the retaining pin to disengage the pin from the rings (13) on the rear of the fly base section and
bullet lug on the 10 ft fly base storage bracket. Re install them in the boom head machinery cross
fer to Figure 4-18. Rotate and release the retain shafts (24) on the right side of the boom. Refer to
ing pin to lock it in the disengaged position. Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label,
9. Pull the retaining pin to disengage the pin from the Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-17. Install the inside
square lug on the fly center storage bracket. Refer top right pin first. Swing the fly base to the left or
to Figure 4-19. Rotate and release the retaining right to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the
pin to lock it in the disengaged position. inside bottom right pin. Swing the fly base to the
right or left to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
Note: Check that all four pins connecting the the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
base section to the center section (two connect bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
ing pins and two connecting hitch pins) are in 16. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the stor
stalled and secured. age location (25) on the boom head machinery
cross shafts on the left side of the boom. Refer to
10. Remove the two fly tip connecting pins (3) from the Left Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label,
fly tip lug pivot holes. Refer to Figure 4-17. En Figure 4-11 and Figure 4-17. Install one left side
sure the top left side fly tip connecting pin is in the fly base connecting pin through the top fly lug on
proper storage location (1) Figure 4-17. Check the left side of the boom. Turn the t‐handle to push
that the remaining 3 fly tip section connecting pins and align the bottom left fly lug and the bottom
are properly stored in the storage rings (3). boom head machinery cross shaft. Install the bot
11. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly center section. tom left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the
12. Fully retract the boom and and boom up to 20°. head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install
Using the boom override switch, slowly extend the the pin keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least
inner boom section approximately 2-2.5 ft a 1/2 in (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is ob
(0.61-0.76m) to slide the fly base and center sec tained.
tions off the storage brackets.

Operator's Manual
WARNING WARNING
All six fly base connecting pins must be The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
properly installed before operating the crane considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
with the fly base erected. Serious personal erected. When making lifts from the main boom
injury or damage to the fly and/or boom could or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
occur if all connecting pins are not properly refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
installed. appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
17. Remove the wire rope guard from the fly base de level on fully extended side frames.
flector sheave and fly center head sheave. Refer to
Figure 4-15. Reeve the winch wire rope on the
boom deflector sheave then over the fly base de Erection Of The 10 Ft Fly Base, 21 Ft Fly
flector and fly center section head sheaves. Install Center, And 24 Ft Fly Tip Sections From
all wire rope guards. The Stored Position
1. Park the crane on a firm, level surface. Fully retract
CAUTION the boom and position the upper directly over the
front or rear of the lower. Engage the travel swing
All wire rope guards must be in proper posi lock.
tion during operation.
18. Properly change the anti‐two block system con

WARNING
a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper Erect the offset fly with the crane on a firm
assembly on main boom head and connect it level surface, the side frames fully extended,
to the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-3. ABC+A counterweight installed, boom mode
Ensure all the necessary anti‐two block har “Standard”, the upper directly over the front or
ness connections are made. rear of the lower, and the travel swing lock
b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the offset fly engaged.
base section. The fly adaptor lug and offset connecting pins
c. Properly install lockout clip on main boom must be in the 2° offset position to install,
head anti‐two block switch cable. remove, erect, or store, the offset fly.
Note: When the lockout clip is installed, the Refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
anti‐two block switch is inactive. maximum boom length the fly can be
and properly stored and an anti‐two block
the crane tipping.
two block switch. 2. Check that the offset connecting pins (2) are in
19. Remove and store the hand line from the tip of the stalled in the 2° offset position. Refer to
fly center section. Figure 4-16. If necessary change the fly offset to
20. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor the 2° position. Refer to “Changing The 10 Ft,
rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this 31-55 Ft Fly Offset Angle ” in this Section of this
Operator's Manual. Operator's Manual for detailed instructions.
21. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities 3. Position the boom above 50° boom angle. Extend
with the fly installed before continuing operations. the boom to at least 86 ft (26m) and lower the hook
ball. to be used on the fly, to the ground. This will al
low enough wire rope length to ease reeving of the
fly.

Operator's Manual
WARNING CAUTION
Do not extend boom more than 2.5 ft (0.76m).
Damage to the fly and/or boom may occur.
similar device to reach necessary areas. 13. Slowly boom down to allow the fly to swing slightly
out from the storage brackets and then fully retract
5. Remove two fly connecting pins from the storage rings the boom.
(13) on the rear of the fly base section. Install them
through the fly base pivot lugs (19) on the right side of
the boom. Refer to Figure 4-17. (Install the pins with
CAUTION
the head on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly.
the pin keepers. Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom
6. Remove the connecting pin and keeper from the damage.
left top fly tip connecting lug (1) on the left side of
the fly tip section. Refer to Figure 4-17. Ensure
two connecting pins are installed through the fly tip
pivot lugs (3). (Install the pins with the head on top
WARNING
and the keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly
keepers. could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep
7. Remove the winch wire rope from the boom head all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid
machinery or the auxiliary lifting sheave, whichever injury.
damage to it during erection of the fly. 14. Continue to lower the boom to 0° angle. Use the
8. Check that the hitch pin (1) is installed through the hand line attached to the fly center section to swing
lugs on the fly tip and fly center sections. Refer to the fly base, center, and tip around the boom head
Figure 4-19. until the fly base lugs engage with the boom head
machinery cross shafts on the left side of the
Note: Check that all four pins connecting the boom. Refer to Figure 4-8.
base section to the center section (two connect 15. Remove the two connecting pins from the storage
ing pins and two connecting hitch pins) are in rings (6) on the rear of the fly base section and
stalled and secured. install them in the boom head machinery cross
shafts (2) on the right side of the boom. Refer to
Right Side Fly Base Connecting Pin Label,
WARNING Figure 4-10 and Figure 4-15. Install the inside
Check that the fly base and tip connecting right to get the pin to drop in the hole. Install the
pins are installed in the pivot holes before inside bottom right pin. Swing the fly base to the
disconnecting the fly from the storage right or left to get the pin to drop in the hole. (Install
brackets. Also check that the hitch pin is the pins with the head on top and the keeper on the
installed through the lugs on the fly tip and bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
base sections. The fly could fall causing 16. Remove the two fly connecting pins from the storage
serious personal injury and/or crane damage. location (25) on the boom head machinery cross
shafts on the left side of the boom. Refer to Left Side
9. Pull the retaining pin (3) to disengage the pin from Fly Base Connecting Pin Label, Figure 4-11 and
the bullet lug on the 10 ft fly base storage bracket. Figure 4-17. Install one pin through the top fly lug
Refer to Figure 4-18. Rotate and release the re (22) on the left side of the boom. Turn the t‐handle to
taining pin to lock it in the disengaged position (2). push and align the bottom left fly lug and the bottom
10. Pull the retaining pin (4) to disengage the pin from boom head machinery cross shaft. Install the bottom
the square lug on the fly center storage bracket. left fly connecting pin. (Install the pins with the head
Refer to Figure 4-19. Rotate and release the re on top and the keeper on the bottom.) Install the pin
taining pin to lock it in the disengaged position (5). keepers. Back off the t‐handle until at least a 1/2 in
11. Attach a hand line to the tip of the fly center section. (1.3cm) clearance from the fly lug is obtained.
12. Fully retract the boom and boom up to 20°. Using
the boom override switch, slowly extend the inner
boom section approximately 2-2.5 ft
(0.61-0.76m) to slide the fly tip, fly center, and fly
base off the storage brackets.

Operator's Manual
21. Remove the wire rope guards from the fly base de
WARNING flector sheave, fly center deflector sheave, and fly
tip head sheaves. Refer to Figure 4-15. Reeve
All six fly base connecting pins must be the winch wire rope on the boom deflector sheave
properly installed before operating the crane then over the fly base and fly center deflector
with the fly base erected. Serious personal sheaves. and fly tip head sheave. Install all wire
injury or damage to the fly and/or boom could rope guards.
occur if all connecting pins are not properly
installed.
CAUTION
17. Remove the hand line from the tip of the fly center All wire rope guards must be in proper posi
section and attach it to the tip of the fly tip section. tion during operation.
Remove the hitch pin which connects the fly tip
section to the fly center section. Refer to 22. Properly change the anti‐two block system con
Figure 4-19. Store the hitch pin back in the lug on nections as follows:
the fly tip section once it is erected. a. Disconnect the plug assembly from the jumper
18. Ensure the boom is fully retracted and at 0° angle. assembly on main boom head and connect it
to the fly base section. Refer to Figure 4-3.
Ensure all the necessary anti‐two block har
CAUTION ness connections are made.
Fully retract the boom before swinging the fly. b. Install the anti‐two block weight on the appro
Failure to do so could cause fly and/or boom priate fly section.
damage. c. Properly install lockout clip on main boom

WARNING anti‐two block switch is inactive.
Use a hand line to control fly swing. The fly When both main boom and fly are reeved for
could swing around the boom rapidly. Keep operation, the lockout clip must be removed
all personnel clear of the swing path to avoid and properly stored and an anti‐two block
injury. weight must be suspended from each anti‐
two block switch.
19. Use the hand line attached to the fly tip section and
slowly swing the fly tip section around the fly center 23. Remove and store the hand line from the tip of the
section until the fly tip lugs engage with the fly cen fly tip section.
ter lugs on the left side of the fly center section. 24. Properly set the Rated Capacity Limiter to the cor
20. Remove the fly tip connecting pins from the storage rect crane configuration. Refer to Section 1 of this
holes on the rear of the fly tip section. Install them Operator's Manual.
through the fly tip connecting lugs on the left side of 25. Check the Crane Rating Manual for lifting capacities
the fly. Install the inside top left pin first. Swing the fly with the fly installed before continuing operations.
tip to the left or right to get the pin to drop in the hole.
Install the inside bottom left pin. Swing the fly tip to
the right or left to get the pin to drop in the hole. (In WARNING
stall the pins with the head on top and the keeper on
The fly adds weight to the boom which must be
the bottom.) Install the pin keepers.
considered in lifting capacities when the fly is
erected. When making lifts from the main boom
WARNING or auxiliary lifting sheave with the fly erected,
refer to the Crane Rating Manual for the
All six fly tip connecting pins must be properly
appropriate deductions from lifting capacities.
installed before operating the crane with the
fly tip erected. Serious personal injury or
level on fully extended side frames.
damage to the fly and/or boom could occur if
all connecting pins are not properly installed.

Operator's Manual
10 Ft Offset Fly Base Panel Panel Lifting Guidelines
Lifting Certain guidelines must be followed when using 10 ft
offset fly base in panel lifting applications. The follow
The 10 ft offset fly base can be used for pre‐cast panel ing are the guidelines that must be followed unless oth
lifting applications, as well as general lifting applica erwise stated in the Crane Operator's or Crane Rating
tions. During the panel lifting applications, a single Manual:
load is allowed on both the main boom and 10 ft offset 1. A single panel with two hooks (main boom and 10 ft
fly base hoist lines at the same time provided that all offset fly base hooks) attached is considered one
panel lifting guidelines are adhered to. load for this application.
Before making any lifts with the 10 ft offset fly base, 2. Follow all 10 ft offset fly base notes for General
refer to the Crane Rating Manual to ensure the load is Operation listed in the Crane Rating Manual.
within the rated capacity for the 10 ft offset fly base. 3. The Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL) and anti‐two
The 10 ft offset fly base adds weight to the boom which block (ATB) systems shall remain fully functional at
must be considered in the lifting capacities. When all times. Select the 10 ft offset fly base as the hook
making lifts from the main boom hoist line with the 10 ft being used. The RCL will display approximately
offset fly base installed, refer to the Crane Rating Manu the total load lifted (the sum of the two lines) and
al for the appropriate deductions from lifting capacities. will also display the 10 ft offset fly base load radius
and rated capacity.
4. The total load on both hooks (the sum of the two
lines), including hook blocks, hook balls, slings,
WARNING and rigging, etc. must not exceed the allowable lift
Do not simultaneously lift separate loads with ing capacity of the main boom or the 10 ft offset fly
the 10 ft offset fly base and the main boom. base, whichever is less. (The main boom capacity
Lifting two loads at the same time may cause in this condition will be the main boom rated load
boom failure leading to major equipment less the deduct for “10 ft offset fly base erected but
damage and/or serious personal injury. not used” to account for the 10 ft offset fly base and
its load handling equipment.)
In the panel lifting application, if both the main 5. Lifting and placement of panels with two hooks is
boom and 10 ft offset fly base hooks are more complex than typical lift crane service. The
attached to a single panel, this is considered crane operator and rigging personnel shall be ex
one load. perienced with and qualified for two hook panel lift
ing and placement applications.
6. Load shift while lifting with two hooks may be more
unpredictable than typical single hook lift work. Ex
tra precautions must be taken to avoid accidents.
A qualified person on the ground shall be desig
nated as the primary signal person.
7. When rigging two hooks on a panel, each hook or
rigging device shall be capable of handling the en
tire weight of the panel being lifted.
8. Both load lines must remain in the vertical plane of
the crane boom (no side load). The panel being lif
ted must also be in the same vertical plane as the
crane boom.
9. The off‐lead angle of the wire rope from true ver
tical must be minimized when initially lifting a
panel with two hooks. The head height of the
boom shall be a minimum of three times the hori
zontal distance between the two hook points on
the panel being lifted.

Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Crane Rating Manual And Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Wire Rope Capacity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Wire Rope Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Wire Rope Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Wire Rope Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Wire Rope Inspection And Replacement Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Wire Rope Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Wire Rope Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Wire Rope Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Winch Roller Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Uncoiling Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Winding Wire Rope On Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Wire Rope Reeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
SocketAnd Wedge Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Socket And Wedge Assembly - Without Extended Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Socket And Wedge Assembly - With “Terminator” Extended Wedge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
Wire Rope Break‐In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
Single Part Line Hoisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Hook Ball Usage With Rotation Resistant Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Non‐Swivel Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Swivel Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Wire Rope Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Wire Rope Sockets With Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Wire Rope Clip Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Cutting Wire Rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Event Data Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Data And Recording Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
Crane Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Upper Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Section 5 - General Information i

Operator's Manual
Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Hydraulic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Load Hoist Drums . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Swing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
Operator's Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Rated Capacity Limiter System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Machinery House . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Catwalks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Lower Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Lower Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Side Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Travel and Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
Jack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Optional Tool Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Boom Wear Pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Boom Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Boom Elevation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Optional Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Hook Blocks And Balls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Fly & Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Work Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Base Crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Working Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Transport Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Load Hoist Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
ii Section 5 - General Information

Operator's Manual
Check the chart for the number of parts of line required
Crane Rating Manual And to make the lift. Use at least that number of parts of line
Serial Number to make the lift. When making a lift with more parts of
line than is needed to make the lift, remember to add
The Crane Rating Manual is attached under the operat the weight of the extra wire rope required to reeve the
or's seat. The Crane Rating Manual has the crane se extra parts of line to the actual load weight. The extra
rial number on it. The serial number is also stamped on parts of line act as additional load weight. Refer to the
the top right side of the lower frame and on the right Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating Manual
side of the upper frame just above the boom hoist cylin for the correct weight per foot (meter) of wire rope.
der lug. The serial number must be used with any cor
respondence with a Link‐Belt Distributor or Factory
concerning parts or warranty. The Crane Rating Manu WARNING
al also lists the maximum allowable lifting capacities for
the crane. The Crane Rating Manual should be Do not exceed the capacities listed for wire
checked for the proper lifting capacities before making rope strength or crane capacity, whichever is
any lifts. less, when making a lift. Serious personal in
jury or major crane damage may result.
If the Crane Rating Manual becomes lost, dam
aged, or unreadable, it must be replaced before op
erating the crane. Information contained in the Crane
Rating Manual is important and failure to follow the in
Wire Rope Specifications
formation it contains could result in an accident. A re The specifications for the wire rope used on this crane
placement Crane Rating Manual can be ordered are on the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rat
through a Link‐Belt Distributor. ing Manual. Refer to Figure 5-1 for a typical example.
Always refer to the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the
Crane Rating Manual and the crane Parts Manual when
WARNING ordering replacement wire rope.
The Crane Rating Manual in the crane is the

only authorized listing of lifting capacities for
Wire Rope Diameter
the crane. It supercedes any other printed lit In standard practice, the nominal diameter of wire rope
erature which lists lifting capacities. It alone is is the minimum acceptable diameter. It is always made
to be used for determining crane capacities. larger, not smaller, than the nominal diameter accord
ing to the allowable tolerances shown in the following
chart:
Wire Rope Capacity Chart
Allowable
The Wire Rope Capacity Chart gives the maximum lift Nominal Wire Rope Diameter
Limits
ing capacities based on wire rope strength. A typical
example is shown in Figure 5-1. The actual chart is in Thru 1/8” (3.2mm) -0 +8%
the Crane Rating Manual. It lists the maximum load Over 1/8” (3.2mm) thru 3/16” (4.8mm) -0 +7%
that should be lifted with different sizes and types of
Over 3/16” (4.8mm) thru 5/16” (8.0mm) -0 +6%
wire rope. The weights shown are based on wire rope
strength alone. Exceeding these load weights may re Over 5/16” (8.0mm) -0 +5%
sult in wire rope damage or failure.
Wear and stress tend to reduce the diameter. It should
Before making a lift, compare the weight being lifted be measured periodically and replaced if the size is be
(remember to add the weight of the hook block, hook low the nominal size of the wire rope being used as
ball, slings, and riggings to the actual load weight) with shown in the chart on page 5-4. It should always be
the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating measured across the largest diameter that will fit inside
Manual. a true circle. Refer to Figure 5-2.
Section 5 - General Information 5-1

Operator's Manual
Wire Rope Capacity
0.75”
Parts of Line
Type RB Type ZB
1 12,920 15,600
2 25,840 31,200
3 38,760 46,800
4 51,680 62,400
5 64,600 78,000
6 77,520 93,600
7 90,440 109,200
8 103,360 124,800
9 116,280 140,400
10 129,200 156,000
11 142,120 171,600
12 155,040 187,200
Wire Rope
Wt./Length [lb/ft] 1.10 1.14
LBCE Type Description

19 x 19 Rotation Resistant- Extra Extra Improved Plow Steel - Pre
RB formed - Right Lay - Regular Lay. Swaged
34 X 7 Non‐Rotating - Extra Improved Plow Steel - Right Regular or
ZB Right Lang Lay
Capacities shown are in pounds and working loads must not exceed the ratings on the capacity charts in the
Crane Rating Manual.
Study Operator's Manual for wire rope inspection procedures and single part of line applications.
Note: The Wire Rope Capacity Chart depicted above is shown as an example only. Use the official Wire
Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating Manual. Use it to determine the correct parts of line re
quired for the given wire rope type and diameter.
Note: Always refer to the crane Parts Manual when ordering wire rope.
Figure 5-1
Typical Wire Rope Capacity Chart (Example Only)
Right
Wrong
Figure 5-2
Measuring Wire Rope Diameter
5-2 Section 5 - General Information

Operator's Manual
WIRE ROPE INSPECTION REPORT

Crane S/N Owned By Crane Location
Date of Inspection Wire Rope Application Wire Rope Description

Manufacturer's I.D. No. Applicable Standards
1/3 of
Criteria for Removal Outside 1
Wire Dia.
Broken Wires End Attachments
Location Measured Rope Sheave Drum Rope Lay
on Wire Diameter In 1 In 1 Strand Excessive Broken Corrosion Fitting Damage Condition Condition Measurement
Rope Rope Lay of 1 Lay wear Wires of Rope Condition
Signature:
Figure 5-3
Typical Wire Rope Inspection Report
According to ASME standards, all wire ropes in active

Wire Rope Inspection And service must be visually inspected daily. A qualified,
Replacement trained person should be appointed to conduct the in
spection. Also on a monthly basis, that person is re
Recommendations quired to inspect all wire ropes and keep a dated, written
record noting any damage, and recording when wire
The three basic reasons for deterioration of wire rope ropes are replaced.
are abrasion, corrosion, and damage caused by fa
tigue bending, crushing, kinking, and forces or abuse, These inspections should be done to determine the de
acting against the wire rope during normal usage. gree of deterioration of the wire rope at any given sec
tion (refer to the following on wire rope replacement).
When wire rope is replaced, use the type specified on This will determine the suitability of the wire rope for
the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the Crane Rating continued service. A sample inspection report is
Manual. Cranes are designed to use a specific type shown in Figure 5-3. (It can be reproduced and used
and size of wire rope. Using wire ropes other than if desired.)
those recommended may result in short life or even fail
ure of the wire rope.

Operator's Manual
Wire Rope Inspection Wire Rope Replacement
Any of the following are reasons to question wire rope Any of the following are reasons for wire rope replace
safety: ment:
1. More than one broken wire in any one strand 1. In running wire ropes, six randomly distributed bro
should be cause for caution. Breaks that occur on ken wires in one wire rope lay, or three broken
the worn crowns of the outside wires usually indi wires in one strand in one wire rope lay.
cate normal deterioration. Breaks that occur in the For rotation resistant wire ropes, two randomly dis
valleys between strands can indicate an abnormal tributed broken wires in six wire rope diameters, or
condition, possibly fatigue, and breakage of other four randomly distributed broken wires in thirty
wires that are not readily visible. One or more val wire rope diameters.
ley breaks should be cause for replacement. 2. In pendants or standing wire ropes, evidence of
2. Wire breaks generally occur in those portions of more than two broken wires in one lay in sections
wire rope which pass over sheaves, wind onto beyond end connections or more than one broken
drums, or receive mechanical abuse. Breaks that wire in one wire rope lay at end connection.
occur near attached fittings usually result from fa 3. One outer wire broken at the contact point with the
tiguing stresses concentrated in these localized core of the wire rope which has worked its way out
sections. Breaks of the latter type should be cause of the wire rope structure and protrudes or loops
for replacement of the wire rope or renewal of the out from the wire rope structure.
attachment to eliminate the locally fatigued area. 4. Abrasion, scrubbing, or peening causing loss of
When running wire ropes over nylon sheaves, in more than 1/3 the original diameter of individual
spect the wire rope where it travels over the point wires.
sheaves. Inspect for a loss of diameter and then 5. Evidence of wire rope deterioration from corrosion.
bend the wire rope to inspect the internal wires for 6. Kinking, crushing, “bird caging”, or other damage
breaks and wear. resulting in distortion of the wire rope structure.
3. Heavy wear, or broken wires, may occur in sections 7. Evidence of any heat damage.
under equalizer sheaves or other sheaves where 8. Marked reduction in diameter indicates deteriora
wire rope travel is limited, or in contact with sad tion of the core resulting in lack of proper support
dles. Particular care should be taken to inspect for the load carrying strands. Excessive wire rope
wire rope at these points. If wire rope wear is de stretch or elongation may also be an indication of
tected at these locations, these wear points can be internal deterioration. Reduction from nominal di
shifted by removing the wire rope from the drum ameter or more than that shown in the chart below:
and cutting a 20 ft (6.1m) section off at the drum
end. This may assist in extending the wire rope life. Reduction of Nominal Wire Rope Diameters
4. Wire rope stretch is generally greatest during initial 1/64” (.4mm) up to and including 5/16” (8mm)
stages of operation when the strands are becom 1/32” (.79mm) over 5/16” (9.5mm) to 1/2” (13mm)
ing adjusted and seated. This is accompanied by
3/64” (1.2mm) over 1/2” (13 mm) to 3/4” (19mm)
some reduction in wire rope diameter.
5. Time for wire rope replacement is indicated by the 1/16” (1.6mm) over 3/4” (19mm) to 1-1/8” (29mm)
extent of abrasion, scrubbing, and peening on the 3/32” (2.4mm) over 1-1/8” (29mm)
outside wires, broken wires, evidence of pitting or 9. Noticeable rusting or development of broken wires
major corrosion, kink damage, or other mechanical in the area of connections.
abuse resulting in distortion of the wire rope struc
ture.
6. Sheaves, guards, guides, drums, flanges, and
Wire Rope Installation
other surfaces contacted by wire rope during op When installing wire rope, the primary concern is get
eration should be examined at the time of inspec ting the wire rope onto the drum without trapping any
tions. Any condition harmful to the wire rope in use twist that may have been induced during handling.
at the time should be corrected. The same equip Use the following procedures to install the wire rope on
ment, and particularly sheave and drum grooves, the crane.
should be inspected and placed in proper condi
tion before a new wire rope is installed.

Operator's Manual
10
2
1
8
2
3
3
7 5
4 6
5
1. Roller Stop 3. Setscrew 5. Lock Collar 7. Shoulder Bolt 9. Torque Shaft

2. Setscrew 4. Capscrew 6. Spring 8. Capscrew 10. Roller
Figure 5-4
Winch Roller Alignment
Winch Roller Adjustment a Ensure capscrew (8) is tightened securely in

torque shaft (9).
Before installing wire rope on the drum, adjust the drum b Using a breaker bar or long handle wrench,
roller if equipped. Refer to Figure 5-4. If the roller is not hold tension on torsion spring (6) while
aligned to the drum, it may cause excessive wear on the loosening the setscrews (3) on both ends of
wire rope, winch roller, or impede spooling of the wire torque shaft (9).
rope on the drum. To adjust the roller, loosen the cap c Allow torque shaft (9) to rotate counterclock
screws (4) and adjust roller assembly as required to align wise, as far as possible while maintaining con
the roller parallel to the drum. Roller should lay flat across trol of the torque shaft (9), then securely tight
each full layer of wire rope on the drum and be centered en setscrews (3).
between the drum flanges. Center the roller between the d Reposition breaker bar or wrench on
drum flanges by loosening the setscrews (2) in the lock capscrew (8).
collars (5), centering the roller (10), and tightening the e Repeat Steps b through d until tension is fully
setscrews (2). After roller is aligned and centered, pre relieved from torsion spring (6).
load the spring using the following procedure. 2. Turn the capscrew (8), which will rotate the torque
shaft (9), until the bolt (7) through the torque shaft
contacts the spring (6).
WARNING
Do not attempt to service winch roller before
properly relieving torsion spring tension. If
CAUTION
proper directions are not followed, the torsion Do not overtighten the spring. Damage to the
spring could rapidly and forcefully uncoil. wire rope may occur.
This may result in serious personal injury and
component damage. Always release tension 3. With the roller stop (1) resting against the drum
on torsion spring before attempting any winch flange or with the roller resting evenly on the first
roller repair. layer of wire rope on the drum, use 105 ft lb
(142Nm) of torque to rotate the spring not to ex
1. Properly release torsion spring (6) tension as follows. ceed one revolution (360°).
4. Tighten setscrews (3). The roller should roll freely
This procedure is greatly simplified by using when the drum rotates.
two service technicians. One to hold the break
er bar/wrench, the other to loosen and tighten
setscrews.

Operator's Manual
3
Right
2
4
1. Winch Drum
2. Wire Rope
3. Wedge
4. Seizings ‐ Type ZB Wire Rope Only (Remove after installa
Figure 5-5 tion)
Uncoiling Wire Rope
Figure 5-6
Anchoring Wire Rope to Drum
Uncoiling Wire Rope
1. To avoid twists, unreel the entire wire rope on the
ground in line with the boom deflector sheave and Anchoring Wire Rope To Drum
drum. Set the reel up horizontally so it can rotate as
the wire rope is reeled off. Refer to Figure 5-5.
Reel the wire rope off slowly, so the reel won't tend CAUTION
to “throw” the wire rope off. If the new wire rope The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
cannot be laid out on the ground, further steps are welded. Failure to do so may cause the core
necessary: to slip and/or the strands to loosen causing
a. Mount the reel on a shaft through flange holes major wire rope damage.
and on jack stands, making sure the reel is set
to be unreeled over the top. Do not allow the
If crane is equipped with type ZB wire rope, attach two
reel to “free‐wheel”. Brake the reel by applying
seizings (hose clamps are an effective and efficient al
pressure to a flange. Do not apply braking
ternative if traditional seizings are not available) about
pressure to the wire rope on the reel or pass
wire rope between blocks of wood or other ma 24 inches (61cm) from the end with a 3 inch (7.62cm)
space between them. Refer to Figure 5-6. The seiz
terial.
ings will prevent any looseness of the outer strands
2. Reeve the wire rope over the boom deflector
from traveling up the wire rope during installation. In
sheave and anchor it to the drum.
sert the free end of the wire rope into the small opening
Note: When replacing wire rope, the sheaves of the anchor pocket. Loop the wire rope and push the
and grooves in drums should be checked for free end about 3/4 of the way back through the pocket.
wear or damage and replaced if necessary. Install the wedge, then pull the slack out of the wire
Damaged, worn, or undersized sheaves will rope. If using type ZB wire rope, remove the seizings
damage the wire rope. On older equipment, re after the wire rope is secured in the drum. Keep tension
member that new wire rope is usually larger in on the wire rope to prevent the wire rope from becom
diameter than the worn wire rope it replaces. ing slack and forming loops or kinks and also to allow
The sheave grooves may be worn to the smaller uniform winding on the drum.
diameter of the old wire rope.
A new wire rope should be broken in by running
it slowly through its working cycle for a short
period under a light load. Refer to “Wire Rope
Break‐In” in this Section of this Operator's
Manual.

Operator's Manual
Winding Wire Rope On Drum
Right
Proper winding of the first layer of wire rope on a Wrong
multiple wrap drum is important. If the first layer is
properly wound, succeeding layers will be easier to
control.
Note: If crane is equipped with a first layer/third

wrap warning system, it must be calibrated while
winding wire rope on the drum. Refer to “First Lay
er/Third Wrap Calibration” in Section 3 of this Oper
ator's Manual
This is especially important on ungrooved drums.

When starting new wire rope on such drums, drive
each wrap of the first layer lightly with a wooden mallet
so each wrap barely contacts the preceding one. Keep
tension on the wire rope to prevent the wire rope from
becoming slack and forming loops or kinks and also to
allow uniform winding on the drum. It is important that
original wire rope lay is maintained at all times. Figure 5-7
Hook Block Reeving
It's important to apply a tensioning load while spooling
the wire rope on the drum. (If not, the lower layers may
be loose enough that the upper layers become The crane can use multiple parts of line when reeving
wedged into the lower layers under load, which can the main winch depending on the lift being made and
cause major damage to the wire rope.) The tensioning the number of sheaves available. When reeving the
load should range from 1 to 2% of the wire rope's nomi main winch, odd parts of line dead end at the hook
nal strength. block and even parts dead end at the boom head. The
auxiliary lifting sheave may be reeved with either one or
Wire Rope Reeving two parts of line. The fly section may be reeved with
Hook blocks should be reeved correctly so they hang two parts of line for better line control. Figure 5-18
straight and do not cause excessive wear on the wire and Figure 5-20 gives the proper reeving for various
rope and sheaves. Refer to Figure 5-7. parts of line. The reeving patterns illustrated must be
used at all times. To determine how many parts of line
to use for a particular lift, check the Wire Rope Capacity
WARNING Chart, and the Winch Performance Chart, in the Crane
Rating Manual.
or walk on the boom or fly. Use a ladder or Note: Wire rope guards must always be used dur
similar device to reach necessary areas when ing operations. They must be pinned in place to
prevent wire rope from jumping off the sheaves.
reeving the crane.

Operator's Manual
Socket And Wedge Socket And Wedge

Without Extended Wedge With Terminator Extended Wedge
Refer to page 5-9 Refer to page 5-10
Figure 5-8
Sockets And Wedges
SocketAnd Wedge Assemblies

This crane may be equipped with either of two styles of
sockets and wedges. One style socket uses a “termi
nator” extended wedge and the other does not. The
wedges for each style are installed differently. Refer to
Figure 5-8 to determine which style your crane has
and where to find the appropriate information for use
and installation.
Type RB WARNING
Do not interchange sockets and wedges.
Loads may slip or fall if socket and wedge are
not properly matched. Use a “terminator”
wedge with a socket for a “terminator” wedge
and a non‐“terminator” wedge with a
non‐“terminator” socket.
Type ZB
Figure 5-9
Wire Rope Identification

Operator's Manual
Right Right
Wrong Wrong
1
4
2 5
6
3
Figure 5-11
1. Seizing (Type ZB Only.) (Remove after installation.) Socket And Wedge Installation
2. Wire Rope Live End
3. Socket
4. Dead End Seizing The dead end must also be seized and a minimum tail
5. 20 Wire Rope Diameters Minimum Tail Length
6. Wedge length of 20 wire rope diameters [15” (.38m) for 3/4”
(19mm) wire rope] is required. The seizings will help
Figure 5-10 prevent core slippage and any looseness of the outer
Socket And Wedge Connections strands from traveling up the wire rope during installa
tion while still allowing the wire rope strands to be free
Socket And Wedge Assembly - Without to adjust. If using type ZB wire rope, remove seizings
from the live end after wire rope is securely installed
Extended Wedge
into the socket.
CAUTION Note: Refer to Figure 5-9 to identify which type of

wire rope is installed on the crane.
Use the proper size wedge with a wire rope
socket or lagging. The use of an off‐size
wedge in a socket or lagging is dangerous as CAUTION
it may not hold. Wedges and sockets shipped The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
from the factory are stamped with size and welded and the tail length of the dead end
type identification. A lagging or socket may must be a minimum of 20 wire rope diameters
be stamped for two or more sizes of wire rope [15” (.38m) for 3/4” (19mm) wire rope]. Fail
and a wedge for one or two. The size on the ure to do the above may cause the core to slip
lagging, socket, and wedge must correspond and/or the strands to loosen causing major
with the size of wire rope being used. wire rope damage.
The correct and incorrect methods of attaching a sock When anchoring the socket to the boom head, ensure
et and wedge to wire rope are shown in Figure 5-10. the flat face is facing out as shown in Figure 5-11. If
The dead end of the wire rope must always be on the socket is not installed correctly structural damage to
sloped portion of the socket. The load line must be in a the boom head may occur.
straight line pull with the eye of the socket. If the wire
It is recommended that the wire rope socket and
rope is installed wrong as shown in Figure 5-10, a per
wedge connection be reestablished on an annual ba
manent set will develop at the point where the wire rope
sis. This can be accomplished by cutting the wire rope
enters the socket.
6 in (0.15m) above the socket and wedge connection.
Before installing type ZB wire rope into a socket or See “Cutting Wire Rope” in this Section of this Opera
wedge attach two seizings (hose clamps are an effec tor's Manual. Install the socket and wedge connection
tive and efficient alternative if traditional seizings are as shown in Figure 5-10.
not available) approximately 3-4 ft (0.9-1.2 m) from
the end with a 3 in (76.2 mm) space between them. Re
fer to Figure 5-10.

Operator's Manual
5
2
“No‐Go”
3
6
“Go”
1. Seizing (Type ZB Only) (Remove after installation.) 5. Tail Length - 20 Wire Rope Diameters Minimum for Rotation
2. Wire Rope Live End Resistant Wire Ropes, 6 Wire Rope Diameters Minimum for 6 to 8
3. Socket Strand Wire Ropes
4. Dead End Seizing 6. “Terminator” Extended Wedge
Figure 5-12
Socket & Wedge Assembly - With Extended Wedge
Socket And Wedge Assembly - With The correct and incorrect methods of attaching a
“Terminator” Extended Wedge wedge and socket to wire rope are shown in
Figure 5-12 and Figure 5-13. The dead end of the
wire rope must always be on the sloped portion of the
socket. The load line must be in a straight line pull with
WARNING the eye of the socket. If the wire rope is installed wrong
as shown in Figure 5-13, a permanent set will develop
Use the proper size wedge with a wire rope
at the point where the wire rope enters the socket. This
socket or drum. The use of an incorrect size,
permanent set will weaken the wire rope and acceler
type, or brand of wedge in a socket or drum is
ate wear at this point.
dangerous as it may not hold. Wedges and
sockets shipped from the factory are stamped Before installing type ZB wire rope into a socket or
wedge attach two seizings (hose clamps are an effec
with size and type identification. A drum or
tive and efficient alternative if traditional seizings are
socket may be stamped for two or more sizes
not available) approximately 3-4 ft (0.9-1.2 m) from
of wire rope and a wedge for one or two. The
the end with a 3 in (76.2 mm) space between them. Re
size on the drum, socket, and wedge must
fer to Figure 5-10.
correspond with the size of wire rope being
used. Wedges and sockets shipped from the factory are
stamped with size and type or pair identification. A
socket or wedge may be stamped for two or more sizes
of wire rope. The size on the socket and wedge must
correspond with the size of wire rope being used. The
WARNING wedge also has a “go”/“no‐go” feature cast into the
Do not interchange sockets and wedges. wedge to assist in determining the proper size wire
Loads may slip or fall if socket and wedge are rope that can be used with that particular socket and
wedge. Refer to Figure 5-12. The proper size wire
not properly matched. Use a “terminator”
rope is determined when: 1) the wire rope passes
wedge with a socket for a “terminator” wedge
through the “go” hole in the wedge, and 2) the wire
and a non‐“terminator” wedge with a
rope does not pass through the “no‐go” hole in the
non‐“terminator” socket.
wedge. The part number may also be stamped on the
socket and wedge. Refer to the Parts Manual for con
firmation. If there is any doubt as to the mating of the
socket and wedge, contact a Link‐Belt Distributor.

Operator's Manual
Right Right
Wrong Wrong

Socket & Wedge Connections Socket & Wedge Installation
The dead end must also be seized and a minimum tail

length of 20 wire rope diameters [15” (.38m) for 3/4” Wire Rope Break‐In
(19mm) wire rope] for rotation resistant wire ropes and After the wire rope has been installed and the ends se
6 wire rope diameters minimum for 6 to 8 strand wire cured in the correct manner, the new wire rope must be
rope is required. Refer to Figure 5-12. run through a break‐in period. This allows the compo
nent parts of the new wire rope to gradually adjust to
Note: Refer to Figure 5-9 to identify which type of actual operating conditions.
wire rope is installed on the crane. 1. Level the crane on fully extended side frames.
Use a wooden mallet to seat the wedge and wire rope Swing the upper over the end of the lower and en
into the socket before applying first load. Lift the first gage the travel swing lock.
load a few inches (centimeters) from the ground to fully 2. Fully raise and fully extend the boom. Attach a light
seat the wedge and wire rope in the socket. This load load at the hook and raise it a few inches (centi
should be of equal or greater weight than loads ex meters) off the ground. Allow to stand for several
pected in use. minutes.
3. Run the wire rope through a cycle of operation at
Secure the dead end section of the wire rope by instal
very slow speeds. During this trial operation, a very
ling the clip through the wedge as shown in
close watch should be kept on all working parts-
Figure 5-12. Tighten the nuts on the clip to the recom
sheaves, drums, roller, etc. to make certain that the
mended torque as shown on the table in Figure 5-16.
wire rope runs freely and without any possible ob
When anchoring the socket to the boom head, ensure structions as it makes its way through the system.
the flat face is facing in as shown in Figure 5-14. If
socket is not installed correctly, damage to the boom Note: Run these loads with reeving that places
head may occur. the loads on the hook with all wire rope off the
drum except the last three wraps. If this is not
It is recommended that the wire rope socket and
possible, alternate methods must be used to
wedge connection be reestablished on an annual ba
assure proper tensioning of the wire rope on the
sis. This can be accomplished by cutting the wire rope
drum.
6 in (0.15m) above the socket and wedge connection.
See “Cutting Wire Rope” in this Section of this Opera 4. If no problems appear in running the wire rope, re
tor's Manual. Install the socket and wedge connection peat procedure with an increased load.
as shown in Figure 5-13.

Operator's Manual
The Double‐Saddle‐Clip Method The Loop Back Method The Extended Wedge Method
Figure 5-15
Wire Rope Socket With Clip
any other which allows the wire rope to rotate while in ser
Single Part Line Hoisting vice, leads to unbalanced loading between the inner and
Non‐rotating, rotation resistant, or spin resistant wire outer layer of strands, which may result in core failure.
ropes are recommended for single part of line applica Wire rope manufacturer's testing has shown that rotation
tions. This is of utmost importance for long fall hoist line resistant wire rope utilized with a swivel hook ball has re
applications. Link‐Belt type “RB”, “ZB”, and “GC” are duced the breaking strength by as much as 50% if exces
examples of wire ropes recommended for single part sive rotation occurs.
hoisting. See the Wire Rope Capacity Chart in the
Crane Rating Manual for the specific types of rotation Non‐Swivel Usage
resistant wire rope recommended for your crane. A non‐swivel hook ball, in conjunction with a tagline or
The use of non‐rotation resistant wire rope is not rec other device to control load spin, should be used when
ommended for long falls of single part of line hoisting the crane is equipped with rotation resistant wire rope.
since the wire rope and load may spin. If the crane op This is to avoid unrestrained rotation of the wire rope.
erator allows either the load or the wire rope to rotate,
the crane or wire rope can be damaged. The anti‐two
Swivel Usage
block weight may also become entangled with the wire A swivel hook ball can be used with rotation resistant
rope and could damage the anti‐two block system, wire rope if:
wire rope, and/or head machinery. 1. The wire rope is not shock loaded or overloaded.
2. Wire rope working strength is reduced to maintain
Hook Ball Usage With original design factors.
3. The wire rope is inspected frequently as outlined
Rotation Resistant Wire below.
Rope Wire Rope Inspection
The rotation resistant characteristic is achieved by laying Marked reduction in diameter indicates deterioration of
the outer strands around an independent wire rope that the core resulting in lack of proper support for the load
is wound in the opposite direction. When the wire rope carrying strands. Excessive wire rope stretch or elonga
has tension on it, opposing rotational forces are created tion may also be an indication of internal deterioration.
between the core and outer strands. If a swivel hook ball
is utilized with rotation resistant wire rope, the wire rope is Major concerns and replacement recommendations
allowed to twist. The outer strands unwind and get lon include:
ger while the inner core is forced to rotate in the same di 1. Loss of wire rope diameter (in excess of those
rection and shortens in length. As a result of this treat listed in the table in “Wire Rope Replacement” in
ment, the inner core sees a disproportionately greater this Section of this Operator's Manual), abnormal
load, and core damage may occur due to shock loading lengthening of wire rope lay, or protrusion of wires
or overloading. A rotating load on an unrestrained, non‐ between the outer strands.
swivel hook ball without a tagline, affects the internal 2. 2 randomly distributed broken wires in 6 wire rope
loading of the wire rope in this manner. This practice, or diameters, or 4 randomly distributed broken wires
in 30 wire rope diameters.

Operator's Manual
Minimum No. Amount Of Wire Rope
Clip Size Torque
Of Clips To Turn Back*
Inches mm Quantity Inches mm ft lb Nm
1/4 3.2 2 3‐1/4 82.5 --- ---
3/16 4.7 2 3‐3/4 95.2 --- ---
1/4 6.3 2 4‐3/4 120.6 15 20.0
5/16 7.9 2 5‐1/4 133.3 30 40.7
3/8 9.5 2 6‐1/2 165.1 45 60.1
7/16 11.1 2 7 177.8 65 86.8
1/2 12.7 3 11‐1/2 292.1 65 86.8
9/16 14.3 3 12 304.8 95 126.9
5/8 15.9 3 12 304.8 95 126.9
3/4 19.0 4 18 457.2 130 173.6
* If a greater number of clips are used than shown in this table, the amount of wire rope turnback should be increased proportionally.
Figure 5-16
Wire Rope Clip Application Recommendation
If using the loop back method, the loop formed must
Wire Rope Sockets With Clips not be allowed to enter the wedge, or the connection
Some codes require the use of a wire rope clip in con will be weakened. The tail length of the dead end must
junction with a socket and wedge connection. be a minimum of 20 wire rope diameters [15” (.38m) for
Figure 5-15 illustrates some typical methods of clip 3/4” (19mm) wire rope].
installation with sockets. In some cases, particularly in
wrecking ball work, there is a chance that the wedge
can loosen, releasing the socket from the wire rope.
CAUTION
This could be caused by the banging action and alter The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
nate loading and unloading of the wire rope that occurs welded and the tail length of the dead end
during this type work. must be a minimum of 20 wire rope diameters
[15” (38cm) for 3/4” (19mm) wire rope].
Failure to do so may cause the core to slip
WARNING and/or the strands to loosen causing major
wire rope damage.
Regularly inspect the integrity of the wire rope
at the point of exit at the dead end side. High
velocity spin of wire rope when loading and
unloading can cause the wire rope to flip‐flop,
fatigue, and finally break off.
The use of wire rope clips with a socket and wedge

connection can weaken the connection if done improp
erly. Do not attach the dead end of the wire rope to the
live side with the clip as this will weaken the connection.
The clip may ultimately take the load and may deform
or break the wire rope.

Operator's Manual
safe connections and the torque for the nuts on the
Right clips is also listed in Figure 5-16.
CAUTION
Apply the initial load and retighten nuts to the
recommended torque. Wire rope can stretch
and reduce in diameter when loads are
applied. Inspect periodically and retighten as
required.
Cutting Wire Rope

CAUTION
The ends of type ZB wire rope must be fuse
Wrong welded. Failure to do so may cause the core
to slip and/or the strands to loosen causing
major wire rope damage.
Figure 5-17
Wire Rope Clip Installation When wire rope is to be cut, seizings should be placed
on each side of the point where the wire rope is to be
cut, to keep the strands in place. On preformed wire
Wire Rope Clip Installation rope such as type RB, one seizing on each side of the
cut is enough. On non‐preformed wire rope less than
The correct method of installing wire rope clips is 7/8 inch (23mm) diameter such as type ZB, two seiz
shown in Figure 5-17. The u‐bolt must always be over ings are recommended. On non‐preformed wire rope
the short end of the wire rope and the base must al over 7/8 inch (23mm) diameter, three seizings are rec
ways contact the long end. ommended. Original wire rope lay must be maintained
Clips should not be staggered, that is u‐bolt of one clip at all times.
over short end and u‐bolt of next clip over long end. Three Basic methods of cutting wire rope are recom
This practice will not only distort the wire rope exces mended:
sively, but will prevent maximum strength of this type 1. Abrasive cutting tools.
fastening. Placing all clips with the u‐bolt over the long 2. Shearing tools. (Wire cutters on small wire rope, a
end of the wire rope will damage strands and result in wire rope cutter, and hammer for larger wire
an unsafe condition. ropes.)
The distance between clips should be not less than six 3. Oxy/acetylene fuel torch. This is the only sug
times the wire rope diameter. In relation to size of wire gested method for cutting type ZB wire rope.
rope, the minimum number of clips recommended for

Operator's Manual
1 Part 2 Parts 3 Parts 4 Parts
5 Parts 6 Parts 7 Parts 8 Parts
9 Parts 10 Parts 11 Parts
Auxiliary Sheave
12 Parts 2 Parts
Notes: Reeve the wire rope to equalize the loading on the boom head sheaves.
Some of the diagrams shown may not apply to this particular crane.
Do not use a swivel at the dead end of a multi‐part reeving.
Refer to Section 4 of this Operator's Manual for positioning of adjustable sheave.
Reeving shown is typical.
Figure 5-18
Wire Rope Reeving Diagrams

Operator's Manual
Auxiliary Auxiliary
Sheave Sheave
13 Parts 14 Parts
CAUTION
These reevings are only applicable for maximum rated capacity lifts that require additional parts of line
to maintain the required wire rope safety factor.
Notes: Reeve the wire rope to equalize the loading on the boom head sheaves. Some of the
diagrams shown may not apply to this particular crane. Do not use a swivel at the
dead end of a multi‐part reeving. Refer to Section 4 of this Operator's Manual for
positioning of adjustable sheave. Reeving shown is typical.
Figure 5-19
Fly Base
Deflector Sheave Fly Tip Head
Sheave
Boom Head
Deflector Sheaves Fly Base
Head Sheave
Boom Head
Sheaves
Hook Ball
Rear Drum
Front Drum Hook Block

Note: Reeving shown is typical. Either drum may be reeved over boom sheaves or fly sheaves.
Figure 5-20

Operator's Manual
Under Lattice
Cross Members
Fly Head
Sheaves
Over Rope Guard
Hook Block
Figure 5-21
10 Ft (3.0m) Fly Section Wire Rope Reeving

Operator's Manual
Event Data Recording Data And Recording Privacy
Important: EDR data is recorded in the crane only if a
This LinkBelt crane is equipped with one or more com nontrivial situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
puters that monitor and/or control the crane’s perform EDR under normal operating conditions and no per
ance. This crane uses computer modules to monitor sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, or crane location)
and retain crane operation, crane configuration, and as is recorded. However, other parties, such as law en
well as crane functions. These modules may aid the forcement, or similar government offices, could com
operator in the operation of the crane. The modules bine the EDR data with the type of personal identifying
may also store data to help the LinkBelt dealer/distrib data routinely acquired during a crane accident invest
utor technician service the crane. igation.
Event Data Recorder To read data recorded by this EDR system, special
equipment is required, and access to the crane and/or
This LinkBelt crane has an Event Data Recorder (EDR)
the EDR is needed. LinkBelt has the special equip
system. The main purpose of the EDR is to record data
ment necessary to retrieve the recorded data.
relating to the crane operation and configuration that
will assist in understanding how the crane’s operating It is the position of LinkBelt that the crane owner owns
systems perform. The EDR is designed to record data any data that is recorded and stored in the EDR or other
related to crane dynamics and safety systems for a onboard computer system(s). LinkBelt will not access
short period of time. The EDR in this crane is designed this data, interpret data, or share the data with others,
to record such data as: except by written request from the crane owner(s). The
• How various systems in the crane were operating request by the crane owner may be due to an official
• How the crane was configured (counterweight, request of police or similar government offices; as part
boom length, operational mode, etc.) of LinkBelt’s defense of litigation through the discov
• What control functions were being used ery process; or as required by law. Data that LinkBelt
retrieves may also be used for LinkBelt or component
This data will help provide valuable information as to manufacturers for research purposes, where a need is
how the crane was functioning and/or being operated. shown and data is not tied to a specific crane or crane
owner.
Link‐Belt will retrieve crane data only by written request
from the crane owner. The Electronic Data Recorder
Request Form found at the end of this Operator's
Manual can be used for this purpose.

Operator's Manual
Crane Specifications
The following information is general in nature and is used for reference purposes only. Depending upon the vintage
of the crane, some features may no longer be available. Standard and optional features may vary from crane to
crane. Contact the factory to verify the specific information if required.
Upper Structure Counterbalance Valves

All hoist motors are equipped with counterbalance valves to
Frame provide positive load lowering and prevent accidental load
drop if the hydraulic pressure is suddenly lost.
All welded steel frame with precision machined surfaces for
mating parts. Load Hoist Drums
Turntable Bearing Main and Optional Auxiliary Winches
Inner race is bolted to upper frame Axial piston, full and half displacement (2‐speed) motor
Outer race with external swing gear is bolted to lower frame driven through planetary reduction unit for positive control
under all load conditions.
Engine Grooved lagging
Power up/down mode of operation
Engine
Hoist drum cable follower - standard
Full pressure lubrication, oil filter, air cleaner, hour meter, Drum rotation indicator
throttle, and electric control shutdown. Drum diameter: 15 in (38.1cm)
Rope length:
Specification Cummins QSL Main: 850 ft (259.1m)
Numbers of Cylinders 6 Auxiliary: 500 ft (152.4m)
Maximum rope storage: 951 ft (290m)
Cycle 4
Terminator style socket and wedge
Bore and Stroke: inch (mm) 4.49 x 5.69 (114 x 145) Third wrap indicator - optional - Visually and audibly
Piston Displacement: in3 (L) 543 (8.9) warns the operator when the wire rope is on the first/bottom
layer and when the wire rope is down to the last three wraps
Max. Brake Horsepower: hp
320 (239) @ 1,800 rpm
(kW)
Swing System
Peak Torque: ft lb (Nm) 1,000 (1 356) @ 1,400 rpm
Dual Swing Drives
Alternator: volts - amps 12 - 160
Motor/Planetary - Bi‐directional hydraulic swing motor
Crankcase Capacity: qt (L) 24 (22.7) mounted to a planetary reducer for 360° continuous smooth
Hydraulic driven fan and thermostatically controlled radiator swing at 2.0 rpm
Swing Park Brake - 360°, electric over hydraulic, (spring
Fuel Tank applied/hydraulic released) multi‐disc brake mounted on the
One 110 gal (416L) capacity fuel tank. planetary reducer. Operated by a switch in the operator's
cab.
Hydraulic System Swing Brake - 360°, foot operated, hydraulic applied disc
brake mounted to the planetary reducer
Hydraulic Pumps
House Lock - Four position house lock (boom over front,
The pump arrangement is designed to provide hydraulically rear or sides) operated from the operator's cab
powered functions allowing positive, precise control with in
dependent or simultaneous operation of all crane functions. Counterweight
Two variable displacement pumps provide independent
control for hoist drums, boom hoist, boom extend, and Consists of a five piece design.
right & left travel. One “A” counterweight, 19,000 lb
Two gear type pumps are used for the swing, retract (8 618kg)
cylinders & operator's controls, and hydraulic oil cooling One “B” counterweight, 16,000 lb
fan. (7 257kg)
Hydraulic Reservoir One “C” counterweight, 16,000 lb
250 gal (946L) capacity equipped with sight level (7 257kg)
gauge. Diffusers built in for deaeration. Two “A” lower counterweights,
12,500 lb (5 670kg) each
Filtration
One 10 micron, full flow return line filter. Accessible for
easy filter replacement.

Operator's Manual
Operator's Cab Machinery House
Fully enclosed modular steel compartment is independently Hinged doors (four on right side, one on left side) for machin
mounted and padded to protect against vibration and noise. ery access. Upper left side guard rails
Tilting cab 0-20°
All tinted/tempered safety glass Catwalks
Sliding entry door and front and rear window
Swing up roof window with windshield wiper Standard on right and left sides. Catwalks fold up and pin for
Door and window locks reduced travel width.
Hot water heater
Air conditioner
Sun visor Lower Structure
Cloth seat
Circulating fan Lower Frame
Front windshield and top hatch wipers and washers
Dry chemical fire extinguisher All welded box construction frame with precision machined
Engine instrumentation panel (tachometer, voltmeter, engine surfaces for turntable bearing, rotating joint, and axles beams
oil pressure, engine water temperature, fuel level, hydraulic Extendable and Retractable axle beams controlled by a hy
oil temperature, hour meter, and service monitor system) draulic cylinder mounted inside the beams
Mechanical drum rotation indicators for main (rear) and
auxiliary (front) hoist drums Side Frames
Six way adjustable seat
Foot throttle Side Frames [With 36” (0.91m) Track Shoes]
Optional Joystick controls All welded, precision machined, steel frames can be hydrauli
Fully adjustable single axis controls cally extended and retracted with a hydraulic cylinder
Bubble type level mounted in the lower frame.
Ergonomic gauge layout 15 ft 2.2 in (4.63m) extended gauge
Controls shut off lever 12 ft 8.7 in (3.88m) intermediate gauge
AM/FM Radio 8 ft 11.6 in (2.73m) retracted gauge
Travel levers & pedals 23 ft 4.2 in (7.11m) overall length
Monitor for rear view and winch cameras 36 in (0.91m) wide track shoes
Sealed (oil filled) idler and drive planetaries
Optional Compact travel drives
Upper mounted remote control flood light Hydraulic self adjusting tracks
One rotating amber beacon on top of cab Track Rollers
One amber strobe beacon on top of cab Twelve sealed (oil filled) bottom track rollers per side frame
Three sealed (oil filled) top track rollers per side frame
Rated Capacity Limiter Heat treated, mounted on anti‐friction bearings
System Tracks
Heat treated, self‐cleaning grouser shoes and heat treated
HED graphic audio‐visual warning system with anti‐two block track pins with dirt seals. 65 track shoes per side.
and function limiter. Operating data available includes: Optional flat or “street” pad
Crane configuration Take Up Idlers
Boom length
Boom head height Cast steel, heat treated, self‐cleaning, mounted on sealed ta
Allowed load and % of allowed load pered roller bearings
Data logging
Boom angle
Travel and Steering
Radius of load
Each side frame contains a pilot controlled, bi‐directional, ax
Actual load
ial piston motor and a planetary gear reduction unit to provide
Drum Rotation Direction Indicators (DRDI)
positive control under all load conditions.
Operator settable alarms (include):
2‐speed travel
Maximum and minimum boom angles
Individual control provides smooth, precise maneuver
Maximum tip height
ability including full counter‐rotation.
Maximum boom length Spring applied, hydraulically released multiple wet‐disc
Swing left/right positions type brake controlled automatically
Operator defined area (imaginary plane) Maximum travel speed is 2 mph (3.2km/h).
Optional internal bar graph indicator Designed to 40% gradeability
Optional external bar graph indicator

Operator's Manual
Wear pads with Teflon inserts that self‐lubricate the boom
Jack System sections
Top and bottom wear pads are universal for all boom
System contains four hydraulic cylinders individually moun sections
ted on swing‐out beams.
Individual jack cylinders are operated by remote control, or Boom Head
can be operated by controls mounted on lower.
Minimum height of lower frame when resting on pontoons Six 16.5 in (41.9cm) root diameter nylon sheaves to handle
is 14.7 in (37.4cm). up to 12 parts of line
Maximum height of lower frame with jacks fully extended is Easily removable wire rope guards
45.2 in (114.8cm). Rope dead end lugs on each side of the boom head
Boom head is designed for quick‐reeve of the hook block
Optional Tool Boxes
Boom Elevation
Two heavy duty steel design tool boxes that bolt onto the
lower frame counterweights. One double acting hydraulic cylinder with integral holding
valve
Boom elevation: -2.5° to 80°
Boom
Design Optional Equipment
Five section, formed construction of extra high tensile steel Auxiliary Lifting Sheave
consisting of one base section and four telescoping sections.
Two plate design of each section has multiple longitudinal Single 16.5 in (41.9m) root diameter nylon sheave
bends for superior strength. The first telescoping section ex Easily removable wire rope guard
tends independently by means of one double‐acting, single Does not affect erection of the fly or use of the main head
stage hydraulic cylinder with integrated holding valves. The sheaves
second telescoping section extends independently by
means of one double‐acting, single stage hydraulic cylinder
Hook Blocks And Balls
with integrated holding valves. The Third and Fourth tele 35 ton (31.8mt) 1 sheave quick‐reeve hook block with
scoping sections extend proportionally by means of one safety latch
double‐acting, single stage cylinder with integrated holding 50 ton (45.4mt) 4 sheave quick‐reeve hook block with
valves and cables. safety latch
80 ton (72.6mt) 5 sheave quick‐reeve hook block with
Boom safety latch
40-150 ft (12.2-45.7m) five section full power boom
safety latch
Three boom extend modes, controlled from the oper
ator's cab, provide superior capacities by varying the safety latch
extension of the telescoping sections: 12 ton (10.9mt) swivel and non‐swivel hook balls with
Standard mode is the full power, synchronized safety latch
mode of telescoping all sections proportionally
A-max 1 mode (or mode `A1') extends only the in Fly & Attachments
ner and center sections to 95 ft (29m) offering in
31 ft (9.4m) lattice fly, stowable, offsettable to 2° , 15° , 30° ,
creased capacities for in‐close, maximum capacity
and 45° . Maximum tip height is 187 ft (57m).
picks 31-55 ft (9.4-16.7m) two piece bi‐fold lattice fly, stowable,
A-max 2 mode (or mode `A2') tip, outer and center offsettable to 2° , 15° , 30° , and 45° . Maximum tip height is
sections extend to 122.5 ft (37.34m) offering maxi 211 ft (64.3m).
mum stability 10 ft (3.0m) lattice fly, stowable, offsettable to 2° , 15° , and
Mechanical boom angle indicator 30° and 45° . Maximum tip height is 166 ft (50.6m).
Maximum tip height for each extend mode is: 10-31 ft (3.0-9.4m) two piece lattice fly, stowable,
Standard is 159 ft 6 in (48.6m). offsettable to 2° , 15° , and 30° and 45° . Maximum tip
A-max 2 is 132 ft 6 in (40.3m) height is 187 ft (57m).
A-max 1 is 105 ft 6 in (32.1m) 10-31-55 ft (3.0-9.4-16.7m) three piece bi‐fold lattice
fly, stowable, offsettable to 2° , 15° , and 30° and 45° .
Optional Maximum tip height is 211 ft (64.3m).
Remote control boom floodlight Work Platform

Boom Wear Pads Boom mounted work platform under design.

Operator's Manual
Dimensions
Base Crane
General Dimensions English Metric

Basic Boom 40-150 ft 12.2-45.7m
Minimum Load Radius 10 ft 3.05m
Maximum Boom Angle 80° 80°
Track Shoe Width 36 in 0.91m
Track Shoe Width (Optional) 44 in 1.12m
of
2' 6.36” Rotation
(0.77m)
40' 1.56” 12' 8.28”
(12.23m) 8' 6.84” (3.87m)
(2.61m)
5' 8.16”
5' 11.64” (1.73m)
(1.82m)
11' 9.36” 9' 7.80” 9' 9.72”

(3.59m) 0' 11.45” (2.94m) (2.99m) 4' 10.68”
(0.29m) (1.49m)
19' 5.52”
(5.93m)
11' 7.92” 11' 8.16”
(3.55m) (3.56m)
23' 4.20”
(7.12m)
48' 6.60”
(14.80m)
50' 3.48”
(15.33m)

Operator's Manual
of
Tailswing Radius Rotation
15' 11.88” (4.87m)
10' 6.36” (3.21m)

of Front Winch
13' 0.36” (3.97m)
of Rear Winch
15' 11.88” (4.87m)
12' 8.16”
(3.86m)
9' 10.20”
(3.00m) 10' 4.68”
(3.17m)
11' 5.52”
(3.49m)
10' 2.28”
(3.11m) 12' 8.64” 4' 4.92”
(3.88m) (1.34m)
15' 2.16” 8' 11.52”
(4.63m) 15' 8.04” (2.73m)
(4.78m) 11' 10.92”
18' 1.56”
(5.53m) (3.63m)
Extended Gauge Intermediate Gauge Retracted Gauge

[Not applicable
with 44” (1.12m)
track shoes]
Note: All dimensions with 36” (0.91m)
standard track shoes.

Operator's Manual
Working Weights
Ground
Bearing
Gross Weight Pressure
Option Description
lb (kg) (on soft
ground)
psi (kg/cm2)
Base crane, “ABC” counterweight, 2 piece lower counterweight, 36” (0.91m) track shoes, 850 ft (259.0m) type
223,470 13.26
1 “ZB” main wire rope, 500 ft (152.4m) type “ZB” auxiliary wire rope, 2 piece fly, 80 ton (72.6mt) 5 sheave hook
block, 12 ton (10.89mt) hook ball, and a 200 lb (90.7kg) operator. (101 151kg) (0.93)
Notes: Ground bearing pressure is based on the total weight distributed evenly over the track contact area.
Transport Drawing of
Rotation
12' 9.72”
(3.9m)
1' 4.56”
1' 3.36” 1' 0”
Transport Weight - 89,000 lb (40 370kg)

Base crane, 850 ft (259.0m) type “ZB” main wire rope, 500 ft (152.4m) type “ZB” auxiliary wire
rope, 2 piece fly, 80 ton (72.6mt) 5 sheave hook block, and 12 ton (10.89mt) hook ball.
Load Hoist Performance

Main (Rear) and Auxiliary (Front) Winches - 7/8 in (22mm) Rope
Maximum Line Pull Normal Line Speed High Line Speed Layer Total
Layer lb kg ft/min m/min ft/min m/min ft m ft m
1 21,120 9 579.9 174 53.0 348 106.1 114 34.7 158 48.2
2 19,056 8 643.7 193 58.8 386 117.7 124 37.8 333 101.5
3 17,359 7 873.9 211 64.3 423 128.9 134 40.8 525 160.0
4 15,940 7 230.3 230 70.1 461 140.5 144 43.9 734 222.8
5 14,735 6 683.7 249 75.9 499 152.1 154 46.9 960 292.6
6 13,700 6 214.2 268 81.7 537 163.7 164 50.0 1204 367.0
Maximum
Diameter
Wire Rope Application Type Permissible Load
in mm lb kg
Standard 7/8 22 Type ZB 20,920 9 489.2
Main (Rear) Winch
Optional 7/8 22 Type RB 17,520 7 946.9
Standard 7/8 22 Type ZB 20,920 9 989.2
Auxiliary (Front) Winch
Optional 7/8 22 Type RB 17,520 7 946.9

Operator's Manual
Attachments
Offset
Fly
Main
Boom
Main
Boom
40-150 ft (12.2-45.7m) 40-150 ft (12.2-45.7m) Main Boom With

Main Boom 10-31-55 ft (3.0-9.4-16.8m) Offset Fly

Operator's Manual
Notes:

Operator's Manual
Table Of Contents
Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Section 6 - Fundamental Terms i

Operator's Manual
ii Section 6 - Fundamental Terms

Operator's Manual
Boom Section: The base, inner (T1), center (T2), out
Fundamental Terms er (T3), and tip (T4) segments which are used as the
Many terms are used which refer to crane function, as telescoping extension.
sembly, operation, and maintenance. The following list Bypass: A secondary passage of fluid flow, in addition
gives a brief definition as to how the terms are used in to the main flow path.
this Operator's Manual and how they fit this particular
Capacity Chart: The chart(s) in the Crane Rating
crane.
Manual in the crane which gives rated lifting capacities
Accumulator: A container in which fluid is stored un for the crane under different load conditions.
der pressure as a source of hydraulic energy.
Carbody: See “Lower Frame”.
Aeration: The condition when air is present in the hy
Carrier Roller: Rollers of track mechanism which are
draulic fluid. This causes the fluid to appear milky and
not power driven but are used to guide the track along
components to operate erratically because of the com
the top of the side frame.
pressibility of air trapped in the fluid.
Cab Walk: Platforms attached to the crane that pro
Anemometer: An instrument for measuring the direc
vide a walkway along the sides of the upper.
tion and force, or velocity, of the wind; a wind gauge.
Cavitation: A condition where air is induced into a cav
Annually: Once a year
ity, line or chamber normally filled with oil. This condi
Anti‐Two Block System (ATB): A system of electrome tion can cause damage to pumps, cylinder walls, etc.
chanical devices used to alert or prevent the crane opera
Center (T2) Section: The segment of the boom which
tor from two blocking the crane. See “Two Block”.
is attached to the inner (T1) and outer (T3) sections.
Attachment: The boom assembly, offset fly section,
Check Valve: A valve which permits flow in one direc
auxiliary lifting sheave, or the combination of them.
tion only.
Auger: A boom attachment used to drill vertical holes
Circuit: A complete or partial path over which current
into the ground.
or fluid may flow.
Automatic Brake: Drum brake system that is applied
Closed Center Circuit: The condition where the fluid
automatically any time the drum control lever is in neu
only flows through the main control valves when a con
tral.
trol valve spool is actuated. This can be done two dif
Auxiliary Lifting Sheave: A unit which connects to the ferent ways: (1) using a pressure compensated pump,
boom head machinery and is used for reeving winch or (2) using a fixed displacement pump, unloading
wire rope for a second winch drum. valve and an accumulator.
Backward Stability: Resistance to overturning of the Collector Ring (Slip Ring): A device used to transmit
crane in rearward direction. the electrical power from the lower to the upper utilizing
Base Section: The segment of the boom which at a rotating disk to allow rotation of the upper.
taches to the upper frame by the boom foot pin. Compressibility: The change in volume of fluid when
Boom: The assembly of the base, inner (T1), center it is subjected to a unit change in pressure.
(T2), outer (T3), and tip (T4) sections used as the tele Counterbalance Valve (Holding Valve): A valve
scoping extension. which regulated fluid flow by maintaining resistance in
Boom Angle: The angle above or below horizontal of one direction, but allows free flow in the other direction.
the longitudinal axis of the boom base section. Counterweight: Weight used to supplement the
weight of the crane in providing stability for lifting loads.
Boom Angle Indicator: An accessory which mea
sures the angle of the boom above horizontal. Cracking Pressure: The pressure at which a pressure
actuated valve begins to open to allow flow.
Boom Foot: Base of boom where it attaches to the up
per revolving frame. Crane Configuration: The relative position and ar
rangement of the parts or elements of the crane e.g.
Boom Hoist: The hydraulic method of raising and low
amount of counterweight, attachment position, side
ering the boom to different boom angles.
frame position, etc.
Boom Length: The straight line through the centerline
Crane Rated Capacity: The maximum weight allowed
of the boom foot pin to the centerline of the boom head
to be lifted with the crane setup in a particular crane
sheave shaft, measured along the longitudinal axis of
configuration.
the boom.
Section 6 - Fundamental Terms 6-1

Operator's Manual
Crane Rating Manual: A compilation of the necessary Full Flow: In a filter, the condition where all the fluid
information needed to plan lifts with the crane. It in must pass through the filter element.
cludes instructions such as the allowable lifting capac Full Load Speed: The speed at which an engine runs
ity charts, Working Range diagrams, Working Areas when it is delivering its full rated horsepower.
diagram, etc.
Crane Set Up: The act or instance of preparing the Full Power Boom: Hydraulic telescopic boom with
cylinders, or cylinders and cables, to extend/retract
crane for operation which entails the positioning of the
each extendable section of the boom.
crane and its elements. It concerns such details or
items such as finding a suitable location to perform the Function Limiters (Function Lockout, Hydraulic Cut
lift, setting the side frame position, leveling, cribbing, or outs, Hydraulic Kickouts): Devices incorporated into
blocking of the crane, etc. the anti‐two block system which will disable the crane
function of winch up, telescope out, and/or boom down
Crawler Lower: The portion of a crawler crane located (as applicable) as a two block situation approaches.
below the turntable bearing.
Gradeability: The slope which a crane can climb ex
Cylinder: A device which converts fluid power into me pressed as a percentage.
chanical force and motion. It usually consists of a
moveable element such as a piston and piston rod, Ground Pressure: Weight of crane divided by the area
which operates within a cylindrical bore. of the surface directly supporting the crane.
Delivery: The volume of fluid discharge by a pump in a Head Machinery: An arrangement of sheaves on the
given time, usually expressed in gallons per minute end of an attachment used to reeve wire rope.
(gpm) or liters per minute (L/min). High Idle: Governed engine speed at full throttle and
Displacement: The quantity of fluid which can pass no load.
through a pump, motor or cylinder in a single revolution Hoist: Function of lifting and lowering loads.
or stroke. Hoist Drum: See “Winch Drum”.
Double Acting Cylinder: A cylinder in which fluid Hoist Wire Rope: The wire rope used to reeve the
force can be applied in either direction. winch and the attachments for lifting loads.
Drum Lagging: See “Winch Drum”. Holding Valve: See “Counterbalance Valve”.
Drum Rotation Indicator: A system that is used to
monitor winch drum speeds. Hook Ball: Ball with hook attached and used for lifting
service. It is used with one part of line only.
Filter: A device which functions to remove insoluble
Hook Block: Block with hook attached used in lifting
contaminants from a fluid by a porous media.
service. It may have a single sheave for double or triple
Flow Divider: A valve which divides a flow of oil into line, or multiple sheaves for four or more parts of line.
two streams.
Hydraulic Reservoir: The storage tank for hydraulic
Fly Base (Fly Base Section): The lower most section fluid.
of the fly. Inner (T1) Section: The segment of the boom which is
Fly Section: Boom tip extension supported only at its attached to the base and center (T2) sections.
base. Instability: A “tipping condition” in which the mo
Force: Any cause which tends to produce or modify ments acting to overturn a crane exceed the moments
motion. In hydraulics, total force is expressed by the acting to resist overturning.
product of pressure P) and the area of the surface (A) LBCE: Link‐Belt Construction Equipment.
on which the pressure acts. (Formula: F = P X A)
Lifting Capacity: The rated load for any given load ra
Frame: Structure on which either upper or lower ma dius and boom angle under specified operating condi
chinery is attached. tions.
Freely Suspended Load: Load hanging free with no Line Pull: The wire rope pull generated off a wire rope
direct external force applied except by the hoist line. drum or lagging at a specified pitch diameter.
Friction: The property which tends to resist the relative Line Speed: The wire rope velocity at a wire rope drum
motion of one surface in contact with another surface. or lagging at a specified pitch diameter.
It always exerts a “Drag” in the direction opposite of the
motion, thus consumes power.
6-2 Section 6 - Fundamental Terms

Operator's Manual
Load Factor: Load applied at the boom tip which gives Outer (T3) Section: The segment of a the boom which
the same moment effect as the boom mass. is attached to the center (T2) and tip (T4) sections.
Load Indicator: A device for measuring and display Pick And Carry: The crane operation of lifting a load
ing the net load being lifted. and traveling with it suspended.
Load Line: Another term for “Hoist Wire Rope”. In lift Pilot Pressure: Auxiliary pressure used to actuate or
ing crane service it refers to the main hoist. The secon control hydraulic components.
dary hoist is referred to as a “Whip Line”. Pinion: Usually the small gear in a gear train which
Load Radius: The horizontal distance from the center drives the other gears.
line of rotation of the upper to the center of gravity of a Pitch Diameter: Root diameter of drum, lagging or
suspended load. sheave, plus the diameter of the wire rope.
Loaded Boom Angle: The angle between the boom Planetary: A set of gears used to either speed up or
base section and horizontal with a freely suspended slow down the input vs the output to gain speed or
load at the rated radius. power whichever is applicable.
Load Stepping: The procedure of moving a load
without traveling the crane when conditions do not al Platform: A device (basket, work platform, bucket,
cage, etc.) designed and fabricated with its intended
low traveling with a load (pick and carry). Park the
use being to position personnel.
crane on a level area, lift the load, swing around, and
set it down ahead of the crane. Travel the unloaded Poppet: A disc, ball or cone shaped part of certain
crane beyond the load, level the crane, lift the load, valves, which when closed against a seat prevents
swing, and set it down farther along the route. Contin flow.
ue this procedure until the load is at its destination. Port: The open end of a passage. May be within or at
Lower Frame: The lower upon which the revolving up the surface of a hydraulic component housing or body.
per frame is mounted. Pressure: Force per unit of area usually expressed in
Lower Roller: See “Track Roller”. pounds per square inch (psi) or Kilopascals (kPa).
Mat: Support, usually of timber or wire construction, Pressure Drop: The reduction in pressure between
for supporting the pontoons on soft surfaces where the two points in a line or passage due to the energy lost in
pontoon areas are not large enough to support the maintaining flow.
load without settling. Pressure Reducing Valve: A valve which limits the
Motor (Hydraulic): A rotary motion device which maximum pressure at its outlet regardless of the inlet
changes hydraulic energy into mechanical energy, a pressure.
rotary actuator. Pump (Hydraulic): A device which converts mechani
No Load Stability Limit: The radius or boom angle be cal force and motion into hydraulic fluid power.
yond which it is not permitted to position the boom be Radius Of Load: The horizontal distance from the cen
cause the crane can overturn without any load on the terline of rotation of the crane to the center of gravity of
hook. the suspended load.
Offset Fly: A fly section that is capable of being pinned Rated Capacity Indicator (RCI): A device that auto
at different angles. matically monitors radius, load weight, and load rating
Oil Cooler: A heat exchanger used to remove heat and warns the crane operator of an overload condition.
from the hydraulic or transmission fluid. Rated Capacity Limiter (RCL): A device that automat
Open Center Circuit: A circuit where the pump con ically monitors radius, load weight, and load rating and
tinuously circulates fluid through the control valves prevents movements of the crane that would result in
when they are in a neutral position. an overload condition.
Operational Aid: An accessory that provides informa Reeving: Passing of wire ropes over pulleys or
tion to facilitate operation of a crane or that takes con sheaves.
trol of particular crane functions without action of the Relief Valve: A pressure operated valve which by
operator when a limiting condition is sensed. passes pump delivery to the reservoir, limiting system
Operator's Cab: A housing which covers the opera pressure to a predetermined maximum valve.
tor's station.

Operator's Manual
Reservoir: A container for storage of fluid in a fluid Swing: The rotation of the upper with the lower remain
power system. ing stationary.
Restriction: A reduced cross‐sectional area in a line Swing Brake: A brake which is used to resist the rota
which produces a pressure drop. tion of the upper during normal, stationary crane op
Rigging Switch (System Override Switch): A switch erations.
which can be used to override any or all of the function Swing Motor: Hydraulic device which uses a plane
limiters (cutouts) which have been activated on the tary to rotate the upper on the lower.
crane during crane rigging/set up.
Swing Park Brake: A self contained brake used for
Rope: Refers to wire rope unless otherwise specified. holding the upper, in any position, during normal crane
See “Wire Rope”. operations.
Rotating Joint: Component which transfers fluid be System Override Switch: See “Rigging Switch”.
tween a stationary and a rotating member.
Tailswing: The swing radius from the centerline of ro
Schematic: A diagram or representation of a system tation of the upper frame to the extreme rear of the
showing everything in a simple way. No attempt is counterweight or most reward component.
made to show the various devices in their actual rela
tive positions. A schematic points out the operation of TCC: Telescopic Crawler Crane.
a circuit for troubleshooting purposes. Tip (T4) Section: The outer most segment of the
Seasonally: Four times per year. boom, which is attached to the outer (T3) section.
Semiannually: Twice per year. Torque: Turning or twisting force usually measured in
foot‐pounds (ft‐lb) or Newton meters (Nm).
Shall: The word shall is to be understood as mandato
ry. Track: Assembled track shoes and connecting pins
around idler rollers and drive sprockets; that part of
Should: The word should is to be understood as advi
lower which contacts the ground.
sory.
Track Roller: Rollers of track mechanism which are
Side Frame: Supporting structure of the track mecha
not power driven, but are used to support the side
nism. Side frames are attached to the lower frame and
frame and guide the track along the ground.
may be extendable and/or removable.
Travel Swing Lock: A mechanical lock that engages
Side Loading: 1. A load applied at an angle to the verti
with the upper directly over either the front, rear, or
cal plane of the boom. 2. Horizontal side force applied
either side of the lower only. Use of the travel swing
to the lifted load either on the ground or in the air.
lock is mandatory when transporting or lifting the
Single Acting Cylinder: A cylinder in which fluid crane.
power can only be used in one direction. Another force
Turntable Bearing: A large bearing which attaches
must be used to return the cylinder.
the upper to the crawler allowing the upper to rotate on
Slew: See “Swing”. the lower.
Spool: Term loosely applied to almost any moving Two Block: The situation when the crane's hook
cylindrically shaped part of a hydraulic component block, hook ball, and/or load contacts the attachment's
which moves to direct flow through the component. head machinery.
Sprocket: The driving element of the track mechan Two Block Warning System: A system of electrome
ism. Receiving power through the drive motor, the chanical devices used to warn the crane operator of an
sprocket meshes with the track to travel the lower. impending two block condition.
Strainer: A filtering device for the removal of coarse Unloading Valve: A valve which bypasses flow to tank
solids from a fluid. when a set pressure is maintained on its pilot port.
Stroke: The length of travel of a piston or spool. Upper: The portion of the crane located above the
Suction Line: The hydraulic line connecting the pump turntable bearing.
inlet port to the hydraulic reservoir.
Upper Cab: See “Operator's Cab”.
Sump Tank: See “Hydraulic Reservoir”.
Upper Revolving Frame: The main structure of the
Surge: A very sudden rise in hydraulic pressure in a upper section of the crane which serves as mounts for
circuit. other components in the upper section.

Operator's Manual
Valve: A device for controlling flow rate, flow direction Wiring Diagram: A diagram which included all the de
or pressure of a fluid. vices in an electrical system and shows their functional
Viscosity: The resistance to flow. High viscosity indi relationships to each other. Such a diagram gives the
cates a high resistance, low viscosity, a low resistance. necessary information for actual wiring or physically
tracing circuits when troubleshooting is necessary.
Whip Line: Secondary hoist line. Also see “Load
Line”. Work Platform: See “Platform”.
Winch: Function of lifting and lowering loads. Working Area: Area measured in a circular arc about
the centerline of rotation as shown on the Working
Winch Drum: A rotating cylindrical spool with side
Areas diagram.
flanges used to wrap the winch wire rope during the
raising and lowering with the winch. Working Weight: Weight of crane with full radiator, half
full fuel tank, and attachments installed.
Winch Wire Rope: The wire rope used to reeve the
winch and the attachments for lifting loads. 360° Swing Lock: A positive mechanical lock against
rotation of the upper over the lower during normal, sta
Wire Rope: A flexible, multiwired member usually con
tionary crane operations.
sisting of a core member around which a number of
multiwired strands are helically wrapped.

Operator's Manual
Notes:

Link−Belt Construction Equipment Company
2651 Palumbo Drive
P.O. Box 13600
Lexington, Kentucky 40583−3600
(606)−263−5200
http://www.linkbelt.com
ELECTRONIC DATA RECORDER

REQUEST FORM
We, , hereby request

(Company Name)
LinkBelt Construction Equipment Company (LBCE) retrieve, interpret, and
provide a summary of the electronic data recovered from the computer system
installed by LBCE on model ___________________, with assigned serial
number __________________.
We request the following data be retrieved:

(Place check mark in box for information requested)
Engine Performance Data (engine temperature, engine speeds, fluid temperature,
etc.)
Operational Mode (computer setup)
Boom Length
Boom Angle
Load Radius
Counterweight Configuration
Lifted Load(s)
Number of Lifts
Anti –Two Block (ATB) Status
Status
Other
Date(s) and Time Range(s) of data requested:
The time to reply to this inquiry will be three (3) weeks from the time the data is received by
the LBCE Technical Product Support Department in Lexington Kentucky. The reply time
may increase due to the amount of Data, and/or the Date and Time Range requested.
LBCE may assess a charge to provide the service of retrieve and interpretation of the data
requested, plus travel time that may be involved by an LBCE representative to retrieve the
data.
__________________________________ ___________
Requesting Company Representative Date
Link−Belt is a registered trademark.

Link Belt Tcc 1100 Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Link Belt Tcc 1100 Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Link Belt Tcc 1100 Operator Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operator's Manual

Upper Serial Number Location

Lower Serial Number Location

Crane Serial Number

BOOK1211 S1063014RSW Preface

This symbol may appear in this Operator's

Section 1 - Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 1-1 Thru 1-176

Section 2 - Lubrication And Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Pages 2-1 Thru 2-30

Section 3 - Periodic Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 3-1 Thru 3-22

Section 4 - Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 4-1 Thru 4-44

Section 5 - General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 5-1 Thru 5-26

Section 6 - Fundamental Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pages 6-1 Thru 6-6

Section 1 - Operating Instructions i

ii Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Section 1 - Operating Instructions iii

System Inoperative Or Malfunctioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-85

System Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-86

Configuration Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-87

Cancel Audible Alarm And Reset Function Limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-96

Operator Settable Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-97

Operator Defined Area Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-108

Function Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-110

Transmitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111

Computer Return And Stored Data Disclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-111

Ground Bearing Pressure Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

Live Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

Simulation Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-113

Ground Bearing Pressure Surface Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

Ground Bearing Pressure Live Data Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-114

Ground Bearing Pressure Simulation Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-115

Sensor Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-119

Highlight Data Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-120

About Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-121

iv Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-133

Combustion Air System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

Coolant System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

Operational Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-134

Section 1 - Operating Instructions v

vi Section 1 - Operating Instructions

1. Boom 5. Travel Motor 8. Hook Block

Think Safety - You, the operator, are in charge of an

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-1

5. Keep your shoes clean. Before entering the opera­

1-2 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

A Small Side Tilt Can Grade Ground Level Or Block Under

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-3

Figure 1-6 Figure 1-7

1-4 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-5

1 27. Always wear proper eye protection when driving

1-6 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

Electrical Dangers Minimum Clearance When Operating Near High

Section 1 - Operating Instructions 1-7

Shaded area shows “sensitivity zone” with full boom length

Figure 1-13 Figure 1-14

f. Warn all personnel of the potential danger.

1-8 Section 1 - Operating Instructions

5. Keep your shoes clean. Before entering the opera

d. Move away from contact in the reverse direc